SWEDISH  GRAMMAR 


EDW.  J.  VICKNER 


C^'-xV 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/briefswedishgramOOvickiala 


s^ 


1^0 


A  BRIEF 

SWEDISH  GRAMMAR 


BY 


EDW.  J.  VICKNER,  M.  A.,  PH.  D. 

PROFESSOR  OP  SCANDINAVIAN   LANGUAGES, 
UNIVERSITY    OF    WASHINGTON 


REvifEU  Edition 


ROCK  ISLAND,  ILL. 

Augustan A    Book    Concern 

1914 


Copyright,  1912, 

BY 

AuGUSTANA  Book  Coxcern. 


Copyright,  1914, 

BY 

AuGUSTANA  Book  Concern. 


ROCK  ISLAND,  ILL. 

AUOUgTAlfA    BOOK    CONCERN,    PRINTERS   AND    BINDERS. 


PREFACE. 

The  cause  and  aim  of  this  hooJc  is  to  present  in  a  clear 
and  concise  way  the  commonplace  facts  and  principles  of 
the  Swedish  language.  It  lays  no  claim  to  be  a  compen- 
dium of  all  forms  and  usages  of  either  the  spoTcen  or  writ- 
ten language. 

The  introduction  of  Swedish  into  numerous  high  schools 
and  universities  in  this  country  has  created  a  demand  for 
a  book  which  may  not  only  assist  the  exclusively  English- 
speaking  students  to  attain  a  fair  reading  and  speaking 
knowledge  of  modern  Swedish  but  which  may  also  meet 
the  demand  of  American  born  students  of  Swedish  descent 
who  desire  to  gain  a  more  complete  knowledge  of  the  lan- 
guage of  their  fathers.  The  consideration  that  the  majority 
of  the  students  who  mil  use  his  book  are  already  more  or 
less  conversant  with  Swedish  has  led  the  author  to  make 
the  lessons  longer  and  the  exercises  rather  more  advanced 
than  is  the  case  in  most  beginners'  books,  to  make  the 
vocabularies  unusually  voluminous,  and  to  devote  consider- 
able attention  to  idiomatic  expressions. 

The  exercises  have  been  made  continuous  wherever  it 
was  found  practicable  to  do  so;  and  it  is  to  be  hoped  that 
this  form  of  exercise  will  prove  more  interesting  and  less 
irksome  to  the  student  than  the  form  that  consists  of  de- 
tached sentences.  The  fact  that  each  lesson  thus  contains 
words  ivhich  are  associated  with  one  another  in  common 
use  mil  undoubtedly  encourage  an  acquisition  of  con- 
nected phrases  rather  than  mere  words.  This  form  of 
exercise,  moreover,  facilitates  a  method  which  the  author 


IV 

from  his  experience  in  the  class  room  has  found  of  great 
value  for  the  attainment  of  a  correct  pronunciation  and 
fluency,  that  of  requiring  the  student  to  reproduce  the 
contents  of  the  exercises  in  his  own  words.  The  author 
feels  confident  that  his  grammar  lends  itself  to  conversa- 
tional practice.  The  vocabulary  has  been  carefully  selected 
from  the  language  of  everyday  life  and  the  phrases  of  the 
Swedish  exercises  are  of  a  colloquial  and  idiomatic  char- 
acter. 

In  the  method  employed  the  teacher  will  naturally  he 
guided  by  his  own  judgment  and  the  character  of  his  class; 
the  author  would,  however,  suggest  that  two  hours  be 
devoted  to  each  lesson.  During  the  first  hour  the  gram- 
matical part  should  be  thoroughly  discussed,  the  teacher 
supplementing  the  examples  given  as  illustrations,  and  tJie 
Swedish  portion  of  the  exercise  thoroughly  practiced;  the 
second  hour  should  be  devoted  to  a  rapid  review,  transla- 
tion of  the  English  portion,  and  to  conversation.  The* 
conversational  exercises  are  not  intended  to  be  exhaustive 
but  suggestive  for  further  drill.  The  value  of  the  con- 
versational method  cannot  be  overestimated. 

Unusually  ample  space  has  been  accorded  the  treatment 
of  the  prepositions,  which  in  all  languages  and  especially 
in  Swedish  constitute  one  of  the  chief  difficulties  which 
confront  the  learner. 

The  authors  treatment  of  pronunciation  and  accent, 
especially  the  musical,  which  is  one  of  the  peculianties  of 
Swedish,  may  perliaps  evoke  criticism  by  reason  of  its 
brevity.  The  limitations  of  space  in  an  elementary  booh 
forbid  entering  into  minute  details.  The  book  is  chiefly 
intended  for  class  use  and  much  is  therefore  left  to  the 
instructor  to  supplement.  Moreover,  a  correct  Swedish 
pronunciation   and   especially  a   mastery   of   the   musical 


accent,  or  intonation,  can  he  acquired  only  hy  constant 
imitation  and  practice. 

In  conclusion  the  author  desires  to  achnowledge  his 
indebtedness  to  Professor  A.  A.  Stomherg,  University  of 
Minnesota,  for  much  valuable  advice  and  encouragement; 
and  to  Professor  Jules  Mauritzson,  Augustana  College, 
Roch  Island,  for  Ins  extremely  valuable  services  in  revising 
the  manuscript. 

E.  J.   ViCKNER. 


CONTENTS. 


PART  I. 
ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  PRONUNCIATION. 

PAGE 

The  Alphabet 1 

Pronunciation:    Quantity;    The  Vowels;    The  Consonants; 

Accentuation    1 

Capitalization    12 

Punctuation    13 

Syllabication    14 

PART  II. 
THE  PARTS  OF  SPEECH. 

LESSON 

I.     Genders — Articles — Verbs    15 

II.     Definite  Articles:    Postpositive,  Prepositive...     20 

III.  Inflection  of  Nouns:  First  and  Second  Declen- 

sion         25 

IV.  Third  Declension    29 

V.     The  Verb:   First  Conjugation 33 

VI.     Second  Conjugation   38 

VII.     Inflection  of  Nouns:    Fourth  Declension — Ad- 
jectives:   Indefinite  Declension   43 

VIII.     Nouns:  Fifth  Declension — Adjectives:  Definite 
Declension — Use     of     Prepositive     Definite 

Article    49 

IX.     Nouns:    Irregularities  in   Declension — Declen- 
sion of  Proper  Names — Genitive  Case 55 

X.     The     Verb:      Third     Conjugation — Pronouns: 

Personal 62 

XI.     The  Verb:  Future  and  Future  Perfect  Indica- 
tive;   Imperative — Pronouns:    Reflexive....     67 
XII.     The  Verb:    Fourth  Conjugation 73 

XIII.  The  Verb:    Subjunctive 79 

XIV.  The  Verb:   .Irregularities;    Unreal   Conditions     86 
XV.     Possessive  Pronouns  and  Adjectives — Position 

of  Adverbs 92 


VIII 

LESSON  PAGE 

XVI.     The  Verb:   Passive  Voice 98 

XVII.     TlieVerb:  Passive  with  Auxiliaries:  Deponents  105 

XVIII.     Pronouns:    Demonstrative    Ill 

XIX.     The  Verb:   Verb  Compounds 117 

XX.     Interrogative  Pronouns  and  Adjectives — Rela- 
tive Pronouns  and  Adjectives 123 

XXI.     The  Verb:   Present  and  Past  Participle 131 

XXII.     The  Verb:  Impersonal  Verbs;  Reflexive  Verbs  137 

XXIII.     The  Verb:   Modal  Auxiliaries 144 

'     XXIV.     The  Verb:   Modal  Auxiliaries 150 

XXV.     Pronouns:    Indefinite   157 

XXVI.     Pronouns:    Indefinite    163 

XXVII.     The  Verb:   Tenses  of  Indicative;   Uses  of  In- 
finitive     168 

XXVIII.     Adjectives:    Comparison    176 

XXIX.     Adjectives:     Comparison — Adverbs:     Compari- 
son      181 

XXX.     Numerals:    Cardinals    and    Ordinals;    Expres- 
sions of  time,  measure,  and  price 186 

XXXI.     Numeral  Formations;  Expressions  of  date  and 

time 193 

XXXII.     Prepositions:    Uses    201 

XXXIII.  Prepositions:    Uses    208 

XXXIV.  Prepositions:   Uses   214 

XXXV.     Prepositions:   Uses    220 

XXXVI.     Adverbs:   Uses   226 

XXXVII.     Conjunctions:  Coordinating  233 

XXXVIII.     Conjunctions:   Subordinating  239 

XXXIX.     Interjections    246 

Appendix:  Use  of  the  Articles — Rules  of  Gender — Notes 
on  Inflection  of  Nouns — Irregularities  in  Conversational 
Pronunciation — Irregularities  in  Conversational  Gram- 
mar   248 — 253 

Strong  and  Irregular  Verbs:  Principal  Parts 254 

Vocabulary:   Swedish-English    258 

English-Swedish    280 

Condensed  Index  of  Subjects 301 

Swedish  National  Songs 305 


BRIEF  SWEDISH  GRAMMAR 

PART  I. 
ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  PRONUNCIATION. 


The  Alphabet. 

1.     The  Swedish  alphabet  is  as  follows: 


CHARACTERS 

NAMES 

CHARACTERS 

NAMES 

A  a 

ah 

PP 

pay 

B  b 

bay 

Q  q 

ku  (Swedish) 

Cc 

say 

R  r 

err 

D  d 

day 

S  s 

ess 

E   6 

a 

T  t 

tay 

F  f 

eff 

Uu 

U   (Swedish) 

Gg 

gay  or 

yay 

V  V 

vay 

Hh 

hoh 

W  w 

vay 

I  i 

e 

X  X 

ex 

Jj 

yee 

Yy 

ii    (German) 

Kk 

koh 

Z  z 

saytah 

L  1 

ell 

A  a 

0 

M  m 

emm 

A  a 

ai    (in  fair) 

Is  n 

enn 

o  6 

0    ( German ) 

0  0 

00 

Note. 

Q.  w. 

and  2  occur 

only  in 

surnames  and  in  ' 

.vords  of  foreign  origin 

especially  geographical  names 

Pronunciation. 

Remark. — 1.  Only  general  directions  can  be  given  here: 
pronunciation  must  be  learned  by  imitation  and  practice.  But 
if  not  learned  correctly  at  first,  it  becomes  more  difficult  after- 
wards.    It  is  not,  however,   intended  that  the  whole  of  this 


2  PRONUNCIATION. 

chapter  shall  be  studied  in  advance.  The  study  of  the  Gram 
mar  proper  should  begin  as  soon  as  possible,  and  constant 
reference,  supplemented  by  such  help  as  may  be  rendered  by 
the  teacher,  should  be  made  to  the  discussion  of  the  sounds 
given  below. 

2.  It  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  sounds  of  any  two 
languages  hardly  ever  correspond  exactly;  hence  comparisons 
between  Swedish  and  English  are  only  approximate, 

QUANTITY. 

2.  The  quantity  of  Swedish  sounds  is  either  long 
or  short.  For  practical  purposes  the  consonajits 
offer  no  peculiar  difficulties  as  regards  length.  The 
following  rules  will  serve  as  a  guide  in  determining 
the  quantity  of  the  vowels: 

(a)  A  vowel  is  long  in  an  accented  syllable  when 
followed  by  a  short  consonant  sound :  fara,  to  travel : 
hdla,  cave ;  fel,  error ;  gi'dl,  quarrel ;  dra,  honor. 

(b)  A  vowel  is  short  in  an  accented  syllable  when 
followed  by  a  long  consonant  sound:  andas,  to 
breathe;  falla,  to  fall;  allt,  everything;  fall,  hem; 
tdnda,  to  kindle;  eld,  fire;  dygd,  virtue. 

(c)  In  unaccented  syllables  both  the  vowel  sound 
and  the  consonant  sound  are  short:  si' rap,  sirup; 
tall'rik,  plate;  mor'gon,  morning. 

(d)  A  final  accented  vowel  is  always  long. 

3.  The  long  and  the  short  vowel  sounds  are  indi- 
cated in  the  same  manner  in  writing.  The  short 
consonant  sound  is  generally  indicated  by  a  single 
consonant;  the  long  by  two  or  more  consonants, 
especially  a  double  consonant. 

Note.  Sometimes  the  long  consonant  sound  in  an  accented  syllable  is  indi- 
cated by  a  single  consonant,  notably  in  the  case  of  m  and  n :  dom,  sentence ; 
kom,  come ;  man,  man ;  van,  friend.  With  a  few  exceptions  m  is  not  doubled 
at  the  end  of  a  word  or  syllable. 


PRONUNCIATION.  3 

THE  VOWELS. 

Remark.  The  vowels  must  receive  full  and  distinct  utter- 
ance in  all  positions.  No  vowel  is  silent;  only  in  the  case  of  e 
in  unaccented  endings  such  as  -en,  -el,  -er,  -et,  and  -e  is  there 
a  tendency  towards  slurring. 

4.  a.  (1)  When  long  this  sound  varies  between 
the  sound  of  a  in  far  and  the  sound  of  o  in  foreig7i 
when  this  o-sound  is  prolonged :  fader,  father ;  grad, 
grade;  tala,  to  speak. 

Note.     Avoid  a  as  in  fall. 

(2)  When  short  like  the  first  a  in  aha:  malm, 
ore;  salt,  salt;  tacka,  to  thank. 

5.  e.  (1)  When  long  this  sound  is  an  approxi- 
mation to  the  sound  of  a  in  day  without  the  vanish. 
The  exact  sound  is  that  of  the  German  long  e  in 
mehr:  ek,  oak;  fel,  error;  leda,  to  lead;  ned,  down. 

(2)  When  short  it  is  (a)  qualitatively  the  same 
as  when  long:  hem,  home;  vecka,  week;  eld,  fire; 
(b)  like  short  a  (see  11,  2)  :  den,  the,  that;  mest, 
most;  herr.  Mister  (avoid  e  as  in  her). 

6.  i.  (1)  When  long  like  i  in  machine  (avoid 
diphthong)  :  mig,  me;  tid,  time;  ila,  to  hurry;  fira, 
to  celebrate;  ni,  you. 

(2)  When  short  it  is  qualitatively  the  same  as 
when  long:  min,  mine;  ingen,  no  one;  viska,  to 
whisper;  silver,  silver;  stirra,  to  stare;  (avoid  i  as 
in  stir). 

7.  o.  (1)  When  long,  o  has  two  sounds:  (a)  ap- 
proximately like  00  in  moon.  The  exact  sound  is 
formed  by  the  tongue  position  for  the  Swedish  long 
d,  with  the  lips  so  constricted  ("rounded")  as  to  be 
nearly  closed:  olycka,  misfortune;  sko,  shoe;  sopa, 


4  PRONUNCIATION. 

to  sweep;  7'os,  rose;  (b)  like  o  in  hope  (avoid  diph- 
thong). This  sound  is  identical  with  the  Swedish 
long  d  (see  10,  1)  :  hov,  court;  Robert;  kol,  coal. 

(2)  When  short  it  has  two  sounds:  (a)  like  the 
first  0  in  oho!  or  like  o  in  oil:  om,  if;  hopp,  hope; 
kropp,  body;  (b)  like  oo  in  moon  shortened:  ost, 
cheese ;  blomma,  flower ;  moster,  aunt. 

8.  u.  (1)  The  sound  of  long  u  is  produced  by  the 
tongue  position  for  Swedish  long  e  (see  5,  1)  with 
the  lips  so  extremely  constricted  (rounded)  as  to 
be  nearly  closed:  gul,  yellow;  ut,  out;  duka,  to  set 
the  table;  mjuk,  soft. 

(2)  The  sound  of  short  u  is  more  open  than  that 
of  long  u.  It  is  approximately  that  of  u  in  value 
(without  the  introductory  consonantal  ^-sound)  : 
under,  under;  guld,  gold;  kunna,  to  be  able. 

9.  y.  Y  is  identical  in  sound  with  German  u  and 
French  u  in  une.  Round  the  lips  as  if  to  pronounce 
u  in  rude,  then  pronounce  ee  in  seen.  It  is  either 
long  or  short.  Ex.  (long)  :  fyra,  four;  rysa,  to 
shudder;  ny,  new;  yr,  dizzy;  (short)  :  sylt,  jam, 
yttra,  to  utter;  fylla,  to  fill. 

10.  a.  (1)  When  long  like  o  in  hope  (avoid  the 
diphthong)  :  dr,  year;  kdl,  cabbage;  gd,  to  go;  sdra, 
to  wound. 

(2)  When  short  like  short  open  o  (see  7,  2)  : 
dllon,  acorn;  fdll,  hem;  hdlla,  to  hold;  dtta,  eight; 
mdnga,  many. 

11.  a.  (1)  When  long  approximately  like  a  in 
care  (avoid  the  diphthong)  :  dra,  honor;  Idsa,  to 
read;  dta,  to  eat;  dven,  even,  also. 


PRONUNCIATION.  5 

(2)  When  short  like  e  in  met:  an,  than,  yet;  man, 
men;  stdlla,  to  put;  angel,  angel. 

12.  6.  o  is  identical  with  German  o  and  French 
eu.  Round  the  lips  as  if  to  sound  o  in  so;  then 
pronounce  the  Swedish  long  e  (see  5,  1).  It  is  long 
or  short.  Ex.  (long)  :  oga,  eye;  rok,  smoke;  over, 
over;  (short)  :  foil,  fell;  oppen,  open;  hocker,  books. 

Note.  This  vowel  has  a  tendency  to  become  more  open  when  short  and  also 
before  r,  especially  rr ;  sot,  sweet,  long  and  close;  in  sott  (the  neuter  form  of 
sot)  the  o  is  short  and  slightly  open ;  oga,  eye,  long  and  close ;  hora,  to  hear, 
long  and  quite  open  ;   dorr,  door,  still  more  open. 

13.  The  vowels  a,  o,  u,  a  are  called  haxd  vowels, 
and  e,  i,  y,  a,  6  are  called  soft  vowels. 

14.  Vowel  modification,  which  in  English  is  very 
often  referred  to  under  its  German  name  umlaut, 
is  a  process  of  considerable  importance  in  Swedish 
inflection  and  derivation.  Thus  a  change  from  a 
and  a  to  a,  or  o  to  6,  or  u  to  y,  occurs  in  the  inflec- 
tional forms  of  many  words  and  in  derivatives. 
Ex.:  and,  duck,  pi.  dnder;  Idng,  long,  comparative 
Idngre;  bok,  book,  pi.  hocker;  ung,  young,  comp. 
yngre;  Idng,  long,  Idngd,  length;  gd,  to  go,  gdngse, 
current. 

GENERAL  OBSERVATION. 

A  vowel  is  usually  pronounced  as  it  is  written.  There  are 
a  few  exceptions  in  words  of  foreign  origin;  thus,  ou  in  a  few 
French  words  sounds  like  u  short,  journal'  (shurnal') ;  eu 
sounds  like  oi  in  the  word  Preussen,  Prussia,  and  its  deriva- 
tives; u  like  1/  in  a  few  French  words:  juste  (shyst),  just, 
fair.     These  exceptions  are  neither  many  nor  important. 


6  PRONUNCIATION. 

THE  CONSONANTS. 

Note.     Consonants  not  discussed  here  have  the  same  sound  as  in  English. 

15.  c.  (1)  Like  English  s  before  the  soft  vowels 
e,  i,  and  y:  cirkel,  cylin'der,  cigarf'. 

(2)  Before  the  hard  vowels  a,  o,  u,  and  before 
another  c  or  other  consonant  like  English  k:  Colum- 
bus, accent'. 

(3)  Ch  has  the  sound  of  sj  (26)  in  a  few  words 
of  foreign  origin:  choklad,  chocolate;  charmant, 
charming. 

16.  d.  Like  English  d,  but  is  silent  before  /: 
djup,  deep;  djur,  animal. 

Note.  Where  d  according  to  the  old  orthography  stands  before  t  in  the  same 
syllable  it  is  either  silent  or  pronounced  like  t;  according  to  the  new 
orthography  (officially  adopted  in  1906)  it  is  either  eliminated  or  changed  to  t : 
gott  (new  form),  neuter  of  god,  good;  godt  (old  form)  ;  ont  (new  form),  neuter 
of  ond,  evil;   ondt   (old  form). 

17.  f.  Is  identical  in  sound  with  English  /;  frdga, 
to  ask ;  kraft,  power ;  fdlla,  to  hem ;  fotograf,  photog- 
rapher. 

Note.  In  accordance  with  the  old  orthography  /  at  the  end  of  a  syllable  or 
word  (except  foreign  words)  has  the  sound  of  v  and  is  silent  before  v  in  the 
middle  of  a  word  except  where  v  begins  the  succeeding  member  of  a  compound. 
In  the  new  orthography  i;  has  supplanted  /  everywhere  in  marking  the  sound  of 
v:  tolv  (new),  twelve,  tolf  (old)  :  gilver  (new),  silfver  (old)  ;  lova  (new),  to 
promise,  lofva  (old). 

18.  g.  (1)  Like  English  g  in  go  before  the  hard 
vowels  a,  o,  u,  d,  and  the  consonants ;  and  also  be- 
fore the  soft  vowels  e  and  i  in  unaccented  endings; 
and  in  iinaX  positions,  except  after  I  and  r:  gd,  to  go ; 
gata,  street;  spegel,  mirror;  tagit,  taken;  kr-ig,  war. 

(2)  Like  English  y  in  year  (tongue  closer  to 
the  palate)  before  the  soft  vowels  e,  i,  y,  a,  6  in 
accented  syllables  of  native  words  and  after  I  and 


PRONUNCIATION.  7 

r:  genom,  through;  giva,  to  give;  gynna,  to  favor; 
korg,  basket;  svalg,  throat. 

(3)  Like  k  before  t  and  occasionally  before  s: 
sagt,  said;  bragt,  brought;  krigsman,  warrior. 

Note  1.     G  is  not  silent  before  n:  gnaga,  gnaw. 

2.  G  before  t,  which  occurred  frequently  in  the  old  orthography,  has  now 
generally  been  replaced  by  h:  vikt  (new),  weight,  vigt  (old)  ;  drdkt  (new), 
dresSj    dragt    (old). 

(4)  Like  sj  (see  below,  26)  in  a  number  of  loan 
words  of  French  origin:  generos',  generous;  gene'- 
ra,  to  inconvenience;  korrige'ra,  to  correct;  gest, 
gesture. 

19.  h.  Is  strongly  aspirated,  but  is  silent  before 
j:  hdlla,  to  hold;  hel,  whole;  hjul,  wheel;  hjdrta, 
heart. 

Note.  The  silent  h  before  v  in  the  old  orthography  has  been  dropped  in  the 
new:  hvem.,  who,   now   vem;   hvar,  where,   now   var. 

20.  j.  Like  g  (18,  2)  or  English  consonantal 
y:  jord,  earth;  jdmn,  even;  jag,  I;  jul,  Christmas. 

NoTK.  In  a  few  French  loan  words  like  sj :  jasmin'  (shasmin'),  jessamine; 
jalusi'    (shalusi'),  window  shade. 

21.  k.  (1)  Like  English  k  before  consonants  and 
hard  vowels,  also  before  e  and  i  in  unaccented  end- 
ings, and  before  soft  vowels  in  words  of  foreign 
origin :  kalla,  to  call ;  kula,  ball ;  rike,  realm ;  rynkig, 
wrinkled;  arkiv',  archives. 

(2)  Like  English  ch  before  the  soft  vowels  (e,  i, 
y,  a,  o)  except  as  stated  above:  kedja,  chain;  kil, 
wedge;  kylig,  chilly;  kdr,  dear;  kott,  meat. 

(3)  Double  k  is  written  ck,  except  in  och,  and. 

Note.     K  is  not  silent  before  n:  kniv,  knife;  knd,  knee. 

22.  m.    Has  the  same  sound  as  in  English. 

Note.  In  some  words  of  French  origin  em  is  sounded  like  the  Swedish  ang : 
cmballe'ra   (angballera^,   pack,  wrap;    emblem'    (angblame),   emblem. 


8  PRONUNCIATION. 

23.  n.     Has  the  same  sound  as  in  English. 

Note  1.  In  some  words  of  French  origrin  en  is  sounded  like  the  Swedish 
anff,  and  on  like  the  Swedish  dng:  entusiasm'  (angtusiasm),  enthusiasm;  pen«e' 
(panjsC),  pansy;   fond  (f&ng:d),  fund,  back^ound. 

2.  If  g  and  n  occurring  tog^ether  belong  to  the  same  radical  syllable,  they 
are  pronounced  with  an  n  before,  except  at  the  beginning  of  a  word :  gnista, 
spark ;   lugn  (lungn) ,  calm  ;   vagn  (vang^n) ,  carriage. 

3.  Ng  sounds  like  Englidi  ng  in  singer,  not  like  ng  in  finger:  lang,  long 
tang,  song;  tjunga,  to  sing. 

24.  r.  Is  strongly  trilled  with  the  tip  of  the 
tongue:  arm,  arm;  bdra,  to  carry;  doi'v,  door. — 
Observe  that  the  vowels  are  pronounced  distinctly 
before  r — not  blurred  as  in  English. 

Note  1.  The  uvular  r  which  is  made  with  the  uvula  vibrating  against  the 
back  of  the  tongue  is  now  regarded  as  permissible. 

2.  R  in  the  combinations  rl,  rn,  rs  and  especially  rd  and  rt  is  not  pro- 
nounced, the  /,  n,  s,  d,  and  t  become  supradental,  that  is,  pronounced  with 
the  tip  of  the  twigue  touching  the  palate :  sort,  murmur ;  dma,  to  intend ; 
kors,  cross ;  bord,  table ;  bort,  away. 

25.  8.  Is  pronounced  like  s  in  so:  sol,  sun;  sys- 
ter,  sister;  resa,  to  travel. 

26.  sch,  sj,  skj,  ssj,  stj.  Before  a  vowel  these  are 
all  pronounced  with  a  sound  that  resembles  English 
sh  but  is  somewhat  rougher.  It  must  be  carefully 
practiced  with  the  teacher :  schack,  chess ;  sjo,  lake ; 
sju,  seven ;  sjdl,  soul ;  skjorta,  shirt ;  skjuta,  to  shoot ; 
hdssja,  hayrack;  stjdrna,  star. 

Note.     In  the  endings  -Hon  and  -ssion  the  si  and  ssi  are  sounded  like  sh. 

27.  sk.  (1)  Before  the  soft  vowels  (e,  i,  y,  d,  o) 
sk  has  the  same  sound  as  sch,  sj,  etc.,  as  described 
in  the  preceding  section  (26)  :  skena,  to  run  away; 
skilja,  to  separate;  skyla,  to  cover;  skdl,  reason; 
skdld,  shield. 

(2)  Before  the  hard  vowels  (a,  o,  u,  a)  sk  is  pro- 
nounced like  the  English  sk:  skal,  shell;  sko,  shoe; 
skuld,  guilt;  skal,  bowl. 


PRONUNCIATION.  9 

Note  1.  Exceptions  to  this  rule  are  the  words  marskalk,  marshal,  and 
manniska,  human  being,   in  which  sk  is  pronounced   like  sj. 

2.  Before  e  and  i  of  an  ending  sk  is  pronounced  like  English  sk:  disken 
(from  disk,  counter)  ;  flasket  (from  flask,  pork). 

28.  t.    Like  English  t  in  most  words. 

Note  1.  In  the  ending  -tion  ti  is  sounded  like  sj  (26)  :  aktion,  action : 
evolution,  evolution. 

When  -tion  is  preceded  by  a,  o,  and  r  in  dissyllabic  words,  a  f  is  generally 
inserted  before  the  «/-sound  in  pronunciation :  nation'  (natsjoon')  ;  motion' 
(motsjoon');  portion'    (portsjoon'). 

2.  Like  ts  before  ia  and  ie  in  foreign  words:  aktie  (aktsie),  share;  patient' 
(patsient,   also  pashent')  ;    profeti'a    (profetsia),   prophecy. 

29.  tj.  Is  pronounced  like  English  ch:  tjock, 
(chock),  thick ;'^yara  (chairah),  tar. 

30.  w.  Is  always  pronounced  like  English  v, 
never  like  English  w. 

31.  X.    Is  pronounced  as  in  English. 

Note.     In  words  in  -xion  it  is  pronounced  like  ksj:  reflexion'    (rayflekshoon). 

32.  z.  Always  pronounced  like  s  in  so:  zebra, 
(saybrah). 

ACCENTUATION. 

33.  In  Swedish  a  distinction  must  be  made  be- 
tween the  accent-stress  and  the  musical  accent. 

ACCENT-STRESS. 

34.  Simple  words.     The  accent-stress  falls  on 
the  root  syllable  of  all  simple  native  words:  le'va, 
to  live;   ha'ge,  pasture;   tan'ke,  thought;   mo'der, 
mother. 

35.  Compounds.  Compound  words  of  native 
origin,  whether  formed  of  noun-\-noun,  preiix-\~ 
noiin,  noun-\-suffix,  adjective-{-adjective,  or  prefix-}- 
verb,  have  the  main  stress,  as  a  rule,  on  the  first 
syllable:  skoVhus,  schoolhouse;  av' stand,  distance; 

Swedish  Grammar  2 


10  PRONUNCIATION, 

man'lig,  manly;  dt'har,  eatable;  bla'gul,  blue  and 
yellow ;  tilVsta,  to  admit ;  an'fora,  to  cite ;  hdr'komst, 
descent;  prat'sam,  talkative. 

36.  Exceptions,  (a)  The  prefixes  be-,  e-,  ent-, 
and  ge-  are  always  unaccented:  beha'ga,  to  please; 
entle'diga,  to  discharge;  gemaV,  consort;  ehu'ru,  al- 
though. So  also  the  prefix  for-  is  unaccented  in 
most  words:  forta'la,  to  slander;  forstd',  to  under- 
stand; but  for'dom,  prejudice  (see  211). 

(b)  The  following  words  have  the  main  stress 
on  the  penult,  or  next  to  the  last  syllable :  egent'lig, 
real;  offent'lig,  public;  mdnat'lig,  monthly;  vdsent'- 
lig,  essential ;  ordent'lig,  orderly ;  barmhdr'tig,  char- 
itable; fienVlig,  hostile. 

(c)  All  words  ending  in  -eiH  have  the  main  stress 
on  the  ultima,  or  last  syllable:  tryckeri',  printing 
office;  fiskeri',  fishery;  slaveri',  slavery. 

Note.     Other  exceptions  will  be  indicated  as  they  occur. 

37.  Compound  words  have  in  addition  to  the 
principal  accent  a  strong  secondary  accent  on  the 
last  member  of  the  compound:  skoVhus',  school- 
house;  trdd' gard\  garden. 

38.  Foreign  words.  Words  of  foreign  origin 
tend  to  retain  their  original  accent.  Words  from 
the  Greek  and  the  Romance  languages,  especially 
those  ending  in  -ant,  -ent,  -al,  -i,  -ik,  -il,  -ist,  -ur,  -ark, 
are  generally  accented  on  the  last  syllable. 

Note  1.  Nouns  lia\ing  the  endings  -inna,  -essa,  -aker,  -eler,  -cum,  -ikel,  -ipr.l 
-itel;  adjectives  ending  in  -abel,  -ibcl,  -Uk,  and  verbs  ending  in  -era  are  ac 
cented  on  the  penult. 

2.  Nouns  ending  in  -ii.m,  -ia,  and  -ic  liave  witli  a  few  exc<'ptions  tlie  mail 
stress  on  the  aniepenult,  or  third  syllable  from  the  end:  pHvilc' gium,  privilege 
nota'rie,  notary. 

3.  Foreign  words  ending  in  -or  shift  the  accent  when  suffixes  are  added 
dok'tor,   dokto'rer,   doktor'ska,   profes'sor,   professo'rer. 


PRONUNCIATION.  11 

MUSICAL   ACCENT. 

39.  Different  from  the  stress  accent  is  the  mu- 
sical accent.  There  are  two  kinds  of  musical  accent 
in  Swedish  employed  in  single  words,  the  acute  and 
the  grave,  or  the  monosyllabic  and  the  dissyllabic. 

The  acute,  or  monosyllabic,  accent,  which  is 
approximately  identical  with  the  musical  accent  in 
English  and  German,  is  used  in  words  which  were 
originally  monosyllables. 

Note.  Many  dissijllahic  and  polysyllabic  words  have  this  accent,  since 
they  were  formerly  monosyllabic  or  have  become  dissyllabic  or  'polysyllabic  by 
the  addition  of  some  ending,  especially  the  definite  postpositive  article. 

40.  Foreign  loan  words  often  receive  the  acute 
accent  since  this  approximately  resembles  the  mu- 
sical accent  employed  by  the  mcTre  important  of  the 
European  languages. 

41.  The  grave,  or  dissyllabic,  accent  belongs  in 
most  cases  to  words  which  were  originally  dissyllabic 
or  polysyllabic.  This  accent  is  a  peculiar  feature 
of  the  Swedish  (and  Norwegian),  and  constitutes 
perhaps  the  greatest  difficulty  which  confronts  the 
foreigner  wishing  to  acquire  a  correct  pronuncia- 
tion. Although  no  rules  can  teach  it,  the  following 
remarks  may  be  useful : 

42.  We  may  call  the  highest  pitch  to  which  the 
voice  rises  in  unaffected  pronunciation  the  high 
tone,  and  the  lowest  to  which  it  falls  the  low  tone. 
The  pitch  which  is  usually  employed  lies  midway 
between  these  two  and  may  be  designated  as  the 
normal  tone.  (Signs:  I,  low  tone;  n,  normal 
tone).  A  word  with  acute  accent  has  the  normal 
tone  on  the  first  syllable  and  the  low  tone  on  the 


13  CAPITALIZATION. 

n  I  n 

following  syllable  or  syllables.     Ex.:  get'-ter,  get'- 

ter-na.    The  word  is  originally  monosyllabic.    This 
intonation  is  practically  the  same  as  the  English. 

43.  A  word  with  grave  accent,  if  dissyllabic,  be- 
gins with  a  tone  a  little  below  the  normal,  which  we 
may  designate  as  — n,  the  voice  then  glides  down  to 
the  low  tone  within  the  same  syllable,  producing  a 
slightly  broken  intonation,  and  rises  to  the  normal 

-nl     n 

tone  on  the  second  syllable.    Ex. :  ta-la,  to  speak. 

44.  A  word  of  more  than  two  syllables  taking 
the  grave  accent  has  the  — n  tone  on  the  first  syllable, 
the  low  tone  on  the  second,  and  the  normal  tone  on 

-n      I       n 

the  third.    Ex.:  ta^la-re,  speaker. 

In  the  case  of  words  which  do  not  take  the  stress 
accent  on  the  first  syllable,  regard  the  stressed  syl- 
lable as  the  first  in  applying  these  rules.    Ex. :  for- 

-rU    n 

ta'la. 

Remabk.  The  accent  mark  used  in  this  book  merely  indi- 
cates the  syllable  to  be  stressed. 

Capitalization. 

45.  Capitals  are  used  less  frequently  in  Swedish 
than  in  English.  Thus  Swedish  uses  a  small  initial 
letter  in  the  following  cases  contrary  to  English 
usage : 

(a)  In  the  names  of  the  days  of  the  week  and 
in  the  names  of  months:  tisdag,  Tuesday;  april, 
April. 

(b)  In  the  names  of  certain  festivals,  holidays, 
and  times  of  the  year :  jul,  Christmas ;  pdsk,  Easter ; 
advent,  Advent. 


PUNCTUATION.  13 

(c)  In  adjectives  and  nouns  derived  from  proper 
names:  svensk,  Swedish;  engelsk,  English;  sveden- 
horgiatisk,  Swedenborgian ;  darvinist,  Darwinist; 
stockholmare,  inhabitant  of  Stockholm. 

46.  In  titles  of  books  and  headings  of  chapters 
only  the  first  word,  as  a  rule,  is  capitalized. 

47.  In  compound  names  like  Forenta  staterna, 
United  States,  and  Stilla  havet,  Pacific  Ocean,  only 
the  first  word  is  capitalized;  so  also  in  expressions 
like  Karl  den  store,  Charles  the  Great. 

48.  Personal  titles  are  generally  not  capitalized 
except  in  direct  address:  herr  Svensson;  professor 
Bjorkman;  hans  majestdt,  His  Majesty;  but,  Bdsta 
Herr  Professor!  —  Dear  Professor:  —  Ers  Maje- 
stdt!—  Your  Majesty   (capitalization  is  optional). 

49.  The  pronoun  /  (second  person  plural)  is 
capitalized;  ni  (second  person  singular)  and  its  dif- 
ferent cases  are  often  capitalized  in  letters  as  a  sign 
of  respect. 

Punctuation. 

50.  The  rules  of  punctuation  are  nearly  the 
same  in  both  English  and  Swedish.  But  Swedish 
punctuation  is  perhaps  closer  than  ours,  the  comma 
especially  being  used  more  freely.  Note  examples  in 
reading. 

Observe.  The  comma  is  generally  used  to  set  off 
the  different  clauses  of  a  sentence,  whether  inde- 
pendent or  dependent,  provided  they  contain  a  sub- 
ject and  «.  predicate :  ringen,  som  jag  hade  pa  fing- 
ret,  har  kommit  hort,  the  ring  that  I  had  on  my 


14  SYLLABICATION. 

finger  has  been  lost;  sag  mig,  vad  du  har  gjort, 
tell  me  what  you  have  done;  gossen  laser,  och  flic- 
kan  syr,  the  boy  reads  and  the  girl  sews. 

Syllabication. 

51.  A  consonant  between  two  vowels,  except  x  in 
simple  words  of  native  origin,  goes  with  the  follow- 
ing vowel :  d-ra,  ce-der,  Id-ra-re,  re-gel,  vdx-a. 

52.  When  two  or  more  consonants  occur  between 
two  vowels,  the  last  consonant  usually  goes  with 
the  following  vowel:  fal-la,  hop-pas,  fladd-ra,  myc- 
ket. 

53.  But  sch  and  sk  when  used  as  signs  for  the 
s^-sound  (sh)  are  not  separated  but  added  to  the 
following  vowel :  mar-schera,  mar-skalk;  ng  is  added 
to  the  preceding  vowel  unless  n  and  g  belong  to 
different  words:  hdng-a,  sjung-a. 

54.  Compound  words  are  divided  according  to 
their  component  parts:  trdd-gdrd,  garden;  kyrk- 
torn,  steeple;  hand-skrift,  manuscript;  bak-om, 
behind. 


PART  II. 
THE  PARTS  OF  SPEECH. 


LESSON  I. 
Genders. 

55.  The  Swedish  language  has  four  genders: 
masculine,  feminine,  common,  and  neuter. 

56.  Masculine  are  generally  names  of  living 
beings,  especially  persons,  of  the  male  sex.  They 
require  as  pronoun  of  reference  han. 

57.  Feminine  are  generally  names  of  living 
beings,  especially  persons,  of  the  female  sex.  They 
require  as  pronoun  of  reference  hon. 

58.  Common  gender  comprises  most  names  of 
inanimate  objects  which  are  not  neuter.  The  pro- 
noun of  reference  is  den. 

59.  Whether  the  name  of  an  inanimate  object 
is  common  or  neuter  depends  variously  on  termina- 
tion or  usage.  A  few  practical  rules  for  determin- 
ing neuter  nouns  will  be  given  in  the  Appendix ;  but 
the  best  plan  for  the  beginner  is  to  associate  the 
indefinite  article  with  every  noun  he  learns. 

60.  The  neuter  gender  requires  det  as  pronoun 
of  reference. 

61.  Formerly  the  distinction  between  the  mas- 
culine and  feminine  genders  of  inanimate  objects 


16  ARTICLES. 

was  more  strictly  observed ;  now  it  is  almost  entirely 
discarded  except  in  some  dialects.  The  distinction 
is  avoided  by  employing  den  as  pronoun  of  reference 
for  either.  The  tendency  is  to  extend  the  province 
of  the  common  gender.  Thus  we  find  that  names 
of  animals,  even  the  higher,  when  no  reference  is 
had  to  sex,  are  generally  regarded  as  common  and 
referred  to  with  the  pronoun  den.  On  the  contrary, 
nouns  ending  in  -a  with  plural  in  -or  are  often  fem- 
inine even  when  they  denote  inanimate  objects  or 
living  beings  of  either  sex:  Var  dr  klockan?  Where 
is  the  clock?  Hon  hanger  pa  vdggen  i  sdngkam- 
maren.  It  hangs  on  the  wall  in  the  bedroom. 
Vad  blev  det  av  den  lilla  vita  duvan?  What  became 
of  the  little  white  dove?  Hon  flog  sin  vdg.  It  flew 
away. 

Note.  Masculine,  feminine,  and  common  nouns  will  be  referred  to  as  gender 
nouns.  It  la  not  deemed  necessary  to  denote  whether  a  noun  is  masculine, 
feminine,  or  conimor  ;  rules  given  in  56,  57,  and  58  will  enable  the  student  to 
make  such  a  distinction  whenever  necessary. 

THE  ARTICLES. 

62.  There  are  three  articles:  the  indefinite 
article;  the  postpositive  definite  article,  which  is 
appended  to  the  noun,  and  the  independent  or  pre- 
positive definite  article,  which  stands  before  the 
noun  and  is  used  only  when  the  noun  is  qualified  by 
an  adjective. 

THE  INDEFINITE  ARTICLE. 

63.  The  indefinite  article  which  is  equivalent  to 
the  English  indefinite  article  a  or  an  has  two  forms : 

(1)     En,  which  is  used  before  all  gender  nouns: 


VERBS.  17 

en  man,  a  man;  en  drottning,  a  queen;  en  dngare, 
a  steamer. 

(2)  Ett,  which  is  used  before  all  neuter  nouns: 
ett  oga,  an  eye;  ett  barn,  a  child. 

RULE  OP  SYNTAX. 

64.  The  indefinite  article  corresponds  in  the 
main  with  that  of  English,  with  some  important 
deviations.    It  must  be  omitted: 

(a)  Before  a  predicate  noun  denoting  profession 
or  occupation  when  not  qualified  by  an  adjective. 
As:  min  van  dr  Idrare,  my  friend  is  a  teacher;  but 
min  van  dr  en  begdvad  Idrare,  my  friend  is  a  talent- 
ed teacher. 

(b)  Also  in  a  number  of  phrases;  as,  jag  har 
lust  att  Idsa,  I  have  a  desire  to  read;  jag  fick  svar, 
I  received  an  answer. 

65.  The  verb  att  hava  (short  form,  att  ha),  to 
have. 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE. 

Sg.  jag  har,  I  have     PI.  vi  ha(va),   we  have 

du  har,  thou  hast  (you  /  haven,han,  you  have 

have)  ni  ha(va),  you  have 

ni  har,  you  have  de  ha(va),  they  have 
han  har,   he  has 

Note.     The  shorter  forms  of  the  verb  Jiava  have  practically  supplanted  the 
longer  forms,  which  are  limited  to  the  solemn  style. 

IMPERFECT  INDICATIVE. 

Sg.  jag  hade,   I  had,  etc.  PI.  vi  hade,  we  had,  etc. 
du  hade  I  haden 

ni  hade  ni  hade 

han  hade  de  hade 


18  VEBBS. 

66.  The  verb  att  vara,  to  be. 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE. 

Sg.  jag  dr,   I  am       PI.  vi  dro,  we  are 

du  dr,   thou  art  (you   /  dren,  you  are 
are)  ni  dro,  you  are 

ni  dr,  you  are        de  dro,  they  are 
han  dr,  he  is 

IMPERFECT  Ii.'DICATIVE. 

Sg.  jag  var,  I  was,  etc.  PI.  vi  voro,  we  were,  etc. 
du  var  I  voren 

ni  var  ni  voro 

han  var  de  voro  . 

67.  Remarks  on  the  verbs. 

(a)  The  singular  du  is  used  in  very  familiar 
address,  to  relatives,  to  intimate  friends,  and  to 
children.  The  plural  I  is  archaic  except  in  elevated 
style. 

(b)  Ni  is  used  instead  of  du  as  the  conventional 
form  of  address.  In  the  plural  it  has  supplanted  1 
both  in  familiar  and  polite  address  (see  142  and 
note) . 

(c)  The  singular  of  the  verb  regularly  takes  the 
place  of  the  plural  in  conversation  and  has  begun 
to  replace  the  latter  in  the  written  language:  thus, 
VI  har,  ni  har,  vi  dr,  etc.,  are  permissible. 

Note.  In  the  banning  only  the  third  p)erson  singular  of  the  verbs  will  be 
given  in  the  vocabulary  ;  this  form  can  be  used  in  all  persons  and  both  numbers. 

Exercise  I. 

N.  B.  The  student  should  be  required  to  reproduce  the 
contents  of  the  exercises,  wherever  this  is  practicable,  in 
his  own  words. 

A.  1.  Karl  ar  en  liten  gosse,  som  (who)  bor  i  en  stor 
stad.    2.  Han  orar  i  skolan  och  har  en  snail  liirare.    3.  Han 


EXERCISE.  19 

far  ofta  en  laiig  liixa,  som  iir  mycket  svai'.  4.  Karl  iir  flitig 
och  kan  sin  (his)  laxa.  5.  "Kan  du  din  (your)  liixa  i 
dag?"  fragar^  Karls  larare.  G.  Karl  svarar:  "Ja,  jag  kan 
min  (my)  liixa." 

^The  predicate  precedes  the  subject  if  the  clause  is  introduced  by  a  modifier 
of  the  verb,  which  may  be  either  adverb,  phrase,   clause,  or  object. 

B.  Answer  the  following  questions  in  S'wcdish  :  1.  Vem 
(who)  ar  Karl?  2.  Var  (where)  bor  han?  3.  Vad  (what) 
har  han?  4.  Ar  hans  liirare  snail?  5.  Vad  ger  han  Karl 
ofta?  6.  Ar  Karls  laxa  svar?  7.  Vad  fragar  han  Karl 
ofta  ?    8.  Vad  svarar  Karl  sin  liirare  ? 

WRITTEN    EXERCISE. 

N.  B.  The  teacher  should  read  the  English  sentences,  give 
the  class  a  few  seconds  for  mental  translation,  and  then  put 
the  question  to  the  individual  student.  The  students  should 
not  be  allowed  to  read  the  translation  from  their  papers  or 
to  translate  from  their  books. 

C.  1.  Mary  lives  in  a  large  and  beautiful  city.  2.  She 
is  a  good  girl.  She  writes  a  long  (Idngt)  letter  to  a  friend. 
3.  She  has  a  mother,  who  is  very  good.  4.  Her  (hennes) 
mother  asks  her  (henne),  '^'What  are^  you  writing?"  5. 
Mary  answers  her  (sin)  mother,  "I  am^  writing  a  long 
letter  to  a  friend  who  lives  in  Stockholm." 

^Swedish  has  no  progressive  nor  emphatic  verb-forms.  Use  the  simple 
present.  Do  and  did  are  not  translated  in  interrogative  and  negative  expres- 
sions.    Use  the  simple  present  or  imperfect. 

VOCABULARY. 

N.  B.  1.  The  indefinite  article  before  nouns  shows  whether 
they  are  gender  nouns  or  neuter  nouns. 

2.  Only  the  indefinite  gender  form  of  the  adjective  is  given 
in  the  first  few  lessons. 

bor,  lives  din,  thy,  your 

ett  hrev,  a  letter  en,  a,  one,   (gender  form) 

t  dag,  to-day  ett,  a,  an  (neuter) 


20 


DEFINITE  ARTICLES. 


en  flicka,  a  girl 

fiitig,  diligent 

frdgar,  asks 

fdr,  gets,  receives 

ger,  gives 

en  gosse,  a  boy 

gdr,  goes 

han,  he 

hans,  his 

har,  has 

?ion,  she 

henne,  her  (objective) 

Jiennes,  her   (possessive) 

i,  in 

;o,  yes 

Jean,  can;   linow 

liiew-,  little,   small 

Idng,  long 


e»  Zaica,  a  lesson 

min,  my 

en  moder  (mor),  a  mother 

mycket,  much,  very  (much) 

och,  and 

ofta,  often 

sin,  his,  her   (reflexive) 

en  skola,  a  school 

i  skolan,  to  (at)  school 

skriver,  writes 

snail,  good,  kind 

som,  who,  which,  that 

en  stad,  a  city 

sfor,  large,  great 

svarar,  answers 

svdr,  hard,  difficult 

vaoker,  beautiful 

en  i;an,  a  friend 


en  Idrare,  a  teacher 

Idioms:  1.  gd  i  skolan,  to  attend  school. 

2.  kunna  (present  kan)  sin  Idxa,  to  know  one's  lesson. 


LESSON  II. 
The  Definite  Articles. 

68.  There  are  two  definite  articles,  the  post- 
positive and  the  prepositive. 

The  Postpositive  Article. 

69.  The  postpositive  article  consists  of  a  letter 
or  syllable  suffixed  to  the  noun.  This  article  is 
always  used  when  the  noun  is  definite  in  sense. 

It  has  the  following  forms : 
a.     For  gender  nouns: 

Singular:  -en,  or  -n. 

Plural :  -na  (rarely  -ne) . 


DEFINITE  ARTICLES.  31 

b.     For  neuter  nouns: 

Singular :  -et,  or  -t. 
Plural:  -na,  -a,  or  -en. 

70.     The  postpositive  article  with  gender  nouns. 
In  the  Singular. 

1.  -en  is  used  when  the  noun  ends  in  a  consonant. 
Ex. :  skald-en,  the  poet ;  hrud-en,  the  bride ;  sol-en, 

the  sun. 

Exceptions.  (1)  Gender  nouns  ending  in  unaccented  el,  -er, 
or  -or  and  the  words  konsul,  consul,  and  purpur,  purple,  take 
-n  as  postpositive  article. 

Ex.:  fdgel-n,  the  bird;  seger-n,  the  victory;  doktor-n,  the 
doctor;   konsul-n,  the  consul. 

(2)  Other  words  ending  in  -I,  or  -r  take  either  -en  or  -n  as 
postpositive  article. 

Ex.:  fjdrit-en  or  fjaril-n,  the  butterfly;  sommar-en  or 
sommar-n,  the  summer. 

2.  -n  is  used  when  the  noun  ends  in  a  vowel. 
Ex. :  gosse-n,  the  boy ;  flicka-n,  the  girl ;  blomma-n, 

the  flower ;  by-n,  the  village. 

Exceptions.  Gender  nouns  ending  in  accented  -e  or  -i  take 
either  -en  or  -n  as  postpositive  article. 

Ex. :  arme-en  or  armen,  the  army ;  symmetri-en  or  symmetri-^, 
the  symmetry. 

N.  B.  Of  gender  nouns  ending  in  unaccented  -en  only  the 
following  four  take  the  postpositive  article.  In  so  doing  they 
drop  the  e  of  the  ending:  hotten,  bottom,  hottn-en,  the  bottom; 
socken,  parish,  sockn-en,  the  parish;  sagen,  legend,  sdgn-en, 
the  legend;   oKen,  desert,  okn-en,  the  desert. 

In  the  Plural. 
-na   (rarely  -ne)   is  used  as  postpositive  article 
with  gender  nouns  in  the  plural. 

Ex. :  skalder-na,  the  poets ;  brudar-na,  the  brides ; 


22  DEFINITE  ARTICLES. 

faglar-na,  the  birds;  flickor-na,  the  girls;  byar-na, 
the  villages;  oknar-na,  the  deserts. 

Exceptions,    miinn-en,  the  men;  giiss-en,  the  geese;   loss-en, 
the  lice;   moss-en,  the  mice. 

71.     The  postpositive  article  with  neuter  nouns. 
In  the  Singular. 

1.  -et  is  used  when  the  noun  ends  in  a  consonant 
or  in  an  accented  vowel. 

Ex. :  namn-et,  the  name ;  bo-et,  the  nest ;  parti-et, 
the  party. 

2.  -t  is  used  when  the  noun  ends  in  an  unaccented 
vowel. 

Ex. :  hjdrta-t,  the  heart ;  eJw-t,  the  echo. 

N.  B.  Neuter  nouns  ending  in  unaccented  -el,  -en.  or  -er 
drop  the  e  of  the  ending  on  taking  the  postpositive  article. 

Ex.:  segel,  sail,  segl-et,  the  sail;  vapen,  weapon,  vapn-et,  the 
weapon;  dunder,  thunder,  dundr-et,  the  thunder. 

Exceptions:  siden-et,  the  silk;  papper-ef,  the  paper. 

In  the  Plural. 

1.  -na  is  used  as  postpositive  article  in  the  plural 
with  neuter  nouns  of  the  Third  Declension. 

Ex. :  bryggerier-na,  the  breweries ;  kafeer-na,  the 
cafes. 

2.  -a  is  used  as  postpositive  article  in  the  plural 
with  neuter  nouns  of  the  Fourth  Declension. 

Ex. :  stdllen-a,  the  places ;  bon-a,  the  nests. 

3.  -en  is  used  as  postpositive  article  in  the  plural 
with  neuter  nouns  of  the  Fifth  Declension. 

Ex. :  namn-en,  the  names ;  segl-en,  the  sails. 

72.  Certain  nouns  do  not  take  the  postpositive 
article. 

1.  Abstract  nouns  ending  in  -an.  Ex. :  beund- 
ran,  admiration. 


EXERCISE.  23 

2.  Most  gender  nouns  ending  in  unaccented  -en 
(see  70,  N.  B.).  Ex.:  froken,  miss,  young  lady; 
examen,  examination. 

3.  Foreign  nouns  ending  in  -um  and  -ns.  Ex.: 
datum,  date ;  genus,  gender. 

But  those  ending  in  -eum  or  -ium  drop  -um  and 
add  -et.  Ex. :  museum,  museum,  muse-et,  the  muse- 
um ;  privilegium,  privilege,  privilegi-et,  the  privilege. 

73.  The  Prepositive  Article. 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

Gender  Nouns  Neuter  All  Grcnders 

den  det  de 

It  is  used  together  with  the  postpositive  article 
when  the  noun  is  modified  by  an  adjective.  Ex. : 
den  varma  solen,  the  warm  sun.  For  further  dis- 
cussion see  126. 

RULE  OF  SYNTAX. 

74.  Contrary  to  English  usage  the  definite  ar- 
ticle in  Swedish  is  used  with  generic  and  abstract 
nouns,  as,  guldet,  gold;  lyckan,  happiness;  livet  dr 
kort,  men  konsten  dr  Idng,  life  is  short  but  art  is 
long. 

Exercise  II. 

A.  Supply  the  postpositive  article  in  the  following: 
1.  Ser  ni  hus — ,  som  ligger  dar  pa  kulle — ?  2.  Det  till- 
hor  dam—,  som  kommer  dar.  3.  Hon  ar  mycket  rik,  sager 
man.  4,  Tradgard — ,  som  ligger  bakom  hus — ,  ar  vacker, 
och  frukt — ,  som  viixer  i  den  (it),  iir  fiirtrafflig.  5.  Hon 
ager  ocksfi  ett  stort  (neut.)  hus  i  stad —  och  har  pengar  i 
bank — . '  (5.  Hon  liar  en  son,  som  iir  atta  ar  gammal  och 
gar  i  skola — .  7.  Hans  larare  sager,  att  gosse —  ar  snail 
och  flitig.  8.  Nu  ar  ban  mycket  sjuk,  och  doktor —  beso- 
ker  lionom. 


24  ~  EXERCISE. 

B.  Answer  the  following  questions  in  Swedish :  1.  Vad 
ligger  pa  knllen?  2,  Kan  ni  se  det?  3.  Vein  tillhor  det? 
4.  Ax  hon  fattig  eller  rik?  5.  Vad  ligger  bakom  huset? 
6.  Vad  vaxer  i  den?  7.  Vad  ar  er  (your)  tanke  (idea)  om 
frukten?  8.  Ager  damen  nagot  mer  (anything  else)? 
9.  Beratta  vad  ni  vet  om  hennes  son  (Tell  what  you  know 
about  her  son). 

C.  Translate:  1.  Do  you  know  the  man  who  owns  the 
house  on  the  hill?  2.  No,  I  do  not  (det  gor  jag  iche), 
but  my  father  knows  him.  3.  He  always  salutes  me  when 
I  meet  him  in  the  street.^  4.  He  is  a  very  kind  man,  and 
rich,  they  say  (A,  3).  5.  His  wife  is  dead  and  he  has  a 
little  boy,  six  years  old,  who  attends  school  (A,  6). 
6.  Now  he  cannot  (kan  hoji  inte)  attend  (go.)  for  he  13 
sick  and  is  at  home.    7.  The  doctor  visits  him  every  day. 

»Pa  gatan. 

VOCABULARY. 

alltid,  always  honom,  him 

bakom,  behind  ett  hus,  house 

en  bank,  bank  en  hustru,  wife 

besoker,  visits  hdl'sar  pd,^  greets 

en  dag,  day  kommer,  comes  * 

en  dam,  lady  en  kulle,  hill 

den   (pronoun),  it  kanner,  knows 

det  (pronoun)  it  ligger,  lies 

en  doktor,  doctor  man   (indef.  pronoun),  one, 
dar,  there  they,  people 

dod,  dead  en  man,  man 

en  fader,  father  moter,  meets 

frukt  (collective),  fruit  ni,  you  (formal) 

fortrdlT'lig,  excellent  nu,  now 

gammal,  old  ndr,  when 

en  gata,  street  ocksd,  also 

hemma,  at  home  pd,  on,  upon 

^halsar  pd'    (with  the  main  stress  on  pd)  signifies  to  pay  a  visit:  vi  hSlsudt 
pd'   ho3  honom,  we  caUcd  at  his  home. 


DECLENSION.  25 

pengar  (plur.),  money  ty  (conj.),  for 

rik,  rich  en  trddgdrd,  garden 

ser,  sees  varje,  each,  every 

siiger,  says  vdxer,  grows 

till'hdr  (35),  belongs  to  ager,  owns 


LESSON  III. 
Inflection  of  Nouns. 

75.  Case.  Nouns  are  changed  for  case  only  in 
the  genitive,  which  is  formed  by  adding  s  to  the 
nominative  of  the  indefinite  or  the  definite  form : 

Ex.:  En  gosses  bok,  a  boy's  book;  gossens  bok 
dr  hdr,  the  boy's  book  is  here;  flickofnas  blommor 
dro  vackra,  the  girls'  flowers  are  beautiful. 

Note.     For  exceptions  see  130,  a,  b,  d. 

76.  Number.  There  are  five  declensions,  accord- 
ing to  the  manner  of  forming  the  nominative  plural 
of  the  indefinite  form.    These  are: 

First  Declension.    Plural  ending  -or. 
Second  Declension.    Plural  ending  -ar. 
Third  Declension.    Plural  ending  -er. 
Fourth  Declension.    Plural  ending  -n. 
Fifth  Declension.    Without  plural  ending. 

In  addition  there  are  some  irregular  nouns  which 
cannot  be  classified. 

FIRST  DECLENSION. 

77.  This  declension  forms  its  plural  by  dropping 
the  ending  -a  of  the  nominative  singular  and  adding 
-or.  The  postpositive  article  is  -n  in  the  singular 
and  -na  in  the  plural. 

Swedish  Grammar  3 


26  DECLENSION. 

78.  The  First  Declension  comprises  all  gender 
nouns  ending  in  -a;  also  the  nouns  ros,  rose;  vdg, 
wave;  toff  el,  slipper;  ddei',  vein;  and  a  few  others. 

Exceptions:  histo'ria  (-er),  story;  kolle'ga  (-er),  colleague;  lusta  (-ar),  desire. 

79.  Example  of  the  First  Declension:  en  flicka, 
a  girl. 

INDEFINITE  DEFINITE 

Sing.         Plur.  Sing.  Plur. 

Nom.  en  flicka,    flick-or        flicka-n,      flick-or-na 
Gen.  en  flicka-s,  flick-or-s     flicka-n-s,  flick-or-na-s 

Remakk.  As  the  genitive  is  formed  regularly  by  the  addi- 
tion of  -s  (without  the  apostrophe),  the  nominative  form  only 
will  be  given  hereafter. 

SECOND  DECLENSION. 

80.  This  declension  is  characterized  by  the  plural 
ending  -ar.  The  postpositive  definite  article  is  -en 
or  -n  in  the  singular  (72),  -na  in  the  plural. 

81.  The  Second  Declension  comprises: 

(a)  Most  monosyllabic  gender  nouns  ending  in  a 
consonant  and  some  ending  in  a  vowel. 

(b)  Gender  nouns  ending  in  -dom,  -il,  -ing,  -ling, 
-ning,  -ung,  and  unaccented  -e,  -el,  -en,  -er. 

Note  1.  Unaccented  e  in  the  endings  -e,  -el,  -en,  -er  is  dropped  when  the 
final  ending  is  added. 

2.  Unaccented  a  in  the  ending  -ar,  and  o  and  u  in  the  words  afton,  evening ; 
djSviil,  devil ;  morgon,  morning,  are  dropped  before  the  plural  ending. 

82.  Examples  of  the  Second  Declension: 

en  fdgel,  a  bird;  en  gosse,  a  boy;  en  afton,  an 
evening. 

INDEFINITE  DEFINITE 

Sg.  en  fdgel  fdgel-n  (73,1) 

PI.    fdgl-ar  (81,1)  fdgl-ar-na 


EXERCISE.  27 

Sg.  en  gosse  gosse-n  (72) 

PI.    goss-ar  (81,1)  goss-ar-na(-ne)  (73,5) 

Sg.  en  a/^ow  afton-en 

PI.    aftn-ar  (81,  b,  2)  aftn-ar-na 


Exercise  III. 

4.  Supply  the  postpositive  def.  article  where  there  is 
one  dash;  the  proper  plural  ending  and  the  postpositive 
article  where  there  are  two  dashes : 

1.  Herr  Brown  ar  ute  och  gar^.  2.  Vadr —  ar  mycket 
vackert;  sol —  skiner  och  Inft —  ar  varm.    3.  Det  ar  mycket 

folk  pa  gat ,  ty  det  ar  helgdag,  och  man  arbetar  ej. 

4.  Nar  han  blir  trott,  satter^  han  sig  pa  en  av  soff i 

parken.    5.  Han  ser  pa  goss och  flick ,  som  leka^ 

dar,  och  hor  pa  fagl ,  som  sjunga.    6.  Sedan  gar^  han 

till  en  restaurang,  ty  han  ar  hungrig.  7.  Han  satter  sig 
vid  ett  bord,  ser  pa  matsedel — ,  kallar  pa  vaktmastar —  och 
bestaller.     8.  Ibland  aro  bans  tvenne  dottrar  med  honom. 

^Ar  ute  och  gar,  is  out  walking,  takes  a  walk.  'See  note  1,  Exercise  I.  A. 
'In  conversation  the  singular  is  used  with  a  plural  subject. 

B.  Answer  in  Swedish :  Vad  heter  (is  the  name  of)  er 
van?  2.  Vad  gor  herr  Brown?  3.  Hurudant  ar  vadret? 
4.  Ar  herr  Brown  ensam  (alone)  ute?  5,  Varfor  (why)  ar 
det  mycket  folk  ute  och  gar?  6.  Varfor  arbetar  man  icke? 
7.  Vad  gor  herr  Brown,  nar  han  blir  trott?  8.  Vad  ser  han 
pa?  9.  A^ad  hor  han  pa?  10.  Vart  gar  han,  nar  han  ar 
hungrig?    11.  Vem  kallar  han  pa?  , 

C.  1.  I  have  a  friend  whose  name  is  {som  heter)  Brown. 
2.  He  comes  often  to  me  and  asks  me  if  I  will  take  a  walk^ 
with  him.  3.  When  the  weather  is  fine  {vackert)  I  answer^ 
yes,  for  he  is  a  kind  and  interesting  man  and  his  company 
is  always  agreeable  {angendmt) .    4.  Sometimes  when  there 


28 


VOCABULARY. 


arc  many  people^  in  the  streets  we  go^  to  a  park  and  sit 
down  {sdtta  oss)  on  one  of  the  seats.  5.  He  often  tells  of 
his  (sina)  travels  in  different  (olika)  parts  of  the  world. 
6.  When  we  are  hungry  (hungriga)  we  eat  together  in  (pa) 
a  restaurant. 

^Vill  ga  ut  och  ga.     ^Soe  noto  1,  Ex.  I,  A.     ^Tbere  is  and  there  are  are  trans- 
lated by  det   dr,  the  verb  being  singular  in  either  case. 


VOCABULARY. 


arbetar,  works 

herdt'tar  (36,  a),  tells,  relates 
bestdl'ler   (36,  a),  orders 
ett  hord,  table 
en  del,  -ar,  part,  share 
en  dotter,  dottrar,  daughter 
ej,  not 

en  flicka,  -or,  girl 
folk  (collective),  people 
ett  folk,  a  people 
en  fdgel,  fdglar,  bird 
en  gosse,  -ar,  boy 
en  helgdag,  -ar,  holiday 
Jierr,  -ar,  Mister 
hungrig,  hungry 
ibland'  (adv.),  sometimes 
intressant' ,  interesting 
kallar  pd,  calls 
leker,  plays 
luft,  air 

en  matsedel  (35,  37),  -sedlar, 
bill  of  fare 


med,   with    (prep.) ;    along 

(adv.) 
om,  about  (prep.);  if  (conj.) 
en  park,  park 
en  restaurang' ,  restaurant 
en  resa,  -or,  journey 
sedan,  thereupon  (adv.),  after 

(conj.) 
sig  (reflexive  pronoun),  himself 

herself,  itself,  themselves 
sjunger,  sings 
skiner,   shines 

en  soffa,  -or,  sofa,  seat,  bench 
sdtter,  seats,  sets 
ett  mllskap,  company 
tillsammans,   together 
trott,  tired 
tvenne,  two 

en  vakt'mastare,  waiter 
varm,  warm 
vid,  at,  by 
(ett)  vdder,  weather 
en  vdrld  (mute  I),  -ar,  world 


Idioms:   1.  att  gd  ut  och  gu,  to  take  a  walk. 

2.  att  sdtta  sig,  to  sit  down. 

3.  Jag  heter  Karl,  my  name  is  Carl. 


DECLENSION.  29 

LESSON  IV. 

Inflection  of  Nouns  (Continued). 

THIRD  DECLENSION. 

83.  The  nouns  of  this  declension  take  -er  in  the 
plural.  The  postpositive  article  is  -en  or  -n  for  gen- 
der nouns  and  -et  or  -t  for  neuter  nouns  in  the 
singular;  -na  for  either  in  the  plural. 

Note.     Some  nouns  ending  in  unaccented  -e,  and  a  few  others,  take  -r  in  tlie 
plural. 

84.  This  declension  contains: 

(a)  A  large  number  of  monosyllabic  gender 
nouns,  especially  derivatives  ending  in  -d,  -st,  -t. 

(h)  Gender  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable  end- 
ing in  -ad,  -else,  -het,  -nad,  -ndr,  -skap. 

(c)  Most  gender  nouns  of  foreign  origin. 

(d)  A  few  neuter  monosyllables. 

(e)  Neuter  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable  end- 
ing in  -eri',  -e'um,  -e,  -i,  -ium,  -on,  -um,  almost  ex- 
clusively of  foreign  origin. 

85.  Examples  of  gender  nouns  of  the  Third 
Declension:  en  Mid,  a  picture;  en  son,  a  son;  en  bok, 
a  book;  en  byggnad,  a  building;  en  hdndelse,  an 
event;  en  neger,  a  negro;  en  nota'rie,  a  notary;  en 
doktor,  a  doctor ;  en  nation,  a  nation. 

INDEFINITE  DEFINITE 

Sg.  en  bild  bild-en 

PI.    bild-er  bild-er-na 

Sg.  en  son  son-en 

PI.    son-er  son-er-na 

Sg.  en  bok  bok-en 

PI.    bock-er  bock-er-na 


30 


DECLENSION. 


Sg. 

en  byggnad 

byggnad-en 

PI. 

byggnad-er 

byggnad-er-na 

Sg. 

en  kdndelse 

hdndelse-n 

PI. 

hdndelse-r 

hdndelse-r-na 

Sg. 

en  neger 

neger-n 

PI. 

negr-er 

negr-er-na 

Sg. 

en  nota'rie 

»       notarie-n 

PI. 

notarie-r 

notarie-r-na 

Sg. 

en  doktor 

doktor -n 

PL 

doktor'-er 

doktor'-er-na 

Sg. 

en  nation' 

nation-en 

PI. 

nation-er 

nation-er-na 

Note.  1.  (a)  A  few  monosyllables  change  the  root  vowel  (14).  In  addition 
to  those  given  in  the  paradigms  we  may  note:  and,  duck;  hand,  hand;  natt, 
night ;   rand,  brim,   stripe ;  strand,  shore ;   stang,  pole. 

(b)  In  hok,  book  ;  fot,  foot ;  rot,  root,  there  is  both  a  change  of  root  vowel 
and  a  doubling  of  the  final  consonant. 

Give  the  plural  of  the  words  enumerated  above  (according  to  14). 

(c)  In  not,  nut;  get,  goat,  and  a  few  others  the  final  consonant  is  doubled. 

2.  Some  monosyllables  take  the  grave  accent  in  the  plural  while  others  take 
the  acute.  Ex.  (grave  accent)  :  son,  toner;  bild,  bilder;  (acute  accent)  :  strand, 
St r Under ;   stad,  stader. 

3.  Loan  words  in  -or  which  in  the  singular  have  the  accent  on  the  syllable 
preceding  -or  shift  the  accent  to  the  syllable  containing  -or  in  the  plural:  pro- 
fes'sor,  professo'rer.     The  def.  art.  is  -n.     (73,  1). 

4.  Gender  nouns  in  unaccented  -el  and  -er  drop  the  e  of  the  ending  before 
the  plural   ending:   fabel,   fable,   fabler;   fiber,   fibre,   fibrer. 

6.  The  ending  -us  in  words  of  Latin  origin  is  dropped  before  the  plural 
ending:  dekanus,   dean,   dekan-er. 


86.  Examples  of  neuter  nouns  of  the  Third  De- 
clension: ett  tryckeri',  a  printing  office;  ett  mu- 
se'um,  a  museum. 


INDEFINITE 

Sg.  ett  tryckerV 

PI.  tryckeri-er 

Sg.  ett  muse'um 

PI.  muse-er 


DEFINITE 

tryckeri-et 
tryckeri-er-na 
muse-et 
muse-er-na 


Note.     Foreign  words  ending  in  -eum  and   -ium  dr«p  the  ending  -um   upon 
taking  the  definite  article  and  the  plural  ending. 


EXERCISE.  .  31 

Exercise  IV. 

A.  1.  Decline  in  the  indefinite  and  definite  form,  nomi- 
native and  genitive  cases,  singular  and  plural:  (like  en 
dohtor)  en  professor,  en  pastor,  a  pastor;  en  rehior,  a  col- 
lege president.  2.  (Like  en  stad)  en  and,  a  duck;  en  hrand, 
a  firebrand  (also  conflagration,  sing,  only) ;  en  strand,  a 
shore.  3.  (Like  en  hdndelse)  en  fo'reteelse,  a  phenomenon; 
en  ah' tie,  a  share.  5.  (Like  en  neger)  en  muskel,  a  muscle. 
6.  (Like  ett  museum)  ett  semina'rium,  a  seminary;  (like 
ett  trycheri)  ett  Iryggeri',  a  brewery;  ett  Icafe,  a  cafe. 

B.  Supply  (at  — )  the  missing  ending,  the  definite  post- 
positive  article,    or    the   ending   of   the   plural    or    both 

(at );  also    (at...)    the  indefinite  article  en,  ett: 

1.  Ar  icke  detta  (this)  . . .  vackert  landskap?  2.  Har  kan 
man  se  mycket  pa  en  gang.  Man  ser  ...  flod,  som  flyter 
genom  vackra  ang — ,  tva  stad —  med  gat — ,  park — ,  hus  och 

kyrk — .     3.  Omkring  stad ligga  akr — ,  skog — ,  berg 

och   dal — .      Punkt ,   som   man   ser   langt   borta   pa 

slatt ,  aro  gard — ,  pa  vilka  bond bo.     4.  Dessa 

(these)  arbeta  hela  (the  whole)  dag —  pa  sina  (their)  fait 
och  i  sina  tradgard — .  5.  Pa  hojd pa  flod —  (gen- 
itive, def.)  vanstra  strand  ligga  tva  ruin — .  6.  De  aro  myc- 
ket intressanta. 

C.  Answer  in  Swedish:  1.  Hurudant  (how)  ar  land- 
skapet?  2.  Vad  flyter  floden  igenom  (through)  ?  3.  Hu- 
ru  manga  stader  kan  ni  se?  4.  Vad  ser  ni  i  dessa  (these) 
stader?  5.  Vad  aro  punkterna  langt  borta?  6.  Vad  gora 
bonderna  hela  dagen?  7.  Vad  ser  ni  pa  hojderna  pa  flo- 
dens  vanstra  strand? 

D.  Translate:  1.  From  this  (denna)  hill  you  can  (Jean 
man)  see  a  very  beautiful  (vachert)  landscape.  2.  On 
both  sides  there  (omit)  are  heights  and  in  the  background 


32 


VOCABULAKY. 


large  (stora)  forests.  3.  Two  rivers  flow  through  the  val- 
ley and  by  these  (dessa)  rivers  lie  cities.  4.  The  dity  to 
the  left  has  two  museums  and  a  famous  (beromt)  picture 
gallery.  5.  I  like  to  see  paintings  of  famous  {heromda) 
artists.  6.  If  you  wish  (vill),  we  shall  visit  {hesoTca  vi) 
the  museum  to-morrow.  7.  Do  you  see  the  smokestacks  on 
the  left  side  of  the  river  ?  8.  They  belong  to  a  large  factory 
where  they  {man)  manufacture  steam  engines.  9.  These 
(dessa)  steam  engines  are  exported  (translate:  one  ex- 
ports) to  foreign  countries. 

VOCABULARY. 
av,  of,  by,   from,  off  en  kyrka,  -or,  church 

en  haJcgrund,  -er,  background   ett  land.  Hinder,  country 


ett  berg,  mountain 

bor  (pi.  bo),  lives 

borta,  away 

en   bonde,    bonder,   peasant, 

farmer 
en  by,  -ar,  village 
en  dag,  -ar,  day 
en  dal,  -ar,  valley 
exporte'rar,  exports 
en  fabrik',  -er,  factory 
en  flod,  -er,  river 
flyter,  flows 
frammande,  foreign 
frdn,  from 
ett  fait,  a  field 
genom  (igenom)  through 
en  gdng,  one  time,  once 
en  gdrd,  -ar,  yard,  farmhouse 
hdr,  here 
en  hojd,  -er,  height,  hill 


ett  landskap,  landscape 

i  morgan,  to-morrow 

en  punkt,  -er,  point,  dot 

en  ruin,  -er,  ruin 

en  skog,  -ar,  forest 

en  slittt,  -er,  plain 

en  skorsten,  -ar,  chimney, 

smokestack 
e?i  strand,  strdnder,  bank, 

riverside 
en  tavla,  -or,  painting,  picture 
ett  tavelgalleri,  -er,  picture 

gallery 
tillverkar,  manufactures 
tvd,  two 

tycker  om'.  likes 
vdnster,  left 
till  vdnster,  to  the  left 
en  dker,  dkrar,  field 
en  dngmaskin,  -er,  steam  engine 
en  dng,  -ar,  meadow 


en  konstndr,  -er,  artist 
Idioms:  1.  Jag  tycker  om  att  Idsa,  I  like  to  read 

2.  att  se  pd,  to  look  at. 

3.  pd  en  gdng,  at  once. 

4.  i  dag,  i  gdr,  to-day,  yesterday. 


FIRST   CONJUGATION.  33 

LESSON  V. 
The  Verb. 

87.  There  are  four  conjugations  in  Swedish. 

88.  Verbs  belonging  to  the  First,  Second,  and 
Third  Conjugations  (also  called  weak  verbs)  form 
their  imperfect  by  adding  an  ending  to  the  un- 
changed root. 

89.  Verbs  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation  (also  called 
strong  verbs)  form  their  imperfect  by  changing 
the  vowel  of  the  root,  without  any  added  ending. 

Remark.     A  certain  number  of  verbs  vacillating  between 
different  conjugations  are  called  irregular  verbs. 

THE  FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

90.  This  conjugation  ha's  the  following  endings: 

-a  in  the  infinitive. 

-ar  in  the  singular  of  the  present  indicative. 

-en  in  the  archaic  second  person  plur.  pres.  ind. 

-a  elsewhere  in  the  plur.  pres.  ind. 

-ade  in  both  numbers  of  the  imperf.  ind. 

-aden  in  the  archaic  second  pers.  plur. 

-ande  in  the  pres.  participle. 

-at  in  the  supine. 

-ad  in  the  gender  form  of  the  past  participle. 

-at  in  the  neuter  form  of  the  past  participle. 

91.  Supine.  The  supine  has  been  evolved  from 
the  neuter  form  of  the  past  participle  and  is  used 
together  with  the  auxiliary  verb  hava  to  form  the 
compound  perfect  tenses. 

92.  The  past  participle  is  a  verbal  adjective; 
it  is  used  as  an  adjective  and  also  with  the  auxiliary 


34 


FIRST   CONJUGATION. 


verbs  bliva  and  varda,  to  become,  to  form  the  com- 
pound passive  of  transitive  verbs   (see  188). 

93.  (a)  The  simple  tense  in  Swedish  expresses 
also  the  progressive  and  emphatic  forms  of  English ; 
thus,  jag  kallar=l  call,  am  calling,  do  call;  jag  kal- 
lade=l  called,  w^as  calling,  did  call. 

(h)  Likewise  the  interrogative  and  negative  uses 
of  do,  do  you  call?  I  do  not  call,  etc.,  are  expressed 
in  the  Swedish  by  the  simple  form:  as,  kallar  ni? 
jag  kallar  inte. 

94.  The  verb  att  kalla,  to  call. 

(a)  PRESENT  INDICATIVE     IMPERFECT  INDICATIVE 


Sg.  jag^ 

\kallar 


Sg.  jag 
du 


PI. 


ni 
hanj 

vi  kalla 
I  kallen 
ni  kalla 
de  kalla 


m 
han 


kallade 


PI. 


vi  kallade 
I  kalladen 
ni  kallade 
de  kallade 


(h)  The  perfect  indicative  is  formed  by  combining 
the  supine  with  the  present  indicative  of  hava,  to 
have. 

The  pluperfect  indicative  is  formed  by  combining 
the  supine  with  the  imperfect  of  hava. 

Examples : 

PERFECT  INDICATIVE        PLUPERFECT  INDICATIVE 


Sg.  jag  1 

^^    rhar  kallat 
han] 


du 
ni 
han 


hade  kallat 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  35 

PI.    vi  ha^  kallat  vi  hade  kallat 

I  han-  kallat  I  haden  kallat 

ni  ha  kallat  ^            ni  hade  kallat 

de  ha  kallat  de  hade  kallat 

*AIso  hava.     ^Also   haven. 

\ 

95.  To  this  conjugation  belong: 

(a)  Almost  all  weak  verbs  the  stem  of  which  ends 
in  a  consonant  and  contains  one  of  the  hard  vowels 
a,  0,  u,  a;  as  skala,  to  peel;  gnola,  to  hum;  skura, 
to  scrub ;  mala,  to  paint. 

(b)  Almost  all  verbs  derived  from  other  words 
by  means  of  a  consonantal  ending ;  as,  svartna  (from 
svart) ,  to  grow  black ;  vidga  (from  vid) ,  to  widen ; 
grbnska  (from  gron) ,  to  grow  green. 

(c)  All  verbs  ending  in  -e'ra;  as,  rege'ra,  to  rule ; 
korrige'ra,  to  correct. 

(d)  All  verbs  having  a  vowel  before  the  infinitive 
ending  -a;  as,  skria,  to  shout;  fria,  to  woo;  roa,  to 
amuse. 

96.  The  present  perfect  and  pluperfect  of  the 
verbs  hava  (ha) ,  to  have ;  vara,  to  be. 

PRESENT  PERFECT 

Sg.  jag^  jag 

du   [,       ,    ..  du 

ni    \harhaft  ^^ 

han]  han 

PI.    vi  ha  haft  vi  ha  varit 

I  han  haft  I  han  varit 

ni  ha  haft  ni  ha  varit 

de  ha  haft  de  fea  varit 


■har  varit 


36 


EXERCISE, 


PLUPERFECT 


Sg. 


PL 


jag] 

^^    Yhade  haft 

han] 

VI  hade  haft 
I  haden  haft 
ni  hade  haft 
de  hade  haft 


hade  varii 


jag^ 
du 
ni 
han 

vi  hade  varit 
I  haden  varit 
ni  hade  varit 
de  hade  varit 


Exercise  V. 


A.  Supply  the  proper  endings  of  the  verbs  as  well  as 
the  postpositive  definite  article  and  plural  ending. 

1.  I  gar  hals —  (impf.)  jag  pa^  hos  min  van  Lindgren. 
2.  Jag  knack —  (impf.)  fl.era  {several)  ganger  pa  dorr — , 
innan  han  oppn —  (impf.)  den.  3.  Han  ursakt —  (impf.) 
sig  med  att  han  hade  vil —  (supine)  pa  soff —  och  in- 
somn —  (supine).  4.  Vi  samtal —  (impf.)  ett  par  timm — 
(plur.)  om  vara  plan —  (plur.)  for  framtid — ,  och  jag 
frag —  (impf.),  om  han  amn —  foretaga  den  resa  utrikes, 
som  han  sa  lange  hade  planer —  (supine).  5.  "Ja,  am 
{in)  ett  ar",  svar — ^  han,  "jag  spar —  (pres.)  pengar 
nu,  ty  en  resa  utrikes  kost —  (pres.)  mycket.  6.  "Vart 
amnar  du  att  resa?"  frag — ^  jag.  "Till  Frankrike  och 
Tyskland",  svar — ^  han.  7.  "Jag  har  lange  onsk —  (supine) 
att  tillbringa  ett  par  ar  i  dessa  {these)  land; —  for  att  {in 
order  to)  studera  tyska  och  franska."  8.  Nar  jag  var  hos 
honom,  borja — -  det  att  regna,  sa  att  {so  that)  han  maste 
{had  to)  lana  mig  ett  paraply. 

^stress  on  pa.     ^Notice  the  inverted  order. 

B.  1.  Vad  gjorde  {did)  ni  nyligen  {recently)  ?  2.  Var 
han  hemma?  3.  Oppnade  han  genast?  4.  Varfor  drojde 
det  sa  lange  {why  did  it  take  such  a  long  time),  innan 
han  oppnade  dorren?    5.   Vad  samtalade  ni  om?     6.  ISTtir 


VOCABULARY.  37 

amnade  han  foretaga  sin  resa  utrikes?  7.  Vad  gjorde  han 
for  att  kimna  (he  able)  resa  om  ett  ar?  8.  Hur  lang  tid 
amnade  han  tillbringa  i  Fraukrike  och  Tyskland  ?  9.  Yad 
amnade  han  gora  dar? 

C.  1.  Yesterday  I  telephoned^  to  my  friend  Lindgren 
and  asked  him  if  he  intended  to  stay  at  home  all  evening 
(hela  Jcvdllen)'.  2.  He  answered  that  he  had  intended  to 
attend  (att  gd  pa)  a  concert,  but  had  changed  his  mind^. 

3.  "Why?"  I  asked\    "I  am  not  quite  well,"  he  answered\ 

4.  Yesterday  somebody  (ndgon)  knocked^  at  the  door.  5.  I 
hurried  to  the  door  and  opened  it.  6.  It  was  my  cousin 
Carl,  whom  his^  mother  had  sent  to  me  with  flowers, 
for  it  was  my  birthday.  7.  "It  must  {matte)  be  rain- 
ing (93,  a),  Carl,"  I  said\  "You  are  wet."  8.  "Yes," 
he  answered^,  "it  began  to  rain  when  I  was  halfway." 
9.  Carl  stayed  with  {hos)  me  a  couple  of  hours,  and  when 
he  went  (gick)  home,  I  lent^  him  my  umbrella.  10.  Carl  is 
a  very  good  and  industrious  boy  and  his^  father  intends 
to  send  him  to  Germany  to  (for  att)  study  German  and 
music. 

^Invert,  "hade  andrat  sig.  ^hans,  not  sin;  sin  is  used  when  the  subject  of 
the  clause  is  the  possessor:   han  skiekade  sin  son    (174). 

VOCABULARY. 

N.  B.  Weak  verbs  are  designated  by  the  number  of  the 
conjugation  to  which  they  belong,  the  infinitive  only  of  the 
verb  being  given. 

att  (conj.  and  sign  of  the  in-  fo'retaga  (sing,  foretager),  to 

finitive),  that,  to  undertake 

borja,  I,  to  begin  en  fodelsedag,  -ar,  birthday 

en  dorr,  -ar,  door  Tiem    (adv.),  home 

en  framtid,  future  haJvvags,  halfway 

fransk,  French  hos  (prep.),  at  the  house  of, 
franska,  French  (language)  with,  at 


38  SECOND  CONJUGATION. 

knacka,  I,  to  knock  skynda,  I,  to  hurry 

en  konsert',  -er,  concert  spara,  I,  to  save 

kosta,  I,  to  cost  stude'ra,  I,  to  study 

en  kusin',  -er,  cousin  telefone'ra,  I,  to  telephone 

en  kvdll,  -ar,  evening  till'bringa,  I,  (also  irr.,  169),  to 
Idna,  I,  to  lend;  to  borrow  spend,  pass 

lange  (adv.),  long  en  timme,  -ar,  hour 

(en)  musik',  music  tysk,  GermaH 

ett  par,  couple  tyska,  German  (language) 
ett  par  timmar,  a  couple  of     ut'rikes,  abroad  (also  used  as 
hours  an  indeclinable  adjective) 

ett  paraply',  umbrella  vart,  whither 

en  plan,  -er,  plan  Vila,  I,  to  rest 

plane'ra,  I,  to  plan  v&t,  wet 

regna   (rengna),  to  rain  dmna,  I,  to  Intend 
resa,  II   (sg.,  reser),  to  travel  dndra,  I,  to  change 

sam'fala,  I,  to  converse  onska,  I,  to  wish 

skicka.  I,  to  send  dppna,  I,  to  open 

Idioms. 

1.  ett  par,  a  couple  of;  ett  par  timmar,  a  couple  of  hours. 

2.  om,  ett  dr,  om  en  vecka,  in  a  year,  in  a  week;  om  mdndag, 

next  Monday. 

3.  att  md  hra,  to  be  well. 

LESSON  VI. 

The  Verb  (Continued). 

THE  SECOND  CONJUGATION. 

97.  The  verbs  belonging  to  this  conjugation  are 
of  two  classes. 

98.  Class  I.  To  this  class  belong  all  verbs  of 
this  conjugation  the  stem  of  which  ends  in  -k,  -p, 
-s,  -t,  and  the  verbs  begynna,  to  begin;  bryna,  to 
whet;  krona,  to  crown;  rona,  to  experience;  synas, 
to  seem.  • 


SECOND    CONJUGATION.  39 

99.  These  verbs  take  the  following  endings: 
-a  in  the  infinitive. 

-er  in  the  singular  of  the  present  indicative. 
-a  in  the  plural  of  the  present  indicative. 
-te  in  the  imperfect  indicative,  both  numbers. 
-ande  in  the  present  participle. 
-t  in  the  supine. 

-t  in  the  gender  and  neuter  forms  of  the  past 
participle. 

Note.     The  archaic  second  plural  will  hereafter  for  the  sake  of  convenience 
be  disregarded  in  the  lists  of  verbal  endings. 

100.  Class  II.     To  this  class  belong  all  other 
verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation. 

101.  These  verbs  take : 

-de  in  the  imperfect  indicative,  both  numbers. 
-d  in  the  gender  form  of  the  past  participle.    The 
other  endings  are  identical  with  those  of  Class  I. 

102.  Examples: 

att  resa,  to  travel ;  att  bdja,  to  bend. 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE 

Sg.  jag]  jag] 

du  {  du  [,... 

ni    f^'^^^^  ni    r^^^^^ 

han]  han] 

PI.    vi  resa  vi  bdja 

I  resen  I  bojen 

ni  resa  ni  bdja 

de  resa  ^      de  bdja 

IMPERFECT   INDICATIVE 

Sg.  jag]  jag 

du  {        .  du 


ni    \  ''^^^^  ni 

han]  han 


bojde 


40  ORDER  OF  WORDS. 

PI.    vi  reste  vi  bojde 

I  resten  I  bojden 

ni  reste  ni  bojde 

de  reste  de  bojde 

PERFECT  INDICATIVE 

jag  har  rest,  etc.  jag  har  bojt,  etc. 

PLUPERFECT  INDICATIVE 

jag  hade  rest,  etc.  jag  hade  bojt,  etc. 

103.  To  the  Second  Conjugation  belong  most 
verbs  having  a  soft  vowel  (e,  i,  y,  a,  6)  in  the 
stem  and  derived  from  other  words  by  a  change 
from  hard  to  soft  vowel:  lysa  (from  Ijus,  light), 
to  light;  fylla  (from  full,  full),  to  fill;  skylla  (from 
skuld,  guilt),  to  accuse;  krona  (from  krona,  crown), 
to  crown. 

Note.  1.  If  the  stem  of  a  verb  of  this  class  ends  in  -r  no  ending  is  added  in 
the  present  indicative,  singular;  thus,  jag  hor,  I  hear,  instead  of  jag  horer;  jag 
gor,  instead  of  jag  gorer.  Similarly  three  verbs  ending  in  -l  take  no  ending. 
These  are  tala,  endure ;  mala,  to  grind  ;  gala,  to  crow. 

2.  If  the  stem  of  a  verb  of  this  conjugation  ends  in  -nd  or  -/  preceded  by  a 
'consonant,  the  d  and  the  t  are  dropped  before  a  d  and  a  t  of  the  ending;  thus, 

tdnda,  to  send,  has  the  imperfect  sdnde,  not  siindde;  the  past  participle  sand, 
not  sandd,  and,  according  to  the  new  orthography,  the  supine  siint,  not  sdndt. 
Gifta  sig,  to  get  married,  has  the  imperfect  gifte,  not  giftte;  the  supine  gift, 
not  giftt;  and  the  past  participle  gift,  not  giftt. 

3.  Verbs  in  double  m  or  n  droo  one  of  these  consonants  before  -de,  -d.  -te, 
and  -t,  but  retain  the  short  sound  of  the  vowel:  hegynna,  to  begin,  begynte ; 
gldmma,  to  forget,  glomde,  glomt. 

104.  Order  of  Words.    Normal  and  Inverted. 

1.  Normal  order:  First  the  subject  with  its  mod- 
ifiers. Second,  the  verb.  Third,  the  object  and 
other  adjuncts  of  the  verb. 

2.  Inverted  order:  The  subject  follows  the  verb. 
The  inverted  order  is  required: 

(a)  In  direct  questions:  Ldste  han  boken  i  gar? 
Did  he  read  the  book  yesterday? 


EXERCISE.  41 

(b)  When  the  object  or  one  of  the  other  adjuncts 
of  the  verb,  adverb,  phrase  or  clause,  precedes  the 
verb:  i  gar  Idste  han  boken,  yesterday  he  read  the 
book ;  da  han  kom,  talade  han  till  mig,  when  he  came 
he  spoke  to  me. 

Observe.  Inversion  occasioned  by  preceding  modifiers  of 
the  verb  occurs  only  in  principal  clauses  and  in  dependent 
clauses  introduced  by  att. 

(c)  In  the  imperative,  if  the  pronoun  is  expressed : 
Kom  du  hit  bara,  (you)  just  come  here. 

Exercise  VI. 

A.  Supply  the  proper  endings  of  the  verbs;  the  post- 
positive definite  article  and  the  plural  endings,  or  both. 

1.  Ar  herr  Quist  hemma  i  dag?  Nej,  han  har  res —  till 
stad —  for  att  traffa  nagra  (some)  van — .  2.  Sa  trakigt 
(neuter),  jag  har  sok —  honom  tva  gang — ,  men  har  ej 
traff —  honom  annu.  3.  Ar  det  nagot  {anything)  viktigt? 
Ja,  jag  hbr —  for  en  vecka  sedan  (a  weeJc  ago),  att  han 
amn —  kopa  vagn —  och  nagra  par  hast — .  Jag  tank —  tala 
med  honom  om  det.     4.  Nu  behov —  han  ej  nagra  {any), 

ty  han  har  salt  {sold)  fabrik ,  som  han  ag — .    5.  Vart 

ha  goss gatt  {gone)  ?    De  ha  gatt  till  muse —  for  att 

se  pa  {look  at)  de  nya  (plur.)  tavl (def.  pi.),  som 

man  beromm —  sa  mycket.  6.  Tror^  {believe)  du,  att  de 
konmia  hem  till  middag — ?  Det^  tror  jag,  ty  de  bruka  ej 
forsumma  nagot  {any)  mal.  7.  Hiar  ni  varit  i  kyrk —  i 
dag?  Nej,  viidr —  var  sa  vackert,  att  jag  promener —  ut 
pa  landet.  8.  Jag  vandr —  genom  skog — ,  plock —  blomm — 
och  horde  pa  fagl — ■ —  (def.  gen.  plur.)  sang.  9.  Det  var 
en  liarlig  predikan,  tyck —  jag.  10.  Ni  borde  {ought)  ha 
varit  1  kyrkan  i  dag,  ty  pastor  Strom  holP  {preached)  en 
ypperlig  predikan. 

'Observe  the  Swedish  way  of  'askinp-  a  question    (93,  b).     'Note  position   of 
det  and  inverted  order.     'Inipf.  of  halla^  to  hold. 
Sweduh  Grammar  4 


42  VOCABULARY, 

B.  Answer  in  Swedish  and  supply  verbal  endings. 

1.  Vem  har  ni  besok —  i  dag?  2.  Varfor  var  han  ej 
hemma?  3.  Vad  onsk —  ni  tala  med  honom  om?  4.  Nar 
amna —  han  kopa  hastar  och  vagnar  ?  5.  Varfor  kop —  han 
dem  ej  nu  ?  6.  Vad  har  han  gjort  med  fabrikerna,  som  han 
agde?  7.  Aro  Karl  och  Gustav  hemma  ?  8.  Varfor  tror  ni, 
att  de  komma  hem  till  middagen?  9.  Vem  predik —  i 
kyrkan  i  dag?    10.  Var  det  mycket  folk  i  kyrkan? 

C.  1.  I  tried  to  see  you  yesterday,  but  you  were  not  at 
home.  2.  In  the  afternoon  I  telephoned  twice,  but  no  one 
(ingen)  answered.  3.  Where  were  you  the  whole  day? 
4.  In  the  forenoon  I  visited  the  museum  in  order  (A,  5) 
to  look  at  the  new  pictures,  which  have  been  praised^  so 
highly.  5.  In  the  afternoon  I  took  a  walk  (A,  7)  into  the 
country.  6.  On  the  way  out  I  met  Mr.  Quist.  He  told 
me  that  he  had  sold  his  (sina)  two  factories.  7.  I  thought 
that  he  owned  only  one.  8.  You  ought  to  have  been  (A,  10) 
in  church  to-day.  Pastor  Strom  preached  (holl)  an  ex- 
cellent sermon  and  the  church  was  crowded.  9.  I  saw  (sag) 
Mr.  Blomberg  there,  who  seldom  attends  church^.  10.  Mrs. 
Blomberg,  on  the  contrary  (ddremot),  attends  very  often. 

^Use  man  with  the  active,     ^gdr  i  kyrkan. 

VOCABULARY. 

N.  B.  The  two  subdivisions  of  the  Second  Conjugation  will 
be  designated  by  a  and  b. 

behova,  lib,   to   need  pd  for' middagen,  in  the  fore- 

beromma,  lib,  to  praise  noon 

bruka,  I,  to  use  forsumma,  I,  neglect,  miss 

en  ef'termiddag,  -ar,  afternoon  forsoka,  I  la,  to  try 

pd  ef'termiddag  en,  in  the  af-  harlig,  glorious,  magnificent 

ternoon  en  hast,  -ar,  horse 

full'packad,  crowded  hora,  lib,  to  hear 

en  for'middag,  -ar,  forenoon  ho'ra  pd,  to  listen  to 


INFLECTION  OF  NOUNS  43 

kopa,  Ila,  to  buy  en  sang,  -er,  song 

fut)  p§,  landet,  to  (into)  the  saltan,  seldom 

country  soka,  Ila,  to  seek,  look  for 

men,  but  triiffa,  I,  to  meet,  see,  speak  to 

en  middag,  -ar,  noon;  dinner  trdkig,  tedious,  sad,  unpleasant 

pd  middagen,  at  noon  sd  trdkigt,  too  bad 

mycket,  highly  tror,  believes 

ett  mdl,  meal;   goal  tvd  ganger,  twice 

mota,  Ila,  meet  tycka,  Ila,  to  think 

om'tala,  I,  tell,  relate  jag  tycker,  it  seems  to  me 

plocka,  I,  to  pick  tdnka,  Ila,  to  think 

predi'ka,  I,  to  preach  vagn,  -ar,  wagon,  carriage 

en  predi'kan,  sermon  vandra,  I,  to  wander,  stroll 

promene'ra,  I,  to  take  a  walk  viktig,  weighty,  important 

ringa  pd'  hos,  lib,  to  ring  up  en  vdg,  -ar,  road,  way 

sedan  (adv.,  prep,  and  conj.),  ypperlig,  excellent 

since  dga,  lib,  to  own 

for ..  .sedan,  ago  «nn«,  yet 

Idioms. 

1.  lor  tvd  dr  sedan,  two  years  ago;  for  lange  sedan,  long  ago. 

2.  Jag  ser  pd,  hor  pd,  I  look  at,  listen  to. 

3    att  trdffa  (rdka)  en  person,  to  see  (meet)  a  person. 
4.  hela  dagen,  the  whole  day. 


LESSON  VII. 

Inflection  of  Nouns  (Continued). 

FOURTH  DECLENSION. 

105.  The  nouns  of  this  declension  take  -n  in 
the  plural. 

106.  The  postpositive  definite  article  is  -t  or  -et 
in  the  singular,  -a  in  the  plural,  also  -en  for  neuter 
monosyllables. 

107.  This  declension  contains: 

(a)  A  few  neuter  monosyllables  ending  in  a 
vowel. 


Sg. 

ett  hjdrta 

PI. 

hjdrtor-n 

Sg. 

ett  rike 

PI. 

rike-n 

Sg. 

ett  piano 

PI. 

piano-n 

Sg. 

ett  hi 

PI. 

bi-n 

44  DECLENSION    OF    ADJECTIVES. 

(b)  Most  neuter  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable 
ending  in  an  unaccented  vowel,  generally  -e. 

108.  Examples  of  nouns  belonging  to  the  Fourth 
Leclension : 

ett  hjdrta,  a  heart;  ett  rike,  a  realm;  ett  piano, 
a  piano ;  ett  bi,  a  bee. 

INDEFINITE  DEFINITE 

hjdrta-t 

hjdrta-n-a 

rike-t 

rike-n-a 

piano-t 

piano-n-a 

bi-et 

bi-na  (also  bi-en) 

Note.  1.  The  words  oga,  eye,  and  ora,  ear,  have  the  plurals,  ogon  and  oron; 
def.  form,  ogonen  and  bronen. 

2.  Bi,  bo,  and  similar  neuter  nouns,  may  also  have  the  def.  sing,  form 
M-t,  bo-t,  etc. 

Declension  of  Adjectives. 

109.  The  adjectives  have  an  indefinite  and    a 
definite  declension. 

THE  INDEFINITE  DECLENSION. 

110.  The  Indefinite  Declension  has  the  following 
endings : 

-t  in  the  neuter  singular. 

-a  (-6,  see  112,  1)  in  the  plural  for  all  genders. 

111.  Notes  on  the  singular. 

1.  Adjectives  ending  in  -t  pi-eceded  by  a  consonant  do  not 
take  the  ending  -t  in  the  neuter;  as,  salt,  salt,  —  neuter,  salt; 
likewise  foreign  adjectives  ending  in  -t:  absolut  —  neuter, 
absolut;  konkret.  —  neuter,  konkret. 


INDEFINITE   DECLENSION.  45 

2.  Adjectives  ending  in  unaccented  -en  change  n  to  the 
neuter  t;  as,  trogen,  faithful,  —  neuter,  troget;  funnen,  found, 

—  neuter,  punnet. 

3.  Adjectives  ending  in  -d  preceded  by  a  vowel  change  d  to 
t  in  accented  syllables  before  the  neuter  t:  god,  good,  —  neuter, 
gott;  in  unaccented  syllables  d  is  dropped:  kallad,  called, — 
kallat;  bred,  broad,  —  brett. 

4.  If  the  final  d  is  preceded  by  a  consonant  it  is  eliminated: 
ond,  evil,  —  neuter,  ont;  brand,  burned,  —  neuter,  brant.  If 
the  adjective  ends  in  a  double  d,  one  is  dropped  and  the 
other  changed  to  t:  trodd,  believed,  —  neuter,  trott. 

5.  Adjectives  ending  in  an  accented  vowel  add  -tt:  fri,  free, 

—  neuter,  fritt;  bid,  blue,  —  neuter,  bldtt. 

6.  Adjectives  ending  in  a  double  n  drop  one  n  before  the 
neuter  t:  sann,  true,  —  neuter,  sant. 

7.  Adjectives  ending  in  -e  (especially  present  participles) 
do  not  change  in  the  neuter:  dlskande,  loving,  —  neuter, 
(ilskande;  ode,  desolate,  —  neuter,  ode.  Some  adjectives  are 
not  used  in  the  indef.  form  of  the  neuter;  as,  lat,  lazy; 
vunster,  left,  etc. 

112.  Notes  on  the  plural. 

1,  The  plural  generally  takes  the  ending  -a  for  all  genders, 
but  -e  is  always  used  when  the  adjective  ends  in  -ad  (past 
participles  of  the  First  Conjugation)  and  sometimes,  espe- 
cially in  solemn  style,  when  the  adjective  modifies  a  masculine 
noun. 

2.  Adjectives  ending  in  an  unaccented  -al,  -el,  -en,  -er  elimi- 
nate the  vowel  of  these  endings  when  the  plural  ending,  -a 
or  -e,  is  added:  gammal,  old,  —  gamla;  ddel,  noble,  —  ddla; 
mogen,  ripe,  —  magna. 

USE  OF  THE  INDEFINITE  DECLENSION. 

113.  The  adjective  is  declined  in  the  Indefinite 
Declension  when  used  attributively  with  a  noun 
in  the  indefinite  sense,  and  also  when  it  is  used 
predicatively:  ett  sndll-t  barn  dr  sin  moders  frojd,  a 
good  child  is  the  joy  of  its  mother;  bamet  dr  vac- 


46  INDEFINITE  DECLENSION 

ker-t,  the  child  is  pretty;  Karl  och  Robert  dro  fli- 
tig-a  gossar,  Carl  and  Robert  are  industrious  boys. 

114.  Examples  of  the  Indefinite  Declension: 

M.  F.  GENDER  FOKM    NEUTER     M.  F.  GENDER  FORM    NEUTER 

Sg.  god  gott  ddel  ddelt 

PI.  goda  ddla 

Sg.  gammal         gammalt         trogeyi  troget 

PI.  gamla  trogna 

Sg.  ond  ont  dlskad  dlskat 

PI.  onda  dlskade 

Sg.  ahsolut  absolut  trodd  trott 

PI.  absoluta  trodda 

115.  Paradigms  with  nouns. 

Sg.  en  god  gosse       en  god  flicka         ett  gott  barn 
PI.  goda  gossar       goda  flickor  goda  barn 

Sg.  en  ddel  konung  en  ddel  kvinna     ett  ddelt  namn 
PI.  ddla  konungar  ddla  kvinnor        ddla  namn 
Sg.  en  dlskad  man    en  dlskad  moder  ett  dlskat  land 
PI.  dlskade  mdn      dlskade  modrar    dlskade  Idnder 

RULES  OF  SYNTAX. 

116.  Adjectives  agree  with  the  nouns  they  quali- 
fy in  number  and  gender  but  not  in  case:  ett  S7idll-t 
barn,  a  good  child;  sndll-a  barn,  good  children;  ett 
sndllt  barn-s  mdder,  the  mother  of  a  good  child; 
sndll-a  barn-s  modrar,  the  mothers  of  good  children. 

117.  Most  descriptive  adjectives  can  be  used  in 
the  indefinite  form  of  the  neuter  singular  as  ad- 
verbs; thus,  ddel,  ddelt,  noble,  —  ddelt,  nobly;  tro- 
gen,  troget,  faithful,  —  troget,  faithfully. 


EXERCISE.  47 

Exercise  VII. 

A.  Supply  the  proper  endings:  1.  I  gar  var  det  mycket 
kail —  men  klar —  och  vacker — .  2.  En  haftig — ^  nordan 
bias — ,  och  termometer —  vis —  atskillig —  grad —  under 
fryspunkt — .  3.  Hela  dag —  arbet — ^  jag  trog —  (adv.), 
men  pa  kvallen  ak — ^  jag  skridskor.  4".  Det  gick  (went) 
ypperlig —  (adv.),  ty  is —  var  blank —  och  hard — .  5.  Skrid- 
skoban —  var  illuminerad,  en  stor —  musikkar  spel —  .  . . 
(proper  form  of  munier)  styck — ,  och  glad —  mannisk — '■ 
ak —  hastig —  (adv.)  fram  och  tillbaka.  6.  Pa  is —  traff — ^ 
jag  en  ganimal —  van,  som  res —  {went)  till  Amerika  for 
tva  ar  sedan,  men  nu  har  kommit  {come)  tillbaka,  7.  Av 
alia  . .  .  (noble)  mannisk — ,  som  jag  kann — ,  ar-  han  den 
baste.  8.  Han  hade  mycket  att  saga  om  forhallande —  i 
Amerika,  som  i  manga  hanseende —  behag —  honom.  9.  I 
min  vans  tradgard  vaxa-  god —  apple — .  I  gar  var^  jag 
dar  och  plock —  nagra.  10.  Apple —  (def.  pi.)  aro  . . . 
(red)  och  ...  (yellow)  och  mycket  ...  (sweet).  11.  Un- 
der traden  (the  trees)  aro  sate —  och  i  gren (def.  pi.) 

bygga  fagl (def.  pi.)  sina  bo — . 

^In  order  to  test  the  student's  knowledge  dashes  are  put  even  where  no 
endings  are  to  be  supplied.     ^Xote  inverted  order. 

B.  Answer  in  Swedish:  1.  Hurudant  var  vadret  i  gar? 
2.  Var  det  lugnt  (calm)  ?  3.  Huru  manga  (many)  grader 
visade  termometern  under  fryspunkten?  4.  Vad  gjorde 
(did  . . .  do)  ni  under  (during)  dagen?  5.  Vad  gjorde  ni 
pa  kvallen?  6.  Beskriv  (describe)  skridskobanan ?  7.  Vem 
traffade  ni  dar?  8.  Var  hade  han  varit?  9.  Vad  talade 
han  om?  10.  Vem  tillhor  tradgarden,  dar  ni  var  i  gar? 
11.  Var  aro  satena? 

C.  1.  The  weather  is  cold  to-day,  but  cljar  and  beautiful. 
2.  I  believe  that  the  thermometer  indicates  several  degrees 


48  VOCABULARY 

below  the  freezing  point.  3.  I  am  tired  because  I  have 
worked  faithfully  all  day.  4.  If  the  ice  is  good  I  wish 
(invert)  to  skate  a  couple  (of)  hours.  5.  The  ice  is  ex- 
cellent, very  hard  and  rmooth,  and  to-night  a.  big  baud  will 
play^  in  the  rink.  6.  Do  you  know^if  the  rink  is  illumi- 
nated to-night?  Surely  (ja  visst).  7.  It  is  a  great  pleasure 
to  skate  rapidly  back  and  forth.  8.  The  band  plays  merry 
pieces.  9.  I  like  merry  music  and  happy  people.  10.  There 
I  see  a  couple  (of)  old  friends.  I  wish  to  speak  to  (vid) 
them.  11.  They  have  been  in  America  and  know  the  con- 
ditions there. 

'Use  present  tense  and   invert    (104,   2)  ;    in,   pa.     'know,   vet. 

VOCABULARY. 

N.  B.     Two  forms  are  given  of  the  adjective:    the  gender 
and  the  neuter  form;  the  latter  is  also  the  adverb. 

hehaga,  I,  to  please  klar,  -t,  clear 

blank,  -t,  smooth,  shiny  munter,  -t,  merry 

bldsa,  Ila,  to  blow  en  musik'kdr,  -er,  band 

ett  bo,  -n,  nest  mdnga,  many 

bygga,  lib,  to  build  mdnniska  (fern.)  -or,  man, 
Tryspunkt,  -er,  freezing  point  human  being 

eti  forhdllande,  -n,  condition,  ett  noje,  -n,  amusement,  pleas- 
relation  ure,  enjoyment 

gammal,  -t,  old  plocka,  I,  to  pick 

glad  glatt,  glad,  happy  rod,  rott,  red 

en  grad,  -er,  degree  en  skridsko,^  -r,  skate 

en  gren,  -ar,  branch  en  skridskobana,  -or,  skating 
gul,  -t,  yellow  rink 

hastig,  -t,  rapid  spela,  I,  to  play  (music) 

Jidrd,  hart,  hard  ett  stycke,  -n,  piece 

Mftig,  -t,  violent,  vehement  ett  sate,  -n,  seat 

ett  hanseende,  respect  sot,  sott,  sweet 
illumine'rad,  -rat,  illuminated  en    termome'ter,    -rar.    ther- 
en  is,  -ar,  ice  mometer 

kail,  -t,  cold  trogen,  troget,  faithful 


FIFTH   DECLENSION,  49 

ett  viider,  weather  ddel,  -t,  noble 

visa,  I,  show,  indicate  ett  tipple,  -n,  apple 

aka,  Ila,  ride,  travel 

Idioms:   1.  dka  skridsko,  to  skate. 

2.  fram  och  tillbaka,  back  and  forth. 

'Generally   pronounced  skrisko. 


LESSON  VIII. 
Inflection  of  Nouns  (OontinnedJ. 

FIFTH  DECLENSION. 

118.  The  nouns  belonging  to  this  declension  take 
no  ending  in  the  plural  (cf.  deer,  sheep,  swine,  in 
English). 

119.  The  postpositive  article  is  -n,  or  -en  for 
gender  nouns  and  -et  for  neuter  nouns  in  the  sin- 
gular and  -na  (sometimes  -ne  for  masculines  in 
-are)  for  gender  nouns  and  -en  for  neuter  nouns 
in  the  plural. 

120.  The  Fifth  Declension  includes: 

(a)  All  gender  nouns  ending  in  -ande  and  -a7'e. 

Note.     Kammare,  hammarej  and  kallare  have  also  the  plurals  kamr-ar,  liamr- 
ar,  and  kiillr-ar.. 

(b)  Names  of  peoples  and  nouns  of  foreign  origin 
ending  in  -er. 

(c)  Most  neuter  nouns  ending  in  a  consonant, 
except  those  ending  in  -eum  and  -ium  which  belong 
to  the  Third  Declension. 

(d)  The  nouns  fader,  father;  broder,  brother; 
man,  man ;  gas,  goose ;  lus,  louse ;  mus,  mouse,  which 
modify  the  vowel  in  the  plural;  pi.  fader,  broder, 


50  DEFINITE    DECLENSION. 

man,  gdss,  loss,  moss;  and  a  few  common  words  of 
measure ;  as,'  fat,  foot ;  turn,  inch ;  mil,  mile. 

Note.     Fot  has  the  plural  fatter  only  when  signifying  a  part  of  the  body. 
Man,  gdss,  liiss,  moss  have  the  definite  forms  mdnnen,  gdssen,  lossen,  mossen. 

121.  Examples  of  nouns  of  the  Fifth  Declen- 
sion: en  bagare,  a  baker;  en  ordforande,  a  chair- 
man; en  mu'siker,  a  musician;  ett  namn,  a  name; 
ett  modus,  a  mode. 


INDEFINITE 

DEFINITE 

Sg. 

en  bagare 

bagare-n 

PI. 

bagare 

bagarna  (ney 

Sg. 

en  ordforande 

ordforande-n 

PI. 

ordforande 

ordfdrande-7ia 

Sg. 

en  musiker 

musiker-n 

PI. 

musiker 

musiker-na 

Sg. 

ett  namn 

namn-et 

PI. 

namn 

namn-en 

Sg. 

ett  modus 

modus- 

PI. 

modus 

modus 

K)bserve  the  elimination  of  the  e  of  the  ending  -are.  Such  forms  as  doma- 
rena  or  domrarna  from  domare,  judge,  to  distinguish  its  plural  from  the  plural 
domarna  of  dom,  sentence,  are  growing  obsolete.  The  def.  article  is  generally 
-na  even  for  words  like   bagare,  cf.   73,  note  5. 

-Words  in  -us  cannot  take  the  postpositive  article.  The  indef.  form  is  used 
for  the  def.     (73,  note  4,  c). 

Declension  of  Adjectives  (Continued). 
THE  DEFINITE  DECLENSION. 

122.  In  the  Definite  Declension  the  adjective 
has  practically  only  one  ending,  -a,  which  is  added 
to  the  original  form  (the  indefinite  singular  of  the 
gender  form)  ;  sometimes,  however,  we  find  -e. 

123.  The  ending  -e  takes  the  place  of  -a  in  the 
following  instances: 


DEFINITE    DKCLENSION.  51 

(a)  Often  in  the  singular;  occasionally  in  the 
plural  when  the  adjective  modifies  a  noun  denoting 
a  person  of  the  male  sex:  de7i  god-a  (also  god-e)  gos- 
sen;  den  stor-e  (never  stor-a)  Gustav  Adolf,  the 
latter  expression  is  emphatic  and  formal ;  den  stor-e 
mannen  means  the  great  man,  Stora  w^ould  here 
because  of  its  greater  commonplaceness  convey  the 
sense  of  physical  largeness. 

(b)  When  the  adjective  is  used  as  a  noun  to 
denote  human  beings  of  the  male  sex;  the  adjective 
then  has  a  genitive  in  -s:  den  gamle,  the  old  man; 
but  den  gamla,  the  old  woman;  de  rike,  the  rich; 
den  gamles  hus,  the  house  of  the  old  man. 

(c)  Always  when  the  adjective  ends  in  -ad;  as, 
den  dlskade  drottningen,  the  beloved  queen. 

Note.     Adjectives  ending  in  -a,  -e  (se),  -onij  -s  (es)  and  -tals  are  indeclinable. 

USE  OP  DEFINITE  DECLENSION. 

124.  The  adjective  is  declined  in  the  Definite 
Declension  when  used: 

(1)  Before  a  noun  with  the  postpositive  article; 
as,  den  rike  mannen,  the  rich  man;  svenska  spra- 
ket,  the  Swedish  language   (69). 

(2)  After  a  noun  in  the  genitive;  as,  min  far- 
broi'S  vackra  hus,  the  fine  house  of  my  uncle;  ko- 
nungens  ddla  wpptrddande,  the  noble  conduct  of 
the  king. 

(3)  After  the  possessive  and  demonstrative  adjec- 
tives and  pronouns ;  as,  Tnina  nya  handskar,  my  new 
gloves;  denne  trogne  tjdnare,  this  faithful  servant. 

(4)  In  expressions  of  address  and  in  apposition 
with  a  personal  pronoun;  as,  Kdre  van!  Dear 
friend.    Jag  olyckliga  mdnniskal    I  unhappy  man. 


52  EXERCISE. 

125.     Examples  of  the  Definite  Declension:  ddel, 
noble;  trogen,  faithful;  dlskad,  loved. 


MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUTER 

PI. 

ddl-a(e) 
ddl-a(e) 

ddUa 
ddl-a 

ddl-a 
ddl-a 

Sg. 

PI. 

trogn-a(e) 
trogn-a(e) 

trogn-a 
trogn-a 

trogn-a 
trogn-a 

Sg. 

PI. 

dlskad-e 
dlskad-e 

dlskad-e 
dlskad-e 

dlskad-e 
dlskad-e 

Note.  Adjectives  ending  in  unaccented  -al,  -el,  -en,  -er  drop  the  vowel  of 
their  last  syllable  before  -o  or  -e  of  the  def.  form. 

THE  USE  OF  THE  PREPOSITIVE  DEFINITE  ARTICLE. 

126.  The  prepositive  definite  article  deii,  det, 
pi.  de  (70)  is  employed  when  the  noun  is  qualified 
by  an  adjective  or  numeral;  in  such  a  case  the  post- 
positive definite  article  must  also  be  used;  thus, 
den  vackr-a  flickan,  the  beautiful  girl;  det  sndll-a 
barn-et,  the  good  child;  de  tio  flitigast-e  gossarna, 
the  ten  most  industrious  boys. 

Note  1.  The  prepositive  article  is  generally  employed  when  the  adjective  is 
used  as  a  noun ;  thus,  den  gamle,  the  old  man ;  den  Ulla,  the  little  g^irl ;  det 
tkona,  the  beautiful. 

2.  It  is  omitted  in  a  number  of  set  phrases,  especially  such  as  serve  as 
names ;  often  before  superlatives  and  adjectives  of  place ;  before  hel,  whole, 
halv,  half,  ijiilv,  self ;  thus,  svemha  spraket,  the  Swedish  language ;  forsta 
dagen,  the  first  day ;  vdnstra  iidan,  the  left  side ;  hcla  natten,  the  whole  nig-ht. 

Exercise  VIII. 

A.  Supply  the  proper  form  of  the  Swedish  equivalents 
of  the  adjectives  given  within  parenthesis  in  the  following : 
den  —  (noble)  mannen;  min  faders  —  (beautiful)  hus; 
de  —  (faithful)  lararna;  de  —  (ripe)  applena;  de  — 
(small)  gossarna;  ett  —  (free)  land;  ett  —  (wet)  fait; 
det  —  (wet)  faltet;  det  —  (respected)  namnet;  den  — 
(little)   flickan;  ett  —   (red)   hus;  ett  —   (sweet)   harn; 


EXERCISE.  53 

—  (sweet)  barn  (pi.);  ett  —  (salt)  bad;  de  —  (noble) 
mannen;  —  (respected)  lakare;  den  —  (old  [one], 
m,  and  f.)  ;  de  —  (ripe  [ones]);  ett  —  (small)  barn; 
de  —  (new)  lararna;  den  —  (new  one) ;  den  —  (free  one, 
m.  and  f.). 

B.  1.  I  gar  vaknade  jag  med  en  haftig  huvudvark. 
2.  Jag  kladde  mig  och  promenerade  i  den  vackra  parken 
en  timme  fore  frukosten.  3.  Da  jag  kom  (came)  tillbaka, 
voro  min  far  och  mor  otaliga,  ty  de  hade  vantat  lange. 
4.  Jag  madde  inte  (did  not  feel)  alls  bra  och  kunde  (could) 
ej  ata  nagot  av  den  goda  maten.  5.  Jag  forsokte  (att) 
dricka  en  kopp  av  det  starka  kaffet,  men  kunde  inte.  6.  Pa 
efterniiddagen  gick  jag  till  den  skicklige  lakaren  dr  Buren. 
7.  Denne  (he,  lit.,  this  one)  ar  en  gammal  van  tilP  min 
far.  8.  Hans  mottagningsrum  ar  i  det  nya  huset  pa  hornet 
af  Kungsgatan  och  Vasagatan.  9.  Jag  maste  (had  to)  van- 
ta  en  hel  timma,  innan  jag  traffade  honom,  ty  det  var 
manga  patienter  fore  mig.  10.  "Vad  fattas  er?"  fragade 
den  gamle  vanlige  lakaren.  11.  "Jag  har  ofta  en  mycket 
haftig  hufvudvark",  svarade  jag.  12.  "Ar  aptiten  god  eller 
dalig?"  13.  "Pa  morgonen  ar  den  mycket  dalig."  14. 
"Hur  sover  ni?"  "Daligt."  15.  "Far  (may)  jag  se  pa  er 
tunga?''  16.  "Har  har  ni  ett  recept,  det  ar  for  aptiten." 
XT'.  Dessutom  ordinerade  han  rorelse  i  friska  luften 
(126,  2). 

'^Till  is  sometimes  used  to  express  genitive  relation ;   translate  of. 

C.  Answer  in  Swedish :  1.  Var  ni  bra,  niir  ni  vaknade 
i  gar  ?  2.  Vad  fattades  er  ?  3.  Vad  gjorde  ni  fore  frukos- 
ten ?  4.  Varfor  voro  er  far  och  mor  otaliga  ?  5.  Hur  lange 
hade  ni  promenerat?  6.  Huru  manga  koppar  kaffe  drack 
(impf.)  ni?  7.  Kanner  er  far  dr  Buren?  8.  Var  har  han 
sitt  mottagningsrum?     9.  Hur  lange  och  varfor  maste  ni 


54  VOCABULABY 

vanta?     10.  Vad  fragade  den  gamle  vanlige  lakaren  er? 
11.    Vad  ordinerade  (pi'escribed)  han? 

D.  1.  My  old  father  woke  up  to-day  with  a  very  violent 
headache.  2.  He  came  down  for  (till)  breakfast  (def.)  but 
could  not  eat  anything  (nagot).  3.  At  (vid)  noon  (def.) 
his  appetite  was  very  poor  and  we  had  to^  telephone  for- 
the  famous  old  physician,  Dr.  Buren.  4.  Our  dear  father 
and  he  are  old  friends.  5.  He  came  soon  in  the  big  red 
automobile,  which  he  bought  last  year  (i  fjol).  6.  When 
he  came  in,  he  asked  (104,  2)  my  father,  "What  ails  you, 
old  friend?"  7.  When  he  had  examined  him  he  wrote 
.{shrev)  two  prescriptions,  one  for  the  violent  headache, 
the  other  (andra)  for  the  poor  appetite.  8.  Besides  he 
prescribed  exercise  and  fresh  air. 

^Have  to  when  it  denotes  compulsion  is  expressed  by  maste,  which  is  the  same 
in  the  present  and  imperfect. 

''For  with  the  verbs  like  axk^  send,  write,  call,  telephone,  is  rendered  efter. 

VOCABULARY. 
alls,  at  all  eft  horn,  corner 

en  aptit  (no  pi.)  appetite  inte,  not 

en  automobiV,  -er,  automobile    innan    (conj.),   before 
ett  had,  bath  klada,  lib,  to  dress 

ett  barn,  child  en  kopp,  -ar,  cup 

hra,  well  Kungsgatan,  King's  street 

dessutom,  besides,  in  addition  liten,  -et  (def.  lilla,  pi.  smA), 
dricka  (strong  verb),  to  drink  little,  small 

ddlig,  -t,  bad,  poor  (en)  luft  (no  pi.)   air 

fattas  (deponent  verb),  I,  to    en  Idkare,  physician 

lack;    to   ail  (en)  mat  (no  pi.),  food 

fri,  fritt,  free  mogen,  -et,  ripe  (18,  1) 

frisk,  -t,  fresh ;  well,  healthy    ett  mottagningsrum,  reception 
en  frukost  (pron.  fruckost),  room,  doctor's  office 

-ar,  breakfast  ny,  nytt,  new 

fcire  (prep,  and  adv.),  before    ndgot,  anything 
en  huvudvark  (no  pi.)  head-    or  dine' ra,  I,  to  prescribe 

ache  otdlig,  -t,  impatient 


IRREGULAR   DECLENSION.  55 

en  patient',  -er,  patient  stark,  -t,  strong 

ett  recept',  prescription  telefone'ra,  I,  to  telephone 

ansedd,  ansett,  respected  en  tunga,  -or,  tongue 

en  rorelse,  -r,  movement;  ex-    vakna,  I,  to  wake  up 

ercise  Vasagatan,  Vasa  street 

salt,  salt  vdt,  vdtt,  wet 

skicklig,  -t,  skillful  vdnlig,  -t,  friendly,  kind 
sova  (strong  verb),  to  sleep      vdnta,  I,  to  wait 

Idioms:   1.  en  kopp  kaffe,  a  cup  of  coffee. 
2.  inte  alls,  not  at  all. 


LESSON  IX. 
Inflection  of  Nouns  (Continued). 

127.    Irregularities  in  declension. 

(a)  For  the  syncopation  of  the  vowel  of  an  un- 
accented ending  before  the  plural  ending,  see  81, 
notes  1  and  2 ;  and  85,  note  4. 

(b)  For  the  elimination  of  the  endings  -us  and 
-um  after  e  and  i  before  the  plural  ending,  see  86, 
note. 

(c)  A  few  nouns  of  the  Second,  Third,  and  Fifth 
Declensions  modify  the  root  vowel  in  the  plural ;  as, 

bonde,  peasant;  pi.  bonder 
broder,  brother ;  pi.  broder 
dotter,  daughter;  pi.  dottrar 
fader,  father;  pi.  fader 
man,  man ;  pi,  man 
moder,  mother;  pi.  modrar 

son,  son;  pi.  soner  (grave  accent),  and  some 
others  (see  85,  notes  1  and  2). 

(d)  A  few  nouns  of  the  Third  Declension  double 
the  last  consonant.  Often  there  is  also  a  vowel 
modification;  as, 


56  THE  CASES. 

bok,  book;  pi.  bocker 
fot,  foot;  pi.  f otter 
get,  goat;  pi.  getter 
not,  nut;  pi.  notter 

(e)  So  also, 

gas,  goose;  pi.  gdss. 
lus,  louse;  pi.  loss, 
mus,  mouse ;  pi.  moss. 

(f)  Some  nouns  of  the  Third  Declension  take 
only  -r  in  the  plural;  such  are,  nouns  ending  in 
unaccented  -e,  a  few  monosyllabic  gender  nouns  end- 
ing in  0,  a,  6,  and  some  others;  as, 

fi'ende,  enemy;  pi.  fiende-r 
hustru,  wife;  pi.  hustru-r 
klo,  claw;  pi.  klo-r 
ko,  cow;  pi.  ko-r 
sko,  shoe;  pi.  sko-r 
td,  toe;  pi.  td-r 

(g)  Many  loan  words  retain  their  foreign  plural : 
faktum,  fact;  pi.  fakta;  examen,  examination;  pi. 
examina, 

DECLENSION  OF  PROPER  NAMES. 

128.  Names  of  persons,  countries,  cities,  rivers, 
mountains,  and  places  take  an  -s  in  the  genitive ;  ex., 
jag  laser  Tegners  dikter,  I  am  reading  the  poetry 
of  Tegner;  Sveriges  floder  dro  vackra,  the  rivers  of 
Sweden  are  beautiful.     (Exceptions  130,  a.) 

Note.     If  a  title  precedes  the  name,  the  latter  only  takes  the  -s  as  in  Eng- 
lish: herr  Liners  dotter  ar  Mr,  Mr.  Liner's  daughter  is  here. 

THE  CASES. 

129.  The  nominative  and  the  genitive  are  the 
only  cases  that  need  to  be  taken  into  account  in 
the  declension  of  nouns,  the  objective  being  identical 
with  the  nominative. 


THE  GENITIVE.  57 

130.  The  genitive  is  formed,  as  has  been  stated 
before,  by  the  addition  of  an  -s  to  the  nominative, 
indefinite  and  definite,  singular  and  plural. 

IMPORTANT  OBSERVATIONS. 

(a)  Proper  nouns  ending  in  an  «-sound  (s,  x,  z)  in  the 
nominative  have  their  possessive  of  the  same  form,  adding 
only  an  apostrophe;  as,  Johannes'  evangelium,  the  Gospel  of 
St.  John. 

(h)  In  the  case  of  a  common  noun  ending  in  an  s-sound, 
-st,  or  -xt  in  the  nominative,  the  genitive  relation  is  gener- 
ally expressed  by  the  prepositions  pd  and  till  (rarely  av) ; 
thus,  faket  pd  ett  hus,  the  roof  of  a  house;  vdggarna  till 
ett  hus,  the  walls  of  a  house;  sometimes  by  putting  the 
noun  in  the  definite  form  and  suffixing  an  s;  as,  'blixtens 
hastighet,  the  rapidity  of  a  flash  of  lightning,  instead  of  en 
blixts  hastighet. 

(c)  In  certain  expressions  names  of  localities  ending  in  a 
vowel  use  a  nominative  in  apposition  where  other  words 
would  require  a  genitive;  as,  Uppsala  universitet,  the  univer- 
sity of  Upsala. 

(d)  A  Latin  genitive  in  -i  occurs  with  nouns  in  -us;  as, 
Kristi  liv.  the  life  of  Christ.  Note  also  the  genitive  of  Jesus, 
Jesu. 

(e)  When  several  words  are  used  to  designate  the  same 
person  or  object,  the  last  word  in  the  group  generally  takes 
the  -s:  Karl  den  stores  rike,  the  realm  of  Charles  the  Great; 
konungen  av  Sveriges  (also  konungens  av  Sverige)  hov,  the 
court  of  the  king  of  Sweden. 

SYNTAX  OF  THE  CASES. 

131.  The  nominative  and  the  objective  need  no 
illustration  since  their  functions  are  the  same  as 
in  English. 

THE  GENITIVE. 

132.  In  regard  to  the  genitive  it  is  of  prime 
importance  to  notice  that  the  form  in  -s  is  employed 
much  more  freely  in  Swedish  than  in  English.    The 

Swedish  Grammar  6 


58  THE  GENITIVE. 

genitive  relation  is  rarely  expressed  by  the  prepo- 
sition av,  of;  thus  impersonal  nouns,  which  in  Eng- 
lish invariably  would  be  construed  with  of  to  express 
the  genitive  relation,  in  Swedish  take  -s;  as,  bordets 
ben,  the  legs  of  the  table;  vid  mdnadens  slut,  at 
the  end  of  the  month. 

133.  The  following  uses  of  the  genitive  should 
be  noted: 

(a)  The  word  modified  by  the  genitive  is  omit- 
ted in  expressions  like:  min  klocka  dr  vackrare  an 
min  brors,  my  watch  is  prettier  than  my  brother's; 
detta  dr  min  systers  hatt,  min  mors  ligger  ddr  borta, 
this  is  my  sister's  hat,  my  mother's  lies  over  there. 

(b)  Somewhat  analogous  is  the  use  of  the  geni- 
tive designating  the  house,  family,  or  business  of 
somebody:  jag  bor  hos  Lindholms,  I  live  at  Lind- 
holm's;  Blombergs  dro  sjuka,  the  Blombergs  are 
sick. 

(c)  In  a  few  expressions  a  genitive  is  used  after 
the  prepositions  i  and  till:  gd  till  sdngs,  to  go  to  bed; 
till  lands,  by  land ;  till  sjdss,  by  water,  to  or  at  sea ; 
gd  till  bords,  to  sit  down  at  table;  i  sondags,  last 
Sunday ;  i  hostas,  last  fall ;  i  vdras,  last  spring. 

A  temporal  expression  with  i  governing  the  geni- 
tive denotes  a  past  period. 

Note.  This  use  of  i  and  till  is  limited  to  a  few  phrases,  which,  however,  are 
of   verj-   common   occurrence. 

134.  After  quantitative  nouns  of  measure  and 
weight,  and  nouns  of  value,  the  nominative  Is  used : 
en  kopp  kaffe,  a  cup  of  coffee;  tio  meter  tyg,  ten 
meters  of  cloth;  ett  kilo  smor,  a  kilogram  of  but- 
ter; for  tio  kronor  socker,  ten'  crowns'  worth  of 
sugar. 


EXERCISE.  5n 

135.  The  objective  genitive  is  often  expressed 
by  till,  sometimes  by  av;  thus,  kdrleken  till  foster- 
landet,  love  of  country;  dsynen  av  land,  the  sight 
of  land.  The  possessive  genitive  is  often  expressed 
by  till  (or  pa)  when  the  possessor  is  an  inanimate 
object:  locket  till  ladan,  the  cover  of  the  box;  kryc- 
kan  pa  kdppen,  the  crutch  of  the  cane  (never  hatten 
till  den  unge  mannen,  but  den  unge  mannens  hatX, 
the  young  man's  hat). 

Exercise  IX. 

A.  Translate  the  following  sentences  and  expressions. 
1.  Where  is  the  leg  of  the  table  (in  two  ways)  ?    2.  The 

roof  of  the  house  (in  two  ways)  is  poor.  3.  The  history  of 
Charles  XII.  4.  Mr.  Lindgren's  daughters.  5.  The  books 
of  Strindberg,  the  author  (place  author  first).  6.  The 
university  of  Upsala  is  very  old.  7.  He  is  at  sea.  8.  Plato 
was  a  pupil  of  Socrates^.  9.  I  bought  the  shoes  at  Lind- 
holm's.  10.  My  house  and  my  father's.  11.  The  literature 
of  Sweden.  12.  The  speech  of  the  emperor  of  Germany. 
13.  The  banks  of  the  Mississippi  are  beautiful.  14.  He 
came  {hom)  last  Monday.  15.  A  cup  of  good  coffee. 
16.  The  streets  of  Berlin.  17.  The  theaters  of  Paris. 
18.  The  city  (of)  Berlin^. 

'Translate:   one  of  Socrates'   pvpils.     *Put  Berlin  in  apposition  with  city. 

B.  Supply  endings  where  indicated:  1.  Kanner  ni  till 
den  svensk —  litteratur —  val  ?    2.  Tyvarr  icke.    Av  de  klas- 

sisk —  forfatt (pi.  def,  gen.)   arbet —  har^  jag  last 

Tegners  Fritiofs  saga  och  Eunebergs  episk —  dikt —  (pi. 
indef.),  och  av  Sveriges  modern —  forfattare  kanner  jag 
till  August  Strindberg  och  Selma  Lagerlof.  3.  Hur  tyck — 
ni  om  Strindberg,  ar  ban  ej  mycket  pessimistisk  ?  4.  Jo^, 
jag  tyck —  mycket   battre   om   Selma   Lagerlofs   bocker. 


60  EXERCISE. 

5.  Var  ni  ej  pa  teater —  i  gar  kvall  ?  6.  Nej,  nieu  jag  liado 
iimn —  att  ga,  ty  jag  hade  hor — ,  att  man  skulle  (would) 
spela  en'  av  Strindbergs  dramer,  men  sa  borj —  det  att 
snoa,  och  vi  stann —  hemma.  7.  Det  var  skada,  ty  fore- 
stallning —  var  utmarkt;  Blombergs  och  vi  voro  dar.     8. 

Roll (pi.  def.  gen.)  utforande  var  mycket  gott  (also, 

utforandet  av  rollerna).  9.  Herr  Palme,  som  i  mandags 
spelade  Fausts  roll  i  Gothes  dram,  spelade  nu  Gustav 
Adolf s.  10.  Har  ni  last  i  tidning —  om  kejsarens  av  Tysk- 
land  tal?  11.  Kan  ni  saga  mig  vad  Sokrates'  beromd — ^ 
larjunge  hette? 

'Note  the  inverted  order.  -Jo  is  used  in  answering  a  question  containing-  a 
negative.  The  def.  form  of  the  adjective  is  used  after  a  possessive  modifier 
(124,  note  2). 

C.  Conversation.  1.  Vilka  av  de  klassiska  forfattarna 
har  ni  last?  2.  Vilka  moderna  forfattare  kanner  ni  till? 
3.  Varfor  tycker  ni  battre  om  Selma  Lagerlof  an  om 
Strindberg?  4.  Hade  ni  ej  amnat  att  ga  pa  teatern  i  gar? 
5.  Vad  spelade  man  i  gar  kvall?  6.  Hurudan  var  fore- 
stallningen?    7.  Vem  utforde  Gustav  Adolfs  roll? 

D.  1.  Where  are  you  going^  to-night,  Charles?  i  am 
going  to  Sandell's.  2.  What  do  you  wish,  sir  (7ni7i  herre)  ? 
I  wish  to  buy  the  works  of  Topelius  (130,  d).  3.  Does  the 
green  house  belong  to  Mr.  Williams'  mother?  No,  it  is 
his  brother's,  I  believe.  4.  Where  do  you  pass  your  win- 
ters? Sometimes  in  Italy  and  sometimes  in  one  of  the 
towns  of  southern  (def.)  France  (128).  5.  I  like  the 
climate  of  Italy  better  than  that  of  southern  France  (than 
southern  France's).  6.  Where  is  to-day's  paper  (the  day's 
paper^)  ?  I  wish  to  read  the  latest  (senaste)  speech  of 
the  king  of  England.  7.  Are  you  acquainted  with  Francis' 
(130,  a)  parents?  Yes,  I  met  them  at  Blomberg's  last 
Monday.    8.  Have  you  read  Selma  Lagerlof 's  famous  (def.) 


VOCABULARY. 


61 


book,  "Jerusalem"  ?  1).  Unfortunately  not,  but  I  have  heard 
that  it  contains  an  excellent  portrayal  of  the  peasants  of 
Sweden.  10.  Where  have  you  bought  the  chickens  and  the 
geese?  I  have  bought  them  at  Lind's.  Aren't  they  fine? 
11.  What  do  you  wish,  sir?  I  wish  a  cup  of  strong  coffee, 
and  (samt^)  bread  and  butter.  12,  I  believe  you  are 
sleepy,  Mr.  Brown.  Yes,  I  am  very  tired.  I  went  to  bed 
so  late  last  night. 

^Translate:  Where  do  you  intend  to  go  to-night f  ^AIso  tidningen  fiir  i  dag. 
^Samt  is  intercliangeable  with  och  to  avoid  repetition,  thougli  rarely  used  in  con- 
versation ;   med,  with,  could  be  used  here. 


VOCABULARY. 


ett  arbete,  -n,  work 

ett  brOd,  bread 

en  dikt,  -er,  poem 

en  dram,  -er,  ett  drama  (no 

plur.),   drama 
episk,  -t,  epic 

Frankrike  (neuter),  France 
Frans,  Francis 


en  lurjunge,  -ar,  pupil 
Idsa,  Ila,  to  read 
modern',  -t,  modern 
en  mdndag,  -ar,  Monday 
pessimis'tisk,  -t,  pessimistic 
en  roll,  -er,  part  (acting) 
sen,  -t,  late 
skada,  -or,  damage 


en  fo'restallning,  -ar,  perform-  ^^  skildring,  -ar,  description, 


ance 
en  farfat'tare,  author 
foriildrar  (plural  only), 

parents 
griJn,  -t,  green 
en  gds,  giiss,  goose 
heta,  Ila,  to  be  called 


portrayal 
fett)  smor,  butter 
snija,  I,  to  snow 
stanna,  I,  to  stay,  stop 
Sverige  (neuter),  Sweden 
sodra  (def.  only),  southern 
somnig,  -t,  sleepy 


in'nehdlla  (st.  v.,  see  hdlla),    e»  sang,  -ar,  bed 


to  contain 
lialien  (neuter),  Italy 
jo,  yes  (used  In  answer  to  a 

negative  question) 
klassisk,  -t,  classic 
ett  klimaf,  climate 


ett  tal,  speech;   number 

ett  tak,  roof 

en  teater,  -rar,  theater 

en  tidning,  -ar,  newspaper 

trott,  tired 

tyvdrr',  unfortunately 


kanna  till',  lib,  to  know  about    e«  utforande,  -n,  execution, 
en  kyckling,  -ar,  young  chicken        performance 


63  THIRD   CONJUGATION. 

Idioms. 

1.  att  gd  pa  ieatern,  pd  en  konsert,  to  attend  the  theater,  a 

concert. 

2.  det  dr  skada,  it  is  a  pity. 

LESSON  X. 
The  Verb  (Continued). 
THIRD  CONJUGATION. 

136.  To  the  Third  Conjugation,  which  may  be 
considered  a  slightly  modified  form  of  the  Second, 
belong  all  weak  verbs  which  end  in  any  other  vowel 
than  -a  in  the  infinitive.  This  conjugation  contains 
comparatively  few  verbs. 

137.  The  Third  Conjugation  has  the  following 
endings : 

stem  vowel  in  the  infinitive :  e,  o,  y,  a — not  a. 
-r  in  the  singular  of  the  present  indicative, 
stem  vowel  in  the  plural  of  the  present  indicative. 
-n  in  the  archaic  second  plural. 
-dde  in  the  imperfect  indicative,  both  numbers. 
-ende  in  the  present  participle  (111,  note  7). 
'tt  in  the  supine. 

-dd  in  the  gender  form  of  the  past  participle. 
-tt   in   the   neuter   form   of  the   past   participle 
(111,  4). 

138.  Examples  of  verbs  of  the  Third  Conjuga- 
tion :  att  tro,  to  believe ;  att  sy,  to  sew. 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE 

Sg.  jag]  Sg.  jag 

du     .  du 

han  han 


syr 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


63 


PI.    vi' 

1                                     wl 

ni  Hro                               ni  [sy 
de\                                    de] 
I      iron                            I      syn 

IMPERFECT  INDICATIVE. 

3g.  jag' 
du 
ni 
han 

jag 

trodde                       ^    sydde 
han 

PI.    vi 
ni 
de 

vi 
4rodde                         ni  \sydde 

de  J 
trodden                     I      sydden 

PERFECT  INDICATIVE. 

jag  har  trott,  etc.  jag  har  sytt,  etc. 

PLUPERFECT  INDICATIVE. 

jag  hade  trott,  etc.  jag  hade  sytt,  etc. 

Personal  Pronouns. 

139.    Declension  of  the  personal  pronouns. 

FIRST  PERSON  SECOND    PERSON  THIRD   PERSON 

Masc.  and  Fem.Masc.  and  Fern.  Masc.  Fem.        Neuter 


Sg. 

Nom. 
Gen. 
Obj. 

jag 

(min) 

mig 

du 

(din) 

dig 

han        hon        det 
hans      hennes   dess 
honom    henne     det 

Gender  Form 

Nom.  den 
Gen.    dess 
Obj.     den 

PI. 

Nom. 

Gen. 

Obj. 

vi 

(vdr) 

oss 

ni  (I) 
(eder,  e' 
eder,  er 

de 
r)             deras 
dem 

G4  PERSONAL   PRONOUNS. 

140.  Remarks  on  the  personal  pronouns. 

(a)  The  personal  pronouns  with  the  exception 
of  the  third  person  lack  genitive  forms ;  these  forms 
are  supplied  by  the  possessive  adjectives.  But  a 
genitive  form  for  the  second  person  occurs  in  a  few 
titles;  as,  Ers  Majestdt,  Your  Majesty;  Ers  excel- 
lens,  Your  Excellency. 

(b)  Mig  and  dig  are  colloquially  pronounced  mdj 
and  ddj. 

(c)  In  conversational  language  'en  or  'n  is  some- 
times appended  to  the  verb  or  to  the  pronoun  subject 
in  a  question  and  used  as  a  sort  of  enclitic  pronoun 
for  honom  or  dew,  likewise  also  'et  or  't  for  det  and 
'na  for  henne.  Ex.  Jag  sag  'en  i  gar.  I  saw  him 
yesterday.    Fick  du't?  Did  you  get  it? 

141.  For  the  use  of  du  and  ni  in  address,  see 
67,  a,  b. 

142.  It  is  considered  more  polite  in  the  singular 
to  use  the  title  of  the  person  with  or  without  herr  or 
fru.  The  definite  form  of  the  title  is  generally  used 
except  when  it  occurs  together  with  the  name  or  is 
used  in  independent  construction. 

Ex.:  Kommer  doktorn  i  kvdll?  Will  you  come  to- 
night, Doctor?  But  Kommer  doktor  Lind  i  kvdll? 
Are  you  coming  to-night,  Doctor  Lind  ?  Ndr  flyttar 
ni  ut  pa  landet,  herr  doktor?  When  are  you  going 
to  move  out  into  the  country,  Doctor? 

Persons  whose  titles  and  names  are  unknown  may 
be  addressed  with  herrn,  frun,  or  frbken  (also  da- 
men,  the  lady)  ;  it  is  impolite  to  omit  name  or  titla 
in  speaking  to  persons  we  know :  Vill  herrn  vara  sd 


EXERCISE.  65 


god  och  saga  mig,  var  Kungsgatan  dr?     Will  you 
kindly  tell  me,  sir,  where  King's  Street  is? 

Note.  To  combine  convenience  with  politeness  one  may  judiciously  intersperse 
i  pronoun  ni  with  the  title.  The  existing  objection  to  this  convenient  pronoun 
e-r-ifiiiallv   liisannf.irins'. 


the  pronoun  ni 

is  gradually  disappearing 


Exercise  X. 


A.  Supply  the  endings  of  the  verbs  and  nouns  where 
indicated. 

1.  Var  tillbring —  (impf.)  ni  era  ferier  i  somras  (133, 
c),  herr  doktor?  2.  Vi  bo —  pa  landet  som  vanligt,  vid 
en  harlig  liten  insjo.  3.  Nar  sommar —  komm — ,  forma — 
jag  inte  att  stanna  i  staden  langre,  jag  maste  fly  ut  i 
naturen  for  att  hamta  nya  kraft —  (pi.)  till  mitt  arbete. 

4.  Ni  flytt —  ut  ganska  sent  i  ar,  herr  doktor,  eller  hur? 

5.  Ja,  det  hero —  pa  olyckan,  som  han —  min  hustni.  Har 
ni  ej  hor —  om  den?  6.  Strax  innan  vi  amna —  (att) 
lamna  stad — ,  voro  (93,  a)  vi  ute  och  kor —  i  min  nya  bil; 
vi  kollider —  med  en  sparvagn,  och  min  hustru  blev  (was) 
skadad.  7.  Nu  ma —  hon  ypperligt,  men  jag  kan  ej  forma 
henne  att  aka  i  automobil  mera.  8.  Varfor  besoker  (93,  b) 
ni  OSS  aldrig,  herr  professor,  medan  vi  bo  pa  landet?  9.  Vi 
ha  det  sa  trevligt,  var  villa  ligger  vid  sjostrand — ,  och 
fran  dess  veranda  ha  vi  en  harlig  utsikt  over  sjon.  10,  Vi 
lia   bade    (both)    motorbal  och  segelbat  och  naturligtvis 

roddbat,  om  ni  tyck —  om  att  ro.    11.  Vag (pi.  def.) 

aro  fortriifflig —  och  passande  for  automobilakning. 

B.  Conversation.  1.  Var  bodde  ni  i  somras?  2.  Varfor 
bor  ni  pa  landet?  3.  Flyttade  ni  ut  tidigt  i  ar?  4.  Varfor 
flyttade  ni  ut  sa  sent?  5.  Vad  skedde,  nar  ni  voro  ute  och 
akte?  6.  Vad  kolliderade  ni  med  ?  7.  Varfor  vill  fru  Ed- 
strom  ej  &ka  i  automobil  mera?  8.  Var  ligger  er  villa? 
9.  Hur  har  ni  det  pa  landet?  10.  Huru  manga  slags  {hindi 
of)  batar  har  ni?    11.  Vad  passa  vagarna  for? 


66  VOCABULARY 

•  C.  1.  Doctor  Edstrom  and  his  family  lived  at  a  beau- 
tiful little  lake  last  summer.  2.  Their  villa  is  situated 
(Jigger)  at  (vid)  the  lake  shore,  and  from  the  porch  they 
have  a  charming  view  over  the  lake  and  its  islands.  3.  The 
doctor  does  not  feel  well  if  he  does  not  spend  his  (sina)  va- 
cation in  (pa)  the  country^  4.  Last  summer  they  moved 
out  later  than  usual,  for  an  accident  had  occurred  to  Mrs. 
Edstrom.  5.  They  were  out  riding  in  their  (sin)  large  new 
automobile  and  collided  with  a  street  car.  6.  Mrs.  Edstrom 
was  seriously  injured,  and  now  the  doctor  cannot  make  her 
(Ex.  X,  A,  7)  ride  in  an  automobile.  7.  Haven't  you 
heard  of  that  (ddrom)  ?  I  thought  you  and  the  doctor 
were  very  good  friends.  8.  I  have  visited  them  several 
times  at  (t)  their  home  in  the  country;  they  have  such  a 
pleasant  home.  9.  Once  I  stayed  a  whole  week  and  was  out 
rowing  and  fishing  (ute  och  rodde  och  metade)  on  the  lake 
every  (varje)  day. 

VOCABULARY. 

aldrig,    never  kollide'ra,  I,  to  collide 

allvarsam,   -t,   serious  en  kraft,  -er,  strength 

en  automobil'dkning,  automo-  kora,  lib,  to  drive 

bile  riding  Idmna,  I,  to  leave 

bero',  III,  to  depend  Idngre,  longer,  any  longer 

en  bil,  -ar,  colloquial  abbrev.  medan,  while 

for  automobile  meta,  I,  to  fish 

ferier  (always  plur.)  vacation  en  motorhdt,  -ar,  motor  boat 

fly,  III,  to  flee  md.  III,  to  feel  (well,  ill,  etc.) 

flytta,  I,  to  move  en  natur',  -er,  nature 

formd'.  III,  to  be  able;  to  in-  natur'ligtvis,  of  course 

duce  or  compel  en  o'lycka,  -or,  accident,  mis- 
sions fca    (adv.),  quite  fortune 

hdmta,   I,  to   fetch  passande,  suitable 

hdnda,  lib,  to  happen,  occur  ro.  III,  to  row 

en  hustru,  -r,  wife  en  roddbdt,  -ar,  rowboat 

en  insjo,  -ar,  lake  en  segelbdt,  -ar,  sailboat 


INDICATIVE. 


G7 


en  sjostrand,  sjustriinder,  lake   som  vanligt,  as  usual 


shore 
skadad,  -at,  injured 
i  somras,  last  summer 
en  spdrvagn,  -ar,  street  car 
strax,  soon 
trevlig,  -t,  pleasant,  agreeable 


en  veranda,  -or,  porch 
en  villa,  -or,  villa,  cottage 
aka,  Ila,  to  ride 
en  d,  -ar,  island 
over  (prep,  and  adv.)  over, 
past 


Idioms. 
att  vara  ute  och  kora,  gd,  rida,    etc.,    to    be   out    driving, 

walking,  riding. 
att  gd  ut  och  gd,  to  take  a  walk. 
att  ha  det  trevUgt,  to  have  a  pleasant  home  or  time. 
att  md  bra,  ilia,  to  feel  well,  bad,  ill. 


LESSON  XI. 

The  Verb  (Continued). 

FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT  INDICATIVE. 

143.  The  future  indicative  is  formed  by  com- 
bining the  present  of  the  auxiliary  skola,  shall,  which 
is  shall  (in  conversation  ska),  with  the  present  infin- 
itive; and  the  future  perfect  by  combining  the 
same  auxiliary  with  the  perfect  infinitive. 


Sg. 


PI. 


FUTURE  INDICATIVE 

jag' 

du 


ni 
han 


■shall  (sha)  halla 


shall  (sha) 
ha  hallat 


VI     1 

m    \shola  (sha)  halla 

de  J 

/  sholen  halla 


FUTURE  PERF.  INDIC. 

jag 
du 
ni 
han 

^^    Ishola  (sha) 
^g   \ha  hallat 

I  sholen  ha  hallat 


Note  1.  Pure  future  is  generally  expressed  either  by  the  present  or  by  the 
inflnitive  together  with  the  present  of  the  verb  komma,  to  come   (296). 

2.  The  double  forms  of  the  English  future  and  future  perfect,  /  shall  call, 
I  ihall  he  calling,  and  /  shall  have  called,  I  shall  have  been  calling,  are  to  be 
rendered  by  the  single  forms,  jag  shall  kalla  and  jag  shall  ha  kallat. 


68  IMPERATIVE. 

THE  IMPERATIVE. 

144.  The  imperative  is  formed  by  attaching  to 
the  stem  of  the  verb  the  following  endings: 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

Second  Person  -a  or  —      First  Person  -om 

Second  Person  -en  or  -n 

Note.     Only  verbs  of  the  First  Conjugation  take  -a  in  the  second  person  sin- 
gular ;   all  other  verbs  use  the  mere  stem. 

145.  Instead  of  the  form  in  -om,  which  is  exceed- 
ingly rare,  the  imperative  of  the  verb  lata,  let,  Idtom, 
generally  shortened  to  Idt,  is  used  with  the  reflex- 
ive pronoun  oss,  us,  of  the  first  person  plural  and 
the  infinitive.  This  form  corresponds  exactly  to 
the  English  imperative  with  let;  thus,  Idt(om)  oss 
kalla,  let  us  call. 

146.  Instead  of  the  second  person  plural  in  -en 
or  -n  the  second  person  singular,  with  the  pronoun 
ni  understood,  is  used  as  an  imperative  for  the 
second  person  plural. 

Note.     The  pronouns  are  g^enerally  omitted  in  the  imperative. 

147.  The  conversational  language  uses  a  num- 
ber of  expressions  which  are  more  polite  than  the 
imperative ;  the  most  common  is  vill  7ii  vara  sa  god, 
will  you  be  so  kind;  thus,  vill  ni  vara  sa  god  och 
komma  (will  you  have  the  kindness  to  come), — 
also,  var  sa  god  och,  etc. ;  or  the  expression,  sa  dr  ni 
(du)  snail  (then  you  are  kind),  may  be  used  after 
the  imperative;  as,  kom,  sd  dr  ni  snail  (please 
come),  or,  kan  (can)  may  be  used  in  a  question: 
kan  du  komma  nii?  —  equivalent  to,  come  now, 
please. 


INFINITIVE.  60 

148.  Examples  of  the  imperative  of  the  verbs 
kalla,  to  call;  bdja,  to  bend;  ti'o,  to  believe;  gd, 
to  go. 

kalla  (du,  ni),  kallom,  Idt(om)  oss  kalla,  kallen(I) 

boj      (du,  ni),  bojom,  Idt(om)  oss  bdja,  bo j en  (I) 

tro      (du,  ni),  Idt(om)  oss  tro,     iron    (I) 

gd       (du,  ni),  Idt(om)  oss  gd,     gdn     (I) 

Note.     Verbs  the  stem  of  which  ends  in  a  vowel  lack  the  form  in  -om,  and 
take  -n  in  the  second  person  plural. 

149.  Remarks  on  the  infinitive. 

(a)  The  present  active  infinitive  ends  in  -a,  but 
verbs  of  the  Third  Conjugation  and  a  few  verbs 
of  the  Fourth  Conjugation  the  stem  of  which  ends 
in  a  vowel  take  no  ending  in  the  infinitive.  The 
sign  of  the  infinitive  if  att,  to.  Ex.:  att  kalla,  att 
tro,  att  gd. 

(b)  The  perfect  infinitive  is  formed  as  in  Eng- 
lish; thus,  att  ha  kallat,  to'have  called;  att  ha  trott, 
to  have  believed ;  att  ha  gdtt,  to  have  gone. 

(c)  There  is  also  a  future  infinitive  formed  by 
combining  the  present  infinitive  of  the  auxiliary 
verb  skola,  shall,  with  the  infinitive  of  the  verb; 
as,  att  skola  kalla.    This  is  rarely  used. 

(d)  The  sign  of  the  infinitive  is  omitted  very  much 
as  in  English.  (Further  particulars  will  be  given 
later.) 

(e)  An  infinitive  phrase  expressing  purpose  is 
generally  introduced  by  the  preposition  for,  for; 
as,  jag  har  rest  till  Tyskland  for  att  studera  tyska 
ddr,  I  have  gone  to  Germany  in  order  to  study  Ger- 
man there. 


70  EXERCISE. 

The  Reflexive  Pronoun. 

150.  There  is  only  one  distinctively  reflexive 
form,  the  objective  sig,  which  is  used  for  all  genders 
and  numbers  of  the  third  person:  himself,  herself, 
itself,  themselves;  as,  han  (hon)  sdtter  sig,  seats 
himself  (herself)  ;  de  sdtta  sig,  they  seat  themselves. 

151.  Elsewhere  the  objective  case  of  the  personal 
pronouns  is  used  as  reflexive;  as,  jag  sdtter  mig, 
I  seat  myself ;  vi  sdtta  oss,  we  seat  ourselves. 

Note  1.  In  English  the  reflexive  -self  must  be  distinguished  from  the  em- 
phatic -self.  This  is  expressed  in  Swedish  by  sjalv ;  as,  jag  sjalv,  I  myself; 
han  har  gjort  det  sjalv,  he  has  done  it  himself. 

2.  Sjdlva(e)  preceding  a  noun  means  even ;  as,  sjalva  konungen  kan  inte 
.gora  det,  even  the  king  cannot  do  it. 

Exercise  XI. 

A.  1.  Om  ni  onska  taga  en  liten  tur  pa  sjon,  barn,  sa 
kom  med  mig.  2.  Ga  in  till  Ostermans  pa  vagen,  Karl,  och 
sag  till  dem,  att  jag  onsk —  lana  . .  .  (iJieir)  bat.  3.  Hop- 
pa  nil  i  bat — ,  goss — ,  men  forsiktigt,  sa  att  ni  ej  stjalp — 
. . .  (it).  4.  Yem  skall  ro?  Jasa,  du  Erik,  nej,  lat  Karl 
ro,  jag  tror  ej,  att  det  skall  bli  tungt  for  honom,  ty  sjon 
ligger  som  en  spegel.  5.  Sluta  att  ro,  Karl,  och  slapp  ned 
ankar — .  Lat  oss  nu  kasta  nt  rev — .  6.  Se  bara,  hur 
mycket  fisk  det  ar  har!  Karl  har  redan  ett  napp  pa  sin 
krok.  7.  Tycker  ni  inte,  att  det  ar  roligt  att  meta,  nar 
man  far  napp?  8.  Var  nu  snail  och  ro  i  land,  sa  satta  vi 
oss  under  det  stor —  trad —  for  att  ata  var  middag. 

B.  1.  Kara  barn,  oppna  lasebockerna  pa  sidan  tjugu, 
och  lat  oss  lasa  Tegners  vackra  dikt.  2.  Sag  mig,  Karl, 
vad  den  handlar  om,  ar  du  snail.  3.  Det  var  alldeles  rik- 
tigt.  Borja  nu  och  las  den  hogt  och  val  for  oss,  Maria. 
4.  Yar  god  och  ursakta  mig,  froken  Forsell,  jag  kan  ej 


EXERCISE.  71 

lasa  liogt;  jag  ar  forkyld  och  har  ont  i  halsen.  5.  Det  var 
ilia,  da  skall  lilla  Klara  lasa  den.  6.  Snalla  froken,  tillat 
mig  att  lasa  den  utantill ;  jag  har  lart  hela  dikten  utantill. 
7.  Det  var  bra  gjort,  Klara.  Hor  nu  pa  uppmarksamt 
allesammans,  medan  Klara  laser.  8.  Sedan  skall  jag  sjalv 
deklamera  den  for  er. 

C.  Conversation.  1.  Vad  onskar  ni  (att)  gora  i  dag? 
2.  Vem  ska  vi  lana  baten  av?  3.  Varfor  blir  det  ej  timgt 
for  Karl  att  ro?  4.  Vad  maste  man  gora,  innan  man  kan 
borja  (att)  meta?  5.  Vem  av  er  har  napp  pa  sin  krok? 
6.  Nar  ar  det  roligt  att  meta?  7.  Var  skola  vi  ata  var 
middag?  8.  Varfor  kan  Maria  ej  lasa  hogt?  9.  Hur  har 
Klara  visat,  att  hon  ar  flitig?  10.  Vad  amnar  froken 
Forsell   (att)   gora,  nar  Klara  har  last  dikten? 

D.  1.  The  children  wished  to  go  out  fishing  {ut  och 
meta)  yesterday.  2.  Since  we  do  not  have  any  boat,  we 
had  to  {maste  vi)  borrow  one  from  Osterman's.  3.  The 
boys  jumped  carefully  into  tlie  boat  in  order  not  to  upset 
it.  4.  Carl  rowed  the  whole  way^,  and  it  was  not  very 
difficult,  for  the  lake  was  like  a  mirror.  5.  Stop  rowing, 
Carl;  and  you,  Eric,  drop  the  anchor.  6.  Let  us  throw  out 
our  lines  here,  boys,  there  is  (A,  6)  plenty  of  (much)  fish 
here,  I  think.  7.  If  you  are  tired  we  shall  (invert)  row 
ashore  and  sit  down  (A,  8)  under  the  big  tree  to  eat  our 
breakfast.  8.  Please  (B,  2)  open  the  books  on  page  ten, 
children.  9.  Tell  me,  Carl,  who  the  author  of  this  (denna) 
beautiful  poem  is.  10.  Quite  right,  my  dear  boy.  And 
now  Clara  will  recite  the  poem  for  us.  11.  When  she  has 
done  (gjort)  this,  I  myself  shall  declaim  it  for  you.  12. 
Why  don't  you  begin,  Clara?  Have  you  not  learned  it  by 
heart?  13.  Please  excuse  me  {var  god  och  ursaJda  mig), 
Miss  Forsell.     I  tried  to  learn  it  by  heart  yesterday,  but 


72 


VOCABULARY. 


could  (I'unde)  not.  I  had  such  a  sore  throat  (sd  ont  i  hal- 
sen).  14.  Please  open  (var  snail  och  ...)  the  window. 
Carl,  I  have  a  headache  {huvudvdrh,  or,  ont  i  huvudet). 

^Hela  vagen:    the  prepositive  article  is  omitted. 


VOCABULARY. 

alldeJes,  quite,  entirely  en  Idsebok,  -bocker,  reader 

allesammans,  all  en  middag,  -ar,  noon;  dinner 

ett  ankare,  — ,  anchor  etf  napp,  bite 

bara,  only  ndgon,  ndgot,  any 

bra,  well   (often  referring  to  ond,  ont,  bad,  wicked;   sore; 

health)  angry 

deklame'ra,  I,  to  declaim  redan,  already 


en  rev,  -ar,  line 
riktig,  -t,  right,  correct 
rolig,  -t,  amusing 


erne' dan,  because,  since 

en  fisk,  -ar,  fish 

ett  fonster,  window 

forkyld'  -kylt,  having  caught  en  sjii,  -ar,  lake 

a  cold  sluta,  I,  to  cease 

forsik'tig,  -t,  cautious  sorti   (rel.  pronoun,  adv.  and 
handJa  om,  I,  to  treat  about  conj.),   who,   like,   as 

hoppa,  I,  to  jump  en  spegel,  -lar,  mirror 

hog,   -t,   high    (as   adv.   also  stjalpa,  Ila,  to  upset 

aloud)  siiga,  (irr.  v.),  to  say 

i  gdr,  yesterday  til'ldta  (st.  v.),  to  permit 

ilia  (adv.),  bad(ly),  too  bad  tic,  ten 


jasd',  so,  is  that  so 

kasta,  I,  to  throw 

en  krok,  -ar,  hook 

Idra,  lib,  to  learn;   to  teach 

Idsa  upp',  Ila,  to  recite 


tung,  -t,  heavy 
en  tur,  -er,  turn;  trip;  luck 
uppmiirksam.  -t,  attentive  (-ly) 
ur'sdkta,  I,  to  excuse 
utantill,  by  heart 


Idioms:   1.  Det  dr  roligt,  it  is  fun. 

2.  Jag  ar  forkyld,  I  have  caught  a  cold. 

3.  Jag  har  ont  i  halsen,  I  have  a  sore  throat. 

Note  that  long  m  can  be  wTitten  double  only  when  it  is  intervocalic.  This 
principle  causes  sometimes  a  dropping  of  one  m  and  sometimes  a  doubling : 
vppmarksam,  becomes  vppmarksamma  in  the  plural  —  to  is  here  intervocalic; 
vummer  becomes  num-rel  in  the  dcf.   form  —  m   is  no  longer  intervocalic. 


FOURTH    CONJUGATIOK.  73 

LESSON  XII. 

The  Verb  (Continued). 

THE  FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 

152.  This  conjugation  contains  all  verbs  that 
form  their  imperfect  by  means  of  a  change  of  the 
vowel  of  the  root  without  any  added  tense  sign. 
There  is  frequently  also  a  change  of  vowel  in  the 
supine  and  past  participle.  These  verbs  are  called 
strong  verbs. 

The  verbs  belonging  to  this  conjugation  are 
divided  into  two  classes. 

153.  The  first  class  contains  verbs  the  root  of 
which  undergoes  but  one  vowel  change.  In  these 
verbs  the  vowel  of  the  supine  and  past  participle  is 
the  same  as  that  of  the  infinitive  and  the  vowel  of 
the  plural  of  the  imperfect  the  same  as  that  of  the 
singular. 

Examples : 

INFINITIVE  IMPERFECT     SUPINE  PAST  PARTICIPLE 

SG.  PL. 

hdlla,  to  hold      holl      hollo     hdllit        hdllen,  -et 
gripa,  to  seize  grep     grepo  gripit       gripen,  -et 

154.  The  second  class  contains  verbs  the  root  of 
which  undergoes  two  vowel  changes.  In  these  the 
vowel  of  the  supine  and  the  past  participle  is  always 
different  from  that  of  the  infinitive ;  the  vowel  of  the 
plural  of  the  imperfect  is  in  most  cases  the  same  as 
that  of  the  supine,  in  the  case  of  a  few  verbs  like  that 
of  the  singular  of  the  imperfect  and  different  from 
that  of  the  supine. 

Swedish  Grammar  8 


74 


FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 


Example : 

INFINITIVE  IMPERFECT     SUPINE  PAST  PARTICIPLE 

SG.  PL. 

finna,  to  find   farm     funno  funnit      funnen,  -et 
knyta,  to  tie     knot     knoto  knutit        knuten,  -et 

155.  The  following  table  of  the  most  common  of 
the  vowel  changes  in  the  Fourth  Conjugation  may 
prove  helpful : 


INFINITIVE 


IMPERFECT  SUPINE 

SG.  PI* 


beto 

bitit 

foro 

farit 

njoto 

njutit 

knoto 

knutit 

funno 

funnit 

skuro 

skurit 

1.  i,  e,  e,  i.    bita,  to  bite  bet 

2.  a,  0,  0,  a.  fara,  to  travel  for 

3.  u,  0,  6,  u  njuta,  to  enjoy  njot 

4.  y,  6,  6,  u.  knyta,  to  tic  knot 

5.  i,  a,  u,  u.  finna,  to  find  fann 

6.  a,  a,  u,  u.  skdra,  to  cut  skar 


156.  The  verbs  of  the  Strong  Conjugation  have 
the  following  endings : 

-er  (-r)  in  the  singular  of  the  present  indicative. 

-a  in  the  plural  of  the  present  indicative. 

-en  in  the  archaic  second  person  plural. 

No  ending  in  the  singular  of  the  impf.  indicative. 

-0  in  the  plural  of  the  imperfect  indicative. 

-ande  in  the  present  participle. 

-en  in  the  gender  form  of  the  past  participle. 

-et  in  the  neuter  form  of  the  past  participle. 

-it  in  the  supine. 

Note  1.  The  difference  of  vowel  in  the  singular  and  plural  of  the  imperfect 
indicative  need  not  occasion  the  bcg^inner  any  difficulty,  since  the  singular  is 
invariably  used  for  the  plural  in  conversation ;  thus,  vi  fann  is  the  common 
form,  vi  funno  is  rarely  heard. 

2.  The  past  participle  is  declined  like  adjectives  in  -en,  for  which  see  111,  2, 
112,  2,  and  125,  note. 


157.     Examples  of  verbs  of  the  first  and  second 


FOURTH    CONJUGATIOX, 


75 


classes  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation:   att  gripa,  to 
seize;  att  finna,  to  find. 


INFINITIVE 


PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 

IMPERFECT  SUPINE  PAST  PABTICIPLE 


I.  gripa      grep        grepo    gripit 
II.  finna        fann        funno   funnit 


Sg.  jag 
du 


PI. 


PRESENT  INDICATIVE. 

Sg.  jag 


^griper 


ygripa 
gripen 


du 
ni 
han 


gripen, 
funnen, 


firmer 


-et 
-et 


PI. 


ni    \finna 

de  J 

/      finnen 


Sg.  jag^ 
du 


IMPERFECT  INDICATIVE. 

Sg.  jag] 


grep 


du 

ni 

han 


fann 


PI. 


PI. 


ygrepo 


grep en 

FUTURE  INDICATIVE. 

Sg.  jag  shall  (ska)  gripa,  finna,  etc. 
PI.    vi  skola  (ska)  gripa,  finna,  etc. 

PERFECT  INDICATIVE. 

Sg.  jag  har  gripit,  funnit,  etc. 
PL    vi  ha  gripit,  funnit,  etc. 

PLUPERFECT  INDICATIVE. 

Sg.  jag  hade  gripit,  funnit,  etc. 
PI.    vi  hade  gripit,  funnit,  etc. 


VI 

ni    \funno 

de  J 

I      funnen 


76  KXEKCISE. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

Sg.  jag  shall  ha  gripit,  funnit,  etc. 
PI.  VI  skola  ha  gripit,  funnit,  etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Sg.  grip  (du,  ni)  jinn  (du,  ni) 

PI.    gripom,  ldt(om)oss  gripa   finnom,  Idt(om)  oss 

finna 
gripen  (I)  finnen  (I) 

INFINITIVES. 

Present,     gripa  finna 

Perfect,     ha  gripit  ha  funnit 

Future,      skola  gripa  skola  finna 

Exercise  XII. 

A.  Change  the  present  into  imperfect  in  the  following: 
1.  Min  bror  skriver  ett  brev  till  min  far,  som  har  farit 

till  Amerika.  2.  Jag  bar  brevet  pa  posten.  3.  Han  far  svar 
(64,  b)  pa  det.  4.  Jag  gar  till  stationen  for  att  mota  min 
bror.  5.  Han  kommer  pa  besok  hos  oss,  6.  Taget  ankom- 
mer  ej  forran  klockan  sex,  det  ar  forsenat.  7.  Nar  han  ser 
mig,  stiger  han  av  taget.  8.  Han  ger  sitt  handbagage  till 
en  barare^  och  gar  med  mig.  9.  Vi  taga  en  droska  och  fara 
hem.  10.  Den  sjuke  gossen  ligger  till  sangs.  11.  Han 
sover  ganska  gott.  12.  Det  ger  honom  krafter.  13.  Karl 
ater  for  mycket.  14.  Han  blir  sjuk,  och  vi  maste  tillkalla 
lakaren.  15.  Vi  ata  fmkten,  som  vi  fa  av  Karl.  16.  En 
haftig  storm  iitbryter.  17.  Vagorna  sla  over  skeppet. 
18.  Det  sjunker  pa  oppna  sjon. 

*ln  Stockholm  called  iladshvd  (neuter).  A  porter  in  a  hotel  is  called 
hotellvaktmiistaTe. 

B.  1.  Vi  kommo  ej  till  den  lilla  staden  forran  sent  pa 
kvallen,  ty  vi  voro  forsenade.  2.  Vart  tag  gick  ej  fort,  och 
dessutom  stannade  det  vid  alia  stationer.     3.  Som  {as)  vi 


EXERCISE.  77 

voro  trotta,  besago  vi  ej  staden,  utan  gingo  direkt  till  vart 
hotell,  som  lag  nara  stationen.  4.  Vi  sovo  utmarkt  liela 
natten,  men  maste  stiga  upp  klockan  sex  for  att  fara  vida- 
re.  5.  Vi  hade  bett  dem  viicka  oss  i  tid,  men  vaknade  sjiil- 
va.  6.  Nar  vi  hade  atit  frukost,  begarde  vi  var  rakning. 
7.  Den  var  ganska  resonabel;  vi  betalade  den  samt  gavo 
drickspengar.  8.  Nar  ni  besoker  staden  X,  bor  (ougJit) 
ni  ga  till  detta  (this)  hotell.    Jag  kan  rekommendera  det. 

C.  Conversation.  1.  Nar  komma  vi  till  Stockholm? 
2.  Hur  manga  minuter  ar  taget  forsenat?  3.  Tycker  ni, 
att  taget  gar  fort?  4.  Hur  manga  minuter  stannar  taget 
vid  Alvesta  ?  5.  Var  ligger  hotellet,  dar  ni  brukar  taga  in  ? 
G.  Nar  skall  man  vacka  oss  i  morgon?  7.  Tror  ni,  att  ni 
kan  vakna  sjiilv?  8.  Har  ni  sovit  gott  i  natt,  herr  Arndt? 
9.  Ar  rakningen  for  hog? 

D.  1.  I  did  not  come  to  Vexio  before  ten  o'clock  in  (pa) 
the  evening.  2.  The  train  which  I  was  on  did  not  run 
very  fast,  and  I  believe  it  stopped  at  all  stations.  3.  A 
friend  of  mine  {en  af  mina  vdnner)  had  recommended  a 
small  hotel  which  lies  near  the  station.  4.  I  gave  my  hand 
baggage  to  a  porter  and  asked^  him  to  show  me  the  way  to 
the  hotel.  5.  In  the  dining  room  of  the  hotel  (gen.  def.) 
I  had-  a  good  supper.  6.  An  hour  later  (scnare)  I  went 
to  bed  and  slept  well  until  six  o'clock  in  (pa)  the  morning, 
when  they  (man)  called^  me.  7,  I  asked  for  the  bill  and 
found  it  very  reasonable.  8.  At  this  hotel  one  gives  (invert) 
no  tips.  9.  It  is  not  large  but  very  good  (hra),  and  I 
shall  recommend  it  to  all  my  (mina)  friends  who  go  (resa, 
fara)  to  Vexio.  10.  Vexio  is  a  pleasant  little  town.  It  is 
situated  by  (vid)  a  lake.  11.  I  did  not  have  time  to  view 
the  town  for  I  arrived  late  (sent)  and  had  to  leave  early  in 
the  morning. 

*To  ask  a  question  is  frdga,  to  ask  a  favor  is  bedja.  ^Use  a'a  and  invert. 
•Use  vdcka. 


78 


VOCABULAKY. 


VOCABULARY. 

N.  B.  Of  the  strong  verbs  the  following  parts  are  given: 
the  infinitive,  the  singular  and  plural  of  the  imperfect,  the 
supine,  and  the  gender  and  neuter  forms  of  the  past  par- 
ticiple, when  found. 


ankomma,  ankom,  ankommo, 
ankommit,  -en,  -et,  to  ar- 
rive 

hedja,  bad,  hddo,  bett,  bedd, 
bett,  to  pray,  to  ask 

begd'ra,   lib,   to  demand 

beta'la,  I  la,  to  pay 

bese',  besdg,  besdgo,  besett, 
besedd,  -sett,  to  look  at, 
view 


ett  hotelV,  — ,  hotel 

ligga,  Idg,  Mgo,  legat,  to  lie,  to 
be  situated 

en  matsal,  -ar,  dining  room 

en  natt,  niitttr,  night 

niira  (adv.  and  prep.),  near 

en    post    (in    this    sense    no 
pi.),  mail,  post  office 

rekommende'ra,  I,  to  recom- 
mend 


bUva,  blev,  blevo,  blivit,  -en, 

-et,  to  become;  to  remain   resona'bel,  -t,  reasonable 
en     broder     (bror),     broder,     6"  rdkning,  -ar,  bill 

brother 
bdra,    bar,    buro,    burit,    -en, 

-et,  to  carry,  to  bear 
en  bdrare,  — ,  porter 
direkt',  direct  (ly) 


se,  sag,  sdgo,  sett,  -dd,  -ett, 

to  see 
ett  skepp,  — ,  ship 
skriva,  skrev,  skrevo,  skrivit, 

-en,  -et,  to  write 


drickspengar  (always  pi.),  tip,  sjunka,  sjonk,  sjonko,  sjunkit. 


tips 
en  droska,  -or,  cab 
fara,  for,  foro,  farit,  -en,  -et, 

to  travel,  to  drive,  to  go 
fa,  fick,  fingo,  fdtt,  to  get,  to 

receive 
forran  (adv.),  before 
forse'nad,   -t,   belated,    late 

(train) 
giva  (also  ge),  gav,  gdvo, 


-en,  -et,  to  sink 
sld,  slog,  slogo,  slagit,  -en,  -et, 

strike 
sld  over,  to  wash  over 
sova,  sov,  sovo,  sovit,  to  sleep 
en  station',  -er,  station 
stiga,  steg,  stego,  stigit,  -en, 

-et,  to  step;  to  rise 
stiga  upp',  to  rise,  to  get  up 


givit  (gett),  -en,  -et,  to  give  ^"  ^"P^'  supeer,  supper 

gd,  gick,  gingo,  gdtt,  gdngen,  ^a^o-  t09>  ^ogo,  tagit,  -en,  -et,  to 

-et,  to  go  (run)  t^^^ 

ett    handbagage    (-gash';    no  till'kalla,  I,  to  call   (in) 

pL),  hand  baggage  ett  tdg,  — ,  train 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


79 


ut'bryta,  uthrot,  utbroto,  utbru-vucka  (tr.  v.),  Ila,  to  wake 

tit,  -en,  -et,  to  break  out       uta,  at,  dto,  iitit,  -en,  -et,  to  eat 
vidare,  further 

Idioms:  1.  att  bedja  om  en  sak,  to  ask  for  a  thing. 

2.  att  bdra  (Idgga)  p&  posten,  to  mail. 

3.  Har  posten  kommit?  Has  the  mail  come? 

4.  Vad  dr  klockan?  What  time  is  it?     Klockan  iir 
sex.     It   is   six  o'clock. 

5.  att  visa  vdgen,  to  show  the  way. 

LESSON  XIII. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Remark.  Note  the  tendency  of  substituting  compound 
forms  for  the  simple  subjunctive. 

PRESENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

158.  The  simple  present  subjunctive  of  all  per- 
sons, except  the  archaic  second  person  plural,  is 
formed  by  adding  -e  to  the  stem.  The  archaic  second 
person  plural  ends  in  -en.  Much  more  common  is 
the  compound  form  with  ma. 

Note.  Verba  the  infinitive  of  which  ends  in  any  other  vowel  than  a  lack  the 
simple  present  subjunctive.  These  include  all  verbs  of  the  Third  Conjugation 
and  a  few  others;  as,  ga,  to  go;  ata,  to  stand;  le,  to  smile;  etc. 

159.  Examples  of  the  present  subjunctive:  att 
vara,  to  be;  att  dlska,  to  love;  att  tro,  to  believe. 


3Ci9 
du 
ni 
han 


vare, 

ymd  vara, 
matte  vara 


SINGULAR. 

du 
ni 
han 


dlske, 
>ma  dlska, 
matte  dlska, 


du 
ni 
han 


ma  tro, 
'matte  tro 


PLURAL. 

vi   1  vare,  vi   ]  dlske, 

ni    \  ma  vara,       ni    >  ma  dlska, 

de  J  matte  vara    de  J  matte  dlska     de  J 


^*.    \md  tro, 
'^}    \  matte  tro 


80  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

r  varen,  (  alsken,  f  ^^^  ^^.^ 

/     man  vara,       /     mdnalska        /     ^^ttentro 
[  matten  vara       [  matten  alska        [ 

160.  Imperfect  subjunctive. 

(1)  In  verbs  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation  the  sim- 
ple imperfect  subjunctive  is  formed  by  changing  the 
ending  -o  of  the  plural  of  the  imperfect  indicative 
to  -e  (the  archaic  second  person  plural  having  the 
additional  ending  -n) .  The  vowel  of  both  numbers 
of  the  imperfect  subjunctive  is  thus  the  same  as 
that  of  the  plural  of  the  imperfect  indicative. 

Note.     The  singular  of  the  imperfect  indicative  of  the  Fourth  Conjug'ation  is 
often  used  instead  of  the  impf.  subjunctive. 

(2)  In  the  First,  Second,  and  Third  Conjugations 
the  simple  imperfect  subjunctive  is  identical  with 
the  imperfect  indicative. 

(3)  Compound  forms  consisting  of  the  imperfect 
of  shall,  skulle,  are  of  very  common  occurrence. 

161.  Examples  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive  of 
the  verbs  binda,  to  bind ;  vara,  to  be ;  alska,  to  love. 


INFINITIVE 

IMPERFECT                     SUPINE           PAST  PARTICIPLE 

SO.                     PL. 

binda 

band        bundo  .    bundit   bunden,  -et 

vara 

var          voro         varit 

alska 

dlskade   dlskade    dlskat    dlskad,  -at 

Sg.  jag  bunde,  skulle  binda,  etc. 
PI.    vi  bunde,  skulle  binda,  etc. 

Sg.  jag  vore,  skulle  vara,  etc. 
PI.    vi  vore,  skulle  vara,  etc. 

Sg.  jag  dlskade,  skulle  alska,  etc. 
PI.    vi  dlskade,  skulle  alska,  etc. 


SUBJUNCTIVE.  81 

162.  Perfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive. 

(a)  The  'perfect  subjunctive  is  formed  by  com- 
bining the  present  or  the  imperfect  of  the  auxiliary 
ma  with  the  perfect  infinitive. 

(h)  The  pluperfect  subjunctive  is  either  identical 
with  the  indicative  or  formed  by  combining  the  im- 
perfect of  skall,  skulle,  with  the  perfect  infinitive. 

Examples  of  the  perfect  and  pluperfect  subjunc- 
tives of  the  verbs  skriva  and  vara. 

perfect  subjunctive. 

Sg.  jag  ma  or  matte  ha     jag  ma  or  matte  ha  varit, 

skrivit,  etc.  etc. 

PI.    vi  ma  or  matte  ha    vi  ma  or  matte  ha  varit, 

skrivit,  etc.  etc. 

pluperfect  subjunctive. 

Sg.  jag  hade  skrivit,  or     jag  hade  varit,  or 
jag  skulle  ha  skrivit     jag  skulle  ha  varit 

PI.    vi  hade  skrivit,  or        vi  hade  varit,  or 
vi  skulle  ha  skrivit       vi  skulle  ha  varit 

USES  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

163.  Classification  of  uses.  The  subjunctive — 
which  marks  in  general  the  absence  of  direct  or 
positive  assertion — is  used  regularly  in  statements 
of  doubtful  reality;  such  as  tvish,  request,  purpose, 
concession,  possibility. 

164.  Subjunctive  of  wish. 

(a)  A  realizable  wish  is  expressed  by  the  simple 
present  subjunctive,  or  by  the  compound  form  with 
ma  and  matte,  ma  implying  greater  and  matte  less 
confidence  in  the  realization  of  the  wish. 


82  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Ex.  Give  Gud  dig  hdlsa;  also,  md  or  matte  Gud 
giva  dig  hdlsa!  May  God  give  you  health.  Matte 
han  vara  hdr!  Would  he  were  here!  Vi  matte  vol 
komma  i  tid  till  tdget!  I  do  wish  we  might  come 
in  time  for  the  train. 

Note.  The  wish  may  sometimes  have  the  force  of  a  command :  Gud  sade : 
"Varde  Ijual"     God  said,  "Let  there  be  light." 

(b)  A  wish  which  refers  to  the  present  and  which 
is  not — at  least  not  immediately — realizable  is 
expressed  by  the  simple  imperfect  subjunctive;  a 
similar  wish  referring  to  the  past,  by  the  pluperfect 
subjunctive. 

Ex.  Ack,  om  jag  vore  ung  igen!  Would  I  were 
young  again !  0,  att  han  vore  hdr!  Would  he  were 
here !  Hade  jag  blott  vingar!  If  I  only  had  wings ! 
Hade  jag  blott  haft  en  enda  van!  Had  I  only  had 
a  single  friend! 

Note  1.  The  simple  imperfect  subjunctive  may  also  express  a  very  vivid 
wish  referring  to  the  future:  Ack,  om  det  snart  vore  var t  O  that  spring  were 
here! 

2.     Note   the  use  of  ack,   om,..,   o,   at*. .  .with  the  sense  of  would  (that) 

Closely  related  to  the  subjunctive  of  wish  are  the 
subjunctives  of  purpose  and  concession. 

165.    Subjunctive  of  purpose. 

The  compound  subjunctive  with  ma  and  matte  is 
used  in  clauses  expressing  purpose  with  the  con- 
junctions att,  pa  det  att,  sa  att,  in  order  that.  After 
a  past  tense  the  subjunctive  with  skulle  may  be  used. 

Ex.  Bed  till  Gud,  att  han  md  (mdtte)  beskydda 
oss,  pray  to  God  that  he  may  protect  us;  han  skyn- 
dade  sig,  sd  att  han  skulle  vara  fdrdig,  he  hurried 
in  order  that  he  might  be  ready. 


EXERCISU.  S3 

Note  1.  The  compound  subjunctive  (sometimes  the  indicative)  of  fa,  may 
(permission),  and  kunna,  can  (ability,  possibilty),  are  often  used  in  a  purpose 
clause  if  permission  or  ability  is  implied:  han  bad  bamen  vara  tysta,  aa  att 
han  skulle  fa  sova,  he  asked  the  children  to  be  quiet  in  order  that  he  might 
sleep ;  han  studerade  suenska  flitigt,  sa  att  han  skulle  kunna  tala  det  flytande, 
he  studied  Swedish  diligently  in  order  that  he  might  speak  it  fluently. 

2.  If  the  subject  of  the  purpose  clause  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  principal 
clause  the  infinitive  with  for  att  (149,  e)  is  used:  herr  Vallner  ar  ej  hemma, 
han  har  rest  till  Stockholm  for  att  besoka  sin  sjuka  bror,  Mr.  Vallner  is  not 
at  home ;   he  has  gone  to  Stockholm  to   visit  his  sick  brother. 

166.  Subjunctive  of  concession. 
Concession  is  expressed  by  the  subjunctive  with 

ma  (not  matte) .  Ex. :  Det  ma  sa  vara,  that  may  be ; 
nu  ma  fienderna  Jcomma,  now  the  enemy  may  come. 

Note.  Note  the  concessive  subjunctive  in  vare  sig  dit  vill  eller  ej,  whether 
you  wish  or  not ;  vi  skola  gd,  vare  sig  han  kommer  eller  ej,  we  shall  go  whether 
he  comes  or  not.  The  expression  vare  sig  (let  it  be  for  itself)  has  practically 
become  a  conjunction  meaning  whether. 

167.  The  potential  subjunctive,  or  subjunc- 
tive of  possibility,  indicates  merely  the  possibility 
that  an  action  may  occur,  without  any  reference  to 
its  probability :  kanhdnda  vore  det  sa  gott  att  borja 
arbetet  med  detsamma,  perhaps  it  would  be  well  to 
begin  the  work  immediately ;  med  din  hjdlp  formdd- 
de  jag  nog  gora  det,  with  your  help,  I  should  be 
able  to  do  it,  no  doubt ;  det  kunde  vara  sant,  it  might 
be  true. 

NoTK.  Absolute  possibility  is  denoted  by  kan  (sometimes  md).  See  Senses 
of  Modals  (255,  b).  Ex.:  det  kan  vara  sant,  it  may  possibly  be  true;  a  very 
vivid  probability  is  denoted  by  matte:  det  matte  vara  mamma,  som  kommer; 
it  must  be  mother  who  comes. 

Exercise  XIII. 

A.  1.  Nagon  knackar  pa  dorren;  det  matte*  vara  brev- 
bararen,  ty  han  kommer  alltid  vid  denna  tid.  2.  Jag  ons- 
kar,  att  det  vore  han  och  att  han  hade  med  sig  en  postanvis- 
ning  hemifran,  sa  att  jag  kunde^  betala  min  inackordering 


84  EXERCISE. 

och  min  skolavgift.  3.  Vore'  man  bara  rik  och  ej  en  fat- 
tig  studerande!  4.  Nej,  det  ar  inte  brevbararen,  utan  ett 
telegrambud.  5.  Matte*  de  ej  vara  sjuka  dar  hemma! 
6.  Vem  skulle^  ha  trott  det!  Min  bror  Eobert,  som  reste 
till  Brasilien  for  att  gora^  sin  lycka,  bar  kommit  tillbaka, 
och  nu  onska  mina  foraldrar,  att  jag  matte*  resa  hem  pa 
ett  par  dagar.  7.  Ack,  om  jag  bara  kande'  nagon,  som 
ville  lana  mig  hundra  kronor,  sa  att  jag  kunde-  resa  med 
detsamma.  8.  Vore^  det  ej  battre,  att  du  sande  dem  ett 
telegram  och  bade  dem-  om  pengar  ?  9.  Jag  skulle  sa  garna 
vilja  lana  dig,  nien  jag  bar  tyvarr  inga.  10.  Har  kommer 
brevbararen  med  ett  rekommenderat  brev.  Matte*  det  bara 
innehalla  nog  pengar,  sa  att  jag  ma^  kunna  betala  mina 
skulder  och  resa  hem. 

ner,    note.     »165,    1.     -164,    b,    1.     n64,    a.     ^IG?.     'leS,    2.     '164    b,    2. 

B.  Conversation.  1.  Vem  tror  ni  det  ar,  som  knackar 
pa  dorren?  2.  Varfor  formodar  (suppose)  ni,  att  det  iir 
brevbararen?  3.  Vad  onskar  ni,  att  ban  medforde  {brought 
along)  ?  4.  Varfor  ville^  ni  garna  ha  en  postanvisning  hem- 
ifran  ?  5,  Vad  ville  ni  hellre  vara  an  en  f attig  studerande  ? 
6,  Vad  nyheter  (news)  innehoU  telegrammet?  7.  Varfor 
hade  er  bror  rest  till  Brasilien  ?  8.  Vad  ville  era  foraldrar, 
att  ni  skulle  gora  ?  9.  Varfor  kunde  ni  icke  resa  med  det- 
samma? 10.  Vad  tjanst  hade  er  kamrat  gjort  er,  ora  ban 
hade  haft  pengar? 

'Impf.   subjunctive   (like  the  indicative)  ;  vilja  garna,  to  like. 

C.  1.  Somebody  must  be  knocking  at  the  door.  Would 
you  go  and  open?  2.  I  wish  it  were  (164,  b,  1)  the  post- 
man, for  I  expect  a  money  order  or  a  registered  letter  from 
home.  3.  Only  a  common  letter!  I  wish  that  it  might 
contain^  money,  for  I  am  entirely  without  (any).  4.  If  my 
parents  would  only  send-  me  some  money  soon  so  that  I 
could  pay  (A,  2)  my  debts.     I  owe  both  for  board  and 


VOCABULARY.  85 

tuition.  5.  Who  would  (sJculle)  have  believed  that  he 
would  return  so  soon.  6.  Father  (min  far)  writes  that 
brother  Robert  has  returned  from  Brazil  in  order  to  cele- 
brate (165,  2)  Christmas  at  home.  7.  Mother  wishes  that 
I  too  might  come  (164,  a)  home,  and  they  promise  that 
they  will  send  money  in  a  few  days  (om  ndgra  dagar). 

D.  1.  Let  us  study  diligently  so  that  our  teacher  may 
praise  (165)  us.  2.  Let  us  hope  that  it  may  not  rain^,  for 
we  have  no  umbrellas.  3.  The  old  woman  asked  me  to  give 
her  something*.  4.  I  did  so  and  she  said,  "May  God  bless 
the  good  gentleman."  5.  The  children  eat  breakfast  very 
early  that  they  may  be  in  school  on  time  (i  tid).  6.  Be 
quiet,  children,  so  that  your  poor  father  may  sleep  {far 
sova,  165,  1).  7.  We  wish  that  he  might  come  (164,  a) ; 
but  whether  (166,  note)  he  comes  or  not,  we  shall  go. 
8.  If  we  had  only  not  gone  out!  But  who  could  believe 
that  he  would  (skulle)  come.  9.  Their  father  required 
(fordrade)  that  they  come^  home  early.  But  he  may  {md, 
kan)  say  what  he  will,  they  do  not  obey.  10.  What  he  says 
might  (167)  be  true.  Would  that  what  he  says  were 
(164,  b,  2)  true. 

^Use  the  impf.  subjunctive  of  innehdlla  (164,  b,  1).  ^Om  mina  fordldrar  bara 
ville,  etc.  'Pres.  indie,  may  be  used.  ^Translate  two  ways:  literafly  and  "asked 
that  I",  etc.  "After  a  verb  of  command  Swedish  often  uses  the  modal  auxiliary 
skola  with  the  pros.  inf.  (not  to  be  confused  with  skola  in  its  use  a«  an 
auxiliary  of  the   future). 

VOCABULARY. 

alldeles,  altogether,  entirely      en  hrevbdrare,  — ,  -arna  (def. 

bara,  only  pi.)   letter  carrier 

befal'la,  lib,  to  order,  to  com-  ddrhemma,  at  home 
mand  fattig,  -t,  poor 

beromma,   lib,   impf.   beromde  fira,  I,  to  celebrate 
(see    103;   note   3),    to        hemifrdn,  from  home 
praise  en  herre,  -ar,  gentleman 


86 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


hoppas,  I,   (deponent  v.),  to 

hope 
en  in'ackorde'ring,  -ar,  board 

and  room   (or  board  on- 
ly) ;    boarder 
in'nehdlla,  -holl,  -hollo,  -hdllit, 

-en,  -et,  to  contain 
en  Jul,  -ar,  Christmas 
komma,   kom,   kommo,    kom- 

mit,  -en,  -et,  to  come. 
iova,  I,  to  promise 
en   lycka    (no   pi.),   fortune, 

happiness 
lyda,  lib,  to  obey 
med  detsamma,  immediately 
nog,  enough;  I  am  sure;  cer- 

certainly 
ndgon,  some  (one),  pi.  ndgra, 

some,  any,  a  few 
ocksd,  also 
en  postanvisning,  -ar,  postal 

money  order 


rekommende'rad,     -rat,     regis- 
tered 

en  skolavgift,  -er,  tuition 
en  skuld,  -er,  debt;  guilt 
skyldig,  -t,  in  debt;  guilty 
vara  skyldig,  to  owe 
stackars     (indeclinable),    poor 
(in  the  sense  of  pitiable) 

en  studerande.  — .  a  student 
ett  telegram',  — ,  telegram 
ett  telegramhud,  — ,  telegraph 
messenger 

en  tid,  -er,  time 
tidig,  -t,  early 
tjugu,  twenty 
tyst,  — ,  quiet,  silent 
utan  (adv.,  prep.,  and  conj.), 
but,  without 

vanlig,  -t,  common,  usual 
valsigna,  I,  to  bless 


Idiom:  Det  ar  nog  han  som  kommer,  it  is  very  likely  he  that 
is   coming. 


LESSON  XIV. 
■  The  Verb  (Continued). 
IRREGULARITIES  OF  VERBS. 

168.  Some  verbs  of  the  second  class  of  the  Second 
Conjugation  which  are  derived  from  other  v^^ords  by 
means  of  the  sufRx  -ja  drop  j  in  the  imperfect, 
supine,  and  past  participle  in  w^hich  forms  the  cor- 
responding hard  vow^el  generally  reappears.  The 
most  common  of  these  verbs  are: 


INFINITIVE 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  87 

PRESENT    IMPERFECT    SUPINE        P.   PART. 


glddja,  to  gladden      gldder  ^ 
sdlja,  to  sell  sdljer 

skilja,  to  separate       skiljer 
smdrja,  to  grease,  oil  smorjer 
sporja,  to  ask,  learn  spdrjer 
vdlja,  to  choose,  elect  vdljer 
vdnja,  to  accustom     vdnjer 

^Plur.   glddja.     'The  neuter  is  fflatt,  silt, 


169.    Such  a  change  of  vowel  occurs  also  in  the 
following  very  common  verbs : 


gladde  glatt 

gladd  ' 

sdlde     salt 

said 

skilde    skilt 

skild 

smorde  smort 

smord 

sporde  sport 

spord 

valde     valt 

vald 

vande    vant 

vand 

akilt,  etc.    (Ill,  3). 

INFINITIVE 

bringa,  to  bring 
gdra,  to  do 
Idgga,  to  lay 
sdga,"  to  say 
sdtta,  to  set,  put 
tdras,  to  dare 

'The  neuter  is  bragt,  lagt, 


PRESENT   IMPERFECT  SUPINE  P.  PART. 

hringar  hragte  bragt  bragt ' 

gdr         gjorde  gjort  gjord 

Idgger     lade       lagt  lagd 

sdger      sade      sagt  sagd 

sdtter     satte      satt  satt 
tdr(e)s  tordes    torts 

satt,  etc.,   (Ill,   3).     ^Commonly  pronounced  sdja. 


170.  There  are  besides  a  small  number  of  verbs 
which  are  entirely  irregular.  The  most  important 
of  these  are: 


INFINITIVE 

PRESENT 

IMPERFECT 

SUPINE 

p.  PART. 

bedja,  to  ask,  pray 

bcder,  her  had 

bddo 

bett 

bedd     ' 

do,  to  die 

dor 

dog 

dogo 

dott 

Ifdngen ' 

fd,  to  get,  receive 

fdr 

tick 

fingo 

mt 

fddd,' 

gd,  to  go 

gdr 

gick 

gingo 

gdtt 

gdngen 

komma,  to  come 

kommer 

kom 

kommo  kommit 

kommen 

heta,  to  be  called 

heter 

hette 

hette 

hetat 

le,  smile 

ler 

log 

logo 

lett 

ledd' 

leva,  to  live 

lever 

levde 

levde 

levat 

levad  * 

ligga,  to  lie 

ligger 

Idg 

Idgo 

legat 

legad  * 

se,  to  see 

ser 

sdg 

sdgo 

sett 

sedd" 

sld,  to  strike 

sldr 

slog 

slogo 

slagit 

slaget 

88 


UNREAL  CONDITIONS. 


INFINITIVE 

PRESENT 

IMPERFECT 

SUPINE 

sov<i,  to  sleep 

sover 

sov 

sovo 

soy  it 

std,  to  stand 

stdr 

stod 

stodo 

stdtt 

tiga,  to  be  silent 

tiger 

teg 

tego 

teg  at 

veta,  to  know 

vet 

visste 

visste 

vetat 

^Only  in  compounds. 

"The  neutei 

•  is  sett. 

bett,  fdnget    (111, 

stddd ' 


UNREAL  CONDITIONS. 

171.  (a)  In  a  conditional  sentence  where  both 
the  condition  and  the  conclusion  are  contrary  to 
fact  the  verbs  of  both  clauses  are  put  in  the  subjunc- 
tive. The  imperfect  subjunctive  is  used  when  the 
statement  refers  to  the  present,  the  pluperfect  when 
it  refers  to  the  past. 

Ex.  Om  han  vore  hdr,  skulle  han  ge  mig  rdtt, 
if  he  were  here,  he  would  agree  with  me;  om  han 
hade  varit  sparsam,  sa  hade  han  ej  varit  fattig, 
if  he  had  been  economical  he  would  not  have  been 
poor. 

(h)  In  the  conclusion  the  subjunctive  forms  with 
skulle  are  very  often  used,  this  usage  corresponding 
exactly  to  the  English  usage  of  should  and  would 
{skulle  translates  both). 

Ex.  Jag  skulle  tro  honom,  om  han.sade  det,  I 
should  believe  him,  if  he  said  it;  jag  skulle  ha  kopt 
huset,  om  jag  hade  haft  pengar,  I  should  have 
bought  the  house  if  I  had  had  money. 

Note  1.  It  om  is  omitted,  the  conditional  clause  has  the  inverted  order : 
hade  jag  pengar,   sa   vore   jag  glad,   if   1  had   money,   I   should  be  glad. 

2.  If  the  conclusion  follows  it  is  frequently  introduced  by  sa  (translated  by 
then  or  left  untranslated). 

3.  The  compound  conjunction  sow,  om,  as  if,  very  often  introduces  an  unreal 
or  uncertain  condition.  If  om  is  omitted,  the  clause  must  have  the  inverted 
order:  han  talar,  som.  om  han  skulle  vara  rik,  or,  som  skulle  han  vara  rik. 


EXERCISE.  89 

Exercise  XIV. 

A.  Complete  the  following  by  adding  a  clause  express- 
ing condition  or  conclusion. 

1.  Hade  jag  black  och  penna,  sa  .  . .  2.  Om  ban  hade 
tid,  sa  ...  3.  Om  jag  inte  vore  sa  trott,  sa  . . .  4.  Om 
hon  icke  vore  f  orkyld,  sa .  . .  5.  Det  skulle  vara  mycket 
trevligt,  om  ...  6.  Eegnar  det  i  morgon,  sa  .  . .  7.  De 
bade  garna  gatt  med  oss,  om  ...  8.  Jag  skulle  ba  rest  till 
Stockholm,  om  . . . 

B.  1.  Skulle  ni  gora  en  resa  till  Sverige,  om  ni  bade 
tillfalle?  2.  Det  skulle  jag  visst  gora!  Om  min  bror  ej 
bade  blivit  sjuk  sa  hastigt,  hade  jag  rest  for  en  manad  se- 
dan. 3.  Om  jag  visste,  att  han  snart  skulle  bli  bra,  sk 
skulle  jag  losa  biljett  nu.  4.  Senare  blir  det  svart  att  fa 
en,  ty  batarna  aro  sa  upptagna  pa  sommaren.  5.  Vart  bar 
Karl  gatt?  Han  bar  gatt  for  att  kopa  morgontidningen, 
som  du  bad  om.  6.  Jag  bar  en  nyhet,  som  sakert  skall 
gladja  dig.  Jag  sag  var  gamle  van  Agrell  pa  gatan  i  mor- 
se. 7.  Han  hade  just  anlant  med  londonangaren  och  sade, 
att  ban  skulle  balsa  pa^  bos  dig  i  dag,  om  ban  finge  tid. 
8.  Han  talade,  som  om  han  hade  gjort  goda  affarer  i  Eng- 
land och  fortjant  mycket  pengar.  9.  Vet  du  om  herr  An- 
derson bar  salt  sin  lilla  villa  vid  Djursbolm?  10.  Ja,  han 
salde  den  i  gar  och  tick  mer,  an  han  hade  betalt  for  den. 
11.  Om  ban  ej  hade  salt  den,  sa  skulle  jag  ba  byrt  den 
for  sommaren.  12.  Hade  Karl  onskat  det,  sa  hade  man 
sakert  valt  honom  till  ordforande  i  foreningen.  13.  A-^em 
valde  man  i  stallet?  Det^  vet  jag  ej,  men  Karl  sade,  att 
ban  skulle  foresla  herr  Lindell. 

^IldUa  pa  with  main  stress  on  pa  signifies  to  pay  a  visit,  with  stress  on  haUa 
it  means  to  greet.  -Notice  word  order,  det  tror  jag  ej j  det  generally  conies 
first  in  expressions  of  this  kind. 

C.  Conversation.  1.  Vad  skulle  ni  gora,  om  ni  hade  till- 
falle?   2.  Varfor  reste  ni  ej  for  en  manad  sedan?    3.  Var- 

Swedish  Grammar.  ^ 


90  EXERCISE. 

for  skulle  det  vara  fordelaktigt  {advantageous)  att  losa 
biljett  nu?  4.  Nar  aro  batarna  mest  upptagna?  5.  Vad 
vill  du,  att  Karl  skall  gora  for  dig?  6.  Var  bar  du  lagt  tid- 
ningen  ?  7.  Vad  bar  var  van  Anderson  gjort  med  sin  prak- 
tiga  (fine)  villa  vid  Djursbolm?  8.  Bor  ban  ej  pa  Ian  det 
om  somrarna  langre?  9,  A'ad  skulle  du  ba  gjort,  om  ban 
ej  hade  salt  den?  10.  Varfor  valde  man  ej  Karl  till  ord- 
forande  i  klubben?  11.  Hade  man  valt  bonom,  om  ban 
bade  onskat  det? 

D.  1.  I  sbould  like^  to  take  a  trip  (B,  1)  to  Sweden 
next  summer.  2.  If  I  bad  money  and  time  I  sbould  cer- 
tainly go  with  you.  3.  Would  it  not  be  fine  (trevligt), 
if  you  could  accompany  me?  4.  You  could  not  choose  a 
better  (hdUre)  occasion.  5.  I  sbould  do  it  if  I  could  only 
sell  my  bouse.  6.  We  should  also  of  course  visit  Germany 
and  England.  7.  I  think  you  would  enjoy  yourself  very 
much  in  Stockholm.  8.  My  wife  does  not  dare  to  go  along ; 
she  is  afraid  of^  the  passage.  9.  I  never  get  (hiir)  sea-sick; 
I  have  grown  accustomed^  to  (vid)  the  sea.  10.  Have  you 
heard  whether  Mr.  Anderson  will  go*?  11.  He  would  have 
gone  a  month  ago,  if  be  had  gotten  a  ticket.  12.  Why  did 
he  not  get  a  ticket?  The  boats  were  all  full,  I  think  (trw 
jag).  13.  The  news,  which  you  brought  me  about  Agrell 
made  me  very  happy.  14.  I  thought  that  he  had  died  long 
ago.  15.  We  used  to  be  very  good  friends  and  I  was  sure 
{sdker  pa)  that  be  would  have  written  me,  had  he  been 
alive".  16.  He  has  been  in  England  ever  (dnda)  since  he 
left  Stockholm,  but  now  it  looks  as  if  be  intended  to  stay  in 
Sweden.  17.  I  am  glad  to  hear  that.  I  wish  he  would  call 
so  that  we  might  have  a  chat. 

^Skulle  oama  or  skulle  tycka  om  att.  To  be  afraid  of— att  vara  radd  for. 
'To  ^ow  accustomed — att  vanja  sig  vid;  accustomed  to,  van  vid.  ^English  go 
must  often  be  translated  by  resa,  fara.  Ska.  'Uae  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  of 
leva. 


VOCABULARY, 


91 


VOCABULARY. 


en  affar,  -er,  business 

an'ldnda,   lib,  -nde,   -nt,  -nd, 
-nt,  to  arrive 

ett  black,  — ,  ink 

bruka,  I,  to  use,  make  use  of 

fdlja,  lib,  to  follow 

folja  med',  to  accompany 

en  fore'ning,  -ar,  society 

fo'resld,  -slog,   -slogo,  -slagit, 
-en,  -et,  to  propose 

fortjd'na,    I,    to    earn,    make 
(money) 

en  gata,  -or,  street 

glddja  (168),  to  gladden,  make 
happy 

hastig,  -t,  rapid,  quick,  sudden 

hastigt    (adv.).  rapidly,   sud- 
denly 

hyra,  lib,  rent,  hire 

t  morse,  this  morning 

just  (adv.),  just 

en  londondngare,  -arna,  Lon- 
don steamer 


med   (prep,  and  adv.),  with, 
along 

en    mor'gontid'ning,    -ar,    a 
morning  paper 

en  mdnad,  -er,  month 

en  nyhet,  -er,  news 

en  ord'forande,  — ,  chairman 

en  penna,  -or,  pen 

riidd     (no     neuter),  afraid, 
timid 

sjosjuk,  -t,  sea-sick 

i  stdllet,  in  the  place  of 

svdr,  -t,  difficult 

sdker,  -t,  sure,  certain 

helt  sdkert,  certainly 

ett  tillfdlle,  -n,  chance,  oppor- 
tunity;  occasion 

trevlig,  -t,  pleasant,  fine 

upptagen,  -et,  occupied,  full 

visst  (adv.),  surely,  certainly 

dn,  yet,  than 

en  overresa,  -or,  voyage,  pas- 
sage 


Idioms:  1.  Han   har  nyss   kommit,  he  has  just  come 

2.  att  ha  mycket  roligt,  to  enjoy  oneself  very  much. 

3.  Det  gldder  mig,  I  am  happy  (or  pleased) 

4.  Man  har  valt  honom  till  president,  he  has  been 
elected  president 

5.  Han  dr  rddd  for  spoken,  he  is  afraid  of  ghosts. 


92 


POSSESSIVE    ADJECTIVES    AND    PRONOUNS. 


LESSON  XV. 
The  Possessive  Adjectives  and  Pronouns. 
172.    The  possessive  adjectives  and  pronouns  are : 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

MASC.   FEM. 

KEUTER 

ALL   GENDERS 

min 

.  mitt 

mina,  my 

din 

ditt 

dina,  thy,  your 

(hans) 

(hans) 

(hans) ,  his 

(hennes) 

(hennes) 

(hennes),  her 

(dess) 

(dess) 

(dess),  its  (gen.  of  den,  det) 

vdr 

vdrt 

vara,  our  . 

eder   (er) 

edert  (ert) 

edi'a  (era),  your 

(deras) 

(deras) 

(deras),  their 

sin 

sitt 

sina,  his,  her,  its,  their 

173.  The  genitive  of  the  corresponding  personal 
pronoun  is  used  as  a  possessive  in  the  third  person 
masculine,  feminine,  and  neuter.  These  forms  are 
invariable.  The  other  possessives  are  declined  ac- 
cording to  the  Indefinite  Declension  of  adjectives 
and  agree  in  gender  and  number  vi^ith  the  noun  they 
modify.  Ex. :  min  son,  my  son ;  mitt  barn,  my  child ; 
mina  bocker,  my  books;  hennes  son,  her  son;  haris 
booker,  his  books. 

1 74.  The  reflexive  possessive  sin  is  used,  for  all 
numbers  and  genders  of  the  third  person  but  must 
be  used  only  when  the  possessor  is  the  subject  of 
the  verb ;  as,  Karl  tog  sin  hatt,  Carl  took  his  (own) 
hat;  but,  Karl  tog  hans  hatt,  would  mean  that  he 
took  somebody  else's  hat.  Gossarna  visade  sina  lek- 
saker,  the  boys  showed  their  (own)  toys;  gossarna 
visade  deras  leksaker,  the  boys  showed  the  toys  of 
some  other  children. 


POSITIONS   OF   ADVKRBS.  93 

175.  The  possessives  are  used  also  as  pronouns; 
as,  hdr  dr  min  bok,  din  ligger  ddr,  here  is  my  book, 
yours  lies  there;  mma  ogon  dro  bid,  era  dro  bruna, 
my  eyes  are  blue,  yours  are  brown. 

FURTHER  REMARKS  ON  THE  POSSESSIVE. 

176.  The  possessives  are  often  combined  with 
the  adjective  egen,  eget,  pi.  egna,  own;  as,  mi7ia 
egna  ord,  my  own  words. 

177.  They  are  never  preceded  by  the  article 
except  in  such  expressions  as :  de  dina,  your  family, 
people;  de  mina,  my  family,  people;  de  vara,  our 
family  or  our  party. 

178.  Substitute  for  the  possessive  adjectives. 
The  definite  form  is  often  used  instead  of  the  pos- 
sessive adjective,  provided  there  is  no  ambiguity, 
particularly  when  the  thing  possessed  is  a  part  of 
the  body  or  an  article  of  clothing;  as,  han  har  for- 
lorat  hatten,  he  has  lost  his  hat ;  jag  har  ont  i  hjdr- 
tat,  I  have  a  pain  in  my  heart. 

Note.  The  possessor  especially  in  reflexive  constructions  is  often  represented 
by  an  object  pronoun :  han  brot  av  sig  benet,  he  broke  his  leg ;  tag  av  dig 
hatten,  take  off  your  hat ;  han  foil  och  slog  sig  i  huvudet,  he  fell  and  struck 
his  head. 

POSITION  OF  ADVERBS. 

179.  The  position  of  the  adverb  in  a  sentence 
depends  largely  on  its  relation  to  the  verb  and 
also  on  emphasis.  Only  a  few  special  rules  need  be 
given. 

(a)  There  are  in  Swedish  a  number  of  adverbs 
which  are  called  movable  adverbs.  In  an  independ- 
ent clause  these  follow  the  simple  verb  and  stand 
between  the  auxiliary  and  infinitive  or  participle 


94  EXERCIST!!. 

in  compound  tenses.  In  a  dependent  clause  these 
adverbs  precede  the  simple  verb  and  the  auxiliary 
of  a  compound  verb.  Such  movable  adverbs  are 
especially  the  adverbs  of  negation:  ej,  icke,  inte, 
not;  aldrig,  never;  certain  indefinite  temporal  ad- 
verbs, as,  alltid,  always;  jdmt,  continually;  snart, 
soon;  ndgonsin,  ever;  a  number  of  other  non- 
descriptive  adverbs  like  vdl,  I  suppose;  nog,  possi- 
bly, to  be  sure ;  tyvdrr,  unfortunately.  Ex. :  han  dr 
icke  sjuk,  he  is  not  sick;  han  sdger,  att  han  icke  dr 
sjuk,  he  says  he  is  not  sick ;  hans  bror  reste  snart  tiU 
Amerika,  his  brother  soon  went  to  America;  ha^is 
bror,  som  snart  reste  till  Amerika,  his  brother,  who 
soon  went  to  America ;  han  kan  nog  ha  rdtt,  he  may 
possibly  be  right;  jag  medger,  att  han  nog  kan  ha 
rdtt,  I  admit,  that  he  may  possibly  be  right. 

(b)  Descriptive  adverbs  as  a  rule  follow  the  in- 
finitive or  the  participle  when  the  verb  is  a  com- 
pound. No  adverbs  except  those  mentioned  above 
can  stand  between  the  verb  and  the  subject:  he 
often  used  to  come  is  in  Swedish,  han  brukade  ofta 
komma. 

Exercise  XV. 

A.  Turn  the  following  sentences  into  dependent  clauses 
by  prefixing  the  parenthesized  words,  noting  the  change  of 
position  of  the  adverbs. 

1.  (Han  sager,  att  . . .)  Han  har  aldrig  satt  vete  pa  sin 
aker.  2.  (Jag  tror,  att  .  . . )  De  amna  inte  annu  plantera 
sin  potatis.  3.  (Lantbnikaren  sade,  att  ... )  Man  maste 
forst  uppluckra  jorden  med  en  harv,  innan  man  kan  sa. 
4.  (Jag  ar  saker  pa  att  . .  . )  Vetet  kan  aldrig  vaxa  utan 
regn  och  solsken.    5.  (Sager  ni,  att  ...  ?)  Ni  skola  sakert 


EXEKCISK  95 

plantera  er  potatis  och  er  majs  nasta  vecka.  6.  (Vet  ni 
om  . . .  ?)  De  skola  snart  sa  sin  havre.  7.  (Jag  fruktar, 
att  . . . )  Det  daliga  vadret  kommer  mojligen  att  f orhindra 
arbetet  pa  falten. 

B.  Supply  the  possessive  adjectives  and  pronouns  indi- 
cated in  the  following.  1.  Har  ar  . . .  {our)  hus,  dar  ar 
...  {his).  2.  Herr  Wallin  ar  en  av  ...  {my)  vanner. 
3.  Fonstren  till  .  . .  (her)  rum  aro  stora.  4.  Hum  manga 
rum  har  . . .  {your)  hus?  5.  Karl  har  givit  mig  . . .  {his)^ 
pengar.  6.  Ha  barnen  fatt  .  . .  {their)^  laxor  an?  7.  Pas- 
sa  . . .  {your)  skor?  8.  .  . .  {his)  rock  passar  honom. 
9.  Jag  har  funnit  .  . .  {my)  bocker.  10.  Var  aro  . . . 
{yours,  polite).  11.  ...  {their)  faders  tradgard  ar  stor, 
men  . . .  {his)  hus  ar  mycket  litet.  12.  Han  tycker  om 
. . .  {our)  matsal,  men  ej  om  .  . .  {his  own)^.  13.  De  ha 
lagt-  .  . .  {my)  bocker  pa  . . .  {their)^  bord  (sing). 

^174.     ^Supine  of  lagga,  to  lay  (169). 

C.  1.  I  morgon  om  vadret  ar  vackert,  skola  vi  foretaga 
var  utflykt.  2.  Mamma  skall  packa  vara  korgar  i  kvall, 
pa  det  att  (sd  att  and  subj.  or  indie.)  de  ma  vara  fardiga 
tidigt  i  morgon.  3.  Hennes  syster,  som  ar  pa  besok^  i  vart 
hem  med  sin  lilla^  dotter,  skall  folja  med  oss.  4.  Vi  tycka 
mycket  om  deras  sallskap  och  onska,  att  de  matte  stanna 
lange  hos  oss.  5.  Vi  skola  stiga  upp  mycket  tidigt  och  fara 
med    den    elektriska    sparvagnen    till    jarnvagsstationen. 

6.  Nar  vi  komma  dit,  gar  en  av  oss  till  biljettkontoret  och 
koper  vara  Jarnvagsbiljetter,  och  sedan  stiga  vi  pa  taget. 

7.  Efter  en  halv  timmes  resa  stiga  vi  av  och  ga  till  en 
vacker  plats  i  skogen.  Var  och  en  bar  sitt  paket  eller  sin 
korg.  8.  Dar  packa  vi  upp  vara  korgar  och  duka  pa  graset, 
medan  en  av  edra  systrar  kokar  kaffet.  9.  Nar  vi  atit  och 
druckit,  springa  vi  omkring  och  leka.    1(X    Flickorna  ploc- 


96  EXERCISE. 

ka  blommor  och  pryda  med  dem  sina^  hattar.  11.  Pa  kval- 
len  taga  vi  taget  tillbaka  till  staden.  13.  Matte  det  bara 
ej  regna  i  morgon!  13.  Min  bror  Erik  klader  (klar)  sig. 
14.  Han  tvattar  sig  om  handerna*  och  i  ansiktet,  borstar 
tanderna  samt  kammar  haret.  15.  Sedan  tar  ban  pa  sig 
rocken,  satter  pa  sig  batten  och  ar  fardig  att  ga  ut. 

*Is  visiting.     ^Plural  and  definite  form  of  liten.     'Express  the  possessive  idea 
in  a  different  way  (178).     *Also,   tvattar  handema  och  ansiktet. 

D.  Conversation.  1.  Nar  gora  ni  er  utflykt  ?  2.  Varfor 
packade  er  mor  edra  korgar  pa  kvallen?  3.  Vem  var  pa 
besok  hos  er?  4.  Behagar  deras  sallskap  er?  5.  Hur 
komma  ni  till  stationen?  6.  Ar  det  en  hastsparvagn  eller 
en  elektrisk  sparvagn?  7.  Varfor  gar  ni  till  biljettkonto- 
ret?  8.  Hur  lange  racker  resan?  9.  Vad  gora  ni  med 
korgarna?  10.  Vad  gora  ni  efter  maten?  11.  Varmed 
pryda  flickorna  sina  hattar? 

E.  1.  I  wish  that  all  our  picnics  might  be  as  (sd)  agree- 
able as  (som)  ours  was  yesterday.  2.  The  weather  was  not 
very  pleasant  when  we  woke  up,  but  the  sun  soon^  began 
to  shine.  3.  Mother  had  packed  our  baskets  "in  (pa)  the 
evening  in  order  that  they  might  be  ready  early  in  the 
morning^.  4.  Her  sister  who  is  on  a  visit  with  (hos)  us 
likes  to  go  on  (med  pa)  excursions.  5.  We  took  the  street 
car  to  the  station  since  we  had  much  to  carry.  6.  When  we 
had  bought  our  tickets  we  boarded  (invert)  the  train  and 
rode  (for)  half  an  hour  (en  lialv  timma).  7.  We  un- 
packed our  baskets  in  the  woods  and  set  the  table  in  the 
grass.  8.  Who  made  the  coffee?  My  sister  Mary.  She 
makes  (kohar)  very  good  coffee.  9.  When  we  had  eaten  we 
had  a  great  deal  of  fun  (mychet  roligt),  we  played  games 
and  sang.  10.  In  the  evening  we  returned  to  the  city  by 
train.    11.  I  wish  that  you  had  been  with  us. 


VOCABULARY. 


97 


F.     1.  Wash^  your  liands  and  brush  your  teeth,  Eric. 

2.  Put  ou  your  coat  and  \ai.  Carl,  and  let  us  go  out. 

3.  Where  do  you  have  your  hat?  4.  Does  he  have  his  own 
(176)  hat  or  mine?  5.  Take  off  your  (178,  note)  hat 
when  you  come  into  the  room.  6.  Eric  struck  Carl  in  the 
head.  7.  Carl  struck  his  head  while  (niedan)  he  was 
skating. 

*In  English  adverbs  may  often  precede  the  simple  form  of  a  verb,  in  Swedish 
never,  except  as  stated  in  179,  a.  ^Tidigt  pa  morgonen;  sent  pa  kvdllen,  late 
in  the  evening.     ^Tvatta  dig  om  hdndema  (B,   14). 


ticket 


ett  ansikte,  -n,  face 
ett  besok,  — ,  visit 
en  biljett',  -er,  ticket 
ett   biljett^ kontor',  — 

office 
borsta,  I,  to  brush 
dricka,   drack,   drucko,   druc- 

kit,  -en,  -et,  to  drink 
dnka,  I,  to  set  the  table 
elektrisk,  -t,  electric 
fara  tillbaka,  to  return 
finna,  fann,  funno,  funnit,  -en, 

-et,  to  find 
fdrdig,  -t,  ready 
folja,  lib,  to  follow 
folja  med',  to  accompany 
(ett)  griis,  — ,  grass 
en  hand,  hunder,  hand 
en  hatt,  -ar,  hat 
ett  hdr,  — ,  hair 
fett)  kaffe  (generally  no  pi.) 

coffee 
kamma,  I,  to  comb 
koka,  I,  to  cook   (to  make), 

to  boil 
en  korg,  -ar,  basket 
leka,  I  la,  to  play 


VOCABULARY. 

en  mamma,  -or,  mother 
mamma    (in   address),   mama 
omkring  (adv.  and  prep.)  about, 

around 
packa,  I,  to  pack 
packa  upp',  to  unpack 
en  plats,  -er,  place 
passa,  I,  to  fit,  to  suit 
pryda,  lib,  to  adorn 
en  rock,  -ar,  coat 
ett  rum,  — ,  room 
sedan,  thereupon,  then 
sjunga,  sjong,  sjijngo,  sjungit, 

-en,  -et,  to  sing 
sld,  slog,  slogo,  slagit,  -en,  -et, 

to  strike 
snart,  soon 

en  skog,  -ar,  forest,  woods 
springa,     sprang,     sprungo, 

sprungit,  -en,  -et,  to  run 
ett  sdllskap,  — ,  company 
satta,  satte,  satte,  satt,  satt,  to 

put 
en  tand,  tander,  tooth 
tidig,  -t,  early 
tvatta,  I,  to  wash 
en  utflykt,  -er,  excursion 


98  PASSIVE. 

Idioms:  1.  Vi  hade  mycket  roligt,  we  enjoyed  ourselves  very 
much. 

2.  att  tviitta  sig  om  hdnderna,  i  ansiktet  to  wash 
one's  hands,   face. 

3.  att  stiga  pa  (av)  tdget,  to  get  on  (off)  the  train, 
5.  att  koka  kaffe,  to  ma"ke  coffee. 


LESSON  XVI. 

The  Verb  (Continued). 

THE  PASSIVE. 

180.  The  passive  is  formed  from  the  active 
either  by  adding  s  to  the  corresponding  form  of  the 
active,  or  by  combining  the  corresponding  tense  of 
the  auxiliary  hliva  (sometimes  vara  and  varda) 
with  the  perfect  participle  of  the  verb. 

THE    PASSIVE    IN    -S. 

181.  This  passive  is  less  common  in  conversation 
than  that  formed  by  means  of  the  auxiliary  verb 
hliva,  for  which  see  188.  This  -s  is  a  remnant  of 
the  reflexive  pronoun  sig  (old  form  sik)  extended 
by  analogy  to  the  first  and  second  persons. 

Note  1.  The  r  in  the  present  indicative  singular  endings  -ar,  -er,  -r  is  al- 
ways eliminated  and  quite  often  the  e  in  the  ending  -er;  as,  artive  jag  hollar, 
passive  jag  hollas,  I  am  called ;  active  jag  griper,  passive  jag  gripes,  I  am 
seized ;  det  finnes  or  del  finns,  there  is  found  or  there  is. 

2.  The  prea.  ind.  pi.  (with  the  exception  of  the  archaic  second  person  in 
-ens)  of  the  Second  and  Fourth  Conjugations  ends  in  -as  (s  is  added  to  the 
corresponding  active  form)  and  not  in  -es,  an  error  to  which  beg^inners  are 
liable:  mannishor  finnas,  there  are,  (are  found)  men. 

3.  In  the  compound  forms  s  is  added  to  the  supine  or  infinitive:  hon  har 
dodats,  he  has  been  killed ;  rdgen  shall  sds  (from  sa)  i  morgon,  the  rye  will  be 
sown  to-morrow. 

182.  Examples  of  the  passive  of  the  verbs  att 
kalla,  to  call ;  att  gripa,  to  seize ;  att  binda,  to  bind. 


PASSIVE.  90 

(1)  kallas,  to  be  called. 

INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

PRESENT 

Sg.  jag  kallas,  etc.  jag  kalles  or  ma  kallas,  etc. 

PI.    vi  kallas,  etc.  vi  kalles  or  ma  kallas,  etc. 

IMPERFECT 

Sg.  jag  kallades,  etc.         /agr  kallades  or  matte, 

skulle  kallas,  etc. 

PI.    vi  kallades,  etc.  vi  kallades  or  matte,  skulle 

kallas,  etc. 

FUTURE 

Sg.  jag  skall  kallas 
PL    vi  skola  kallas 

PERFECT 

Sg.  yas'  ^ar  kallats,  etc.     ^a^r  md  /ia  kallats,  etc. 
PI.    ■^;^  /m  kallats,  etc.        f  ?  md  /ia  kallats,  etc. 

PLUPERFECT 

Sg.  /as'  hade  kallats,  etc.  /agr  /lade  kallats  or  matte 

ha  kallats,  etc. 

PI.    t?i  /i.ade  kallats,  etc.     t'i  /lacZe  kallats,  or  matte 

ha  kallats,  etc. 

FUTURE  PERFECT 

Sg.  /aflf  sA^aZ?  /la  kallats,  etc. 
PI.    ^"i  s/(;oto  ha  kallats,  etc. 

INFINITIVES 

Present,    att  kallas 
Perfect,     att  ha  kallats 
Future,      att  skola  kallas 

(2)  gripas,  to  be  seized  bindas,  to  be  bound 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS 

gHpa,  grep,  grepo,  gripit,     hinda,  hand,  hundo, 
gripen  huvdit,  bunden 


100  PASSIVE. 

INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

PRESENT 

Sg.  jag  gripes,  bindes  jag  gripes,  bindes 

PI.    vi  gripas,  bindas  vi  gripes,  bindes 

IMPERFECT 

Sg.  jag  greps,  bands  jag  grepes,  bundes 

PI.    vi  grepos,  bundos  vi  grepes,  bundes 

The  compound  forms  are  conjugated  like  kalla; 
thus,  jag  ma  bindas,  matte  bindas;  vi  matte  ha 
bundits;  vi  skola  bindas;  de  ha  gripits,  etc. 

Note.  In  verba  with  present  in  -er  e  is  very  often  eliminated  in  conversa- 
tion ;  thuB  jag  grips,  I  am  seized  ;  jag  hors,  I  am  heard. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  PASSIVE. 

183.  The  agent  of  a  passive  action  is  expressed 
by  the  preposition  av.  The  agent  may  be  either 
personal  or  impersonal.  Instrument  is  usually 
expressed  by  med  (medelst) :  han  dodades  av  sin 
fiende  med  ett  svdrd,  he  was  killed  by  his  enemy 
with  a  sword. 

184.  Substitute  for  the  passive.  When  some 
personal  agent  is  implied  but  not  expressed,  Swe- 
dish prefers  the  indefinite  pronoun  man,  one,  they, 
with  the  active  voice;  as,  man  kallar  mig,  instead 
of  jag  kallas,  I  am  being  called;  man  sdger  or  det 
sages,  it  is  said. 

Note.  Sometimes  a  reflexive  construction  is  employed ;  thus,  blyet  bojer  sig 
Idtt  (blyet  bojes  latt),  lead  is  easily  bent  (can  easily  be  bent).  This  con- 
struction generally  conveys  an  idea  of  possibility. 

185.  The  apparent  or  false  passive. 

Since  English  uses  the  verb  to  be  and  the  past 
participle  to  represent  the  subject  both  as  under- 
going the  action  of  the  verb,  as  in  the  door  is  shut 


PASSIVE.  101 

(is  being  shut),  which  is  a  real  passive,  and  also  as 
being  in  the  state  or  condition  resulting  from  the 
action,  as  in  the  door  is  shut  (has  been  shut  before), 
which  may  be  called  a  false  passive,  great  care  must 
be  taken  to  distinguish  between  the  true  passive  and 
the  apparent  or  false  passive.  The  latter  is  expressed 
in  Swedish  by  vai'a,  to  be,  and  the  past  participle 
of  the  verb,  which  as  any  other  adjective  agrees 
with  the  subject  in  number  and  gender;  as,  dorr  en 
dr  stdngd,  the  door  is  (in  the  state  of  being)  shut; 
dorren  stdnges,  or  man  stdnger  dbrren,  the  door 
is  being  closed. 

186.    Idiomatic  meanings  of  the  passive. 

(a)  The  passive  in  -s  has  very  often  a  reciprocal 
meaning.  Ex. :  de  motas  ofta,  they  meet  one  another 
often  (literally,  they  are  met  often)  ;  barnen  klap- 
pas  och  kyssas,  the  children  caress  and  kiss  one 
another  (literally,  are  caressed,  etc.). 

(b)  Sometimes  it  is  used  absolutely,  denoting 
habit,  characteristics,  etc.  Ex.:  Hasten  bits  (pro- 
nounced with  short  i) ,  the  horse  bites  (has  the  habit 
of  biting)  ;  pappa,  Karl  knuffas,  papa,  Carl  is  push- 
ing me. 

Note  1.  It  is  best  to  avoid  using  the  -s  form  of  a  verb  which  is  often  used 
in  the  reciprocal  or  even  absolute  sense  when  it  is  not  accompanied  by  an 
agent  or  other  modifier  which  obviates  the  ambiguity  ;  de  knuffades  can  hardly 
mean  anything  else  than  they  pushed  one  another,  (reciprocal)  or,  they  pushed 
(absolute);  on  the  contrary,  de  knuffades. .  .av  honom,  or,...  at  sidan,  they 
were  pushed... by  him,  or... to  the  side,  have  passive  force.  In  the  first  case 
we  would  invariably  say,  de  blevo  knuffade.  (The  teacher  should  give  other 
examples. ) 

2,  When  used  in  the  absolute  sense  verbs  of  the  Second  and  Fourth  Conjuga- 
tions take  -s,  not  -es  (181,  1)  ;  there  is  also  a  shortening  of  the  vowel:  katten 
rivs  (pronounced  with  short  t),  the  cat  scratches;  rives  would  mean  is  being 
torn.  The  passive  in  its  true  as  well  as  its  reciprocal  use  generally  takes  -es 
»nd  there  is  no  shortening  of  the  vowel. 


]  02  EXERCISE. 

187.    Impersonal  passive. 

The  passive  voice,  especially  the  form  in  -s,  is 
often  used  impersonally.  Even  intransitive  verbs 
that  lack  personal  passive  forms  may  thus  be  used: 
det  tolas  for  mycket  hdr,  there  is  too  much  talking 
here;  det  har  inte  spelats  i  dag,  there  has  been  no 
playing  to-day;  hdr  dtes  och  soves  jdmt,  here  they 
eat  and  sleep  all  the  time. 

Note  1.     Man  with  the  active  would  be  less  stiff  in  sudi  cases. 
2.     Note  such  impersonal  passive  expressions  as,  det  har  herdttats  mig,  I  have 
been  told. 

•  Exercise  XVI, 

A.  Continue  through  all  persons  of  the  singular  and 
plural. 

I.  Man  tackar  mig,  man  tackar  dig,  etc.  (/  am  leing 
thanked,  etc.,  pres.,  impf.,  and  perf.)  2.  Man  kallar  mig, 
etc.  (7  am  being  called,  etc.,  pres.,  future,  and  pluperf.). 

Turn  the  following  sentences  into  the  passive  form. 

3.  Har  han  salt  huset^?  4.  Den  store  forfattaren  von 
Heidenstam  holl  ett  tal  den  forsta  maj.  5.  Jag  har  betalt 
rakningen.  6.  Yem  skall  mota  honom  vid  stationen? 
7.  En  hund  bet  mig  i  benet.  8.  En  poliskonstapel  skot 
hunden  med  en  revolver.  9.  Man  arresterade  agaren  till 
hunden  (also  hundens  agare).  10.  Eatten  (the  court) 
botfallde  (fined)  honom. 

Turn  into  the  active  with  man  as  subject : 

II.  Skall  huset^  saljas?  12.  Har  han  valts  till  ordfo- 
rande?    13.  Dansades  det  har  i  gar? 

*The  subject  in  the  active  becomes  the  agent  in  the  passive  (183).  *The 
subject  becomes  object ;   for  construction  with  man,  see  184. 

B.  1.  Detta  ar  ett  vetebrods  historia.  2.  Pa  hosten 
plojer  bonden  en  del  av  sin  aker  och  sar  vetet;  detta  kallas 


EXERCISE.  103 

vintervete.  3.  Medan  vadret  annu  ar  varmt,  gror  vetet. 
4.  Da  vintern  kommer  med  kold  och  sno,  slutar  vetet  att 
vaxa.  5.  Om  den  unga  brodden  ej  tacktes  med  sno,  sa 
skulle  den  frysa  bort,  men  snon  skyddar  den  mot  kolden. 
6.  Pa  varen,  nar  snon  har  smalts  av  solstralarna,  borjar 
vetet  att  vaxa,  och  pa  sommaren  mognar  det.  7.  Da  av- 
meja  bonderna  det  och  kora  det  till  logen,  dar  det  troskas. 
8.  Nar  vetet  har  troskats,  kores  det  till  kvarnen,  och  dar 
males  det  till  mjol,  som  sedan  av  bagaren  forvandlas  till 
brod. 

C.  1.  Vill  du  ha  en  skiva  av  detta  vetebrod  till  ditt 
kaffe,  Erik?  2.  Nej,  giv  mig  hellre  en  skiva  av  ragbrodet, 
sa  ar  pappa  snail.  3.  Det  har  legat  pa  bordet  sedan  i  gar 
och  ar  torrt.  4.  Brodet  ar  ej  sa  gott,  som  det  brukar  vara, 
denna  gang  har  Anna  ej  lyckats  riktigt. 

D.  Conversation.  1.  Vad  gor  bonden  pa  hosten?  2.  Plo- 
jer  ban  hela  sin  aker?     3.  Varfor  gror  vetet  pa  hosten? 

4.  Nar  mognar  vetet?  5.  Vad  tjanst  {service)  gor  snon 
det  unga  vetet?  6.  Vid  vilken  arstid  borjar  brodden  ater 
att  vaxa  ?  7.  Av  vem  har  vetet  avmejats  ?  8.  Vart  forslar 
man  vetet?  9.  Vad  gor  man  med  det  dar?  10.  Till  vem 
skall  vetet  saljas?  11.  A^ad  gor  han  med  det?  12.  Av 
vilket  brod  vill  ni  ha  en  skiva  ? 

E.  1.  The  field  has  been  plowed  by  the  farmer.  2.  I  do 
not  believe  that  the  wheat  has  been  sowed  yet.  3.  What  is 
the  wheat  called  that  is  sowed  in  the  fall  ?  4.  It  is  called 
winter  wheat  and  it  is  regarded  as  (sow)  the  best  (hdsta). 

5.  This  wheat  sprouts  in  the  fall  before  (innan)  the  winter 
comes.  6.  It  is  protected  by  the  snow,  which  covers  it; 
otherwise  it  would^  be  damaged  by  the  frost.  7.  It  begins 
to  grow  again-  in  the  spring  and  ripens  in  the  summer. 
8.  The  farmer  savs  that  the  wheat  will  be  cut  to-morrow 


104 


VOCABULARY. 


and  he  hopes  that  the  weather  will  be  (use  pres.)  fine, 
9.  The  wheat  which  was  threshed  yesterday  has  been  hauled 
to  the  flour  mill  to-day.  10.  It  has  been  bought  by  the 
miller,  who  will  grind  it  to  flour,  which  he  will  sell  to  the 
baker. 

F.  1.  Is  there  any  (ndgot)  bread  in  the  house?  I  am 
so  hungry.  2.  Yes,  there  is  {Mr  dr)  a  loaf  of  white  bread 
here,  but  it  is  dry.  3.  This  {delta)  bread  is  excellent. 
Sister  Anne  has  had  good  luck  with  {lyckats  med)  her 
bread  this  {denna)  time. 

^Use  skuUc  and   invert.     'Ater  directly  after  main  verb. 
Note.     When  the  next  lesson  has  been  mastered,  go  back  and  substitute  the 
passive  with  bliva  wherever  it  is  possible. 


VOCABULARY. 


anse,  ansdg,  -sdgo  -sett,  -sedd, 

-tt,  to  regard 
annars,  otherwise 
arreste'ra.  I,  to  arrest     • 
av'meja,  I,  to  cut 
baka,  I,  to  bake 
ett  ben,  — ,  bone,  leg 
bita,  bet,  beto,  bitit,  -en,  -et, 

to  bite 
en  brodd,  sprout 


en  loge^,  -ar,  threshing  floor, 
granary 

mala,  lib,  to  grind 

(ett)  mjol  (no  pi.),  flour 

en  mjolnare,  — ,  miller 

mogna,  I,  to  ripen 

mot,  against 

ploja,  lib,  to  plow 

en  polis'konstapel,  -lar,  police- 
man 


frysa  borV,  fros  bort,  froso  — ,  en  revolver,  -rar,  revolver 
frusit  — ,  bortfrusen,  -et,     en  skiva,  -or,  slice 
to  be  killed  by  frost 


forste,  -a,  first 

forvandla,  I,  to  transform 

gro.  III,  to  sprout 

hellre,  rather 

en  hund,  -ar,  dog 

en  host,  -ar,  fall 

en  kvarn,  -ar,  flour  mill 

(en)  kold  (no  pi.)  cold,  frost 

kora,  lib,  to  drive,  to  haul 


skjuta,    skot,    skoto,    skjutit, 

skjuten,  -et,  to  shoot 
skydda,  I,  to  protect 
sluta,  I,  to  stop,  close   (also 

slot,  sloto,  slutit) 
(en)  sno,  snow 
smdlta,  Ila,  or  IV,  to  melt 
en  solstrdle,  -ar,   sunbeam 
sd,  III,  to  sow,  to  plant 
torr,  -t,  dry 


PASSIVE.  105 

troska,  I,  to  thresh  en  vdr,  -ar,  spring 

(ett)  vete,  wheat  dter,  again 

en  vinter,  -rar,  winter  en  dgare,  — ,  owner 

V  is  hard  in  lotje   {g,   k  and  sk  are  always  hard  before  a  soft  vowel  in  an 
unaccented   ending.) 


LESSON  XVII. 
The  Verb  (Continued) 
PASSIVE  WITH  AUXILIARIES. 

188,  The  passive  voice  can  also  be  formed  by 
combining  the  corresponding  tense  of  the  auxiliary 
verb  bliva  (bli),  to  become  (also,  lo  remain),  with 
the  past  participle  (not  the  supine)  of  the  verb, 
which  agrees  in  number  and  gender  with  the  sub- 
ject. Occasionally  the  verbs  varda,  to  become,  and 
vara,  to  be,  are  used  as  auxiliaries. 

189.  Passive  of  the  verbs  tro,  to  believe;  binda, 
to  bind: 

INDICATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

PRESENT 

Sg.  jag  blir  trodd,  bunden    jag  blive  trodd,  bunden 
vi  bli(va)  trodda,  vi  blive  trodda,  bundna 

bundna 

IMPERFECT 

Sg.  jag  blev  trodd,  bun-        jag  bleve  trodd,  bunden 

den 
PL    vi  blevo  trodda,  vi  bleve  trodda,  bundna 

bundna 

FUTURE 

Sg.  jag  shall  bli(va)  trodd,  bunden 
PI.    vi  skola  bli(va)  trodda,  bundna 

Swedish  Grammar  R 


106  PASSIVE. 


4 


PEBFECT 


Sg".  jag  har  blivit  trodd,  jag  ma  ha  blivit  trodd, 

bunden  bunden 

PI.    vi  ha  blivit  trodda,  vi  ma  ha  blivit  trodda, 

bundna  bundna 


PLUPERFECT 


Sg.  jag  hade  blivit  trodd,  jag  hade  blivit  trodd, 

bunden  bunden 

PI.    vi  hade  blivit  trodda,  vi  hade  blivit  trodda, 

bundna  bundna 

FUTURE  PERFECT 

Sg.  jag  shall  ha  blivit  trodd,  bunden 
PI.    vi  skola  ha  blivit  trodda,  bundna 

PRESENT    INFINITIVE 

att  bli(va)    trodd,    bunden 

PERFECT    INFINITIVE 

att  ha  blivit  trodd,  bunden 

JJoTE.     The   other   subjunctives   are    formed   as   shown   above ;    thus,    jag    ma 
hU(va)  trodd,  vi  skulle  ha  blivit  bundna,  etc. 

190.    Other  auxiliaries  of  the  passive. 

(1)  Varda  (vart,  vordo,  vorden),  which  is  con- 
jugated with  the  verb  vara  instead  of  hava  in  the 
perfect  tenses.  Ex. :  Jag  varder  kallad,  I  am  called ; 
han  vart  kallad,  he  was  called ;  vi  dro  vordna  kallade, 
we  have  been  called;  du  shall  varda  kallad,  thou 
wilt  be  called.  The  beginner  may  disregard  this  for- 
mation of  the  passive  entirely  since  it  is  obsolete; 
the  imperfect  tense,  however,  is  of  comparatively 
frequent  occurrence. 

(2)  Vara  is  generally  used  only  in  the  apparent 
or  false  passive  (185) ,  that  is,  to  express  a  condition 
or  state;  as,  huset  dr  brunnet,  the  house  is  burnt. 


PASSIVE,  107 

Sometimes,  however,  it  comes  very  near  expressing 
a  true  passive:  han  dr  omtyckt  av  alia,  he  is  liked 
by  all ;  jag  dr  pldgad  av  mygg,  I  am  troubled  by  mos- 
quitoes. 

191.  Too  much  stress  cannot  be  laid  upon  the 
fact  that  in  the  overwhelming  majority  of  cases 
passive  action  is  not  expressed  in  Swedish  by  vara. 
to  be,  and  the  past  participle  as  in  English,  but  by 
hliva  and  the  past  participle,  or  by  the  passive  in  -s 
(note  also  construction  with  man,  184)  ;  thus,  the 
house  was  built  in  a  month,  is  not  huset  var  byggt 
pa  en  mdnad,  hut  huset  byggdes,  or  huset  blev  byggt 
(also,  man  byggde  huset). 

Note.  But  since  vara  plus  the  past  participle  indicates  a  state  or  condition 
regarded  as  complete  and  permanent,  and  as  resulting  from  the  action  of  the 
verb  (185)  its  present  plus  the  past  participle  is  often  used  as  an  equivalent 
for  the  English  perfect  passive  and  its  imperfect  plus  the  past  participle  as  an 
equivalent  for  the  English  pluperfect  passive.  As:  brevet  ar  skrivet,  the  letter 
has  been  written ;  posten  var  redan  uthuren,  the  mail  had  already  been  dis- 
tributed. 

FURTHER  REMARKS  ON  THE  PASSIVE. 

192.  The  passive  in  -s  is  preferred  to  the  passive 
with  bliva  in  expressions  denoting  a  common  rule, 
a  general  fact,  an  injunction  or  direction;  as,  sddana 
brott  straffas  med  fdngelse,  such  crimes  are  pun- 
ished with  imprisonment ;  flaskan  forvaras  pa  is,  the 
bottle  should  be  kept  on  ice;  de  hdr  skorna  skola 
lagas,  these  shoes  are  to  be  repaired ;  jag  kallas 
Johan,  I  am  called  John ;  but  jag  blir  kallad  feg,  om 
jag  ej  gor  det,  I  shall  be  called  a  coward  if  I  do  not 
do  this ;  on  the  contrary,  han  kallas  feg  av  var  man, 
he  is  called  a  coward  by  everybody. 

Note.  The  passive  with  hliva  is  more  common  in  conversation  than  the 
■s    form.     These  two   passives   are   often    interchangeable ;    sometimes,   ho'vever. 


108  EXERCISE. 

they  express  different  shades  of  meaning.  For  instance,  when  no  agent  is  men- 
tioned, the  passive  with  bliva  seems  to  imply  a  definite  agent.^hile  the  -s  form 
very  often  imparts  a  sense  of  indefiniteness :  floden  fylldea  seems  to  point  to  a 
slow  natural  process,  whereas  floden  blev  fylld  would  imply  action  on  the  part 
of  some  definite  agent.  If  the  agent  is  expressed,  both  forms  may  be  used 
without  any  difference  in  meaning. 

193.  The  present  of  hliva  has  generally  a  future 
sense;  this  is  also  the  case  in  the  passive:  frukten 
blir  skadad  av  frosten,  the  fruit  will  be  damaged 
by  the  frost.  To  express  the  present,  use  either 
the  present  of  the  passive  in  -s,  or  man  with  the 
active,  or  make  the  agent  the  subject. 

Deponent  Verbs. 

194.  Many  verbs  have  only  the  passive  -s  form. 
These  deponent  verbs  are  active  in  meaning;  many 
are  even  transitive.  They  are  conjugated  like  the 
passive  of  other  verbs  except  that  some  have  imper- 
ative forms,  which  are  wanting  in  the  passive. 
Some  have  a  present  participle  in  -s,  others  one 
without.    Most  deponent  verbs  lack  this  form. 

Ex.:  latas  (from  lat,  lazy),  to  be  lazy;  vredgas 
(from  vred,  angry),  to  be  (grow)  angry;  vdras 
(from  vdr,  spring) ,  to  turn  spring ;  brottas,  to  wres- 
tle; andas,  to  breathe;  lyckas,  to  succeed;  minnas, 
to  remember. 

Exercise  XVIJ. 

A.  Conjugate  the  following  both  as  indicated  and  with 
the  -s  form  of  the  passive. 

1.  Jag  har  blivit  beromd  av  min  larare;  du  bar  blivit 
beromd  av  din  larare,  etc.  2.  Jag  skall  icke  bli  klandrad 
av  min  fader,  etc.     3.  Jag  kom  ej ;  ty  jag  hade  ej  blivit 


EXERCISE.  '  ion 

kallad;  du  kom  ej,  ty  du,  etc.  4.  Jag  skulle  ha  blivit 
klandrad,  om  jag  ej  hade  hjiilpt  honom;  du  skulle  ha  blivit 
klandrad,  om  du  ej  hade  hjalpt  honom,  etc.  5.  Om  jag 
hade  blivit  agad  mera,  nar  jag  var  liten,  sa  hade  jag  blivit 
en  battre  manniska;  om  du,  etc.  —  Use  also  the  active 
with  man,  leaving  out  "av  min  Idrare"  and  "av  min  fader." 

B.  1.  Ar^  hela  huset  forstort?  Ja,  allt  ar^  uppbrant. 
Utom  nagra  gamla  mobler  har  intet  blivit^  raddat.  2.  Vet 
man  hur  elden  uppstod?  Icke  sakert,  men  man  tror,  att 
den  har  blivit^  anlagd.  3.  Kan  herrn  saga  mig,  om  museet 
iir^  stangt  hela  sondagen?  Nej,  det  ar  det  inte,  men  det 
oppnas^  ej  forran  pa  eftermiddagen.  4.  Vill  du  taga  de 
liiir*  skorna  till  skomakaren,  Karl,  det  har  paret  skall  halv- 
sulas',  och  pa  det  har  skola  klackarna  lagas^.  5.  Du  ser  sa 
trott  ut.  Har  du  ej  sovit  gott?  Nej,  jag  har  plagats  av 
en  sa  svar  tandvark  hela  natten.  6.  Jag  brukade  ocksa 
plagas  av  tandvark,  men  nu  ha  alia  mina  ihaliga  tander 
blifvit  plomberade^.  7.  Herr  Lind  dodades  vid  jarnvags- 
olyckan,  som  skedde  i  gar.  8.  Jag  skulle  ha  tagit  samma 
tag,  men  man  radde  mig  att  ej  resa.  9.  Har  aro  vi  hos  ur- 
makaren,  han  har  blivit  rekommenderad^  till  mig  av  en 
van,  och  jag  hoppas,  att  han  lyckas  laga  min  klocka.  10. 
Vad  ar  fatt  med  den?  Den  har  stannat.  Jag  tror  att 
fjadern  ar^  avbruten,  dessutom  behover  verket  nog  att  ren- 
goras.  11.  Nu  har  den  blivit  rengjord,  uppdragen  och 
justerad;  den  saktar  sig®  ej  mer.  12.  I  dag  blev  jag  vackt 
av  min  van  Berggren,  innan  det  dagades.  13.  Vi  rodde  ut 
pa  sjon,  fiskarna  nappade  bra,  och  innan  klockan  sju  voro 
tjugu  stora  abborrar  upptagna^ 

*See  190,  2,  and  185.  *-s  fonn  can  be  used.  '192.  *De  har,  these;  de  dar, 
those.     "192,  note.     'En  Iclocka  fortar  sig  or  saktar  sig,  gains  or  loses  time. 

C.  I  have  heard  that  Mr.  Anderson's  house  has  been 
destroyed  by  fire.     Has  nothing  been  saved  ?     2.  I  do  not 


110  VOCABULAEY. 

believe  that  they  succeeded  in  saving  anything  except  some 
old  pieces  of  furniture.  3.  I  have  seen  in  the  paper  that 
Mr.  Lind  was  killed  in  the  railroad  accident  which 
happened  yesterday.  4.  I  knew  him  well,  but  I  was  never 
introduced  to  him.  5.  Just  think  (tank  hara),  I  should 
have  taken  the  same  train  if  I  had  not  been  advised 
by  a  friend  not  to  go.  6.  Now  I  shall  not  be  troubled^  by 
toothache  any  longer,  for  my  hollow  tooth  has  been  filled^. 
7.  Where  does  the  shoemaker  live?  I  have  a  pair  of  shoes 
that  need  to  be  repaired^.  8.  These  shoes  are  to  be  half- 
Goled^.  9.  My  watch,  which  had  stopped,  has  been  repaired^ 
by  the  watchmaker.  10.  It  has  been  cleaned  and  regulated^ 
and  I  hope  that  it  will  keep  good  time*  now.  Mr.  Halldin 
is  an  excellent  watchmaker;  he  was  recommended^  to  me 
by  a  friend.  He  is  a  man  who  deserves  to  be  recom- 
mended^. 

^Presenterad    for.     'Passive    in    -s.     'Passive   with    bliva.     *Keep    good    time, 
gd  riitt. 

VOCABULARY. 

en  ah'borre,  -ar,  perch  fortjd'na,  I   (sometimes  Ila), 

an'lilgga,  -lade,  -lagt,  -lagd,  -t,  to  deserve,  earn 

to  establish;  anldgga  eld,     haWsula,  I,  to  half-sole 
to  cause  arson  hoppas  (dep.  v.),  I,  impf.  hop- 

av'bruten  (p.  part,  of  av'bryta  pades,  to  hope 

and   bryta  av',   to   break    i'hdlig,  -t,  hollow 
off),  broken  intet,  nothing 

doda,  I,  to  kill  juste'ra  (j=sh),  I,  to  adjust, 

en  eld,  -ar,  iire,  conflagration  regulate 

fatt,  in  expressions  like  taga    en  jdrn'vagsolycka,  -or,  rail- 
fatt  pd,  to  lay  hold  of;  way  accident 

vad  dr  det  fatt?  What  is      en  klack,  -ar,  heel 
the  matter?  en  klocTca,  -or,  clock,  watch;    . 

en  fjdder,  -drar,  feather,  main-        bell 

spring  laga,  I,  to  mend 

forrdn  (adv.),  before  en  motel,  -ler,  piece  of  fur- 

forsto'ra,  lib,  to  destroy  niture 


DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS. 


in 


I 


nappa,  I,  to  bite  (of  fish) 
plomWra,  I,  to  fill  (teeth) 
plaga,   I,   to   pain,   torment, 

trouble 
presente'ra,  I,  to  introduce 
ren'gora,    rengjorde,    etc.,    to 

clean 
rucla,  lib,  to  advise 
rddda,  I,  to  save 
sakta,  I,  to  reduce  speed,  slow 

up 
en  sko'makare,  — ,  shoemaker 
stiinga,  lib,  to  close,  shut 
siiker,  -t,  sure(ly),  certain  (ly) 
en  sondag,  -ai;  Sunday 


en  tand,  tiinder,  tooth 
(en)  tandvdrk,  toothache 
upp'briint  (p.  part,  of  upp'briin- 

na  and  brdnna  upp',  to  burn 

up),  burnt  up 
upp'dragen  (p.  part,  of  upp'dra- 

ga  and  draga  upp',  to  pull 

up,   wind    up),   wound    up, 

pulled  up 
upp'std,  -stod,  -stodo,  -stdtt,  to 

originate;  arise 
en  ur'makare,  — ,  watchmaker 
utom,  beside 

ett  verk,  — ,  work;  movement 
vid,  in 


LESSON  XVIII. 
Demonstrative  Pronouns. 

195.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  are:  den,  det, 
this,  that;  denne(a),  delta,  this;  densamme(a),  det- 
samma,  the  same.    They  are  declined  as  follows : 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

MASC.    &    FEM. 

GEXDEH    FORM 

NEUTER 

ALL    GENDERS 

Nom,  den 

den 

det 

de 

Gen.    dens 

dess 

dess 

deras 

Obj.     den 

den 

det 

dem 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

MASC. 

FEM.  &   GENDER  F. 

NEUTER 

ALL  GENDERS 

N.  denne(a)  denna  detta  dessa 

G.  demies  dennas  deltas  dessas 

N.  densamme(a)  densamma    delsamma    desamma 
G.  densammes      densammas  delsammas  desammas 

Note.     Dens  refers  only  to  persons,  dess  only  to  things,  except  occasionally  in 
poetry.     Det  is  pronounced  da  or  de  in  conversation. 


112  DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

196.  These  are  used  also  as  adjectives,  but  have 
then  no  genitive.  There  is  besides  a  demonstrative 
adjective  samme,  same,  which  is  used  more  fre- 
quently than  densamme  and  inflects  as  follows : 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

MASC.      FEM.  &  GEND.  F.         NEUTER      ALL  GENDERS 

samme  (a)      samma  samma  samma 

197.  The  following  adjectives  partake  of  the 
nature  of  demonstratives  and  may  also  be  used  as 
pronouns  in  the  plural  and  in"  the  neuter  singular : 
sddan,  sadaiit,  sddana,  such;  likadan,  -t,  -a,,  like, 
alike;  dylik,  -t,  -a,  such,  similar.  Ex.:  en  sddan 
gosse,  such  a  boy;  dylikt  har  jag  aldrig  sett  forr, 
I  have  never  seen  such  a  thing  (or  things)  before. 

198.  Den  har,  this,  and  den  ddr,  that,  used  orig- 
inally only  in  conversation,  are  rapidly  finding  their 
way  into  the  written  language.  They  are  declined 
as  follows: 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

MASC.  FEM.  GENDER  FORM     NEUTER  ALL  GENDERS 

Nom.  and  Obj. : 

den  har,  ddr  det  har,  ddr  de  har,  ddr     ♦ 

(Genitive  lacking.) 

Ex.  Den  har  hasten  dr  vacker,  den  vill  jag  kopa, 
this  horse  is  fine,  I  wish  to  buy  it;  det  ddr  huset 
tillhor  visst  herr  Carlen,  I  think  that  house  belongs 
to  Mr.  Carlen;  de  ddr  rosorna  dro  hdrliga,  those 
roses  are  beautiful.  (After  den  hdr  and  den  ddr, 
the  noun  takes  the  definite  form.) 

199.  The  former  and  the  latter  are  expressed  by 
den  fdrre(a)  (neut.  det  forra,  pi.  de  forr  a)  and  den 


DEM02;STRATIVE    PRONOUNS.  113 

senare  (neut.  det  senare,  pi.  de  senare)  :  Anna  och 
Emma  dro  sijstraj^;  den  forra  dr  Ijus,  den  senare 
mork,  Anna  and  Emma  are  sisters ;  the  former  is  a 
blonde,  the  latter  a  brunette. 

Note.  When  used  substantively,  these  expressions  take  an  -a  in  the  gfenitive: 
den  forraa  (Annas)  lynne  dr  gldttigare  an  den  senare*,  the  disposition  of  the 
foi-mer  is  merrier  than  that  of  the  latter. 

200.    Remarks  on  the  demonstratives. 

(a)  The  forms  in  -e  must  be  used  when  the  demon- 
strative is  used  as  a  pronoun  and  refers  to  persons 
of  masculine  gender;  they  are  generally  preferred, 
at  least  in  the  written  language,  when  the  demon- 
strative is  used  adjectively  before  a  noun  denoting 
a  person  of  masculine  gender:  denne  dr  min  hror, 
this  one  is  my  brother;  det  dr  samme  man  jag  sag 
i  gar,  it  is  the  same  man  I  saw  yesterday. 

(h)  After  samme  a  following  adjective  has  always 
the  definite  form  but  a  following  noun  generally  the 
indefinite;  after  denne  the  adjective  is  always  def- 
inite and  the  noun  generally  indefinite  in  the  written 
language  but  very  often  definite  in  the  spoken:  jag 
har  sett  samme  (a)  lille(a)  gosse  forr,  I  have  seen 
the  same  little  boy  before;  denna  stdtliga  kyrka  dr 
den  nya  Vasakyrkan,  this  stately  church  is  the  new 
Vasa  church. 

(c)  Sddan  is  regularly  preceded  by  the  indefinite 
article:  en  sddan  man. 

Note.      In    exclamations,    however,    the    order   may   be    reversed    in  case    of 

sadan  and   its  equivalents  sicken,  slik,  and   tocken;    thus,   sddant   ett  elande! 

oh,   such    misery !     Sicken   en    stackare !     Such   a   miserable   creature !  (Never 
en  sicken  stackare  I) 


114  DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS. 

(d)  The  demonstrative  pronouns  den,  det,  and 
denna,  delta,  referring  to  things  in  a  general  way, 
and  depending  upon  a  preposition,  are  sometimes 
translated  by  ddr  (sometimes  hdr) ,  w^ith  the  prepo- 
sition added:  ddrmed,  with  that,  or  those;  harmed, 
with  this,  or  these ;  jag  har  talat  med  honom  ddrom, 
I  have  talked  with  him  about  that  thing,  or  those 
things ;  jag  litar  ddrpd,  I  rely  on  that. 

201.  Some  uses  of  the  demonstratives. 

For  they,  this,  that,  these,  those,  when  used  as 
subjects  and  referring  to  a  predicate  noun,  Swedish 
uses  the  neuter  singular  det,  delta,  det  hdr,  det  ddr, 
irrespective  of  the  gender  and  number  of  the  follow- 
ing noun,  if  the  demonstrative  idea  is  not  very  em- 
phatic or  if  one  person  or  thing  is  not  contrasted 
with  another;  as,  delta  dr  min  hror,  this  is  my 
brother;  delta  dr  vackra  hlommor,  these  are  beau- 
tiful flowers ;  but  denne  dr  min  hror,  this  one  is  my 
brother;  de  hdr  dro  -vackra  hlommor,  de  ddr  fula, 
these  are  beautiful  flowers,  those  are  homely  ones. 

202.  Den  is  often  used  as  antecedent  to  a  restric- 
tive relative  (he  who)  ;  as,  den,  som  sagt  delta,  talar 
icke  sanning,  he  who  said  this  does  not  speak  the 
truth  (222,  d). 

Note.     De  is  often  used  indefinitely ;  de  ddrhemma,  the  people  at  home. 

203.  Idiomatic  expressions  with  demonstratives: 

En  sddan  dumhom  han  dr!  (or,  sddan  en  dumbom, 
etc.)  What  a  stupid  fellow  he  is!  Det  gor  detsamma, 
it  does  not  matter ;  med  detsamma,  immediately. 


EXERCISE.  115 

Exercise  XVIII. 

A.  Fill  out  the  blanks  as  suggested. 

1.  Smek  ej  ...  {tliaty  katten,  Anna,  ...  {it)  rivs 
(186,  b).  2.  . . .  {it)  ar  visst  . .  .  {the  same)  katt^  som 
rev  ...  {me)  i  gar.  3.  Ar  ...  {this)^  ...  {your)  gosse, 
fru  Anderson?  Ja,  och  . .  .  (detta  or  dessa)^  ar  . . .  (my) 
fliekor.  4.  Vilka  aro  . .  .  {yours)  ?  ...  {those)^  i  parken. 
5.  Arc  ej  Maria  och  Elisabet  ganska  lika?  Nej,  det  ar 
. . .  {such,  200,  c)  skillnad  pa  dem,  att  man  ej  kan  se,  att 
de  aro  systrar.  6.  ...  {the  former)  ar  Ijus,  ...  {the 
latter)  mork.  7.  Ar  ...  {this)^  ...  {your,  familiar) 
ring?  Ja,  . .  .  {it)  ar  . .  .  {mine).  8.  Av  vem  har  du  fatt 
. . .  {this)  vackra  ring — ^  (def.  or  indef.  ?)  ?  Jag  har  fatt 
den  av  min  far  till  julklapp.  9.  . .  .  {it)  ar  sa  ovanlig; 
jag  tror  ej,  att  jag  nagonsin  sett  en  precis  likadan.  10.  Jag 
blev  sa  glad,  nar  jag  tick  . . .  {it),  jag  hade  lange  onskat 
mig  ...  (a  similar  one,  197).  11.  Ar  .  . .  {this,  200,  a) 
Smith,  som  du  talar  om,  . .  .  {the  same)  person^  som  vi 
larde  kanna  pa  . .  .  {that)^  resa —  (def.  or  indef.?)  till 
Stockholm  for  ett  par  ar  sedan?  Ja,  han  ar  ...  {the 
same  one,  200,  a).  12.  ...  {He  who,  202)  talade  var 
. . .  {the  same)  gamle  herre^  (use  man),  som  vi  traffade 
i  gar  kvall  pa  bjudningen  hos  Linds.  13.  Vad  sade  han 
. . .  {about  that,  200,  d)  ?  Han  sade,  att  han  var  glad 
.  . .   {because  of  it,  translate,  over  it). 

»198.     ^200,    b.     '201. 

B.  1.  This^  is  a  beautiful  flower;  where  did  you  find 
it?  I  found  it  in  that"  little  flower  bed.  2.  Please  take  a 
seat^.  That  chair^  is  not  comfortable;  take  this  one^. 
3.  I  believe  I  shall  take  that  one^  by  {vid)  the  window, 
thank  you  {tach  sa  mychet,  first).  4.  Doesn't  that^  little 
girl  take  after  her  mother?    Yes,  she  has  the  same  eyes*, 


116  VOCABULARY. 

the  same  mouth*,  and  tlie  same  voice*.  5.  Have  you  ever 
seen  such  a  (200,  c)  sturdy  old  man?  6.  He  is  ahnost 
eighty  years  old,  but  it  does  not  matter  (203) ;  he  does  the 
same  heavy  work  as  he  used  to  do.  7.  Let  us  take  a  walk; 
such  a  fine  autumn  day  as  (som)  this  is  rare.  8.  I  must 
work  till  six  o'clock;  after  that  (sedan)  I  can  take  a  walk. 
9.  Which  (vilken)  Mr.  Smith  do  you  mean?  The  one 
who  (202)  lives  on  King's  Street.  10.  That  is  the  same 
Mr.  Smith  whom  I  used  to  know.  He  was  such  a  good 
man.  11.  Are  these^  your  sisters?  Yes,  and  those  are  my 
brothers.  12.  You  have  such  a  beautiful  ring,  Anna; 
where  (var. .  .if ran  f)  did  you  get  it?  13.  Yes,  it  is  very 
pretty.  I  got  it  as  a  Christmas  present  from  my  brother. 
14.  I  wish  I  had  one  like  it  (197).  15.  In  that  (200,  d) 
you  are  right,  Carl,  but  please  do  not  talk  any  more  about 
it.  16.  Our  teacher  was  angry  with  {ond  pa)  us  yesterday. 
17.  He  told  us  that  he  had  never  seen  such  compositions 
before.  18.  Those  who  (202)  had  more  than  ten  errors 
had  to  rewrite  theirs. 

^201.     *198.     'Either  var  sa   god   och   silt    ner,   or   var   sd   god   och   salt   er 
(also tag  plats).     *200,  b. 

VOCABULARY. 

bekvam,  -t,  comfortable  ganska,  quite,  fairly 

en    bjudning,    -ar,    reception,  en  hustdag,  -ar,  autumn  day 

party  en    julklapp,    -ar,    Christmas 
en  hlom'sterrahatt' ,  -er,  flower         present 

bed  en  kctt,  -er,  cat 

brds  pd   (dep  v.),  Ill,  impf.  lik,  -t,  like,  alike 

brdddes,   supine    brdtts),  Ijus,  -t,  light,  blonde 

to  take   after  mena,  I   (sometimes  Ila),  to 
duktig,  -t,  capable,  sturdy  mean 

ett  fel,  — ,  error  en  mun,  munnar,  mouth 

/d,  fick,  fingo,  fdtt   (170),  to  mork,  -t,  dark,  brunette 

get;  be  allowed  ndgonsin.  ever 


COMPOUND  VERBS,  117 

ndstan,  almost  en  skillnad,  -er,  difference 

o'vanlig,  -t,  unusual  skriva  om',  to  rewrite 

en  person',  -er,  person  smeka,  Ila,  caress 

precis',  exactly  en  stol,  -ar,  chair 

en  ring,  -ar,  ring  sdllsynt,  — ,  rar, 
riva,  rev,  revo,  rivit,  -en,  -et,     tio,  ten 

to  scratch,  tear  en  tunga,  -or,  tongue 

rdtt,  — ,  right  en  upp'sats,  -er,  composition 

en  rost,  -er,  voice  dttio,  eighty 

Idioms:   1.  att  ha  rdtt,  to  be  right. 

2.  att  brds  pa  ndgon,  to  take  after  somebody.    ' 

3.  det  dr  visst,  I  think  it  is. 


LESSON  XIX. 

The  Verb  (Continued) 

COMPOUND  VERBS. 

204.  There  are  two  kinds  of  verb  compounds  in 
Swedish:  inseparable  and  separable. 

INSEPARABLE   VERB    COMPOUNDS. 

205.  The  following  prefixes  always  form  insepa- 
rable verb  compounds;  that  is,  compounds  of  which 
the  component  parts  are  never  separated:  be-,  bi-, 
ent-,  er-,  for-,  gen-,  hdr-,  miss-,  sam-,  um-,  und-, 
van-,  veder-,  a-. 

206.  Noun  Prefixes.  Verb  compounds  of  which 
the  first  member  is  a  noun  are  generally  inseparable ; 
as,  kors'fdsta,  to  crucify;  impf.  korsfdste;  supine, 
korsfdst;  past  part.,  korsfdst;  land'sdtta,  to  put 
ashore;  landsatte,  landsatt,  landsatt;  hals'hugga,  to 
behead;  halshogg,  halshuggit,  halshuggen. 

Note.     If  the   nonn  is  compounrlcd   with   a  proposition,   this   compound   prefix 
may  be  separated  from  the  verb.     Thus:  landsatta,  to  put  ashore,  satlc  i  land, 


118  COMPOUND  VERBS. 

etc.;  ddagalagga,  to  manifest,  lade  adaga;  lagt  ddaga;  ddagalagd;  the  present 
and  past  participles  of  such  verb  compounds  are  always  inseparable  when  used 
as  attributive  adjectives:  den  landsatte  pasnageraren,  the  landed  passenger;  when 
equivalent  to  a  clause  or  when  used  in  the  predicate,  they  are  sometimes  sepa- 
rable: satta  i  land  vid  kajen,  skyndade  vi  till  tullhuset,  landed  at  the  pier,  we 
hurried  to  the  custom-house;  vi  ha  bUvit  satta  i  land,  we  have  been  landed. 

SEPARABLE  VERB  COMPOUNDS. 

207.  Adjective  Prefixes.  Adjectives  used  as  pre- 
fixes generally  form  separable  verb  compounds: 
fri'kopa  or  kopa  fri\  to  ransom;  frikopte  or  kopte 
fri,  frikopt  or  kopt  fri;  but  frikalla,  to  acquit,  not 
kalla  fri;  frikallad,  frikallat.  For  the  present  and 
past  participle  see  206,  note. 

Note.  If  the  adjective  is  separated  it  agrrees  with  the  object  in  gender  and 
number;  as,  han  vitmdlade  huset,  he  painted  the  house  white;  but  han  mdlade 
huset  vitt.  It  is  best  for  beginners  to  regard  the  adjective  prefixes  as  in- 
separable. 

208.  Adve7'b  and  preposition  prefixes.  Adverbs 
and  prepositions  used  as  prefixes  form  both  sepa- 
rable and  inseparable  verb  compounds.  Separable 
verb  compounds  of  this  class  often  change  their 
meaning  when  the  adverb  or  preposition  follows  the 
verb. 

(1)  Separable,  with  no  diflFerence  of  meaning: 
u^teldsa  or  Idsa  u'te,  to  lock  out;  fo'rega  or  ga  fo're 
to  precede;  ge'nomldsa  or  Idsa  ge'nom,  to  read 
through;  frdn'taga  or  taga  frdn',  to  take  from  or 
deprive  of;  av'hugga  or  hugga  av\  to  cut  off,  etc. 

(2)  With  difference  of  meaning:  the  sense  is  liter- 
al when  the  parts  of  the  verb  compound  are  sepa- 
rated; figurative  when  not  separated:  av'gd,  to  re- 
sign ;  graduate ;  gd  av',  to  break ;  an'ldgga,  to  estab- 
lish, organize ;  Idgga  an',  to  aim ;  fram'hdlla,  to  point 
out;  hdlla  fram',  to  stretch  forth;  un'derhdlla,  to 


I 


COMPOUND  VERBS.  119 

entertain;  hdlla  un'der,  to  hold  beneath;  fram'ga, 
to  appear,  become  evident;  ga  fram',  to  go  forth. 

209.  Compound  verbs  are  conjugated  exactly  like 
corresponding  simple  verbs. 

210.  If  the  separable  affix  is  an  adjective  or 
phrase  (206,  207)  the  object  is  placed  between  the 
verb  and  the  affix;  if  an  adverb  or  a  preposition, 
often  after ;  as,  man  satte  honom  i  land,  they  landed 
him ;  but  han  hogg  av  handen,  he  cut  off  his  hand. 

211.  The  stress  accent  falls  always  on  the  prefix, 
if  a  phrase,  on  the  noun,  except  in  the  case  of  be-, 
ent;  for-  [see  36  (a)],  which  never  take  the  accent. 
The  musical  accent  is  grave. 

Note.  Care  should  be  taken  not  to  confuse  for-,  the  inseparable  prefix,  and 
fore-,  the  separable  prefix.  The  latter  takes  the  accent  and  imparts  an  entirely 
different  meaning  to  the  verb.  Thus:  fordra' ga,  to  endure;  fo'redraga,  to 
prefer,  present;  forstd',  to  understand;  fo'restd,  to  manage;  to  impend. 

212.  When  the  affix  is  separated  and  happens 
to  stand  before  a  noun,  care  must  be  taken  not  to 
confuse  it  with  a  preposition  introducing  a  phrase; 
the  affix  is  always  accented,  the  preposition  rarely. 
Ex. :  han  hrot'  av  brodet  och  at,  he  broke  a  piece  off 
the  bread  and  ate,  but  han  brot  av'  brodet,  he  broke 
the  bread  in  two. 

213.  Synopsis  of  the  verbs  av'bryta,  to  interrupt, 
and  stdnga  in'ne,  to  shut  in. 

ACTIVE 

Pres.      jag  av'bryter  jag  stdnger  in'ne 

Impf.     jag  avbrot  jag  stdngde  inne 

Future  jag  shall  avbryta      jag  shall  stdnga  inne 


130 


EXERCISE. 


Perf.      jag  har  avbrutit 
Plupf.    jag  hade  avbrutit 
Fut.  P.  jag  shall  ha  av- 
brutit 


jag  har  stangt  inne 
jag  hade  stangt  inne 
jag  shall  ha  stangt  inne 


PASSIVE 


Pres. 


jag  avbrytes,  or 

blir  avbruten 
Impf.     jag  avbrots,  or 

blev  avbruten 
Future  jag  shall  avbry- 
tas,  or 

shall  bli(va)  av- 
bruten 

jag  har  avbrutits, 
or 

harblivit  avbruten 

jag  hade  avbru- 
tits, or 

hade   blivit  av- 
bruten 
Fut.  P.  jag  shall  ha  av- 
brutits, or 

shall   ha    blivit 
avbruten 


Perf. 


Plupf. 


jag  stdnges  inne,  or 

blir  innestdngd 

jag  stdngdes  inne,  or 

blev  innestdngd 

jag  shall  stdngas  inne, 

or 
shall  bli  innestdngd 

jag  har  stdngts  inne,  or 
har  blivit  innestdngd 

jag  hade  innestdngts. 

or 
hade  blivit  innestdngd 

jag  shall  ha  inne- 
stdngts, or 

shall  ha  blivit  inne- 
stdngd 


EXEECISE  XIX. 

A.  Translate.  1.  He  has  interrupted  me.  2.  I  had 
broken  off  a  piece.  3.  Hold  the  glass  beneath  the  water. 
4.  You  must  entertain  your  friends.  5.  Which  do  you  pre- 
fer, to  stay  here  or  to  go  with  us  ?  6.  He  will  comply  with 
ray  request.  7.  He  will  come  after.  8.  They  (man)  have 
landed  the  passengers.  9.  The  landed  passengers  wished  to 
view  the  city.  10.  I  can't  endure  that  man.  11.  Had  you 
recognized  (two  ways)  him?  13.  He  was  (blev)  recog- 
nized. 13.  They  ransomed  him.  14.  The  ransomed  one 
thanked  his  friends. — Put  the  verbs  in  different  tenses. 


EXERCISE.  121 

B.  JSTikolaus  den  forste  av  Eyssland  dnskade  att  iakttaga 
sitt  folks  liv.  For  att  kunna  (165,  2)  gora  detta  brukade 
ban  foretaga  langa  spatserturer  forkladd  i  en  vanlig  offi- 
cerskappa,  sa  att  man  ej  sknlle  (165)  igenkanna  honom. 
En  gang  bade  ban  gatt  ut  till  en  liten  forstad.  Nar  ban 
skulle  atervanda,  varseblev  ban  (blev  ban  varse),  att  ban 
ej  bittade.  Nu  aterstod  for  honom  endast  att  anfortro  sig 
at  en  droska.  Han  ropade  pa  en,  steg  in  och  befallde  kus- 
ken  att  kora  honom  till  slottet.  Da  de  bade  anlant  dit, 
steg  tsaren  ut.  Da  ban  skulle  betala,  blev  han  varse,  att 
ban  givit  ut  alia  sina  pengar.  "Var  god  och  vanta",  sade 
ban  till  kusken  och  amnade  ga  in,  "jag  skall  skicka  ut 
pengarna  genast."  "Nej,  lille  far",  avbrot  kusken  honom, 
"sa  ha  officererna  redan  ett  par  ganger  bedragit  mig,  de  ha 
underlatit  att  skicka  ut  pengarna.  Kvarlamna  din  kappa 
som  {as)  pant ;  om  du  skickar  ut  pengarna,  sa  skickar  jag 
in  den."  Kejsaren  efterkom  kuskens  begaran  och  gav  ho- 
nom sin  kappa  som  pant. 

C.  Conversation.  1.  Varfor  foretog  kejsaren  av  Eyss- 
land langa  spatserturer?  2.  Varfor  kande  man  ej  igen 
honom?  3.  Vart  begav  ban  sig  en  gang?  4.  Vad  varse- 
blev ban,  nar  han  skulle  atervanda?  5,  Vad  gjorde  han? 
6.  Vad  befallde  han  kusken?  7.  Varfor  kunde  han  ej 
betala  kusken  genast?  8.  Hur  ville  han  uppgora  saken 
{settle  the  matter)  ?  9.  Av  vilka  {whom)  hade  kusken 
forut  blivit  bedragen?  10.  Varfor  ville  han,  att  kejsaren 
skulle  kvarlamna  kappan?  11.  Efterkom  kejsaren  bans 
begaran  ? 

D.  1.  We  must  disguise  ourselves^  if  we  do  not  wish  to 
be  recognized^.  2.  Have  you  observed  the  conduct  of  this 
man?  3.  Yes,  I  have,  and  I  do  not  understand  how  people 
can  entrust  money  to^  him ;  be  spends*  too  much  for  amuse- 

Swedixh  Grammar  9 


122  VOCABULARY. 

ments.  4.  Now  we  have  arrived  at  (till)  the  palace. 
Please^  step  out  of  the  carriage.  5.  Get  into  the  carriage. 
I  shall  order  the  cabman  to  drive  to  the  theater.  6.  I  did 
not  know  that  I  had  lost  my  money;  I  became  aware  (of) 
it  when  I  was  going  (skuUe)  to  pay  for  the  ride  (dktur). 
7.  How  did  you  settle  the  matter  (C,  8)  ?  I  settled  it  in 
this  way,  that  I  asked  the  cabman  to  wait  and  said  that  T 
should  send  out  the  money.  8.  Did  he  comply  with  your 
request?  In  a  way  (pa  s'dtt  och  vis),  but  he  asked  for 
(bad  om)  my  watch  as  security  and  said  he  would  return 
it  when  he  got  the  money.  9.  The  man  had  a  good  reason 
for  this  request,  he  had  been  cheated  so  often  in  the  same 
way  (pa  samma  sdtt).  10.  He  interrupted  me  while  I  was 
speaking  and  asked  for  the  money  which  he  had  entrusted 
to  me. 

^Porklada  oss,  reflex,  verb.  'Use  passive  with  bliva,  also  construction  with 
man;  passive  with  -»  would  hardly  ever  be  used  in  such  a  case.  *An  indirect 
object  is  often  preceded  by  at  or  till,  which  are  not  always  interchangeable; 
tiffa  at  or  till,  but  akriva  till.  *The  separable  forms  are,  as  a  rule,  used  more 
than  the  inseparable,  at  least  in  the  simple  tenses:  han  ger  (giver)  ut.  ^Var 
td  god  och  stig  ur,  or,  siig  ur,  ar  ni  snail. 

VOCABULARY. 

N.  B.  The  past  participle  is  practically  always  inseparable, 
even  when  the  verb  is  separable.  The  supine  of  a  separable 
verb  is  separable.  The  teacher  should  point  out  the  differ- 
ence in  meaning  of  the  two  kinds  of  verbs,  if  any. 

an'fortro  (insep.).  Ill,  to  en-  iedra'ga  (insep.),  -drog.  -dro- 
trust  go,  -dragit,  -dragen,  -et,  to 

an'landa   (insep.),   lib,  impf.  cheat,  deceive 

anldnde,  to  arrive  hefaVla  (insep.),  lib,  to  com- 
mand 

av'bryta   (injap.),  -brot,  bro-  efterkomma,  efterkom, -kom- 
to,    -bruiit,    -bruten,    -et,  ^^     .kommit,    kommen, 

to  interrupt  ^^   ^^  comply  with 

bryta  av',  to  break  off  komma  ef'ter,  to  come  after 

^m  begd'ran  (no.  pi.),  request,  fri'kopa,  kopa  fri',  Ila,  to 
demand  ransom 


INTEUROGATIVES. 


123 


fordra'ga  (insep.,  see  bedra- 
ga),  to   endure,  tolerate. 

fo'redraga  (insep.),  to  prefer 

forkld'da  (insep.),  lib,  to  dis- 
guise 

en  for'stad,  -stdder,  suburb 

forstd'  (insep.,  see  std),  to  un- 
derstand 

ut'giva,  giva  ut',  utgav,  -gdvo, 
-givit, -given, -et,  to  spend; 
publish,  edit 

hitta,  I,  to  find,  find  one's  way 

i'akttaga  (sep.),  -tog,  -togo, 
tagit,  -tagen,  -et,  to  ob- 
serve 

igen'kanna,  kdnna  igen',  lib, 
to  recognize 

kvar'ldmna,  Idmna  kvar',  I,  to 
leave  behind 

en  klocka,  -or,  clock,  watch 

land'sdtta,  -satte,  -satt,  -satt, 
to  land 

ett  lit,  — .  life 

en  officer',  -er,  officer 

Idiom:   att  varsehliva  en  sak, 


en  officers' kappa,  -or,  officer's 
cloak 

en  orsak,  -er,  reason,  cause 

e?i  pant,  -er,  security 

ropa,  I,  to  shout 

Ryssland  (neuter),  Russia 

ctt  slott,  — ,  castle,  palace 

skicka  in',  ut',  I,  to  send  in, 
out 

en  spatsertur,  -er,  walk 

ett  stycke,  -n,  piece 

un'derhdlla    (see    hdlla),    to 
entertain 

hdlla  un'der,  to  hold  beneath 

un'derldta  (insep.),  -Idt,  -lata, 
-Idtit,  -en,  -et,  to  neglect 

var'sebliva,  hliva  var'se,  to  be- 
come aware  of 

d'terldmna,    lib,   to   return 

Idmna  dter  (unusual) 

d'terstd  (sep.,  see  std),  to  re- 
main 

d'tervdndaisep.) ,  lib,  to  return 

vdnda  dter  (unusual) 
to  become  aware  of  a  thing. 


LESSON  XX. 

The  Interrogative  Pronouns  and  Adjectives. 

214.  The  interrogative  pronouns  are:  vem,  who; 
vad,  what;  vilken,  which,  who;  vilkendera,  which 
one;  vad  for  en,  what  kind  of,  what. 

DECLENSION. 

SINGULAR 

^'^^^-  ^•^:uTER^^«^•'  ^'^^^'meuter       fZ'Z'J^'i'  ^'euteb 

&    FEM.  &  GENDER  F.  &  GENDER  F. 

vem    vad    vilken 
vems  vilkens 


vilket   vilkendera    vilketdera 
vilkets  vilkenderas  vilketderas 


124  JNTERROGATIVES. 

PLURAI, 

Nom.  vilka 
Gen.    vilkas 

Vad  for  en  has  a  neuter  vad  for  ett  and  a  plural 
vad  for  ena,  but  no  genitive. 

215.  The  interrogative  adjectives  are:  vad,  vil- 
ken,  vilkendera,  vad  for  en,  and  hurudan,  of  what 
nature,  how.  Their  declension  is  identical  with 
that  of  the  interrogative  pronouns  but  they  lack 
the  genitive  case:  hurudan  has  the  neuter  form 
huriidant  and  the  plural  hiirudana. 

216.  Remarks  on  the  interrogatives. 

(a)  Vem  refers  only  to  persons  and  is  never  used 
as  an  adjective.  Ex.:  Med  vem  talade  du?  (or  vem 
talade  du  med?)  With  whom  did  you  speak?  Vems 
bok  dr  detta?  Whose  book  is  this? 

Note.  When  vem  is  subject  in  an  indirect  question  it  is  followed  bj*  som : 
vet  du  vem  som  var  harf  do  you  know  who  was  here? 

(b)  Vad  is  used  both  as  a  pronoun  and  as  an 
adjective ;  when  used  pronominally  it  is  always  neu- 
ter; adjectively  it  may  be  used  for  all  genders  like 
the  English  ivhat.  This  use  being  rather  restrict- 
ed, the  student  should  use  vilken  and  vad  for  en: 
Vad  talar  han  om?  What  is  he  talking  about?  Vad 
rati  har  du  att  gora  detta?  What  right  have  you 
to  do  this? 

Note.  When  uhat  is  subject  in  an  indirect  question  it  is  often  represented 
by  vad  som  in  Swedish:  joff  vet  ej  vad  som  ar  bast,  I  do  not  know  what  is  best ; 
but  jag  vet  ej,  vad   (object)   han  har  sagt. 

(c)  Vad  for  en  is  used  both  as  a  pronoun  and 
as  an  adjective,  the  latter  use  prevailing.  As  an 
adjective  it  drops  ena  in  the  plural.     Ex.:  Vad  for 


\ 


RELATIVKS.,  125 

blommor  har  du  ddr?  What  kind  of  flowers  have 
you  there  ?  Sometimes  it  has  the  meaning  of  vilken : 
vad  for  en  konung  hade  Sverige  da?  What  king 
did  Sweden  have  then? 

Note.     Fiir  may  be  separated  from  vad:  vad  ar  det  for  en  hlommaf     What 
kind  of   (a)   fiower  is  that? 

(d)  Vilken  and  vilkendera  are  used  both  as  adjec- 
tives and  as  pronouns;  hurudan  (hurdan)  only  as 
an  adjective.  Ex.:  Vilken  har  varit  hdr?  Who  has 
been  here?  Vilket  hus  har  du  hyrt?  Which  house 
have  you  rented?  Vilkendera  onskar  du?  Which 
one  (of  several  objects)  do  you  wish?  Vilketdera 
huset  ar  hans?  Which  house  (of  these  houses)  is 
his?  Hurudant  ar  vddret?  How  is  the  weather 
(of  what  nature)  ? 

217.  If  the  interrogative  pronoun  is  governed 
by  a  preposition  this  may  as  in  English  either  pre- 
cede or  stand  at  the  end  of  the  clause:  med  vem 
talade  du?  or  vem  talade  du  med?  with  whom  did 
you  speak? 

218.  With  prepositions,  vad  may  in  certain  cases 
be  replaced  by  prepositional  compounds  with  var, 
where :  varav,  vavmed,  vartill,  etc. :  vai^med  har 
man  belonat  honom?  With  what  have  they  rewarded 
him?    Varav  lever  han?  What  does  he  live  on? 

Relative  Pronouns  and  Adjectives. 

219.  The  relative  pronouns  are  som,  vilken,  vad, 
den,  and  the  genitive  form  vars. 

220.  For  inflection  of  vilken  and  vad  see  214,  and 
for  inflection  of  den  see  195. 

221.  The  relative  adjective  is  vilken. 


126  RELATIVES. 

222.    Remarks  on  the  relatives. 

(a)  Som  is  by  far  the  most  common  of  the  rela- 
tive pronouns;  it  is  indeclinable  and  is  used  for  all 
genders  and  all  cases  with  the  exception  of  the 
genitive,  which  is  supplied  by  vars  and  vilkens  (vil- 
kets,  vilkas).  Ex.:  min  van,  som  dr  hdr  pa  besok, 
skall  resa  i  morgon,  my  friend  who  is  here  on  a 
visit  will  leave  to-morrow;  mannen,  vars  barn  dro 
sjuka,  dr  mycket  fattig,  the  man  whose  children  are 
sick  is  very  poor. 

(b)  Vilken  when  used  as  a  pronoun  often  employs 
the  genitive  form  vars  instead  of  vilkens.  It  is 
not  used  very  often  in  conversation  except  when 
the  antecedent  is  a  clause  (when  it  is  indispensable) 
or  when  a  preposition  must  stand  before  the  rela- 
tive. Ex. :  han  har  blivit  void,  vilket  forvdnar  mig, 
he  has  been  elected,  which  fact  surprises  me  (here 
som  would  be  incorrect)  ;  fyra  gossar,  av  vilka 
en  var  min  kusin,  drunknade  i  gar,  four  boys  of 
whom  one  was  my  cousin  were  drowned  yesterday. 

(c)  Vad  is  used  as  a  compound  neuter  relative 
including  its  antecedent,  also  after  the  indefinite  pro- 
noun allt.  It  has  no  plural.  Ex.:  vad  han  sdger, 
dr  sant,  what  he  says  is  true;  det  dr  allt,  vad  jag 
har  sett,  that  is  all  I  have  seen  (som  may  be  used) . 

Note.  When  vad  is  the  subject  of  the  sentence  or  clause  it  is  generally  com- 
bined with  som;  thus,  vi  skola  saga  vad  som  ar  ratt,  we  ought  to  say  what 
is  right. 

(d)  Den  is  used  as  a  definite  relative  only  in  the 
objective  case;  a^  such  it  is  of  comparatively  rare 
occurrence.  In  the  nominative  together  with  som 
it  corresponds  to  he  who,  the  one  who  (tvhich),  who- 


EXERCISE.  127 

ever.  In  solemn  style  it  is  sometimes  combined  with 
ddr,  den  ddr,  he  who,  whoever.  Ex. :  dessa  dro  de 
regler,  dem  (more  common  som)  ni  mdste  folja, 
these  are  the  rules  which  you  must  follow;  den  som 
sage?'  detta,  dr  dum,  whoever  says  this  is  stupid ;  den 
ddr  vet  det  rdtta,  han  gore  det  rdtt  dr,  he  that  knows 
the  right,  let  him  do  right. 

223.  The  prepositions  which  govern  the  rela- 
tives are  generally  placed  at  the  end  of  the  clause; 
when  used  with  som,  always.  Ex.:  damerna,  som 
du  talar  om,  kdnner  jag,  I  know  the  ladies  that  you 
speak  about;  huset,  vilket  (i  vilket)  han  bor  i,  dr 
gammalt,  the  house  in  which  he  lives  is  old. 

224.  In  Swedish  as  in  English  the  relative  is 
often  omitted  when  objective.  Ex.:  Vem  var  det, 
du  motte  i  gar?  Who  was  it  you  met  yesterday? 

225.  When  the  relative  is  governed  by  a  prepo- 
sition and  refers  to  things,  a  compound  of  the  rela- 
tive adverb  var,  where,  and  the  preposition  may 
be  used;  as,  bordet,  varpd  boken  ligger,  or  bordet, 
som  boken  ligger  pa,  dr  mitt,  the  table  which  the 
book  lies  on  is  mine;  huset,  som  han  bor  i,  or  vari 
han  bor,  dr  hans  fars,  the  house  which  he  lives  in 
is  his  father's. 

Exercise  XX. 

A.  Translate  orally.  1.  Who  goes  there?  2.  Who  is  he? 
3.  What  do  you  have  in  your  (178)  hand?  4.  Of  whom^ 
are  you  speaking?  5.  Of  what  are  you  speaking?  6.  What 
book  do  you  mean?  7.  What^  new  house  is  that?  8.  Do 
you  know  at  (vid)  what  time  the  train  leaves  (gar)  ? 
9.  What  sort  of  a  man  is  he?  10.  Do  you  understand  what 
he  says?     11.  I  do  not  know  what  is  best   (hast).     12. 


128  EXERCISE. 

Which  drama  of  Strindberg  do  you  like  best^?  13.  In 
what  (218)  does  the  difference  consist?  14.  Do  you  know 
what  kind  of  teacher  he  is?    15.  How  is  the  weather? 

^Translate  in  two  ways:  preposition  before  and  at  the  end  of  the  clause, 
^ransl. :  what  kind  of  a  new  house  is  that?  or  which  is  that  new  house?  To 
like  best,   tycka  bast  om. 

B.  Translate  orally.  1.  He  is  a  man  who  knows  every- 
thing. 2.  That  is  the  lady  who  has  the  pretty  daughters. 
3.  That  is  not  the  man  I  mean.  4.  He  who  (222,  d)  is 
rich  is  not  always  happy.  5.  That  is  alP  I  know  about  the 
matter.  6.  Whoever  (222,  d)  does  such  a  thing  (ndgot 
sddant)  is  not  a  good  man.  7.  The  man  whom  (224)  I 
spoke  about  is  a  professor  at  {vid)  the  University  of  Up- 
sala^.  8.  The  house  in  which  (225)  he  lives  is  his  father's. 
9.  There  is^  no  poet  whose  life  is  so  interesting. 

^Relative  may  be  omitted ;  see  222,  c.  -Uppsala  universitet.  'There  U, 
there  are,  in  a  general  sense  must  be  rendered  by  det  finnes  (^finns),  in  a  limite<l 
sense  by  det  dr. 

C.  En  apotekare,  som^  hade  rakat  i  tvist  nied  en  officer, 
blev  av  denne  utmanad  till  duell.  Den  sak,  om  vilken  de 
voro  oense,  var  en  obetydlighet,  och  apotekaren,  som  var  en 
forstandig  man,  onskade  att  forhindra  duellen.  Tidigt  pa 
morgonen  av  den  dag,  pa  vilken  duellen  skulle  utkampas, 
gjorde  apotekaren  ett  besok  i  officerens  bostad  och  sade 
belt  lugnt  till  denne :  '"'Emedan  jag  ar  den,  som  bar  blivit 
utmanad,  sa-  tillkommer  det  mig  att  valja  vapnen.  Har 
arc  tva  piller,  av  vilka  det  ena^  ar  forgiftat,  det  andra  dar- 
emot  oskadligt.  Var  sa  god  och  valj  det  ena  och  svalj  det ; 
jag  svaljer  det,  som  aterstar,  och  en  av  oss  maste  do." 
Officeren,  som  blev  mycket  overraskad  av  apotekarens  for- 
slag,  vars  andamal  naturligtvis  var  att  forhindra  duellen, 
kastade  ut  pillerna  genom  fonstret  och  forsonade  sig  med 
honom. 

*Note  the  frequent  use  of  som.  ^Note  the  frequent  use  of  sd  to  introduce  the 
principal  clause  when  it  follows  the  dependent.  *det  ena. . . .  det  andra,  one. . . 
the  other. 


EXERCISE.  129 

C.  Conversation,  1.  Med  vera  liade  apotekaren  rakat 
i  tvist?  2.  Vartill  blev  lian  ntmanad  av  ofFiceren?  3.  Niir 
gick  apotekaren  till  officeren?  4.  Varfor  hade  apotekaren 
beslutat  forhindra  duellen?  5.  Vad  tillkom  honom  och 
varfor?.  6.  Vad  for  vapen  foreslog  {proposed)  apotekaren? 
7.  Visste  apotekaren,  vilketdera  pillret  var  forgiftat?  8. 
Vad  skulle  lians  motstandare  {opponent)  gora  med  det 
piller,  han  valde?  9.  Vad  var  iindamalct  med  detta  for- 
slag?  10.  Vad  gjorde  officeren  med  pillerna?  11.  Upp- 
nadde  {attained)  apotekaren  sitt  andamal? 

D.  1.  Do  you  know  what  kind  of  a  man  the  druggist  is 
with  whom  the  officer  got  into  a  quarrel?  2.  Yes,  I  know 
him  well  {v'dl).  He  is  a  man  whose  friendship  I  esteem 
very  highly.  3,  I  do  not  know  what^  the  quarrel  consisted 
in^,  but  according  to  what  I  have  heard  it  was  about  a 
trifling  matter.  4.  The  druggist,  who  was  a  very  sensible 
man,  wished  to  prevent  the  duel.  5.  By  what  means 
(transl. :  through  what)  did  he  succeed  in  preventing  it? 
6.  He  went  to  the  house  of  the  man  who  had  challenged 
him  and  had  a  talk  with  him.  7.  He  reminded  him  of  an 
old  custom  according  to  which  it  is  the  right  of  him  (C,  5) 
who  has  been  challenged  to  choose  the  weapons.  8.  When 
the  officer  asked  him  what  kind  of  weapons  he  would  choose 
he  held  out  a  couple  of  pills.  9.  Of  these  there  was  one 
which  was  poisoned^;  the  other  was  harmless.  10.  The 
druggist  asked  the  officer  which  one  of  the  two  he  would 
{ville)  take  and  swallow.  11.  He  himself  would  {shulle) 
swallow  the  one  that  (222,  d)  remained.  12.  The  propo- 
sition which  the  druggist  made  surprised  the  officer  and  he 
threw  the  pills  out  through  the  window.  13.  The  druggist, 
whose  (222,  a)  purpose  it  was  to  prevent  the  duel,  suc- 
ceeded in  this  (200,  d). 

^Translate  in  two  ways   (218).     ^True  or  apparent  passive? 


130 


VOCABULARY, 


VOCABULARY. 


en  apotekare,  — ,  druggist 

bestd'  (insep.,  see  std),  to  con- 
sist; endure;  treat 

en  bostad,  bostdder,  dwelling, 
home 

en  duelV,  -er,  duel 

dar'emot,  on  the  contrary 

do,  dog,  dogo,  dott,  — ,  to  die 

emedan,  because 

enligt,  according  to 

er'inra  (insep.),  I,  to  remind 

fram'rdcka,  rdcka  fram',  Ila, 
to  reach  or  hold  out 

forgif'ta  (insep.),  I,  to  poison 

forhind'ra  (insep.),  I,  to  pre- 
vent 

ett   forslag',   — ,    proposition, 
proposal 

forso'na,  I,  to  reconcile 

forstdn'dig,  -t,  sensible,  intel- 
ligent 

hog,  -t,  high 

kasta   ut'    (rarely    utkasta), 
(sep.),  I,  to  throw  out 

lugn,  -t,  calm(ly) 

Idioms:   1 


lycklig,  -t,  happy 

mena,  I,  to  mean 

en  o'betydlighet,  -er,  insignifi- 
cance, trifle 

o'ense  (indecl.),  at  variance 

o'skadlig,  -t,  harmless 

ett  piller,  — ,  pill 

rdka,  I,  to  come  or  get  (into), 
to  meet  (with),  to  meet 

ett  samtal,  — ,  conversation 

en  sed,  -er,  custom,  usage 

svdlja,  lib,  to  swallow 

tilVkomma  (insep.,  see  kom- 
ma),  to  befit,  be  the  right 
of  somebody 

en  tvist,  -er,  quarrel 

upp'skatta  (insep.),  I,  to  esteem 

ut'mana  (insep.),  I,  to. chal- 
lenge 

ut'kdmpa,  I,  to  fight  out 

kumpa  ut',  to  cease  fighting 
(i.  e.  die) 

ett  vapen,  — ,  weapon 

en  vdnskap,  friendship 

o'verras'ka  (insep.),  I,  to  sur- 


prise 

att  rdka  i  grUl,  svdrigheter,  to  get  into  a  quarrel, 
difficulties. 

2.  att  bliva  dverraskad  av  ndgot,  to  become  astonished 
at  something. 

3.  Det  tillkommer  mig,  I  havr  a  right  to  it,  or  it  is 
my   privilege. 


I 


LESSON  XXL 

The  Verb  (Continued). 
PRESENT  PARTICIPLE. 

226.  The  present  participle  is  formed  by  adding 
-ande  to  the  stem  of  the  verb  if  the  infinitive  ends 
in  -a,  otherwise  -ende.  Ex.:  kallande,  from  kalla, 
to  call;  leende,  from  le,  to  smile;  syende,  from  sy, 
to  sew. 

Note  1.  The  present  participle  is  indeclinable,  but  if  used  as  a  noun,  it 
takes  -s  in  the  genitive :  en  doendes  anger,  the  repentance  of  a  dying  person. 

2.  Deponent  verbs  form  their  present  participle  either  with  or  without  the 
■s;  as,  minnandes,  remembering;  dldranae,  aging,  from  minnas  and  dldras, 
many  lack  a  present  participle. 

227.  The  present  participle  is  used: 

(1)  as  an  adjective:  ett  sovande  barn,  a  sleeping 
child; 

(2)  as  an  adverb :  han  talte  flytande,  he  spoke  flu- 
ently ; 

(3)  as  an  adverbial  predicative:  hon  gick  tiggan- 
de  frdn  hus  till  hus,  she  went  begging  from  house 
to  house. 

Note.  The  conversational  language  often  prefers  a  finite  verb  to  the  present 
participle  used  as  an  adverbial  predicative.  Ex. :  hon  gick  frdn  hus  till  hus 
och  tiggde,  instead  of  hon  gick  tiggande,  etc. 

228.  The  present  participle  is  not  used  in  Swe- 
dish to  form  a  progressive  tense  as  in  English.  When 
the  idea  of  continued  action  is  especially  prominent, 
it  is  expressed  by  means  of  the  verb  holla  pa',  to 
keep  on,  continue,  and  the  infinitive  preceded  by  att : 
han  holl  pa  att  skriva,  da  jag  kom  in,  he  was  writ- 
ing when  I  entered.    Sometimes  the  preposition  mea, 


132  PARTICIPLES. 

with,  is  inserted  before  the  infinitive:  han  holl  pa 
med  att  Idsa. 

Note.  Sitta,  to  sit ;  tjd,  go ;  sld,  stand ;  ligga,  lie,  and  similar  verbs  are 
used  w^th  a  finite  form  of  some  other  verb  to  express  progression:  jag  sitter 
och  skrifver,  I  am  writing ;  ligga  och  lata  sig,  lounging  about,  idling ;  sla 
och  hdnga,  hanging  around  (idly).  Note  the  following  use  of  halla  pa:  jag 
hiill  pa,  att  folia,  1  came  near  falling. 

229.  The  English  present  participle  very  often 
must  be  rendered  by  a  subordinate  clause  either 
temporal,  causal,  or  relative,  according  to  the  sense : 
the  boy,  hearing  us  come,  ran  away,  gossen  sprang 
sin  vdg,  ndr  han  horde  oss  komma;  being  sick  he 
had  to  go  home,  emedan  han  var  sjuk,  mdste  han 
gd  hem. 

230.  The  English  verbal  in  -ing  is  often  equiva- 
lent to  the  infinitive:  running  is  a  useful  exer- 
cise, att  springa  dr  en  nyttig  ovning;  he  went  away 
without  seeing  me,  han  gick  bort  utan  att  se  mig. 

Note.  When  the  verbal  is  modified  by  a  possessive  adjective,  Swedish  uses  a 
noun  clause  with  att  instead  of  att  with  the  infinitive:  He  came  without  my 
seeing  him,  han  horn  utan  att  jag  sag  honom;  their  having  come  home  was  a 
surprise,  att  de  hade  kommit  hem  var  en  ofverraskning. 

231.  Nouns  in  -ning  and  -ande  (added  to  the 
verbal  stem)  correspond  to  the  English  verbals  and 
abstract  nouns  jn  -ing.  Ex.:  allt  detta  talande  dr 
onodigt,  all  this  talking  is  unnecessary;  mycken 
skrivning  dr  trdttande,  much  writing  is  tiresome. 

232.  After  the  verbs  hora  and  se  Swedish  uses 
the  infinitive,  never  the  present  participle,  as  in 
English :  jag  sag  honom  komma,  I  saw  him  coming. 

PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

233.  The  past  participle  is  formed  in  five  differ- 
ent ways  according  to  the  class  or  conjugation  to 
which  the  verb  belongs. 


PARTICIPLES. 


133 


234.  In  the  First  Conjugation  the  ending  is  -ad. 
In  the  Second  Conjugation,  Class  I,  the  ending 

is  -t. 

In  the  Second  Conjugation,  Class  II,  the  ending 
is  -d. 

In  the  Third  Conjugation  the  ending  is  -dd. 

In  the  Fourth  Conjugation  the  ending  is  -en 
(-n,  -et). 

235.  These  endings  are  added  to  the  stem  of 
the  verb.  In  the  Fourth  Conjugation  there  may 
or  may  not  be  a  change  of  vowel ;  thus,  kallad,  bojd, 
kopt,  sydd,  skriven,  funnen. 

Note  1.  Deponent  verbs  as  a  rule  lack  the  past  participle,  so  do  many  in- 
transitive verbs. 

2.  It  may  be  of  assistance  for  the  beginner  to  notice  that  the  past  participle 
of  weak  verbs  may  be  found  by  dropping  the  e  of  the  imperfect. 

236.  The  past  participle  is  used  as  an  adjective 
and  agrees  in  number  and  gender  with  the  noun  or 
pronoun  which  it  modifies  or  of  which  it  is  a  com- 
plement. It  is  declined  in  accordance  with  the  rules 
governing  the  declension  of  adjectives. 


237.    Strong  Declension. 

Singular 
gender  form         neuter 

I.  dlskad  dlskat 

II.  Class    I.  kopt  kopt 
II.  Class  11.  bojd  hojt 

III.  sydd  sytt 

IV.  skriven         skrivet 


Plural 
all  genders 

dlskade 

kdpta(e^) 

bdjda(e) 

sydda(e) 

skrivna(e) 


238.    Weak  Declension. 

dlskade       dlskade 
kdpta(e^)    kdpta 
bdjda(e)     bojda 
sydda(e)     sydda 
skrivna(e)  skrivna 


dlskade 

kGpta(e^) 

bdjda(e) 

sydda(e) 

skrivna(e) 

'Masculine  nouns  denoting  persons  often  take  the  -e  form  of  the  adjective. 


134  EXERCISE, 

239.  The  past  participle  is  used  only  adjectively 
as  an  attributive,  an  appositive,  or  a  predicate  modi- 
fier. In  the  last  function  it  is  used  with  bliva  (varda) 
to  form  the  compound  passive  and  with  vara  in  the 
apparent  passive  (185)  :  de  slagna  ryssarna  flydde, 
the  defeated  Russians  fled ;  hdren,  besegrad  och  upp- 
riven,  drog  sig  tillbaka,  the  army,  defeated  and 
shattered,  withdrew;  huset  har  blivit  mdlat,  the 
house  has  been  painted ;  brevet  dr  skrivet,  the  letter 
is  written;  rocken  dr  lagad,  the  coat  is  mended. 

240.  The  past  participle  should  not  be  confused 
with  the  supine,  which  is. used  only  with  the  auxil- 
iary verb  hava  to  form  the  perfect  tenses  and  is 
indeclinable. 

Note.  With  some  verbs  of  motion  vara  may  be  used  with  the  past  participle 
to  form  the  perfect  tenses ;  as,  han  dr  bortrest,  he  has  left ;  han  ar  anldnd, 
he  has  arrived. 

Exercise  XXI. 

A.  Supply  the  present  participle,  the  past  participle,  or 
the  supine  of  the  verbs  indicated,  according  to  the  context; 
also  the  definite  and  plural  endings.  1,  Den  .  . .  (forlora) 
ring —  har  blifvit  .  .  •  (finna)  2.  Barn —  stod  . . .  (grata) ^ 
framfor  den  .  .  .  (stanga)  dorr — .  3.  Ester  ar  en  , . .  (for- 
tjusa)'^  liten  flicka.  4.  .  . .  (sova)^  hund —  (pi.)  bitas  ej. 
5.  Ert  . . .  (vanta  lange)^  brev  har  . . .  (komma).  6.  . . . 
(vanda)^  sig  till  mig,  bad  tiggar —  om  en  slant.  7.  Jag  har 
...  (hitta)  alia  de  .  . .  (forlora)  brev —  (def.  pi.),  edert 
. . .  (inbegripa)-.  Express  in  more  idiomatic  S'wedish  by 
expanding  the  participles  into  clauses.  8.  Icke  havande 
erfarenhet  nog,  vet  jag  ej  vad  jag  bor  gora.  9.  Nyheterna 
mottagna  i  gar  ha  gjort  oss  alia  glada.  10.  Havande  last 
brevet,  kastade  jag  bort  det.    Translate:  11.  I  heard  him 


EXERCISE.  135 

singing^.    12.  He  came  driving.     13.  Reading  and  writing 
are  taught  at  school. 

•Pres.  part.  ^Past  part.  'After  verbs  like  sCj  hora,  kanna,  Swedish  uses  the 
infinitive  of   the   dependent  verb,    not  the   pres.  part. 

Note  the  inverted  order  in  an  independent  clause  following'  a  dependent. 

B.  1.  Nar  jag  gick  hem  fran  kyrkan  i  gar,  traffade  jag 
froken  Lind,  dotter  till  en  gammal  skolkamrat.  2.  Eme- 
dan  det  ar  lange  sedan  jag  sag  henne,  kande  jag  knappast 
igen  henne.  3.  Hon  var  fortjusande  vacker  i  sin  n3'a  vin- 
terhatt,  vilken  hon  sade  var  en  julklapp  fran  hennes  far. 
4.  Hon  omtalade  for  mig,  att  hennes  far  ofta  hade  ut- 
tryckt  en  onskan  att  fa  traffa  mig.  5.  Jag  svarade,  att  jag 
ej  skulle  lamna  staden  utan  att  ha  besokt  dem.  6.  Det 
gladde  mig,  att  han  mindes  mig.  7.  Han  ar  en  mycket  in- 
tressant  man,  som  talar  manga  frammande  sprak  flytande 
och  ar  val  belast,  8.  Da  vi  hollo  pa  att  samtala,  kommo 
hennes  vanner  ut  ur  kyrkan.  9.  Nar  jag  sag  dem  komma, 
sade  jag  adjo  och  lamnade  henne. 

C.  1.  Emedan  jag  ville  roka  en  cigarr,  gick  jag  in  i  rok- 
kupen.  2.  Mannen,  som  star  dar  borta,  ar  konduktorn, 
fraga  honom,  nar  taget  gar.  3.  Han  kom  springande,  men 
nar  han  sag  mig,  stannade  han  och  halsade. 

D.  1.  Going^  home  from  church  last  Sunday,  I  met  Miss 
Wallner.  2.  Stopping^  she  wished  me  a  merry  Christmas 
and  a  happy  New  Year.  3.  She  looked^  charming  in  her 
new  winter  hat.  4.  Seeing^  me  look  at  it,  she  told  me  that 
it  was  a  Christmas  gift  from  her  father,  5.  Her  father  is 
a  very  learned  and  cultured  man  and  a  celebrated  author. 
6.  He  speaks  fluently  six  foreign  languages  and  is  very 
well-read.  7.  Not  having*  seen  him  for  many  years,  I  ex- 
pressed my  desire  of  calling  (inf.)  on  him.  8.  Smiling* 
kindly  she  said  that  her  father  would  like  to  see  me,  hav- 


136  VOCABULARY. 

ing^  often  talked  about  me  and  wondered  where  I  was. 
9.  Thanking-  her  I  asked  her  to  greet  her  parents  from 
me. 

E.  1.  Is  this  a  compartment  for  smokers?  No,  smoking 
is  prohibited  here.  2.  How  much  did  you  have  to  (mdste 
ni)  pay  for  overweight?  Nothing;  they  checked  my  bag- 
gage without  weighing  (230)  it.  3.  Having  asked^  the 
conductor  if  it  was  the  express  train  for  (till)  Stockholm, 
we  boarded  the  train.  4.  My  stopping  and  talking  (230, 
note)  caused  me  to  (gjorde  ait  jag)  come  too  late  to  the 
train.  5.  Having  bought^  a  time-table,  I  went  into  the 
waiting  room. 

^Translate  by  a  temporal  clause.  -Expand  into  a  coordinate  clause.  *To  look 
(appearance)  —  «e  ut.  ^Causal  clause  introduced  by  endr,  emedan,  or  da. 
*Clause  introduced  by   ty. 

VOCABULARY. 

adjo',  good-bye  en    kupe,    -er,    compartment 

helasf,  -t,  well-read  (railroad) 

bildad,  -at,  p.  p.  (bilda),  cul-  le,  log,  logo,  lett,  to  smile 

tured  Hinge  vantad,  -at,  p.  p.  (vanta 
en  er'farenhet,  -er,  experience  Idnge),  long  expected 

ftytande,  pres.  p.  (fiyta),  fluent  lard,  lart,  p.  p.  (Idra),  learned 

frdmmande, — .foreign,  strange  (e)mot'taga,  taga  emot'  (sep., 
forbjuden,   p.   p.   (forbjuda),  see  taga),  to  receive 

prohibited  om'tala,  tala  om'  (sep.),  to  tell 

fortju'sande,  pres.   p.   (for-  polette'ra,  I,  to  check  (baggage) 

tjusa),  charming  en  rokare,  — ,  smoker 

fbrdVdrar,  parents  en  rokkupc,  -er,  compartment 
for  sent',  too  late  for  smokers 

grdta,  grdt,  grdto,  grdtit.  to  rokning,  smoking 

weep  sju,  seven 

hitta,  I,  to  find  en  slant,  -ar,  coin 

hdlsa  pa',  to  call  on  ett  sndlltdg,  — ,  express  train 

in'begripa,  -grep,  -grepo,  -gri-  ett  sprdk,  — ,  language 

pit,  -en,  -et,   to   include  stanna,  I,  to  stay,  stop 

en  konduktor',  -er,  conductor  stiga  pd',  to  board,  enter 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS.  137 

i  sondags,  last  Sunday  en  vinterhatt,  -ar,  winter  hat 

en  tid'tabelV,  -er,  time  table  viiga,  lib,  to  weigh 

en  tiggare,  — ,  beggar  vdnda,  lib  {vande,  vdnt),  to 
tit'ta  pd,  I,  to  look  at  turn 

undra,  I,  to  wonder  en  vantsal,  -ar,  waiting  room 

ut'trycka  (insep.),  Ila,  to  ex-  en  overvikt,  overweight 

press  en  onskan  (no  pi.),  wish 

Idioms:  1.  att  onska  ndgon   en  glad  jul,   to   wish   somebody 
a    merry    Christmas. 

2.  att  onska  ndgon  ett  gott  nytt  &r,  to  wish   some- 
body a   happy   New   Year. 

3.  att  om'tala,  or  tola  om'  ndgot  for  ndgon,  to  tell 
somebody   something. 

4.  Jag  sade  adjo  till  honom,  I  said  good-bye  to  him. 

5.  att  ha  frammande,  to  have  company. 


LESSON  XXII. 

The  Verb  (Continued). 

IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

241.  The  impersonal  verb  form,  like  the  reflex- 
ive, is  used  more  extensively  in  Swedish  than  in 
English.  The  impersonal  subject  is  det,  which  is 
never  omitted  except  in  a  few  archaic  expressions. 

242.  Important  impersonals  are: 

(1)  Those  referring  to  processes  of  nature: 

det  regnar,  it  rains  det  fryser,  it  freezes 

det  snoar,  it  snows  det  toar,  it  thaws 

det  hlixtrar,  it  lightens     det  dagas,  it  dawns 

(2)  Those  expressing  merely  abstract  action;  as, 
det  knackar  pa  dorren,  there  is  a  knock  on  the  door ; 
det  ror  sig  i  skogen,  something  moves  in  the  forest ; 
det  gar  i  korridoren,  somebody  is  walking  in  the 
hall. 

Swedish  Grammar  10 


138  IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

(3)  Verbs  in  many  idiomatic  phrases,  the  person 
or  thing  referred  to  often  appearing  as  object : 

det  gdller  mitt  Uv,  my  hfe  is  at  stake 

det  gdller  honom,  it  concerns  him 

det  lonar  modan,  it  is  worth  the  while 

det  gar  mig  vol,  I  am  doing  well 

det  gor  mig  ont  om  dig,  I  feel  sorry  for  you 

hur  star  det  till  med  dig  ?  How  are  you  ? 

243.  The  impersonal  passive.  Many  verbs, 
even  intransitives,  may  form  an  impersonal  passive 
either  with  det  as  the  subject  or  with  the  subject 
omitted;  as,  det  skrattades  och  sjongs,  there  was 
laughing  and  singing;  hdr  dtes,  ser  jag,  you  are 
eating,  it  seems  (I  see)  ;  det  frdga^  ofta,  the  ques- 
tion is  often  asked. 

244.  Other  uses  of  det: 

Det  corresponds  in  general  to  the  English  it,  but 
has  some  idiomatic  uses,  as  already  shown  in  part. 

(a)  Det  stands  for  the  introductory  there  and 
serves  to  bring  the  verb  before  the  logical  subject; 
as,  detjevde  en  gang  en  konung,  once  there  lived  a 
king;  det  sprang  ett  par  gossar  over  fdltet,  literally, 
there  ran  a  couple  of  boys  across  the  field. 

Note.     The  verb  does  not  as  in  English  agree  with  the  logical  subject  but  is 
always  in  the  singrular.     This  form  is  often  resorted  to  for  emphasis. 

(b)  Det  finns,  det  gives,  and  det  dr: 

1.  There  is,  and  there  are,  expressing  mere  exist- 
ence, are  rendered  by  det  finns,  det  gives,  and  det 
dr. 

2.  Det  finns,  more  seldom  det  gives,  expresses 
existence  within  a  space  of  extended  or  indefinite 
limits,  whereas  det  dr  expresses  existence  within 


REFLEXIVE  VERBb.  139 

a  definite  space  of  relatively  small  extent :  det  fanns 
dnnu  drliga  man,  there  were  still  honest  men;  det 
gives  intet  vol,  there  is  no  choice ;  det  finns,  or  gives 
en  Gud,  there  is  a  God;  det  dr  ett  par  herrar  vid 
dorren,  there  are  a  couple  of  gentlemen  at  the  door. 
Note  the  singular  of  the  verb,  irrespective  of  the 
number  of  the  following  noun. 

(c)  Det  is  used  expletively  to  represent  another 
word,  phrase,  or  clause  already  used,  and  of  which 
the  repetition  is  avoided  (it  is  then  rendered  by  so 
or  not  translated) .  Ex. :  han  var  rik,  nu  dr  han  det 
ej  Idngre,  he  was  rich,  now  he  is  so  no  longer;  vet 
du  vad  han  sade?  J  a,  det  gor  jag;  do  you  know 
what  he  said  ?  Yes,  I  do ;  ar  han  hdr  ?  J  a,  det  tror 
jag;  is  he  here?    Yes,  I  think  so. 

REFLEXIVE  VERBS. 

245.  Reflexive  verbs  "reflect"  the  action  upon 
the  subject.  Hence  the  object  is  always  the  pro- 
noun corresponding  to  the  subject. 

246.  A  reflexive  verb  has  no  peculiarity  of  con- 
jugation. The  pronoun  object  is  placed  immedi- 
ately after  the  verb. 

247.  The  reflexive  form  is  used  much  more  wide- 
ly in  Swedish  than  in  English,  often  giving  rise  to 
secondary  significations  which  require  their  own 
peculiar  translations.    Examples : 

erinra,  to  remind  erinra  sig,  to  remember 

inhilla,  to  make  believe  inbilla  sig,  to  imagine 
uppfora,  to  perform,  erect  uppfora  sig,  to  behave 
tro,  to  believe  tro  sig,  to  presume,  dare 

fatta,  to  seize  fatta  sig,  to  compose  one- 

self 


140 


REFLEXIVE  VERBS, 


Some  verbs  are  used  only  reflexively;  as, 

befinna  sig,  to  be  (as  to  tilldraga  sig,  to  take  place 
health,  condition) 

hefiita  sig,  to  apply  one-  hegiva  sig,  to  betake  one- 
self self 

248.      Conjugation    of    the    reflexive    verb:    att 
inbilla  sig,  to  imagine. 


PRESENT  INDICATIVE 

Sg.  jag  inbillar  mig 
du  inbillar  dig 
han  vibillar  sig 
ni  inbillar  er  (eder) 

PI.    vi  inbilla  oss 

I  inbillen  er  (eder) 
ni  inbilla  er  (eder)   ' 
de  inbilla  sig 


IMPERFECT    INDICATIVE 

jag  inbillade  mig,  etc. 


vi  inbillade  oss,  etc. 


PERFECT  PLUPERFECT 

jag  har  inbillat  mig,  etc.  jag  hade  inbillat  mig,  etc. 


FUTURE 


FUTURE  PERFECT 


jag  shall  inbilla  mig,  etc.  jag  shall  ha  inbillat  mig, 

etc. 


IMPERATIVE 

2nd  Sg. 

inbilla  dig  (familiar) 

2nd  PI. 

inbillen  er  (archaic) 

2nd  Sg.  and  PI. 

inbilla  er 

1st  PI. 

Idt(om)  oss  inbilla  oss,  etc. 

Note.  The  reflexives  may  be  intensified  by  sjSlv:  han  aUlcade  sig  ijalv  och 
ieke  sina  medmanniskor :  he  loved  himself  and  not  his  fellow  men.  The  student 
should,  however,  avoid  the  use  of  gjiilv  with  the  reflexives,  this  construction 
being  very  limited. 


INFINITIVES 

Present : 

att  inbilla  sig 

Perfect  : 

att  ha(va)  inbillat  sig 

Future  Perfect: 

att  shola  ha  inbillat  sig 


EXERCISE.  141 

249.  Note  such  idiomatic  reflexive  constructions 
as:  jag  skar  mig  i  fingret,  I  cut  my  finger;  Karl 
har  brutit  av  sig  benet,  Carl  has  broken  his  leg; 
sdtt  pa  dig  hatten,  put  on  your  hat.  The  postposi- 
tive definite  article  is  often  used  instead  of  the  pos- 
sessive with  nouns  which  denote  parts  of  the  body 
and  articles  of  clothing.  The  possessor  may  be 
represented  by  an  object  pronoun. 

250.  The  reciprocal  pronoun  is  varandra,  each 
other,  one  another,  which  is  indeclinable :  vi  trdffade 
varandra,  we  met  each  other;  vi  dlskade  varandra, 
we  loved  one  another. 

Note.  The  reciprocal  idea  may,  as  has  been  stated  before,  often  be  expressed 
by  the  -s  fonn  of  the  verb :  vi  trdffas,  we  meet  one  another ;  hdstarna  bitas, 
the  horses  bite  one  another  ;  sang  och  glddje  fdljas  at,  song  and  joy  accom- 
pany one  another.  When  no  agent  is  mentioned  the  -s  form  of  the  passive 
must  often  be  avoided  since  it  may  give  a  reciorocal  meaning  to  the  verb 
(186). 

Exercise  XXII. 

A.  Continue  the  following:  1.  Jag  skall  kliida  mig 
varmt,  sa  att  jag  ej  f orkyler  mig,  du  . .  .  dig  . . . ,  sa  att, 
etc.  2.  Innan  jag  mottog  frammande,  maste  jag  klada  om 
mig,  innan  du  .  .  .,  maste  du.  . .  dig,  etc.  3.  Om  jag  inte 
uppfor  mig  battre,  sa  maste  jag  skammas,  om  du,  etc. 
4.  Jag  hade  befunnit  mig  battre,  pm  jag  hade  skyddat  mig 
mot  kolden,  du,  etc.  5.  Om  jag  ej  andrar  mig,  och  det  ej 
regnar,  sa  kommer  jag,  om  du,  etc. 

Translate:  1.  I  think  so.  2.  We  shall  see  one  another 
soon.  3.  Hurry,  Carl,  we  are  waiting  for  {pa)  you.  4. 
There  are  two  industrious  boys  in  this  room.  5.  Can  you 
tell  if  there  is  a  postoffice  in  {vid  or  pa)  this  street?  6. 
Stay  at  home,  boys,  it  is  freezing  and  snowing. 


142  EXERCISE. 

B.  1.  Det  gar  pa  verandan,  nu  knackar  det  pa  dorren; 
skynda  dig,  Anna,  att  oppna.  2.  Jag  maste  ga  och  klada 
om  mig;  det  passar  ej  att  taga  emot  frammande,  kladd 
som  jag  ar.  3.  Jag  tror,  att  det  ar  herr  Edgren,  bed  ho- 
nom  stiga  in  i  formaket  och  satta  sig,  det  drojer  endast  ett 
par  minuter,  tills  jag  ar  far  dig.  4.  Jag  hoppas  ni  ursaktar, 
att  jag  har  latit  er  vanta,  herr  Edgren.  5.  Hur  star  det 
till?  S'a  trakigt^,  att  min  man  icke  ar  hemma,  det  skulle 
ha  glatt  honom  att  fa  traffa  er.  6.  Jag  mar  fortraffligt, 
fm  Sterner.  Men  hur  befinna  ni  er  nu  for  tiden  (nowa- 
days) ?  7.  Jag  horde  for  nagon  tid  sedan,  att  Karl  hade 
forkylt  sig  myeket  svart.  8,  Vi  ma  alia  bra  nu,  men  vadret 
andrar  sig  sa  hastigt  nu  for  tiden,  att  det  ar  omojligt  att 
skydda  sig  mot  forkylning.  9.  I  gar  snoade  det,  i  dag  reg- 
nar  det,  nu  blixtrade  det  till  och  med,  tror  jag.  10.  Sag 
till  (at)  gossarna,  att  de  uppfora  sig  litet  battre,  Anna, 
Erik  skriker  ju,  som  om  det  gallde  livet.  11.  De  kunna 
vaP  roa  sig  utan  att  vasnas  sa;  herr  Edgren  och  jag  kun- 
na knappast  hora  varandra.  12.  Adjo,  fru  Sterner;  det 
var  trakigt,  att  Karl  ej  var  hemma,  men  vi  traffas  val 
senare. 

^It  is  too  bad  that,  etc. ;  boken  ar  trakig,  the  book  bores  me.  ^Val  —  I 
suppose,  I  should  think,  very  likely,  etc. 

C.  1.  I  think  the  weather  has  changed^ ;  it  is  becoming 
cloudy,  it  looks  as  if  it  would  {skulle)  rain  soon.  2.  It  is 
quite  (gansl-a)  chilly  and  we  must  dress  warmly  if  we  in- 
tend to  go  out,  otherwise   (annars)   we  shall  catch  cold. 

3.  Somebody  is  walking-  on  the  porch;  now  there  is  a 
knock^.     Please  look  and  see  (se  efter)  who  it  is,  Anna. 

4.  Father,  it  is  Mr.  Lind.  How  are  you,  Mr.  Lind  ?  I  am 
very  glad^  to  see  you.  5.  The  pleasure  is  mutual,  Mr.  Len- 
nart,  it  is  long  since  we  met.  6.  Why  do  the  boys  make 
such  a  noise  (B,  11),  Anna?    Tell  (B,  10)  them  to  behave 


VOCABULARY. 


143 


better  when  there  is  company.  7.  If  I  am  not  mistaken^ 
it  is  Carl  that  is  yelling ;  he  ought  to  be  ashamed  to  behave^ 
so  badly.  8.  Who  is  that  lady  you  greeted?  It  is  the  wife 
of  Mr.  Brown.  9.  We  do  not  know  one  another  well,  but 
we  always  greet  one  another  when  we  meet  (250).  10,  Who 
is  Mr.  Brown  ?  He  is  a  man  who  always  lacks^  money  and 
who  wants  to  borrow  from  everybody.  11.  He  used  to  be 
much  respected,  but  he  is  no  longer  so  (244,  c).  12.  There 
are  not  many  (manga)  in  this  town  who  would  lend  him 
money.  13.  Has  he  presumed*  to  ask  you  to  lend  him? 
14.  No,  he  knows  that  it  is  not  worth  while^.  15.  Good-bye, 
I  must  hurry ;  there  is  much  work  for  me  at  home. 

*Use  reflex,  verb.     ^242,  2.     *Use  an  impersonal  construction,  242,  3.     *Pre- 
sume  —  tro  sig. 


VOCABULARY. 


tefin'na    sig,    to    feel,    to    be 

(health) 
droja    (intr.),   lib,   to   delay, 

take  time 


knappast,  hardly 
en  kold,  cold 
kylig,  -t,  cool 
ett  liv,  — ,  life 


fattas  (dep.  v.,  often  impers.),  Idta,   Idt,   Idto,   Idtit,  to   let, 

I,  to  lack  allow 

frysa,  fros,  froso,  frusit,  -en,  miss'taga   (insep.,  see  taga), 

-et,  to  freeze  to  mistaKe 


fiirdig,  -t,  ready 


misstaga  sig,  to  be  mistaKen 


fdrky'la  sig,  lib,  to  catch  cold     ^^^^^  (generally  impers.),  I, 
en  forkyVning,  -ar,  cold  (health)        ^^  become  cloudy 
ett  for'mak,  parlor 


en  gladje,  joy 

giilla,  lib,  to  have  a  value; 
concern 

hdVsa  pA,  I,  to  greet 

klada,  lib,  to  dress  (some- 
body) 

kldda  sig,  to  dress  (oneself) 

kldda  om'  (sig),  to  change 
dress 


motas  (used  reciprocally),  to 

meet  one  another 
passa,  I,  to  fit;  be  proper 
roa  sig,  I,  to  amuse  oneself 
senare,  later 
skrika,    skrek,    skreko,    skri- 

kit,  to  yell,  cry 
skydda,  I,  to  protect 
skynda  sig,  I,  to  hurry 


144 


MODAL   AUXILIARIES. 


skiimmas    (dep.),   lib,   to   be 

ashamed 
snija  (impers.),  I,  to  snow 
std  till',  to  be  (health) 
svdr,  -t,  difficult,  serious 
sd  att  (conj,),  so  that 
till  och  med,  even 
tills  (conj.),  until 
trdffas  (used  reciprocally),  to 

meet  or  see  one  another 


trdkig,  -t,  boring,  sad,  bad 
uppfo'ra,  lib,  to  erect;  to  per- 
form 
uppfdra  sig,  to  conduct  oneself 
fora  upp^,  to  bring  up 
ur'sdkta,  I,  to  excuse 
vdsnas  (dep.),  I,  to  make  noise 
dndra,  I,  to  change  (something) 
dndra  sig,  to  change  one's  mind 
omsesidig,  -t,  mutual 


Idioms. 

1.  Varfdr  drdjer  han  sd  Idngef    Why  does  he  stay  so  long? 

2.  Myntet  giiller  icke  Idngre,  the  coin  is  no  longer  current; 
han  guller  icke  mycket  hdr,  he  is  of  small  account  here. 

3.  att  skdmmas  for  ndgot,  to  be  ashamed  of  something. 

4.  att  ta  emot'  frummande,  to  receive  company. 

5.  Hur  star  det  till  med  er  hrorf    How  is  your  brother? 


LESSON  XXIII. 
Verbal  Auidliaries. 

MODAL  AUXILIARIES. 

251.    The  modal  auxiliaries  are: 

INFINITIVE  PRESENT 

SING.  PLUR. 

kunna,  can  kan  kunna 

ma,  may  ma  m.a 

bora,  ought  to  bor  bora 

skola,  shall  skall  (ska)  skola(ska)  skulle  stcolat 

vilja,  will  vill  vilja  ville      velat 

mdste,  must  mdste  mdste         mdste  mdst 

tor,  is  likely  tor  tora  torde 

The  modals  are  conjugated  regularly;   some  of  them,  how- 
ever, are  defective.     The  following  remarks  will  suffice: 

(a)  The  archaic  second  person  has  the  ending  -en:  I  skolen 
(md  takes  only  -n  in  2nd  pers.  pi.:  I  mdn). 

(b)  The  singular  form  is  practically  the  only  one  used  in 
conversation. 


IMPERFECT    SUPINE 
so.  AND  PL. 

kunde  kunnat 
mdtte 
borde    bort 


MODAL   AUXILIARIES.  145 

(c)  The  compouud  tenses  'are  formed  regularly:  jag  har 
skolat,  han  hade  kunnat.  Skola,  md,  tur,  mdste,  and  hora 
lack  future  and  future  perfect;  md  and  tor  lack  perfect  and 
pluperfect. 

(dj  The  subjunctives  of  the  modals  except  of  kunna  and 
vilja  are  not  formed  with  md,  matte,  and  skulle.  The  im- 
perfect and  pluperfect  subjunctives  only  are  in  use  (except 
in  the  case  of  vilja  and  kunna)  and  they  are  like  the  indica- 
tive: kunna  and  vilja  may  form  a  present  subjunctive  with 
md  or  mdtte  and  the  present  infinitive;  an  imperfect  sub- 
junctive with  skulle  and  the  present  infinitive;  a  perfect  sub- 
junctive with  md  or  mdtte  and  the  perfect  infinitive;  a  plu- 
perfect subjunctive  with  skulle  and  the  perfect  infinitive. 
The  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctives  generally  used  are 
identical  with  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  indicative:  im- 
perfect subjunctive,  jag  skulle  kunna,  vilja,  or  jag  kunde, 
ville;  perfect  subjunctive,  jag  md,  mdtte  ha  kunnat,  velat; 
pluperfect  subjunctive,  jag  skulle  ha  kunnat,  velat  or  jag  hade 
kunnat,  velat. 

SOME  USES  OF  THE  MODAL  AUXILIARIES. 

252.  The  modal  auxiliaries  have  more  complete 
forms  in  Swedish  than  in  English.  The  Swedish 
modal  must  for  that  reason  sometimes  be  translated 
by  a  paraphrase;  as,  jag  mdste  arbeta  i  gar,  I  had 
to  work  yesterday;  jag  har  kunnat  gora  det,  I  have 
been  able  to  do  it. 

253.  The  modal  auxiliaries  govern,  as  in  English, 
the  simple  infinitive:  han  sdger,  att  han  ej  kan 
komma,  he  says  that  he  cannot  come;  jag  mdste 
gd  nu,  I  must  go  now. 

Note.  They  are  grenerally  accompanied  by  an  infinitive,  but  sometimes  a 
complementary  verb  may  be  implied ;  when  an  adverb  of  direction  is  used  a 
verb  of  motion  may  be  omitted  after  skola,  vilja,  and  mdste:  jag  mdste  hem, 
I  must  go  home ;  jag  vill  in,  I  want  to  come  in. 

254.  In  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  of  skola  and 
bora,  Swedish  prefers  a  construction  made  up  of 


146  SENSES  OF  MODALS. 

the  imperfect  subjunctive  of  the  modal  and  the 
perfect  infinitive  of  the  verb  to  one  consisting  of 
the  pluperfect  subjunctive  of  the  modal  and  the 
present  infinitive,  conforming  thus  with  the  Eng- 
lish usage.  The  treatment  of  kunna  is  identical, 
except  that  when  we  wish  especially  to  empha- 
size the  pluperfect  time  of  the  ability  or  possibil- 
ity we  use  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  of  kunna. 
Ex. :  han  skulle  ha  gjort  det,  he  should  have  done  it ; 
ni  horde  ha  kommit,  you  ought  to  have  come; 
jag  kunde  ha  skrivit,  I  could  have  written;  but 
jag  hade  kunnat  skriva,  I  might  have  been  able 
to  write. 

Note.  Vilja,  on  the  other  hand,  would  in  a  similar  case  always  be  put  in 
the  pluperf.  and  the  depending  verb  in  the  present  infinitive:  jag  hade  velat 
skriva  brevet,  and  i\ot  jag  ville  ha  skrivit;  han  hade  velat  ga,  om  hans  mor  ej 
hade  varit  sjuk,  he  would  have  wished  to  go,  if  his  mother  had  not  been  sick. . 

SENSES  OF  MODAL  AUXILIARIES. 

255.  Kunna.  Originally  it  meant  to  know  how,  to 
be  skilled  in.  This  use  is  still  retained  in  the  verb 
when  used  independently :  han  kan  svenska,  sin  Uixa; 
he  knows  Swedish,  his  lesson. 

(a)  Ability :  han  kan  Visa,  men  han  vill  ej,  he  can 
read  but  he  does  not  want  to. 

(b)  Possibility:  det  kan  nog  hdnda,  that  may 
happen;  jag  kunde  nog  gora  det,  I  could  perhaps 
do  it. 

(c)  Permission:  nu  kan  ni  ga,  now  you  may  go. 
In  this  sense  it  is  often  used  as  a  mild  command. 

(d)  Willingness :  det  kan  jag  giva  (ge)  er  genast, 
I  can  give  you  that  at  once. 

(e)  Habit,  custom :  hon  kunde  grata  i  timtal,  ndr 


EXERCISE.  147 

hon  tdnkte  pa  sitt  doda  barn,  she  would  cry  for 
hours  when  she  thought  of  her  dead  child. 

Note.  Habit  and  custom  are  more  often  expressed  by  the  verbs  bruka  and 
•pldga  and  the  infinitive,  or  by  the  present  or  imperfect  of  the  verb :  ndr  han  sag 
mig,   bruhade  han  fraga,  or,  frdgade  han,  whenever  he  saw  me  he  would  ask. 

256.    Ma. 

(a)  Auxiliary:  the  present  and  imperfect  are 
used  as  auxiliaries  to  form  the  present  subjunctive. 

(h)  Desire:  ma  Gud  vdlsigna  vdrt  arbete,  may 
God  bless  our  work;  vi  matte  vdl  komma  i  tid  till 
tdget,  may  we  only  come  in  time  to  the  train  (would 
that  we  might  etc.) . 

Note  1.     Matte  expresses  a  more  vivid  wish  than  md. 

2.  From  this  sense  of  md  springs  its  use  in  purpose  clauses  and  some  other 
clauses  introduced  by  att:  han  bad,  att  jag  mdtte  stanna  (also,  bad  mig  atl 
stannaj   he  asked   me   to  remain. 

(c)  Permission,  possibility:  md  (not  mdtte)  may 
be  used  with  the  sense  of  kan:  det  md  sd  vara,  that 
may  be  so;  occasionally  in  the  sense  of  fd  (263,  a)  : 
det  md  du  ej  gora,  you  may  not  do  that. 

Note.     Here  belongs  the  expression  mdhdnda,  perhaps. 

(d)  Supposition,  expressed  by  the  imperfect  of 
the  modal  mdtte  (not  md)  :  det  mdtte  ha  varit 
hemskt,  it  must  have  been  uncanny;  du  mdtte  vara 
mycket  trott,  I  dare  say,  you  are  very  tired. 

Exercise  XXIII, 

A.  Continue:  1.  Jag  visste  icke,  vad  jag  ville,  du  visste 
icke,  vad  du  ville,  etc.  3.  Jag  hade  kunnat  gora  en  resa, 
om  jag  hade  velat,  du  hade,  etc.  3.  Jag  skulle  vilja  ga  ut, 
men  jag  maste  stanna  hemma,  du  skulle,  etc.  4.  Jag  skulle 
ha  spelat  tennis,  om  jag  hade  kunnat,  du,  etc.     5.  Om  jag 


148  EXERCISE. 

hade  velat  fara  med  tiotaget,  sa  hade  jag  mast  skynda  mig, 
om  du,  etc.  6.  Jag  horde  ha  fragat  min  far  forst,  om  han 
ville  lata  mig  ga  med,  du  horde,  etc.  7.  Jag  ville  garna 
veta,  om  jag  skulle  kunna  gora  det,  du,  etc.  8.  Matte  jag 
ej  ha  kommit  for  sent !  matte  du,  etc. 

B.  1.  Min  van  Karl  fragade  mig  i  gar  morse,  om  jag 
ville  fara  med  honom  till  staden.  2.  Jag  sade  at  honom, 
att  jag  hade  mycket  arbete,  som  jag  horde  gora,  men  att 
jag  onskade,  att  han  matte  fraga  min  far,  om  jag  kunde 
fara  med.  3.  Matte  pappa  bara  tillata  det!  tankte  jag, 
nar  Karl  avlagsnade  sig  foi  att  hedja  honom  om  lov.  4.  Vi 
skulle  kunna  ha  sa  roligt  tillsammans,  5.  Naturligtvis 
skulle  vi  bevista  det  stora  fotbollspelet,  som  skulle  utkam- 
pas  mellan  tva  av  de  basta  fotbollagen  i  staden.  6.  Jag  har 
ofta  hett  pappa,  att  han  matte  lata  mig  spela  fotboll,  men 
jag  har  ej  kunnat  overtyga  honom  om  att  det  fir  en  nyttig 
idrott.  7.  Jag  brukar  ofta  saga,  att  om  han  blott  forstodo 
spelet,  sa  maste  han  finna  det  intressant.  8.  "Det  ma  s§ 
vara",  sade  han  en  gang,  "jag  har  blott  sett  ett  enda  spel 
och  kunde  alls  inte  bli  pa  det  klara  darmed.  9.  Det  syntes 
mig  vara  litet  for  mycket  for  ett  spel  och  litet  for  litet  for 
ett  slagsmal.'^  10.  Karl  kom  tillbaka  och  sade,  att  hiin 
hade  mast  lova,  att  vi  skulle  vara  tillbaka  sa  tidigt,  att  jag 
kunde  vattna  blomsterrabatterna  och  klippa  grasmattan. 
11.  Det  matte  ha  varit  svart  for  Karl  att  fa  pappas  tilla- 
telse. 

C.  Conversation.  1.  Vad  fragade  Karl  er  i  gar  morse? 
2.  Varfor  trodde  ni  ej,  att  ni  skulle  fa  folja  med?  3.  Vad 
onskade  ni,  att  Karl  skulle  gora?  4.  Varfor  avlagsnade 
Karl  sig.  5.  Vad  skulle  ni  ga  till,  om  ni  finge  resa  till  sta- 
den ?  6.  Mellan  vilka  skulle  spelet  utkampas  ?  7.  Vad  har 
ni  ej  lyckats  overtyga  er  far  om  ?    8.  Varfor  tror  ni  ej,  att 


VOCABULARY.  149 

er  far  finner  spelet  intressant?  9.  Hur  manga  fotbollspel 
har  er  far  bevistat?  10.  Har  Karl  lyckats  att  fa  er  fars 
tillatelse  till  resan?  11.  Vad  maste  ni  gora,  nar  ni  kom- 
mer  hem? 

D.    1.  I  should  like  to  go  to  town  with  my  friend  Carl. 

2.  A  football  game  will  be  played  between  the  two  best 
teams  in  town  and  I  should  like  very  much^  to  attend  it. 

3.  But  I  do  not  know  whether  {om)  I  may^  go,  for  my 
father  has  given  me  much  work  to    do    before    evening. 

4.  But  it  seems  to  me  that  he  ought  to  allow  me  to  go  this 
time  {gang).  5.  I  have  had  (perf.  of  maste)  to  stay  at 
home  all  summer^  in  order  to  take  care  of  the  garden, 
water  the  flower  beds  and  cut  the  lawn.  6.  I  have  always 
wished  to  play  football,  but  my  father  does  not  think  that 
it  is  a  useful  sport.  7.  If  Carl  were  only  here,  he  would 
be  able  to  get  my  father's  permission.  8.  I  am  so  glad 
that  you  came,  Carl.  Would  you  go  and  ask  father  (pappa) 
whether  I  may^  go?  9.  You  see,  I  ought  (horde)  really 
to  work  to-day.  I  should  have  done  (254)  this  work  yes- 
terday. 10.  What  did  papa  say?  Did  he  give  his  per- 
mission? 11.  Yes,  5'ou  may^  go  with  me;  but  you  will  have 
(pres.  of  maste)  to  be  back  early.  12.  He  must  be  very 
rich,  for  he  spends  much  money.  13.  I  wish  he  would  come 
soon  so  that  we  could*  begin  to  eat.  14.  Now  I  must  say 
good-bye  to  you,  but  we  might  meet^  again  to-morrow. 

^Skulle  mycket  gdrna  vilja...  ''Far  (263).  'After  hela,  which  is  not 
preceded  by  the  prepositive  article,  the  noun  takes  the  definite  form.  'Imper- 
fect subjunctive  of  kunna.     "s-fonn,  186a. 

VOCABULARY. 

alltid,  always  en  blom'sterrabaW,  -er,  flower 

av'ldgsna,  I,  to  renlove  bed 

avlagsna  sig,  to  go  away  blott,  only 

bara,  only  fara,  to  travel,  go 

bevista,  I,  to  attend  fara  med,  to  accompany 


150  SENSES  OF  MODALS. 

ett  fotbollspel,  — ,  football  game  naturligtvis,  of  course 
ett   fotbollag   (lag),   — ,   foot-    nyttig,  -t,  useful 

ball  team  ett  slagsmdl,  — ,  fight 

forst,  first  skota,  Ila,  take  care  of 

for  mycket,  too  much  ett  spel,  — ,  game,  play 

en  grdsmatta,  -or,  lawn  spela,  I,  play 

en  gang,  once  tennis,  tennis 

en  i'drott,  -er,  sport  tidigt,  early 

igen,  again  tillsammans,  together 

klippa,  Ila,  to  cut,  mow  en  tilldtelse,  permission 

ett   lov,  — ,   permission  tilldta  (insep.),  to  permit 

lova,  I,  to  promise  ett  tiotdg,  ten  o'clock  train 

mellan,  between  vattna,  I,  to  water 

i  gdr  morse,  yesterday  morn-    verkligen,  really 

ing  o'vertygaiinsev).) ,  I,  to  convince 

Idioms:   1.  att  fara  till  staden,  to  go  to  town. 

2.  Jag  vill  gdrna  fara  med,  I  should  like  to  accompany. 

3.  Det  synes  mig,  or  jag  tycker,  it  seems  to  me. 

4.  bli  pd  det  klara,  understand. 

LESSON  XXIV. 
Verbal  Auxiliaries  (Continued). 

SENSES  OF  MODAL  AUXILIARIES   {Continued). 

257.  Bora. 

(a)  Duty:  jag  bor  gora  vad  som  dr  rati,  I  ought 
to  do  what  is  right. 

Note  1.  The  imperfect  borde  is  generally  used  with  present  meaning  antl 
hag  the  same  signification  as  bor  (ought)  if  unaccented :  du  borde  skdmmas. 
yon  ought  to  be  ashamed  of  yourself.  If  accented  it  implies  that  one  does 
not  do  what  one  ought  to,  for  instance:  jag  borde  ga  hem  och  arbeta,  I  ought 
(that  is,  if  I  were  to  do  my  duty)  to  go  home  and  work. 

2.     In  the  sense  of  duty  bora  is  weaker  than  skola. 

(b)  Calculation :  tdget  bor  vara  hdr  om  tio  minu- 
ter, the  train  ought  to  be  here  in  ten  minutes. 

(c)  Fitness :  sd  bor  det  vara,  thus  it  ought  to  be. 

258.  Skola.    Originally  it  signified  duty  or  obli- 
gation. 


SENSES  OF  MODALS.  151 

(a)  Auxiliary: 

1.  The  present  (shall)  is  used  as  an  auxiliary 
with  the  infinitive  to  form  the  future  tense :  jag  shall 
gd,  I  shall  go ;  jag  shall  hava  gdtt,  I  shall  have  gone. 

2.  The  imperfect  (shulle)  is  used  with  the  in- 
finitive as  one  mode  of  forming  the  imperfect  and 
pluperfect  subjunctive. 

(h)  Condition  or  contingency:  om  ni  shulle  se 
honom,  sd  hdlsa  honom  frdn  mig,  give  him  my  greet- 
ings, if  you  should  see  him ;  han  sade,  att  han  shulle 
homma,  he  said  that  he  would  come. 

(c)  Duty  or  necessity,  when  proceeding  from 
the  speaker :  du  shulle  ha  gdtt,  ndr  han  bad  dig,  you 
should  have  gone  when  he  asked  you;  du  shall  iche 
stjdla,  thou  shalt  not  steal;  om  vi  sha  gora  det,  sd 
Idt  OSS  gora  det  snart,  if  we  are  to  do  it,  then  let  us 
do  it  soon. 

(d)  Threat  or  promise:  det  sha  du  inte  ha  gjort 
for  inte,  I  will  remember  you  for  this  (i.  e.  repay 
you  in  kind). 

(e)  Intention:  han  shulle  ha  hommit  i  gar,  he 
mtended  to  come  yesterday. 

(f)  Report:  han  shall  vara  holossalt  rih,  he  is 
said  to  be  enormously  rich. 

(g)  Wish:  vi  shulle  allt  ha  en  trddgdrd,  i  vilhen 
alia  slags  blommor  shulle  vdxa,  I  wish  we  had  a  gar- 
den in  which  all  kinds  of  flowers  might  grow. 

259.    Vilja. 

(a)  Will,  intention,  purpose:  han  ville  visst  iche 
gora  dig  ond,  he  did  not  at  all  intend  to  make  you 


152  SENSES  OF  MODALS. 

angry;  han  vill  hem,  jag  kan  ej  kvarhdlla  honom, 
he  is  determined  to  go  home,  I  cannot  keep  him. 

(h)  Wish,  entreaty  or  request:  han  ville  gdrna 
hjdlpa,  he  was  anxious  to  help;  vill  ni  komma  ndr- 
mare  or  vill  ni  vara  sd  god  och  komma  ndrmare, 
please  come  a  little  closer  (vill  is  very  often  used 
thus  to  express  a  mild  command)  ;  jag  ville  gdrna 
ha  en  kopp  till,  I  should  like  another  cup. 

Note  1.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  of  vilja  with  the  adverb  gdrna,  willingly, 
is  g'enerally  used  to  express  a  request  politely  as  above,  sometimes  with  ■  viil 
and  a  n^fative:  ni  ville  vdl  inte  gora  del  for  migt     Would  you  do  that  for  me' 

2.  Vilja  is  often  used  with  an  object,  especially  a  pronoun:  Vad  vill  han 
dig  f  What  does  he  have  to  say  to  you  ?  kan  vill  mig  vdl,  he  wishes  me  well, 
he  is  well  disposed  toward  me.  Its  signification  seems  to  forbid  its  use  with 
any  other  than  animate  subjects,  but  it  is  often  used  figuratively  with  inani- 
mate: min  klocka  vill  ej  gd,  my  watch  does  not  run  (won't  run)  ;  blommor 
vilja  ej  vdxa  i  sadan  jord,  flowers  do  not  gjow  in  such  soil. 

Remaek.  Do  not  translate  will  and  would  by  vill,  ville, 
if  they  are  only  a  sign  of  the  future  or  the  subjunctive.  Will 
and  would  denoting  habitual  action  are  generally  expressed 
by  the  simple  tenses,  present  and  past,  or  by  the  verbs  bruka 
and  plaga  (255,  e). 

260.  Mdste. 

(a)  Physical  necessity:  jag  mdste  ha  mat,  annars 
svdlter  jag  ihjdl,  I  must  have  food,  or  else  I  shall 
starve  to  death. 

(b)  Logical  necessity:  det  mdste  vara  sant,  that 
must  be  true. 

(c)  Moral  necessity:  ham  mdste  lyda  sina  for- 
dldrar,  children  must  obey  their  parents. 

261.  Tor. 

Probability,  supposition:  the  imperfect  torde  is 
used  with  present  sense  and  is  of  much  more  fre- 
quent occurrence  than  the  present  tor:  det  torde 


VERBAL  AUXILIARIES.  153 

vara  ganska  svdrt,  very  likely  it  is  quite  difficult; 
han  torde  vara  sjuk,  ty  han  lovade  sdkert  att  komma, 
I  suppose  that  he  is  sick,  for  he  promised  surely  to 
come. 

OTHER  VERBAL  AUXILIARIES. 

262.  The  causative  auxiliary  lata,  to  let,  make, 
or  cause  (to  do  or  to  be  done).  It  has  three  main 
significations : 

(a)  to  allow,  to  give  permission :  han  Idt  pojkarna 
leka,  he  allowed  the  boys  to  play. 

(b)  to  have  somebody  do  a  thing:  jag  har  Idiit 
Karl  hdmta  brddet,  I  have  had  Carl  fetch  the  bread. 
When  the  verb  has  this  signification  the  subject  of 
the  infinitive  is  often  omitted :  jag  har  Idtit  gdra  en 
rock,  I  have  had  a  coat  made. 

XoTE.  In  the  latter  case  it  is  best  to  render  lata  by  have  and  the  infinitive 
by  the  passive  participle. 

(c)  Lata  is  used  to  paraphrase  the  first  person 
plural  of  the  imperative :  Idt  oss  gd;  also  occasionally 
as  a  substitute  for  the  passive ;  as,  det  later  sig  gdra, 
that  can  be  done;  han  har  Idtit  overtala  sig,  he  has 
been  persuaded. 

Note.  In  this  reflexive  construction  the  passive  infinitive  is  also  permitted  ; 
the  reflexive  always  precedes  the  infinitive :  Jian  har  latit  sig  ofvertalas,  he  has 
been  persuaded. 

263.  Fd,  to  get,  to  receive,  is  also  used  as  an 
auxiliary  in  a  variety  of  meanings. 

(a)  Permission:  nu  fdr  du  gd,  now  you  may  go. 
In  this  sense  it  is  more  common  than  either  kunna 
255,  c)  or  md  (256,  c). 
(h)  Necessity:  som  gosse  fick  han  ofta  gdra  en 

Swedish  Grammar  11 


154  EXERCISE. 

ma7is  arbete,  as  a  boy  he  often  had  to  do  a  man's 
work. 

Note  1.  Very  often  the  word  lov,  permission,  is  used  euphemistically  with 
fa  when  it  denotes  necessity:  du  far  lov  alt  studera  nil,  you  must  study  now. 

2.  Maste  has  a  more  general  and  absolute  meaning  than  fdj  thus,  we  must 
all  die,  must  be  rendered  by,   vi  maste  alia  do. 

(c)  With  the  verbs  veta,  hora,  and  se,  fa  is  used  in 
an  inchoative  sense  resembling  the  English  get;  as, 
hon  fick  veta  det  i  gar,  she  received  news  of  it  yes- 
terday (learned  to  know)  ;  kommer  han?  du  far  se, 
you  will  see  (learn). 

Note.  When  used  independently  fa  presents  many  striking  analogies  with 
ff^.     Fa  tag  pa,  to  get  hold  of ;  fa  igenom  en  sak,  get  a  thing  through,  etc. 

264.  Ldr  is  used  only  in  the  present  indicative 
to  denote  a  supposition  based  on  report.  In  this 
sense  it  is  more  common  than  skola  (258,  f )  :  han 
ldr  vara  sjuk,  they  say  he  is  sick. 

Note.  The  same  idea  is  more  commonly  expressed  by  the  use  of  the  adverb 
visst,  certainly,  surely ;  han  dr  vtsst  sjuk.  The  adverbs  allt,  nog  and  vdl  ex- 
press the  idea  conveyed  by   torde   (261). 

Exercise  XXIV. 

A.  Continue:  1.  Jag  bor  vara  hemma  om  en  timma, 
ty  min  far  har  sagt,  att  jag  maste  hjalpa  honom,  du  bor 
vara,  etc.  2.  Ora  jag  anda  skall  gora  det,  sa  borde  jag  gora 
det  strax,  etc.  3.  Jag  skulle  garna  vilja  ha  kaffe,  om  jag 
blott  finge  lov  af  min  lakare  att  dricka  det,  du  skulle  garna, 
etc.  4.  Som  gosse  hade  jag  nog  fatt  arbeta  tungt,  om  jag 
hade  kunnat,  men  jag  var  sa  klen,  som  gosse  hade  du,  etc. 
5.  Jag  skulle  ha  latit  gora  mig  en  kostym,  om  min  far  hade 
velat  ge  mig  pengar  att  be^ala  den  med,  etc.  6.  Om  han 
hade  velat  avlagsna  sig,  sa  kunde  jag  ha  gatt  till  sangs 
tidigt,  etc.  7.  Jag  lat  honom  vanta  pa  svar,  ty  jag  var  ej 
pa  det  klara  med  hvad  han  ville,  du  lat  honom,  etc. 


EXERCISE.  155 

B.  En  bonde  hade  kommit  till  en  marknad  och  ville 
kopa  nagot.  Han  stod  vid  ett  av  marknadsstandeii  och 
sag,  hur  folk  kopte  glasogon.  Handlanden  gav  dem  en 
bok  med  fin  stil  i,  sedan  satte  de  pa  ett  par  glasogon  och 
sago  nppmarksamt  i  boken.  "Kan  ni  lasa  den  liar  sWen 
bra?"  fragade  handlanden,  och  njir  den  andre  svarade  ja, 
sa  kopte  han  glasogonen.  Bonden  ville  ocksa  kbpa  sig  ett 
par  glasogon.  Han  steg  fram  till  disken,  satte  pa  sig  det 
ena  paret  efter  det  andra  och  sag  i  boken,  man  lade  ater 
bort  dem.  Handlanden  ville  hjalpa  honom  och  erbjod  ho- 
nom  olika  glasogon,  men  bonden  sade  gang  efter  aiman: 
"Jag  kan  inte  lasa  med  dem."  Till  sist  fragade  honom  en 
annan  bonde,  som  under  tiden  hade  kommit  dit:  ''Men 
sag  mig,  kan  du  verkligen  lasa?"  "En  sadan  dumbom  du 
ar",  svarade  den  forsta  bonden,  "skulle  jag.  val  kopa  mig 
glasogon,  om  jag  kunde  lasa?" 

C.  Conversation:  1.  Vem  hade  kommit  till  markna- 
den?  2.  Vad  ville  han  gama  gora?  3.  Vad  gjorde  man 
vid  ett  av  standen?  4.  Vad  gjorde  handelsmannen  for  att 
kunna  se,  vad  for  glasogon  han  maste  ge  dem?  5.  Av  vem 
bor  man  lata  undersoka  sina  ogon,  innan  man  koper  g'as- 
ogon?  (ogonlakaren).  6.  Vad  for  stil  kunna  de,  som  ha 
svaga  ogon,  bast  lasa?  7.  Vad  tyckte  bonden,  att  han  ocksa 
sk-ulle  ha?  8.  Vad  gjorde  han  alltsa?  9.  Vad  fick  han- 
delsmannen lov  att  ge  honom?  {one  pair  after  another). 
10.  Hade  bonden  velat  kopa  glasogon,  om  han  hade  kunnat 
lasa?  11.  Vad  trodde  han,  att  glasogonen  skulle  satta  ho- 
nom i  stand^  att  gora. 

^Satta  i  stand,  to  enable;   vara  f  stand,  to  be  able. 

D.  1.  A  peasant  who  was  unable^  to  read  wished  to  buy 
a  pair  (of)  spectacles.  2.  He  thought  (trodde)  that  all 
he  had  to  have  in  order  to  be  able  (165,  2)  to  read  was  a 


156  VOCABULARY. 

pair  (of)  spectacles.  3.  He  said  to  himself:  "I  ought  to 
have  spectacles,  and  if  I  can  get  a  pair  that  fits  me  I  shall 
be  able  to  read."  4.  The  peasant  would  not  have  wished 
(254,  note)  to  buy  glasses,  had  he  been  able  to  read.  5.  A 
wise  man  would  (258,  b)  have  had  (262,  b)  his  eyes  ex- 
amined by  an  oculist  before  buying^  glasses.  6.  The  dealer 
let  him  try  one  pair  after  another,  thinking^  that  he  would 
find  a  pair  which  would  fit  him.  7.  The  young  man  is  not 
permitted  (263,  a)  to  read  because  his  eyes  are  weak. 
8.  The  doctor  says  that  he  may  read  a  short  while  to-mor- 
row. 9.  What  do  the  children  wish  (to  have)  for  Christ- 
mas ?  They  want  many  things,  but  we  can't  afford  to  give 
them  much.  10.  Then  they  will  have  (use  pres.  of  modal) 
to  be  satisfied  with  little.  11.  Carl  asked  my  father,  "May 
we  go  to  town?"  and  my  father  answered,  "You  may  go, 
but  you  must  be  back  before  six  o'clock."  12.  Your  father 
must  have  a  great  deal  to  do  now.  Several  times  I  have 
wished  to  see  him,  but  I  have  not  been  able^  to.  13.  Yes, 
he  is  having  (262,  b)  a  house  built  in  the  country,  and 
must  superintend  the  work.  14.  Where  have  you  had  your 
suit  made?  I  should  like  (259,  b)  to  have  the  address  of 
your  tailor.  15.  He  can  make  clothes  that  fit;  he  is  said 
(258,  g)  to  have  studied  his  art  in  London. 

^Icke    kunna  in  proper   (ense.     "Expand   into   a   temporal   clause  with  innan. 
^Causal  clause  with  emedan,  enar  or  da. 

VOCABULARY. 

en  adress',  -er,  address  flere(a)  more,  several 

en  honde,  bonder,  peasant  forstdn'dig,  -t,  wise,  sensible 

hort'ldgga}  (sep.),  to  put  away  genom,  through 

bygga,  lib,  to  build  glasdgon,  spectacles 

en  disk,  -ar,  counter  gdng  efter  annan,  time  and 
en  dumbom^  -mar,  fool  again 

er'bjuda,   -bjod,   -bjddo,   -bju-  en  handlande,  — ,  merchant 

dit,  -en,  -et,  to  offer  en  handelsman,  -man,  dealer 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS.  15T 

kliider,  clothes  en  skrdddare,  — ,  tailor 

en  konst,  -er,  art  utiga  from',  to  step  forth 

kort,  — ,  short  stil^  -ar,  style;  print 

liten,    -et,    def.    liUa{e),  pi.     en  stund,  -er,  while 

smd,   little  svag,  -t,  weak 

en  marknad,  -er,  fair  under  tiden,  in  the  meantime 
ett  marknadsstund,  —   booth     un'dersoka  tinsep.),  to  examine 

mycket,  much  upp'miirksam,   -t,   attentive 

tiu,  now  vilja  ha',  to  want 

nojd,  nojt,  satisfied  en  ogonldkare,  — ,  oculist 

oJik,  -t,  unlike,  different  overvaka  (insep.),  I,  to  super- 

ett  rdd,  — ,  advice;   means  intend 
sex,  six 

Idioms:  1.  Jag  har  ej  rdd,  I  cannot  afford. 

2.  Vad  vill  du  ha  fill  julklapp?     What  do  you  wish 
for  Christmas  (.present)? 

3.  att  lata  sy  en  rock,  to  have  a  coat  made. 

'More  commonly  used  separably. 

-Note  how  final  m  of  a  word  when  the  preceding  vowel  is  short  is  doubled  on 
its  becoming  intervocalic  by  the  addition  of  an  ending  (3). 

LESSON  XXV. 
Indefinite  Pronouns. 

I.     USED  AS  PRONOUNS  ONLY. 

265.  Man  (indeclinable)  is  used  only  in  the 
nominative  as  an  indefinite  personal  subject  and, 
lacking  an  exact  equivalent,  is  variously  translated 
one,  they,  you,  we,  people  (cf.  German  man,  French 
on) .  Ex. :  man  sdger,  att  han  har  skrivit  en  ny  bok, 
they  say  that  he  has  written  a  new  book;  mxin  for- 
talar  mig,  people  slander  me. 

(a)  In  the  oblique  cases  the  corresponding  forms 
of  en  are  used,  ens  for  the  genitive,  en  for  the 
objective ;  the  reflexive  is  sig.  Thus :  vad  man  ger, 
bringar  en  lycka,  what  one  gives  brings  one  luck; 


158  INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 

man  skulle  icke  beromma  sig  sjdlv,  one  should  not 
praise  oneself.  The  reflexive  possessive  is  sin,  sitt, 
otherwise  eits  is  usedr  ens  vdnner  dro  ofta  vdrre 
an  ens  fiender,  one's  friends  are  often  worse  than 
one's  enemies;  mail  bor  vorda  sina  fordldrar,  one 
ought  to  honor  one's  parents. 

(b)  When  man  is  the  subject  of  a  transitive  verb 
it  is  usually  best  to  render  the  sentence  by  a  passive : 
man  har  behandlat  honom  ilia,  he  has  been  badly 
treated. 

266.  Anting   (gen.  -s;  no  plur.),  everything. 

267.  Ndgonting  (gen.  -s;  no  plur.),  something, 
anything. 

268.  Ingenting  (gen.  -s;  no  plur.),  nothing, 
Ingentbig  as  well  as  nagonting  in  a  negative  sen- 
tence are  often  intensified  by  a  following  (sometimes 
preceding)  alls;  as,  har  du  sett  ndgonting?  Ingen- 
ting alls,  have  you  seen  anything?  Nothing  at  all; 
jag  sag  alls  ingenting,  I  saw  nothing  whatever. 

Note  1.  Ingenting  and  ndgonting  are  followed  by  an  adjective  in  the  indef- 
inite form  of  the  neuter :  har  ni  ndgonting  gott  alt  dtat  do  you  have  anything 
good   to  eat?     Likewise   ndgot  and   inlet. 

2.  Ingenting  is  usually  placed  before  the  supine  of  a  compound  tenae,  ndgon- 
ting, after;  likiwise  intet  is  placed  before  and  ndgot  after;  Jag  har  ingenting 
(intet)  sett,  jag  har  sett  ndgonting  (ndgot).  In  a  dependent  clause  ingenting  and 
intet  come  immediately  after  the  subject:  han  soger,  att  han  ingenting  har  sett. 

269.  Envar  (gen.  envars;  no  plur.)  ;  var  och  en 
(neut.  vart  och  ett,  gen.  vars  och  ens;  no  plur.), 
sometimes  en  och  var,  everybody,  every  one :  var  och 
en  (envar)  har  sina  fel,  everybody  has  his  faults; 
envars  (vars  och  ens)  rykte  bor  respekteras,  every- 
body's reputation  should  be  respected. 

Note.     Var  och  en  is  sometimes  used  adjectively. 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS.  159 

II.     USED   AS   BOTH    PRONOUNS   AND   ADJECTIVES. 

270.  En  (neut.  ett,  only  as  adj.,  gen.  e7is,  plur. 
ena,  def.  form  ene,  ena),  one,  a,  an:  man  tror  ens 
egna  vdnner  bast,  one  has  most  confidence  in  one's 
own  friends;  han  dr  en  av  mina  bdsta  vdnner,  he 
is  one  of  my  best  friends.  In  less  elegant  conversa- 
tion en  is  used  in  the  nominative  w^ith  the  same 
sense  as  man;  in  the  oblique  cases  it  always  takes 
the  place  of  man.  It  is  not  used  after  adjectives 
like  the  English  one:  the  red  apple  and  the  green 
one,  det  roda  applet  och  del  grona. 

271.  Den  ene  (-a)  (fem.  den  ena,  neut.  det  ena) , 
the  one,  is  often  used  in  correlation  with  den  an- 
dre  (-a),  etc.,  the  other:  den  ene  kommer,  den 
andre  gar,  one  comes,  the  other  goes. 

272.  En  och  annan  (neut.  ett  och  annat,  gen. 
en  och  annans;  no  plur.),  one  now  and  then,  one 
here  and  there:  en  och  annan  sdger  sd,  one  now 
and  then  says  so  (some  say  so) . 

273.  Ende  (-a)  (plur.  and  def.  enda) ,  only,  is 
used  as  an  adjective:  han  var  enda  sonen,  he  was 
the  only  son.  When  used  as  a  pronoun  it  is  always 
preceded  by  the  definite  or  indefinite  article  and 
tak^s  an  -s  in  the  genitive :  dessa  voro  de  enda,  som 
voro  ddr,  these  were  the  only  ones  who  were  there ; 
jag  har  ej  sett  en  enda  av  dem,  I  have  not  seen  a 
single  one  of  them. 

274.  Ndgon  (neut.  ndgot,  gen.  ndgons,  nagots; 
plur.  ndgra;  gen.  ndgras),  some,  some  one,  any, 
anyone,  a  few,  something,  anything:  har  du  ndgra 


1  GO  EXERCISE. 

pengar?  have  you  any  money?  ndgon  har  fragat 
efter  dig,  some  one  (has)  asked  for  you;  jag  har 
hort  nagot  vackert  om  dig,  I  have  heard  something 
nice  about  you;  ndgons  hatt  ligger  har,  somebody's 
hat  lies  here. 

Note   1.     The  words  for  any  and  some  when  used  in  a  partitive  sense  are 
often  omitted:   har  nt  tdndstickort  do  you   have  any  matches? 
2.     Some   when  it   means  a  little  is  translated  by  lifet    ilite). 

275.  Ingen  (neut.  intet,  inget,  gen,  ingens, 
intets;  plur.  inga,  gen.  ingas) ,  no  one,  none,  nobody, 
nothing;  as  adjective,  no:  jag  har  inga  pengar  (also 
jag  har  icke  ndgra  pengar),  I  have  no  money; 
ingens  karaktdr  kan  vara  renare  an  hans,  nobody's 
character  can  be  purer  than  his. 

Note.  The  paraphrase  icke  nagcn,  nagra  is  more  common  than  ingen,  inga; 
at  the  beginning  of  a  statement  ingen  is  preferred.  Ingel  is  becoming:  more 
and  more  common  for  intet. 

276.  All  (neut.  allt,  gen.  alias,  allts;  plur.  alia, 
gen.  alias),  all,  everything:  Gud  har  skapat  allt, 
God  has  created  everything;  alia  hans  dottrar  voro 
vackra,  all  his  daughters  were  pretty;  all  jorden 
dr  Guds  verk,  all  the  earth  is  the  work  of  God. 

Note  1.  When  all  in  English  means  whole  it  must  be  rendered  by  hela 
without  the  prepositive  article:  jag  har  arbetat  hela  dagen,  I  have  woriied 
all   day ;    hela  Paris,   all  Paris. 

2.  For  the  use  of  alls  see  268,   for  the  use  of  allra  see  316. 

3.  Observe  the  following  idiomatic  uses  of  hel:  som  ett  helt,  as  a  whole; 
helt  och  hdllet,  wholly,  completely ;  pa  del  hela  taget,  taken  as  a  whole,  on 
the  whole. 

Exercise  XXV. 

A.  Supply  the  missing  indefinites:  1.  Ar  .  .  .  {anyhody) 
dar?  Jag  ser  ...  (nohody).  2.  Men  jag  ser  ...  (some- 
body's) hatt  hanga  dar.  . . .  (nohody)  har  kommit,  sa 
vitt^  jag  vet.  3.  . . .  (one)  horde  lasa  dorren,  annars  kan 
ju  vem  som  heist  komma  in,  och  .  . .    (one)  hor  det  icke. 


EXERCISE.  161 

4.  .  . .  {somebody)  kunde  till  och  med  komma  ocli  stjala 
bort  .  . .  {one's)-  saker,  iitan  att  man  visste  det.  5.  Brev- 
bararen  liar  varit  liar  med  ...  (a  few)  brev  for  dig.  6.  .  . . 
{one)  var  ofrankerat,  och  jag  maste  betala  fyrtio  ore,  .  . . 
{tlie  other)  var  rekommenderat.  7.  Har  du  .  . .  {any)  fri- 
marken  att  lana  mig?  Jag  liar  skrivit  brev  . . .  {all)  da- 
gen  till  .  . .  {every  one)  i  familjen,  och  jag  har  inte  . . . 
{a  single)  frimarke  kvar.  8.  Hur  skall  . . .  {one)  f a  . .  . 
{one's)-  post,  nar  ...  {one)  ar  ute  och  reser?  9.  Lat 
adressera  dina  brev  paste  restante  till .  . .  {some)  av  de  sta- 
der,  du  amnar  besoka.  10.  ...  {everybody),  som  ar  ute 
och  reser,  har  svarighet  med  posten.  11.  Middagen  maste 
vara  fardig  nu.  Var  god  och  tag  plats  bredvid  mig. 
12.  ...  {no)  ceremonier,  som  ni  ser;  vi  aro  blott  ... 
{some)  vanner.  13.  Behagar  ni  ...  {some)  soppa?  Sop- 
pan  ar  utmarkt.  Skulle  ni  vilja  ge  mig  ...  (a  little  more). 
14:.    Behagar  ni  en  kopp  kaffe  till? 

^Sd  vitt  {vitt,  neuter  of  vid),  as  far  as;  note  omission  of  som  (as).  ^Sin 
or  ens  (265,  a). 

B.  I  am  at  home  to  no  one^;  I  wish  to  rest  a  little. 
2.  If  anyone  asks  for  me,  say  that  I  shall  be^  at  home  again 
at  seven  o'clock  {Jclockan  sju).  3.  One  (371)  of  those  two 
Americans  asked  for  {after)  you;  he  left  no  card,  and  I 
cannot  recall  his  name.  4.  Have  you  ever  seen  anything 
so  annoying?  Here  I  have  waited  for  {pa)  him  all  week, 
and  now  when  I  am  out  (for)  a  few  minutes  he  comes. 

5.  Do  you  have  anything  good  to  eat?  Yes,  this  chicken 
is  excellent.  6.  Should  you  like  a  wing  or  a  leg?  7.  If 
you  will  allow^  me,  I  shall  take  a  little  of  this  fruit.  8.  Take 
what  you  want  without  ceremony;  here  one  helps  oneself 
(248,  note).  9.  Try  this  wine;  it  is  ten  years  old  and  of 
with   {till)   the  fruit.     10.  Thank  you,  not  now;  I  shall 

the  best  quality.     One  generally*  takes  a  glass  (of)  wine 


162  VOCABULARY. 

taste  your  wine  another  time;  but  I  shall  take  another 
apple.  11.  One  single  apple  like*  this  is  worth  more  to  me 
than  all  (the)  wine  in  the  world.  12.  Now,  when  we  have 
eaten,  we  shall  see  the  sights  of  (bese)  the  city.  I  haven't 
seen  anything  of  Stockholm  yet.  13.  Where  shall  we  go? 
Everybody  who  visits  Stockholm  must  of  course  visit  the 
famous  Skansen  and  the  Northern  Museum.  14.  Let  us 
all  go  there.  What  do  you  prefer,  car,  cab,  or  automo- 
bile? 

^Translated:  not... for  anybody.  ^Use  the  present  tense.  'Adverbs  cannot 
stand  between  subject  and  verb  except  adverbs  of  negation  and  a  few  others 
in  a  dependent  clause  (179,  a).     ^Translate:  one  such  apple  as  (som)  this. 

VOCABULARY. 

acLresse'ra,  I,  to  address  Idsa,  I  la,  to  lock 

ev.  amerikan' ,  -er,  American        mer,  more 

hehaga,  I  (often  impers.),  to    minnas  ( dep. ) ,  lib,  to  remember 

please;    to   desire  ofrankerad,  -at,  without  stamp 

hredvid,  beside  poste  restante,  general  delivery 

en  brevMrare,  — ,  letter  car-     rekommende^rad,    -at,    regis- 

rier  tered 

bast,  best  sju,  seven 

en  ceremoni',  -er,  ceremony        smaka,  I,  to  taste 
en  family,  -er,  family  stjiila  bort',  bortstjdla  (sep.), 

ett  frimiirke,  -n,  postage  stamp  -stal,   -stulo,   -stulit,   -en, 

fyrtio,  forty  -et,  to  steal 

fijrarglig,  -t,  annoying  en  svdrighet,  -er,  difficulty 

forsoka,  Ila,  to  try  en  soppa,  -or,  soup 

hdnga,  lib,  to  hang  tio,  ten 

ett  kort  {visit'kort) ,  — ,  card     vila  sig  (refl.),  I,  to  rest 

(visiting  card)  ett  vin,  -er,  wine 

en  kvalitet',  -er,  quality  en  vinge,  -ar,  wing 

kvar,  over,  left  ett  ore,  -n,  ore   (coin  worth 

Idmna,  I,  to  leave  ^  cent). 

Idioms:  1.  Yad  behagar  ni?  What  would  you  like? 

2.  Yar  god  och  tag  plats,  please  sit  down. 

3.  Skulle  ni  vilja  ha  en  kopp  kaffe  till?    Would  you 
like  another  cup  of  coffee? 


LESSON  XXVI. 
Indefinite  Pronouns  (Continued). 

277.  Mdngen  (neut.  mdnget,  gen.  mdngens;  pi. 
and  def .  manga,  gen.  mangas) ,  many  a  in  the  singu- 
lar and  many  in  the  plural.  Ex.:  manga  vackra 
blommor  vdxa  i  trddgdrden,  many  beautiful  flowers 
grow  in  the  garden;  mdngen  rik  dr  olycklig,  many 
a  rich  person  is  unhappy. 

278.  Mycket  (indeclinable),  much:  hur  mycket 
pengar  ha?'  du  pd  dig?  how  much  money  do  you  have 
about  you?  icke  alls  mycket,  not  very  much. 

279.  Annan  (neut.  annat,  gen.  annans;  pi.  and 
def.  andra,  gen.  andras) ,  other.  Like  the  English 
other  it  is  preceded  either  by  the  definite  or  in- 
definite article  in  the  singular:  har  ni  en  annan 
bok?  Have  you  another  book?  Vad  gora  de  andra? 
What  are  the  others  doing? 

Note  1.     Ndgon  annan,  ndgot  annat  means  somebody  else,  something  else. 

2.  En  annan  means  another,  a  different  one;  en  till  means  one  more:  var 
god  och  giv  mig  en  annan  bole,  please  give  me  another  book  ;  jag  ville  garna 
ha  en  kopp  till,  1  should  like  another  cup. 

3.  Varannan  signifies  every  other:  varannan   dag,  every  other  day. 

280.  Somlig  (neut.  somligt;  pi.  somliga,  gen. 
somligas) ,  some,  is  used  as  a  pronoun  or  an  adjec- 
tive generally  only  in  the  neut.  sing,  and  plur.  of 
all  genders:  somliga  mdnniskor,  some  people;  som- 
liga onska  det  har,  andra  det  ddr,  some  want  this 
and  some  that. 

Note   1.     Note   the  correlatives  somliga....    andra,   some....    others. 
2.     The  English  some  is  generally  to  be  rendered  by  ndgon,  ndgra,  in  speak- 
ing of  individuals  or  individual  things;  by  litet  (lite),  in  speaking  of  quantity. 

281.  Flera(e)  (gen. /Zeras),  more,  several. 


164  INDEFINITES. 

282.  Flesta(e)  (gen.  ^es^as) ,  most,  the  majority. 

Flera  and  fiesta  are  used  as  comparative  and  superlative  of 
m&nga.  When  flera  does  not  express  comparison  it  signifies 
several,  quite  a  few;  fiesta  is  always  preceded  by  the  article, 
but  the  noun  it  modifies  does  not  take  the  postpositive  ar- 
ticle: flera  voro  hiir  i  dag  an  i  gar,  more  were  here  to-day 
than  yesterday;  pa  fleras  begiiran  sjong  han  sdtigen,  at  the 
request  of  several  he  sang  the  song;  de  fiesta  rosta  nog  for 
honom,  the  majority  will  doubtless  vote  for  him. 

283.  Fd  (gen.  fas),  few.  It  is  very  often  pre- 
ceded by  ndgra:  nagra  fa  voro  hdr,  a  few  were  here. 

284.  Varannan  (neut.  vartannat;  no  plur.), 
every  other:  varannan  dag  ha  vi  tyska,  we  have 
German  every  other  day. 

NoTK.  Om  vartannat,  topsy-turvy ;  far  (vart)  tredje,  var  (vart)  fjarde ; 
every  third ;   every  fourth. 

285.  Endera  (neut.  ettdera) ,  one  of  two,  either ; 

ndgondera  (neut.  ndgotdera),  either; 
ing endera  (intetdera),  neither; 
vardera  (vartdera) ,  each. 

These  take  an  s  in  the  genitive  when  used  pro- 
nominally.-  They  are  rarely  used  as  adjectives.  Ex. : 
ingendera  av  oss  fick  ndgot,  neither  of  us  got  any- 
thing; han  kan  komma  endera  dagen,  he  may  come 
one  of  these  days;  hdr  ha  ni  ett  apple  vardera,  here 
you  have  an  apple  each. 

286.  Var  (neuter  vart;  no  plur.)       1 

varje  (indeclinable)  Veach,  every 

varenda  (neut.  vartenda,  no  pl.)J 

Varje  is  only  used  adjectively.  Varenda  used  as 
d  pronoun  is  followed  by  en,  ett.  Ex. :  varje  Idrjunge 
mdste  gora  sin  plikt,  every  pupil  must  do  his  duty; 


INDEFINITES.  165 

jag  har  givit  bort  vartenda  ett,  I  have  given  away 
every  one. 

Note.  Varje  may  sometimes  be  used  with  the  sense  of  any:  varje  penna  dr 
god  nog,  any  pen  will  do. 

287.  Vilken  (neut.  vilket,  plur.  vilka)  som  heist 
and  vad  som  heist  (neuter)  are  used  pronominally 
and  adjectively  with  the  sense  of  whosoever,  what- 
soever, whichsoever,  anyone  at  all,  anything  at  all, 
any  at  all;  vem  som  heist,  whosoever,  anyone  (at 
all),  is  used  only  pronominally. 

When  these  words  are  used  as  adjectives,  som 
heist  generally  follows  the  noun ;  when  used  as  pro- 
nouns, som  may  be  dropped  before  a  relative  clause. 
Ex. :  vilken  penna  som  heist  dr  god  nog,  any  pen  is 
good  enough;  vem  som  heist  kan  komma,  anyone 
at  all  may  come;  ids  vad  bok  som  heist,  read  any 
book  you  please;  vid  vilken  tid  som  heist,  at  any 
time;  vdlj  hvad  heist,  som  passar,  chose  anything 
that  suits  you. 

1.  Ndgon,  ingen,  hurudan,  and  conjunctive  adverbs 
like  niir,  hur,  sd,  likewise  form  compounds  with  som  heist 
to  become  especially  indefinite;  as,  dr  det  ndgon  som  heist 
orsak,  varfor  du  icke  kan  din  laxaf  Nej,  ingen  som  heist, 
is  there  any  reason  whatsoever  why  you  do  not  know  your 
lesson?  No,  no  reason  whatever;  kom  ndr  som  heist,  come 
at  any  time;  kiir  sd  fort  som  heist,  drive  as  fast  as  you 
please. 

2.  The  particle  an  is  also  used  with  the  relatives  and  cer- 
tain conjunctive  adverbs  to  impart  an  indefinite  force:  vem 
det  an  dr,  whoever  it  may  be;  vad  du  an  gor,  gor  det  vdl, 
whatever  you  do,  do  it  well;  vad  svar  han  an  gav,  whatever 
answer  he  gave;  hur  fort  det  an  gdr,  sd  hinna  vi  ej  from 
i  tid,  no  matter  how  fast  we  go,  we  won't  be  there  in  time. 

3.  Note  the  difference  in  meaning  between  han  gjorde 
vad  som  heist,  and  vad  han  an  gjorde. 


166  EXERCISE. 

288.  Bdda,  bdgge  (gen.  bddas,  bdgges),  both, 
are  plural  forms.  When  bdda  is  preceded  by  the 
prepositive  article  it  means  two;  as,  de  bdda  flic- 
korna  dro  systrar,  the  two  girls  are  sisters;  but 
bdda  systrarna  kommo,  both  sisters  came. 

Observe.     Ft  bdda,  ni  bdda,  de  bdda,  both  of  us,  both  of  you,  both  of  them. 

Exercise  XXVI. 

A.  En  grosshandlare  behovde  en  gang  en  springpojke 
pa  sitt  kontor  och  satte  fordenskull  en  annons  i  tidningen. 
Manga  gossar  infunno  sig  pa  kontoret  nasta  dag.  Somliga 
av  dessa  hade  medfort  goda  rekommendationsbrev,  men 
grosshandlaren  skickade  bort  dem  alia  utan  att  se  pa  deras 
rekommendationer  och  beholl  en  enda  liten  gosse,  som  icke 
hade  nagot  som  heist  skriftligt  intyg.  En  av  bans  vanner, 
som  var  narvarande,  fragade  varfor  ban  just  valde  en,  som 
ej  hade  nagon  rekommendation,  da  de  fiesta  andra  hade 
medfort  sadana.  "Jo",  svarade  grosshandlaren,  "ban  hade 
ej  sa  fa  rekommendationer,  eburu  de  ej  voro  skriftliga. 
Han  torkade  av  fotterna  vid  dorren  och  tog  upp  en  knapp- 
nal  fran  golvet,  foljaktligen  maste  ban  vara  bade  renlig 
och  noggrann.  Dessutom  tog  ban  av  sig  mossan  och  sva- 
rade raskt  och  riktigt,  darfor  maste  ban  vara  bade  forstan- 
flig  och  uppmarksam.  Han  vantade  stilla  och  tyst,  medan 
var  och  en  av  de  andra  trangde  sig  fram,  och  ar  foljakt- 
ligen ocksa  blygsam.  En  manniskas  uppforande  betyder 
mycket  mer  an  vilken  rekommendation  som  heist." 

B.  Conversation.  1.  Vad  behovde  grosshandlaren?  2. 
Vad  gjorde  ban  for  att  fa  en  springpojke?  3.  Medforde 
bans  annons  nagot  resultat?  4.  Yad  hade  de  flesta  med- 
fort? 5.  Brydde  sig  grosshandlaren  om  deras  rekommen- 
dationsbrev? (bry  sig  om=:/o  care  for).  6.  Vem  valde 
ban   for  platsen?     7.    Vad    var   det,   som   forvanade   en 


VOCABULARY.  167 

av  bans  vanner,  vilken  var  narvarande?  8.  Vilka  fem 
goda  egenskaper  (qualities)  agde  gossen?  9.  Varigenom 
(through  what)  visade  gossen,  att  han  var  renlig?  Artig? 
Forstandig  och  upp  marks  am  ?  10.  Vad  brydde  sig  gross- 
handlaren  mer  om  an  (than)  om  rekommendationsbrev ? 
C.  1.  Are  tbere'^  many  advertisements  in  the  paper  to- 
day? No,  only  a  few  (283).  2.  I  should  like  to  know 
if  there  is  anyone  who  wants  an  errand  boy.  3.  It  seems 
as  if  every  other  (279,  3)  advertisement  is  about  errand 
boys.  4.  The  next  morning  there  were  many  boys  in  (pd) 
the  office ;  it  was  full  of  boys  who  wanted  the  place.  5.  The 
letters  of  recommendation  of  most  were  very  good.  6.  Some 
of  the  boys  had  many  recommendations  each.  7.  But  the 
merchant  dismissed  every  one  of  them  and  kept  a  small 
boy  who  did  not  have  any^  recommendation  whatsoever. 
8.  Which  one  of  you  got  the  place?  Neither.  9.  Every  boy 
who  did  not  have  any  letter  of  recommendation  was  dis- 
missed, and  neither  of  us  had  any.  10.  I  believe  that  he 
wilP  soon  need  another  (279,  2)  boy  in  his  office;  the  one 
that  (den  soni)  he  has  is  neither*  polite  nor*  tidy.  11.  The 
conduct  of  both  boys  was  good,  but  it  seemed  as  if  the 
little  boy  behaved  better.  12.  Do  you  have  any  reason 
whatsoever^  for  not  having'  done  this  yet?  13.  I  did  not 
know  that  it  should  be  ready  so  soon;  when  I  asked  you, 
you  said  that  I  could  do  it  at  any  time.  14.  How  fast  shall 
I  drive  ?    You  may  drive  as  fast  as  you  please^. 

*JCr  det  or   finns  dot    (244,  b).     ^287,   1.     'Use   present  or  hammer  att  and 
Infinitive.     *Varlcen. . .  .eller.     ^Translate  var  for  du  icke   har,  etc. 

VOCABULARY. 
en  annotis'    (pronounced   an-    iehdl'la  (insep.,  see  hdlla),  to 

nongs')  -er,  advertisement  retain 

artig,  -t,  polite  beho'va  (insep.),  lib,  to  need 

av'torka  (sep.,  torka  av'),  to    bety' da  (insep.),  lib,  to  signify 

wipe  hlygsam,  -t,  modest 


168  USE    OF  TENSES. 

bort'skicka,  skicka  borf'(sep.)  ndrvarande,   — ,   present 

to  dismiss  ndsta,  — ,  next 

bdde. .  och   (conj.),  both. .  and  ocksd,  also 

ehu'ru   (conj.),  although  en  plats,  -er,  place,  position 

fort,  fast  rask,  -t,  quick 

foljaktligen,  consequently  renlig,  -t,  cleanly 

fdrden' skull,  on  that  account  en  rekommendation' ,  -er,  re- 
ett  golv,  — ,  floor  commendation 

en  grosshandlare,  — ,  whole-  ett  rekomniendations'brev,  — , 

sale  merchant  a  letter  of  recommendation 

in'finna  sig,  to  appear,  to  pre-  skriftlig,  -t,  written 

sent  oneself  en  springpojke,  -ar,  errand  boy 

ett  intyg,  — ,  testimonial  synas   (dep.),  Ila,  to  seem 

just,  just  torka  av',  I,  wipe  off 

en  knappndl,  -ar,  pin  tranga  sig  fram',  lib,  to  crowd 
ett  kontor,  — ,  office  to  the  front,  to  press  forward 

medan,  while  tyst,  — ,   quiet,   silent 

med'fora  (sep.),  to  bring  along  upp'taga,  taga  upp',  to  take  up 

noggrann,  -grant,  careful  ett  uppforande  (no  pi.),  conduct 

LESSON  XXVII. 
Use  of  the  Tenses. 

289.  In  general  the  tenses  are  used  as  in  Eng- 
lish, but  the  following  points  should  be  noticed. 

PRESENT. 

290.  The  Present  for  the  Future.  In  both  lan- 
guages the  present  is  used  with  the  meaning  of  the 
future  but  this  use  is  much  more  extensive  in  Swe- 
dish, and  a  Swedish  present  must  often  be  rendered 
by  the  future.  In  fact  Swedish  employs  the  present 
instead  of  the  future  almost  always  when  some  ad- 
verbial expression  of  time  accompanies  the  verb  and 
prevents  a  misunderstanding :  jag  gar  till  posten  och 
dr  tillbaka  am  tio  minuter,  I  am  going  to  the  post 
office  and  shall  be  back  in  ten  minutes. 

Note.     For  the  progressive  present  see  228  and  note. 


USE   OF   TENSES.  169 

IMPERFECT. 

291.  The  Imperfect  for  the  Present.  The  im- 
perfect of  the  verb  vara  is  used  in  a  present  sense, 
especially  in  exclamatory  expressions,  to  denote 
intensity  of  feeling,  such  as  pleasure,  enthusiasm, 
disgust,  etc.  It  is  usually  combined  with  the  imper- 
sonal det.  Ex. :  Det  var  fortjusande  vackert!  How 
charmingly  beautiful !  Det  var  forfdrligt,  hvad  det 
bldser!  How  fearfully  it  storms!  Det  var  roligt, 
att  du  kommer,  I  am  glad  that  you  are  coming.  Det 
var  da  lojligt!    Isn't  that  ludicrous? 

Note.     For  the  progressive  imperfect  see  228  and  note. 

292.  The  imperfect  is  used  in  certain  expres- 
sions with  a  present  or  imperative  meaning  to  give 
a  tinge  of  modesty  or  politeness:  herrarna  beha- 
gade  komma  in,  please  come  in,  gentlemen;  jag  bn- 
skade  veta  om  herr  X  dr  tillbaka,  I  should  like  to 
know  if  Mr.  X.  is  back.  This  might  perhaps  be 
regarded  as  a  subjunctive  (167). 

PERFECT. 

293.  The  Perfect  for  the  Future  Perfect.  As  in 
English  the  perfect  is  often  employed  with  the 
meaning  of  the  future  perfect  when  no  misunder- 
standing can  arise:  ndr  han  har  varit  i  Sverige  ett 
dr,  sd  talar  han  svenska  flytande,  when  he  has  been 
in  Sweden  a  year,  he  will  speak  Swedish  fluently. 

FUTURE. 

294.  For  the  present  taking  the  place  of  the 
future  see  290. 

.  295.  The  future  expressed  by  the  auxiliary  skola 
and  the  infinitive  often  conveys  the  idea  of  a  reso- 

Swedith  Grammar  12 


170  USE    OF   TENSES. 

lution,  decision,  or  even  command:  jag  shall  hetala, 
I  will  pay,  is  equivalent  to  a  promise ;  du  shall  hetala 
is  equivalent  to  an  exhortation  or  command. 

296.  Pure  futurity  is  often  expressed  by  the 
present  of  the  verb  homma-\-ih.e  infinitive  of  the  verb 
preceded  by  att:  jag  hommer  att  hetala,  I  am  going 
to  pay.  In  this  case  the  present  could  not  be  used 
since  there  is  no  adverbial  expression  of  time  to 
obviate  the  misunderstanding.  We  may  say,  jag 
hetalar  i  morgon.  If  we  wish  to  translate,  for 
instance,  you  will  laugh  when  you  read  the  booh, 
we  must  say  ni  hommer  att  shratta,  ndr  ni  laser 
hohen  and  not  ni  shall  shratta,  ndr  ni  laser  hoheyi, 
since  the  latter  has  almost  the  force  of  a  command. 
The  present  of  shratta  may  also  be  used  but  is  not 
quite  as  good  in  this  case  as  hommer,  etc. 

297.  Std  i  hegrepp  is  occasionally  used  with  the 
infinitive  to  express  immediate  futurity;  it  is  equiv- 
alent to  the  English  to  he  about  to,  or  on  the  point 
of,  but  is  used  much  less  extensively:  jag  star  i 
hegrepp  att  resa  till  Europa,  I  am  on  the  point  of 
leaving  for  Europe. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

298.  The  future  perfect  is  used  very  little  in 
Swedish,  its  place  being  taken  by  the  perfect  (293) . 

299.  Omission  of  the  Auxiliary  in  the  Perfect 
and  Pluperfect.  In  a  dependent  clause  the  auxiliary 
hava  is  frequently  omitted:  ndr  du  gdtt  (har  gdtt), 
shall  jag  bdrja  att  arheta,  when  you  have  gone,  I 
shall  begin  to  work. 


USE   OF   TENSES.  171 

THE  USES  OF  THE  INFINITIVE. 

300.  The  simple  infinitive  (without  att)  is  used 
much  more  frequently  in  Swedish  than  in  English. 
Thus,  att  is  omitted: 

(a)  With  the  future  auxiliary  skall,  the  modals, 
and  lata,  fa,  Idr. 

(b)  When  the  infinitive  has  a  subject  in  the  ob- 
jective, a  construction  very  common  in  Swedish ;  as, 
jag  bad  honom  komma,  I  asked  him  to  come;  jag 
horde  honom  sjunga,  I  heard  him  sing;  jag  sag  ho- 
nom komma,  I  saw  him  coming. 

(c)  Very  often  when  the  infinitive  is  used  pred- 
icatively  after  a  verb  in  the  passive:  han  hordes 
saga,  he  was  heard  to  say;  han  sages  ha  dott,  he  is 
said  to  have  died ;  de  syna-s  trivas,  they  seem  to  get 
along  well. 

(d)  After  many  verbs  which  in  English  require 
to  before  the  infinitive  which  they  govern,  like, 
dmna,  to  intend;  hoppas,  to  hope;  bruka,  to  use; 
pldga,  to  use,  etc.,  especially  when  euphony  demands. 

301 .  The  infinitive  with  att  is  used : 

(a)  As  subject  or  object  of  a  sentence:  att  fela 
dr  mdnskligt,  to  err  is  human.  In  this  case  the 
infinitive  is  often  translated  by  a  verbal  noun  or  a 
gerund  in  English. 

(b)  As  a  modifier  of  nouns  and  adjectives :  kons- 
ten  att  bli  rik,  the  art  of  growing  rich;  detta  dr  Idtt 
att  forstd,  this  is  easy  to  understand. 

Note  expressions  like :  rum  att  hyra,  rooms  for  rent ;  ved  att  saga,  wood  to 
be  sawed,  where  the  noun  is  really  the  object. 

(c)  As  predicate  after  vai^a,  bliva,  finnas,  sta, 
etc.     Swedish  uses  here  the  active  infinitive  where 


173  EXERCISE. 

either  the  active  or  the  passive  is  used  in  English: 
Vad  dr  hdr'att  gora?  What  is  here  to  be  done? 
Han  star  ej  att  overtala,  he  is  not  to  be  persuaded. 

302.  Prepositions  with  att  Infinitive.  When  it 
refers  to  the  subject  of  the  leading  verb  the  att 
infinitive  may  be  preceded  by  almost  any  prepo- 
sition, in  which  case  the  English  generally  requires 
a  verbal  noun;  as,  han  lekte  i  stdllet  for  att  gora 
sitt  arbete,  he  played  instead  of  doing  his  work; 
genom  att  hjdlpa  andra  hjdlper  man  ofta  sig  sjdlv, 
by  helping  others,  we  often  help  ourselves;  jag  dr 
glad  over  att  kunna  hjdlpa  dig,  I  am  glad  that  I 
can  help  you. 

Note.  When  the  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  not  the  same  as  that  of  the 
leading  verb,  Swedish  uses  an  att  clause  preceded  by  the  preposition :  genom  att 
han  lanade  mig  pengar,  kunde  jag  kopa  huset,  by  his  lending  me  money,  I  was 
able  to  buy  the  house ;  han  gick,  utan  att  jag  fick  tala  med  honom,  he  went 
without  my  getting  a  chance  to  speak  to  him. 

Exercise  XXVII. 

A.  Ett  skepp,  som  seglade  fran  Smyrna  till  Marseille 
med  dyrbar  last,  forfoljdes  av  sjorovare  och  ansags  vara 
forlorat.  Kaptenen  kom  da  pa  den  tanken  att  lata  besatt- 
ningen  ga  ned  under  dack.  Pa  dacket  lamnade  han  blott  en 
enda  matros,  som  han  noga  foreskrev,  vad  han  skulle  gora. 
Nar  sjorovarnas  skepp  narmade  sig  och  dess  kapten  be- 
fallde,  att  man  skulle  stryka  flagg,  ropade  matrosen  med 
jamrande  rost:  "Jag  har  ej  sa  mycket  styrka  kvar;  ni  fa 
bemaktiga  er  skeppet;  vi  komma  fran  Smyrna,  och  kap- 
tenen samt  halften  av  besattningen  ha  dott  i  pesten  pa 
overresan.  Sex  man  aro  annu  kvar,  men  komma  sakert 
att  do,  om  ni  ej  hjalper  oss.  Skynda  er  att  stiga  ombord, 
ty  ni  allena^  kan  radda  oss."  "Far  din  vag,  din^  dum- 
bom !"  ropade  sjorovaren  till  svar,  "tror  du  verkligen,  att 


EXERCISE.  173 

jag  skulle  vilja  niirma  niig  ditt  fartyg!"     Diirpa  avliigs- 
nade  han  sig  sa  fort^  han  kunde. 

*Note  the  weak  form  of  the  adjective  after  a  personal  pronoun.  ^Note  the 
use  of  the  personal  pronoun  of  the  second  person  in  expressions  denoting  con- 
tempt ;  transl.  you  big  fool.  Otlier  expressions  of  the  same  kind :  din  skurk, 
din  asna,   etc.     'Note  omission  of  som,  as. 

B.  Conversation,  1,  Varifran  kom  skeppet?  2.  Vart 
seglade  det?  3.  Vad  for  slags  last  hade  det?  4.  Var  det 
ett  segelfartyg  eller  ett  angfartyg  {steamer)  ?  5.  Av  vem 
forfoljdes  det?  6.  Kunde  det  undkomma  {escape)  sjo- 
rovaref artyget  ?  7.  Vart  skickade  kapteneu  hela  besatt- 
ningen  med  undantag  av^  en  enda  matros  ?  8.  Vad  befall- 
de  kaptenen  pa  det  andra  fartyget  honom  "att  gora?  9. 
Vad  hade  blivit  av  kaptenen?  10.  Hiir  manga  av  besatt- 
ningen  voro  kvar?  11.  Vad  gjorde  sjorovarna,  niir  de  horde 
detta  ? 

^With  the  e.xception  of. 

C.  Supply  the  proper  S'wedish  equivalent  for  the  Eng- 
lish future,  namely,  the  present,  future  with  sTcall,  or  Icom- 
mer  att,  in  the  first  six  sentences. 

1.  I  morgon  . .  .  (resa,  1st  plur.)  till  Stockholm.  2.  Om 
en  vecka  . .  .  (vara,  1st  plur.)  tillbaka,  och  da  . .  .  (besoka, 
1st  plur.)  dig.  3.  Det  dar  gamla  fartyget  . . .  sakert  for- 
olyckas.  4.  I  morgon  . . .  (fara)  till  Chicago,  och  da  . .  . 
(kopa,  1st  sing.)  en  ring  at  dig.  5.  Du  . .  .  (gora)  allt 
ditt  arbete,  Erik,  innan  du  far  ga  ut  och  spela  boll.  6.  Nar 
ni  laser  min  daliga  svenska,  sa  . . .  (skratta,  2nd  sing., 
polite)  at  mina  manga  fel.  7.  Hela  besattningen  ...  (do, 
progressive  present).  8.  I  gar  nar  min  kusin  kom  for  att 
besoka  mig,  . . .  (packa,  progressive  imperfect,  first  person) 
min  koffert. 

Change  the  following  three  sentences  according  to  299. 
9.  Om  jag  hade  vetat,  att  han  var  sjuk,  sa  hade  jag  besokt 


174  VOCABULAEY. 

honom.  10.  Den  gamle  herrn,  som  nyss  har  stigit  i  vagnen, 
ar  min  larare.  11.  Vi  sakna  vara  vanner,  som  nyss  ha  rest 
till  New  York. 

In  the  following  supply  the  proper  infinitive,  the  att 
infinitive  or  the  simple,  of  the  verbs  indicated.  12.  Genom 
.  . .  (narra)  sjorovarna  raddade  kaptenen  sitt  fartyg.  13. 
Han  bad  matroserna  ...  (ga)  ned  under  dack.  14.  Han 
ansags  .  . .  (vara)  rik.  15.  Sjorovaren  hordes  . . .  (ropa) 
till  matrosen  pa  dacket. 

D.  1.  But  say,  this  is  (291)  a  beautiful  ship!  Do  you 
know  to  what  port  it  is  going  to  sail  ?  2.  ShalP  we  go  on 
board?  I  know  the  captain,  and  shall^  introduce  you  to 
him,  if  you  wish.  3.  He  is  a  fine  man  and  I  am  sure  (sdker 
pa)  that  you  will  like-  him.  4.  He  has  just  returned  from 
America  and  the  passage  was  very  difficult.  5.  It  was  only 
by  maneuvering^  the  ship  skillfully  that  (soin)  he  saved  it. 
6.  He  does  not  believe  that  his  trip  will  be-  stormy.  7.  He 
asked  us  to  come  on  board,  for  (ty)  he  did  not  wish  to 
leave  the  city  without  having^  spoken  to  us.  8.  When  the 
sailor  had  (299)  told  the  pirate  that  half  of  the  crew  had 
died  of  the  plague,  the  pirate  sailed  away  without  taking^ 
possession  of  the  ship.  9.  He  was  on  the  point  (297)  of 
going  out  when  I  entered.  10.  Did  he  do  all  this  work? 
Well,  I  call  that  working  (301,  a).  11.  We  must  walk 
fast  in  order  to  get  (komma)  home  before  night  (def. 
form).  12.  Mr.  Lind  was  kind  enough  to  lend  me  a  book. 
13.  He  is  very  much  interested  in  playing'  tennis.  14.  The 
water  is  warm  enough  for  bathing'  (till  att  bada  i). 

^Here  the  future  implies  a  decision:  skola  or  komvia  attf     'Here  pure  futuri- 
ty. 

VOCABULARY, 
alle'na   (only  predicative,  no    hemak'tiga  sig,  to  take  pos- 
neut.),  alone  session  of 

befal'la,  lib,  to  command  en  besatt'ning,  -ar,  crew 


VOCABULARY. 


175 


dyrtar,  -t,  precious,  costly 

ett  diick,  — ,  deck 

ddrpd,  thereupon 

ett  far'tyg,  — ,  vessel 

en  flag g a  (flagg),  -or,  flag 

fort,  quiclily,  rapidly 

fo'reskriva  (insep.  v.),  to  pre- 
scribe 

fdrfol'ja  (insep.),  lib,  to  pur- 
sue 

en  hamn,  -ar,  port,  harbor 

en  hedersman,  -man,  man  of 
honor 

en  hdlft,  -er,  half 

intresse'rad,  -at,  interested 

jiimrande,  — ,  plaintive 

en  kapten',  -er,  captain 

komma  in',  to  enter 

en  last,  -er,  cargo;  burden 


en  matros',  -er,  sailor 
manovre'ra,  I,  to  maneuver 
ned,  down 
nog,  enough;  certainly,  to  be 

sure 
noga    (adj.   and   adv.),  exact 
ndrma  sig,  I,  to  approach 
ombord,  on  board 
en  pest,  -er,  pest,  plague 
presente'ra,   I,  to  introduce 
ropa,  I,  to  cry,  call 
en  rost,  -er,  voice 
en  sjorovare,  — ,  pirate 
skicklig,  -t,  skillful 
stryka,    strok,    stroke,    stru- 

kit,  -en,  -et,  to  lower 
en  styrka,  strength,  power 
en  tanke,  -ar,  thought 
(innu,  yet 


Idioms:  1.  Var  sd  god  och  hlna  mig,  be  so  kind  as  to  (please) 
lend  me;  han  var  sd  god  och  kom,  he  was  kind 
enough  to  come. 

2.  att  do  i  en  sjukdom,  to  die  of  a  disease. 

3.  att  komma  pd  en  ide,  en  tanke,  to  hit  upon  an  idea, 
a  thought. 

4.  att  presentera  en  person  for  ndgon,  to   introduce 
a  person  to  somebody. 

5.  att  omtala  ndgot  for  ndgon,  to  tell  somebody  some- 
thing. 


LESSON  XXVIII. 


Comparbon  of  Adjectives 

303.  Most  adjectives  form  their  comparative  by 
adding  -a?'e  to  the  stem  of  the  positive,  and  the 
superlative  by  the  addition  of  -ast. 

304.  Examples : 

rik  rikare 

ddel  ddlare 

trogen  trognare 

vacker  vackrare 

ringa  ringare 


rikast 

ddlast 

trognast 

vackrast 

ringast 

Note.     Positive  stems  in  unaccented  -el,  -en,  -er,  drop  the  e  of  these  syllables 
in  the  comparative  and  superlative.     Positive  stems  in  -o  drop  the  a. 


rich 

noble 

faithful 

beautiful 

humble,  small 


305,  The  following  adjectives  form  their  com- 
parative and  superlative  by  the  addition  of  -re  and 
-st  and  modify  the  stem  vowel  if  it  is  strong: 
grov  grovre  grovst  coarse 

hog  hogre  hogst  high 

lag  Idgre  Idgst  low 

Idng  Idngre  Idngst  long 

stor  stdrre  storst  great,  large 

trdng  trdngre  trdngst  narrow,  tight 

tung  tyngre  tyngst  heavy 

ung  yngre  yngst  young 

Note.      Grov,   trdng   and   lag   are   also   compared  reg^ularly ;    lag   then   has  a 
moral  sigrniflcation. 

306.  The  following  are  compared  irregularly: 


ddlig 

gammai 

god,   bra 

liten 

mycken 

manga 


samre 

dldre 

bdttre 

mindre 

mera 

flera(e) 


sdmst 

didst 

bdst 

minst 

mest 

flesta(e) 


bad 

old 

good 

little,   small 

much 

many 


Note  1.     The  plural  of  liten  is  smd  and  is  compared  like  liten,  but  also  has 
the  comparative  smarre. 

2.     God  and  ddlig  are  also  compared  regularly. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


177 


307.  Some  adjectives  derived  from  adverbs, 
especially  such  as  designate  place,  have  no  posi- 
tive. These  have  a  comparative  in  -re,  generally 
inverted  in  the  superlative  -erst. 


bakre 

bakerst 

farther  back,  rear 

bortre 

botterst 

farther 

frdmre 

frdmst 

farther  in  front 

fdrre(a) 

forst 

former 

inre 

innerst 

inner 

nedre 

nederst 

nether,  lower 

undre 

underst 

under 

yttre 

ytterst 

outer 

ovre 

overst 

upper 

308.  Adjectives  which  do  not  easily  take  the 
endings  of  comparison  may  be  compared  by  using 
mera  and  mest  together  with  the  positive  (such 
are  adjectives  in  -e,  -ad,  -s,  isk  and  all  participles). 
Ex. :  ode,  desolate,  mei^a  ode,  mest  ode;  dlskad,  mera 
dlskad,  mest  dlskad. 

Note.  This  is  also  the  case  when  two  qualities  of  the  same  object  are  com- 
pared with  one  another :  han  ar  mera  trott  an  somnig,  he  is  more  tired  than 
sleepy. 


DECLENSION    OF    COMPARATIVES    AND    SUPERLATIVES. 

309.  The  comparative  is  invariable  except  that 
it  takes  an  -s  in  the  genitive  when  used  as  a  noun : 
den  dldre  brodern,  the  older  brother;  det  dldre  bar- 
net,  the  older  child;  den  dldres  rdttigheter,  the 
rights  of  the  older. 

310.  The  superlative  is  not  declined  in  the  pred- 
icate when  not  preceded  by  the  definite  prepositive 
article;  when  preceded  by  this  article  it  is  declined 
like  an  adjective  in  the  weak  declension.    Ex. :  ha7i 


178  EXERCISE. 

var  den  flitigaste  i  klassen,  he  was  the  most  diligent 
one  in  the  class ;  han  var  didst,  he  was  the  oldest. 

Note.  Superktives  in  -ast  take  only  the  ending  -e:  del  vackraste  barnet,  but 
det  yngsta  barnet,  den  yngste  gossen. 

311.  Than  is  rendered  by  an:  han  dr  dXdre  dn 
jag,  he  is  older  than  I. 

Exercise  XXVIII. 

A.  Insert  comparative  and  superlative  forms  respective- 
ly in  the  blanks. 

1.  Jag  ar  trogen,  du  ar  .  . . ,  han  ar  .  . .  2.  Vi  iiro  adla, 
ni  aro  . . .,  de  aro  ...  3.  Detta  huset  ar  stort,  det  dar 
ar  . . . ,  och  det  grona  dar  borta  ar  . . .  4.  Detta  ar  en 
fortjusande  utsikt,  men  utsikten  fran  berget  pa  andra  sidan 
fioden  ar  . .  .,  och  utsikten  fran  den  hoga  bergstoppen 
{peak)  dar  borta  ar  . .  .  5.  Karl  ar  liten,  Erik  ar  . . . , 
Ernst  ar  .  . .  6.  I  dag  ar  det  manga  i  kyrkan,  men  forra 
sondagen  var  det  ...  7.  Han  ar  en  lag  manniska,  Jag 
bar  sallan  sett  en  .  .  .  8.  Vilken  av  de  tva  bergstopparna 
ar  den  . . .  {lowest)  ?  9.  Hur  gammal  ar  Erik?  Det  vet 
jag  ej  sakert,  men  han  ar  . . .  {older)  an  Karl,  och  Alfred 
ar  den  . . .  {oldest)  av  gossarna.  10.  Vem  ar  . . .  {most 
musical),  Anna  eller  Klara?  11.  Anna  ar  . . .  (compara- 
tive) an  Klara.  12.  Har  du  sett  en  . .  .  {more  desolate, 
(ide)  trakt  an  denna? 

B.  1.  Ar  icke  katedralen  i  Koln  en  av  de  aldsta,  storsta 
och  hogsta  kyrkor  i  varlden?  2.  Jo,  det  finns  endast  fa, 
som  aro  aldre,  storre  och  hogre.  3.  Nar  tycker  ni,  att  det 
ar  intressantast  (310)  att  resa?  Pa  sommaren,  ty  da  aro 
dagarna  langre,  man  kan  se  mer,  och  det  ar  mycket  ange- 
namare.  4.  Hur  lang  tid  tar  det  att  komma  fran  New 
York  till  Liverpool?  De  snabbaste  angarna  gora  over- 
resan  pa  mindre  an  sex  dagar.    5.  Det  iir  ett  misstag,  att 


EXERCISE.  179 

tie  europeiska  tagen  skuUe  vara  langsammare  an  de  ameri- 
kanska.  6.  I  flere  lander  i  Europa  aro  snalltagen  bland  de 
snabbaste,  som  det  over  huvud  taget  finns.  7.  Har  man  ej 
flere  klasser  darborta  an  har?  Jo,  det  ar  vanligen  tre 
klasser;  i  Tyskland  har  man  till  och  med  fyra.  8.  I  Sve- 
rige  resa  endast  de  allra  rikaste  (316)  i  forsta  klass,  och 
de  fiesta  fara  i  tredje.  9.  Man  reser  bekvamare  (318)  i 
andra  klass  dar  an  i  var  forsta.  10.  Vem  bor  i  huset  dar- 
borta? Tva  av  vara  narmaste  slaktingar,  en  farbror  och 
en  kusin.  11.  Den  forre  bor  i  framre  del  en  av  den  ovre  va- 
ningen,  den  senare  i  den  bakersta  delen  av  den  undre  va- 
ningen;  resten  av  huset  star  tomt.  12.  Jag  sknlle  garna 
vilja  hyra  huset,  om  dess  yttre  vore  vackrare,  dess  inre  dar- 
emot  behagar  mig.  13.  Skulle  du  vilja  gora  en  langre^ 
tur  i  min  bil  i  eftermiddag?    Ja,  med  storsta  noje-. 

'Translate:   extended;    Idngre   means  here  rather  long.     *Note  the   indefinite 
form   of  the  noun. 

C.  1.  There  are  large  and  high  churches  in  most  cities, 
but  there  are  business  buildings  in  New  York  which  are 
larger  and  higher  than  the  largest  and  highest  churches  in 
the  world.  2.  My  oldest  brother  is  the  most  diligent  boy 
in  the  class.  3.  In  point  of^  studies  he  is  at  the  head 
{fr'dmst,  310),  but  in  sports  he  is  poorer  than  most  of 
them.  4.  We  had  the  most  beautiful  weather  on  our 
trip  to-day;  it  was  less  warm  than  on  our  former  trip. 
5.  Have  you  no  nearer  and  better  friend  in  this  city  than 
he?  No,  he  is  my  nearest  and  best  friend.  6.  I  do  not 
know  whether  I  shall  travel  first  or  second  class.  Would 
you  advise  me?  7.  If  I  were  you  (t  ert  stdlle)  I  should- 
rather  travel  second;  that  class  is  more  comfortable  than 
our  first  and  only  the  wealthiest  travel  first  class  here. 
8.  The  fastest  steamers  are  not  always  to  be  preferred^; 
a  slower  and  larger  steamer  rocks  less.    9.  Don't  you  think 


180  VOCABULARY. 

that  the  interior  of  this  house  is  much  more  beautiful  than 
the  exterior?  Yes,  but  it  is  more  beautiful  than  modern 
(308).  The  house  next  to  ours  is  for  rent  (301,  b,  note). 
Why  don't  you  rather  rent  that  ?  It  has  many  more  modern 
improvements  (nutida  heJcvdmligheter) . 

*Use  impersonal  form  of  gdlla.     ^Translate  »d   (171,  B,  2)   skulle  jag  hellre, 
etc.     *att  foredraga  (301,  c). 

VOCABULARY.  • 
en  affdrsbyggnad,  -er,  business  en  klass,  -er,  class 

building  Idngsam,  -t,   slow    (not  lone- 

angendm,  -t,  agreeable  some;    to   be  lonesome^: 

(en)  bekvdmlighet,  -er,  comfort         att  ha  trdkigt) 
bekvdm',  comfortable  ett  miss'tag,  — ,  mistake 

bredvid',  next  to,  at  the  side  of  modern'  -t,  modern 
ddrborta,  over  there  ett  noje,  -n,  amusement,  pleas- 

endast,  only  ure 

europeisk,  -t,  European  en  rest,  -er,  remainder 

en  farbror,  -broder,  uncle  en  sliikting,  -ar,  relative 

fattig,  -t,  poor  snabb,  -t,  quick,  rapid 

fo'redraga  (insep.,  see  draga),  ett  studium,  -er,  study 

prefer  till  och  med,  even 

gunga,  I,  to  rock,  to  swing        torn,  -t,  empty,  vacant 
gdlla,  lib,  to  have  a  value;  to     en  tur,  -er,  trip 

be  a  question  of  vanligen,  usually 

hellre,  rather  en  dngare,  — ,  steamboat 

i'drott^,  -er,  sport  over  huvud  taget,  on  the  whole 

en  katedraV,  -er,  cathedral         en  overresa,  -or,  trip  across 

^Idrott  is  generally  used  collectively  in  the  singular. 


LESSON  XXIX. 
Comparison  of  Adjectives  (Continued). 

312.  A  comparison  of  equality  is  expressed  by 
lika(sd)  . .  .som,  (just)  as. .  .as;  or  by  sa.  .  .som, 
so  (as) ...  as,  the  latter  generally  after  negatives ; 
lika  or  sd  is  occasionally  omitted :  han  dr  lika  gam- 
mal  som  jag,  he  is  just  as  old  as  I;  hon  dr  ej  sd 
lycklig,  som  hon  brukade  vara,  she  is  not  as  happy 
as  she  used  to  be;  han  dr  tapper  som  ett  lejon,  he 
is  as  brave  as  a  lion. 

Note.  A  comparison  of  equality  with  adverbs  is  expressed  in  the  same  way  ; 
where  there  is  no  equality  the  correlative  as ....  as  must  be  rendered  by  sd. . . . 
som  only :  han  skriver  lika  bra  som  du,  he  writes  as  well  as  you  ;  kom  sa  fort 
som  mojligt,  come  as  soon  as  possible. 

313.  The  comparison  below  the  positive  is  formed 
by  using  the  adverbs  mindre,  minst  (less,  least)  : 
han  dr  den  minst  framstdende  av  de  ire  broderna, 
he  is  the  least  prominent  of  the  three  brothers. 

314.  The  adverb  the  with  a  comparative  is  ex- 
pressed by  dess,  desto  (sometimes  ju) ;  the  correla- 
tives the. .  .the  by  ju  (normal  order)  . .  .dess,  desto 
or  ju  (inverted  order)  ;  as,  jasd,  han  kommer,  desto 
bdttre,  so,  he  is  coming,  so  much  the  better ;  ju  Idngre 
han  stannade  hdr,  dess  (ju)  fattigare  blev  han,  the 
longer  he  remained  here,  the  poorer  he  became. 

31 5.  The  comparative  and  the  superlative  are 
sometimes  used  absolutely;  the  comparative  then 
denotes  a  rather  high  degree  and  the  superlative  a 
very  high  degree;  as,  en  storre  penningsumma,  a 
rather  large  sum  of  money ;  jag  gor  det  med  storsta 
noje,  I  shall  do  that  with  the  greatest  pleasure ;  min 
baste  vdn,  my  dear  friend  (in  speaking  or  writing 


182 


ADVERBS. 


to  some  one)  ;  kdraste  du  (kdra  du  is  perhaps  more 
common) ,  in  speaking  to  very  intimate  friends. 

316.  Distributive  Superlative.  The  superlative 
is  often  strengthened  by  the  adverb  allra  (old  gen. 
plural  of  all)  :  den  allra  storsta,  den  allra  vackraste, 
the  greatest,  prettiest  of  all  (the  very  greatest,  pret- 
tiest) . 

Adverbs. 

317.  The  indefinite  forms  of  the  neuter  singular 
of  most  descriptive  adjectives  can  be  used  as  ad- 
verbs. Ex.:  adj.,  god,  good;  adv.,  gott;  adj.,  vdnlig, 
friendly;  adv.,  vdnligt;  adj.,  hastig,  rapid;  adv., 
hastigt. 

Note.     Some   adverbs   are   formed   from   adjectives  in   -lig  by   means  of  the 
ending  -en;  trolig-en,  probably ;  mojlig-en,  possibly. 

318.  Comparison  of  adverbs.  Adverbs  form 
their  degrees  of  comparison  like  the  adjectives.  Very 
few  except  those  ending  in  -t  can  be  compared. 


Examples : 

hovligt 

hovligare 

hovligast 

politely 

ddelt 

ddlare 

ddlast 

nobly 

troget 

trognare 

trognast 

faithfully 

tungt 

tyngre 

tyngst 

heavily 

319.    The  following  adverbs  are 

also  compared 

bra,  vol 

bdttre 

bast 

well 

gdrna 

hellre 

heist 

willingly 

ilia 

vdrre 

vdrst 

badly 

ndra 

ndrmare 

ndrmast 

near 

Idnge 

Idngre 

Idngst 

long 

fore 

forr 

forst 

before 

fort 

fortare 

fortast 

fast 

ofta 

oftare 

oftast 

often 

sakta 

saktare 

saktast 

slow 

fram 

frdmre 

frdmst 

forth 

EXERCISE.  183 

320.  The  comparative  and  the  superlative  of 
adverbs  are  invariable.  Apparent  exceptions  are 
a  few  idiomatic  absolute  superlatives;  as,  de  voro 
i  det  ndrmaste  ett  hundra,  they  were  very  nearly 
one  hundred ;  han  kdmpade  i  det  Idngsta,  he  fought 
as  long  as  possible;  han  hdlsade  mig  pa  det  hov- 
ligaste,  he  greeted  me  most  politely;  han  kom  med 
det  sna7'aste,  he  came  as  soon  as  possible. 

321.  So  also  the  Swedish  equivalent  for  the  Eng- 
lish, as . . .  can,  could :  hon  gick  det  tystaste  hon 
kunde,  she  walked  as  quietly  as  she  could;  han  Idste 
det  tydligaste  han  kunde,  he  read  as  plainly  as  he 
could  (also  sd  tydligt  han  kunde;  note  omission  of 
som,  as). 

322.  As. .  .as  possible  is  expressed  by  sd. .  .som 
mojligt ;  sd  snart  som  mojligt,  as  soon  as  possible. 

323.  The  English  more  and  more=:allt-\-the  re- 
peated comparative  as  in  English  (a  single  com- 
parative may  be  used)  :  stormen  rasade  allt  hdfti- 
gare  och  hdftigare,  the  storm  raged  more  and  more 
violently. 

Exercise  XXIX. 

A.  1.  Gar  du  ofta  pa^  teatern,  Karl?  Hogst  {at  the 
most)  fern  eller  sex  ganger  om  aret  (338,  note).  Jag  gar 
mycket  hellre  pa  forelasningar  och  konserter.  2.  Konser- 
ten  i  gar  var  troligen  den  mest  lyckade  (308)  sedan  sa- 
songens  borjan,  salongen  var  i  det  narmaste^  fullsatt.  3. 
De  olika  numren  pa  programmet  mottogos  med  det  allra 
varmaste  bifall.  4.  Jag  tyckte,  att  froken  Forsell  sjong 
lika  bra  som  fra  Jungstedt,  fast  den  senare  ar  mera  om- 
talad   (308).     5.  Vad  skall  ni  gora  under  de  stundande 


184  EXEECISE, 

helgdagarna?  Jag  skall  avlagga  ett  kortare  (315)  besbk 
hos  min  bror.  6.  Halsa  honom  pa  det  hjartligaste^  och  sag 
honom,  att  jag  skall  skriva  till  honom  med  det  allra  sna- 
raste^.  7.  Kara  du,  maste  du  verkligen  resa?  Jag  ar  sa 
ledsen;  men  kom  igen  sa  fort  du  kan  (321).  8.  Ju  oftare 
du  kommer,  och  ju  langre  du  gor  ditt  besok,  desto  battre, 
ty  du  ar  alltid  en  mycket  valkommen  gast  hos  oss.  9.  Hur 
gar  det  for  Erik  i  skolan?  Icke  sa  bra  som  det  gjorde  i 
borjan;  ban  var  visserligen  icke  den  allra  basta  i  sin  klass, 
men  han  var  flitigare  an  nu  och  gjorde  sitt  basta.  10.  Nu 
synes  han  mera  lat  an  dum  (308,  note),  han  arbetar  utan 
det  ringaste  intresse  och  ar  alls  icke  uppmarksam  i  klassen. 
11.  Karl  daremot  studerar  det  flitigaste  han  kan  och  ar 
framst  i  sin  klass.  12.  Jag  bar  hoppats  i  det  langsta^,  att 
Erik  skulle  bli  uppflyttad  i  ar,  men  det  troligaste  ar,  att 
han  far  sitta  kvar. 

^Pa  is  used  in  the  sense  of  to  in  a  number  of  phraaes:  att  ga  pa  teatem,  pa 
target,  to  go  to  the  theater,  to  market.     '320. 

B.  Conversation.  1.  Vart  gar  ni  heist,  pa  teatem  eller 
pa  en  forelasning?  2.  Var  auditoriet  vid  konserten  i  gar 
talrikt?  3.  Fann  ni  konserten  lyckad?  4.  Appladerade 
ahorarna  de  olika  numren^  ?  5.  Vem  sjong  bast,  froken 
Forsell  eller  fru  Jungstedt?  6.  Nar  amnar  ni  (att)  avlagga 
(ett)  besok  hos  er  bror?  7.  Har  ni  skrifvit  till  honom  an? 
8.  Gor  en  jamforelse  (comparison)  mellan  Eriks  och  Karls 
arbete  i  skolan. 

^Indef.  form  nummer;  one  m  is  dropped  in  the  def.  form  since  the  long  m- 
sound  is  no  longer  intervocalic. 

C.  1.  Do  you  attend  the  theater  oftener  now  than  you 
used  to  (do),  Carl?  2.  No,  extremely^  seldom,  and  when  I 
do  attend,  I  attend  mostly^  the  opera.  3.  I  have  never  be- 
fore been  as  occupied  as  I  am  now;  the  more  (314)  I  do, 
the  more  there  is  to  do,  it  seems.    4.  Aren't  you  working  a 


VOCABULARY.  185 

little  (274,-)  harder  than  you  used  to?  5.  Perhaps.  I  wisli 
to  have  a  certain  work  ready  as  soon  as  possible  in  order 
to  get  my  vacation.  6.  Where  do  you  intend  to  spend  it? 
At  a  watering  place?  7.  No,  I  have  been  at  watering 
places  several  (flera)  times  before.  This  summer  I  prefer 
to  take  a  trip  to  northern  Sweden.  8.  A  friend  of  mine 
has  given  me  a  most  (hogst)  interesting  account  of  the 
beautiful  sceneries  of  Lapland.  9.  Are  you  going  alone? 
N"o,  we  shall  be  four,  perhaps  more  (flera).  10.  Would 
(shuUe)  you  permit  me  to  go  with  you  if  I  could  be  ready 
as  soon  as  you?  11.  With  the  greatest  (315)  pleasure,  the 
(314)  more  we  are,  the  merrier  it  will  be. 

D.  1.  Is  Eric  as  diligent  as  he  was  in  the  beginning? 
2.  No,  I  do  not  know  what  is  the  matter  with  him,  it 
seems  as  if  he  were  growing  lazier  and  lazier  (323).  3.  Is 
he  not  here  yet?  Perhaps  he  will  come  a  little  later.  4.  No, 
he  wrote  me  most  politely  that  he  would  rather  come  an- 
other time.  5.  He  sent  the  most  cordial  (316)  greetings 
to  all  his  friends.  6.  My  dear  (315)  friend,  can't  you 
come  to  see  me  a  little  oftener  than  3^ou  do?  Come  as  often 
as  you  please  (287,  1). 

^Ytterst  —  hogst,  in  the  highest  degree,  very,  and  yttersl,  extremely,  ex- 
ceedingly, are  often  used  to  form  an  absolute  superlative.     ^For  del  mesta  (320). 

VOCABULARY. 

ett  auditorium,  -cr,  audience  for  det  mesta,  for  the  most 
avlagga,  insep.,  to  make  (a  part 

visit) ;   sep.  lay,  take  off  en  forelasning,  -ar,  lecture 

en  badort,  -er,  watering  place  en  gdst,  -er,  guest 

ett  bifall,  approval,  applause  Tijdrtlig,   -t,    cordial 

en  borjan,  beginning  Mrd,    hdrt,   hard 

dum,  -t,  stupid  intressant',   interesting 

fast,   although  ett  intres'se,  -n,  interest 

frdmst,    foremost  kanhdn'da,  perhaps 

fulVsatt,  — ,  crowded  en  Mass,  -er,  class 

Swedish  Grammar  13 


186  NUMERALS. 

kvar   (adv.  and  adj.   in  the  sjunga,   sjdng,   sjongo,   sjungit, 

predicate)   left,  over  sjungen,    -et,    to    sing 

lat  (no  neut.),  lazy  en  skildring,  -ar,  account 

Jedsen,  sorry  snar,    -t,    rapid,    quick;    snart, 
lyckad,  -at,  successful  soon 

norra  (indeclinable),  northern  stundande  (indecl.),  coming 

ett  nummer,  — ,  number  synas    (dep.   v.),   Ila,  to  seem, 
om'talad,  -at,  mentioned;  appear 

celebrated  en  sasong',  -er',  season 

en  opera,  -or,  opera;    opera  tilldta   (insep.),    to  permit 

house  troligen,  probably 

ett  program',  — ,  program  uppflyttad,  -at,   moved   up, 
ringa   (indeclinable)    insig-  promoted 

nificant  upptagen,  -et,  occupied 

sceneri',   -er,   scenery  verkligen,  really 

en  semes' ter^,  -rar,  semester;  visserligen,    to    be    sure,    cer- 

vacation  tainly 

^Semester  is  a  vacation  from  work,  ferier  a  vacation  from  school.     ^Sasong  is 
a  social  season,  arstid,  a  natural  season. 

Idioms:  1.  att  sitta  kvar,  not  to  be  promoted. 

2.  att  6It  uppflyttad,  to  be  promoted. 

3.  Hvad  fattas  honomf  What  is  the  matter  with  him? 

LESSON  XXX. 
The  Numerals. 


CAI 

IDINAL 

ORDINAL 

1. 

en  [neut. 

ett; 

(den)  fdrste(a) 

def.  eneCa)} 

2. 

tva 

andre(a),  2nd 

3. 

tre 

tredje,  3rd,  etc. 

4. 

fyra 

fjdrde 

5. 

fern 

femte 

6. 

sex 

sjdtte 

7. 

sju 

sjunde 

8. 

dtta 

dttonde 

9. 

nio 

nionde 

10. 

tio 

tionde 

11. 

elva 

elvte 

NUMERALS. 


187 


12. 

13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
■  19. 
20. 

21. 

22. 

30. 

31. 

40. 

50. 

60. 

70. 

80. 

90. 
100. 
101. 
200. 
250. 

1,000. 
1,150. 

1,000,000. 


tolv 
tretton 
fjorton 
femton 
sexton 
sjutton 
aderton 
nitton 

tjugu  (tjugo, 
tjuge) 
tjuguett 
tjugutva 
t7'ettio  (tretti) 
tretti(o)ett 
fyrtio  (fyrti) 
femtio   (femti) 
sextio  (sexti) 
sjuttio  (sjutti) 
dttio   (dtti) 
nittio  (nitti) 
(ett)  hundra 
hundra  ett 
tvd  hundra 
tva  hundra 
femtio 
(ett)  tusen 
ett  tusen  ett 
hundra  femtio 
en  million 


tolvte 

trettonde 

fjortonde 

femtonde 

sextonde 

sjuttonde 

adertonde 

nittonde 

tjugonde 

tjuguforsta 

tjuguandra 

trettionde 

tretti(o)fdrsta 

fyrtionde 

femtionde 

sextionde 

sjuttionde  ■ 

dttionde 

nittionde 

hundrade 

hundra  forsta 

tvd  hundrade 

tvd  hundra  femtionde 

tusende 

ett  tusen  ett  hundra 
femtionde 


REMARKS  ON  THE  CARDINALS. 

325.  The  cardinals  are  indeclinable  when  used 
as  adjectives  with  the  exception  of  en,  which  has 
the  neuter  ett:  det  dr  tjuguett  barn  i  rummet;  but 
tjuguen  gossar. 

326.  When  used  as  nouns  they  take  an  s  in  the 
genitive  but  are  otherwise  indeclinable:   de  fyras 


188  NUMERALS. 

dsikt,  the  opinion  of  the  four ;  de  adertons  samman- 
komst,  the  meeting  of  the  eighteen  (the  Swedish 
Academy) . 

Note.  The  numbers,  million,  milliard,  billion,  etc.,  are  declined  as  nouns  of  the 
Third  Declension :  tre  millioner  manniskor.  Hundra  and  tusen  may  also  be  used 
substantively  and  then  take  the  form  hundrade  and  tusende  with  plural  in  -n: 
det  tjugonde  arhundradet,  the  twentieth  century ;  del  forsta  tutendet,  the  first 
thousand. 

327.  The  form  tu  is  used  for  tvd  in  certain  set 
phrases;  such  as,  pa  tu  man  hand,  in  confidence 
between  two ;  de  unga  tu,  the  engaged  or  newly  mar- 
ried couple ;  ett,  tu,  tre  (in  counting  time,  also  in  the 
sense  of  suddenly) ;  cf.  adv.  itu:  viva  itu,  tear  in  two. 

328.  Tvenne  and  trenne  are  sometimes  used  for 
two  and  three  but  never  in  connection  with  other 
numerals.  Bada  and  hdgge  are  occasionally  used 
with  tvd  for  the* sake  of  emphasis:  hdda  tvd,  both; 
in  such  expressions  as  vi  bdda,  de  hdgge,  etc.,  we 
two,  they  two,  hddu  and  hdgge  have  the  force  of 
numerals. 

329.  Hundra  and  tv^en  are  always  preceded  by 
ett  (in  counting  ett  may  be  left  out)  :  ett  hundra 
femtiodtta;  ett  tusen  ett  hundra  sextiofem;  och,  and, 
is  not  used  between  the  hundreds  and  the  tens. 

330.  The  forms  tretti,  fyrti,  femti,  etc.  are  used 
mostly  in  compounds:  femtidtta,  sextitre. 

Note.     Fyrtio    is    pronounced    as    if    it     was    written    fortio.     Aderton    is 
generally  pronounced  arton. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  ORDINALS. 

331.  The  ordinals  are  used  as  indeclinable  ad- 
jectives, except  f6rste(a)  and  ayidre(a)  which  follow 
the  weak  declension.  They  are  usually  preceded  by 
the  prepositive  definite  article,  but  may  sometimes 


NUMERALS.  ISO 

be  used  without  it :  den  forsta,  den  andra,  den  tred- 
je;  but  forsta  dagen  (also  den  forsta  dage?i)  i  veckan 
dr  sondagen,  the  first  day  of  the  week  is  Sunday; 
del  dr  andra  gdngen  han  dr  hdr,  it  is  the  second 
time  he  is  here. 

332.  In  compound  ordinals  only  the  last  number 
takes  the  ordinal  ending,  den  ett  tusen  tvd  hundra 
sextiofjdrde. 

333.  The  ordinals  take  the  genitive  -s:  Karl  den 
tolvtes  dod,  the  death  of  Charles  XIL 

334.  The  cardinals  are  occasionally  used  instead 
of  the  ordinals ;  these  follow  the  noun :  pa  sidan  tio, 
on  page  ten. 

335.  The  ordinals  are  often  abbreviated,  the  last 
letter  or  letters  being  used  with  the  numbers  to  in- 
dicate the  ordinal.  Ex.:  den  5:e,  den  8:e;  the  num- 
ber may  be  used  alone  after  the  article:  den  5 
februari. 

EXPRESSIONS  OF  TIME    (O'CLOCK)  . 

336.  The  following  phrases  illustrate  the  man- 
ner of  telling  the  time  of  day: 

Hur  mycket  dr  klockan?  what  time  is  it? 

Klockan  dr  tio,  it  is  ten  o'clock. 

Klockan  dr  halv  tio,  it  is  half  past  nine. 

Klockan  dr  en  kvart  over  fyra,  it  is  a  quarter  past 
four. 

Klockan  dr  en  kvart  fore  (till,  i)  fyra,  it  is  a  quar- 
ter of  four. 

Klockan  dr  tre  kvart  pa  fyra,  it  is  a  quarter  of 
four. 

Klockan  dr  tjugu  minuter  fore  tre,  it  is  twenty 
minutes  of  three. 


190  EXERCISE. 

Klockan  dr  tjugu  minuter  over  tre,  it  is  twenty 
minutes  past  three. 

Klockan  har  just  slagit  fyra,  it  has  just  struck 
four. 

Pa  slaget  tre,  at  three  o'clock  sharp. 

Precis  tre,  at  three  o'clock  sharp. 

Vid  niotiden,  about  nine  o'clock. 

Fram  at  tiotiden,  towards  ten  o'clock. 

Han  kom  klockan  tio,  he  came  at  ten  o'clock. 

EXPRESSIONS  OF  MEASURE  AND  PRICE. 

337.  After  nouns  of  measure  t*he  thing  measured 
is  used  without  preposition:  hon  kopte  fyra  meter 
svart  tyg,  she  bought  four  meters  of  biack  cloth; 
giv  mig  ett  glas  friskt  vatten,  give  me  a  glass  of 
fresh  water. 

338.  After  an  expression  of  price  a  noun  of 
measure  requires  the  def.  postpositive  article  in- 
stead of  the  indef.  article  in  English:  detta  tyget 
kostar  tre  kronor  metern,  this  cloth  costs  three 
crowns  a  meter;  tio  kronor  stycket,  ten  crowns  a- 
piece. 

Note.  This  distributive  use  of  the  def.  article  is  found  after  other  expres- 
sions of  quantity,  but  the  noun  is  then  preceded  by  a  preposition  (generally 
om,  pd,  or  t)  :  tvd  ganger  om  aret,  two  times  a  year ;  han  fortjdnar  trettio 
kronor  t  veckan,  he  earns  thirty  crowns  a  week. 

Exercise  XXX. 

A.  1.  Practice  orally.  En  gang  ett  ar  ett,  tva  ganger 
ett  ar  tva,  etc.  En  gang  tva  ar  tva,  tva  ganger  tva  ar  fyra, 
3X2=6,  4X2=8,  etc.  2.  Eead  in  S^wedish:  2X12=24, 
3X12=36,  4X8=32,  6X7=42,  7X9=63,  7X10=70. 
3.  Addera  1,563,  2,348,  11,213.  4.  Subtrahera  15,113  fran 
19,213.    5.  Multiplicera  580  med  213.     6.  Give  the  differ- 


EXERCISE.  191 

ent  expressions  for:  It  is  a  quarter  past  12^;  12.30;  1.45; 
3.15;  4;  5.25.  7.  Name  the  numbers  40,  41,  50,  53,  64, 
G7,  78,  89,  94,  100,  104,  205,  209,  371,  498,  1,000,  1,001, 
75,012,  2,098,427. 

^At  a  quarter  past  twelve,  klockan  en  kvart  efler  tolv ;  klockan  is  often 
abbreviated  to  kl.:  kl.  12.15. 

B.  I  denna  stad  bo  2,656,342  manniskor,  men  den  iir 
iinda  ej  pa  langt  nar  sa  stor  som  London,  ty  dar  bo  nara 
7,000,000  manniskor  eller  nara  tre  ganger  sa  manga. 
2.  Hur  manga  invanare  bar  staten  Minnesota?  Omkring 
2,000,000,  tror  jag.  3.  Minnesotas  befolkning  ar  ej  vidare^ 
talrik,  nar  man  tar  i  betraktande,  att  det  ar  en  av  de  storsta 
staterna  i  Unionen.  4.  Med  vilket  tag  resa  vi  till  Stock- 
holm i  morgon?  Det  gar  ett  tag  ...  (a  quarter  past 
seven),  om  vi  stiga  upp  ...  {at  six  or  half  past  five),  sa 
kunde  vi  ata  frukost  pa  hotellet.  5.  Sag  till  uppassaren 
att  vi  onska  rakningen.  Har  ar  den,  jag  fiek  den  for  nagra 
minuter  sedan.  6.  Den  ar  val  tamligen  sa  hog,  formodar 
jag.  Ah  nej,  icke  sa  varst,  22  kronor  oeh  37  ore,  10  kronor 
for  rummet,  8  kronor  och  50  ore  for  supen  och  frukosten 
oeh  resten  for  diverse  smasaker.  7.  Da  aro  naturligtvis 
icke  drickspengarna  till  betjaningen  inbegripna?  Kej, 
dessa  far  man  betala  sarskilt.  8.  Hur  mycket  belopa  de 
sig  till?  2  kr.  eller  2.50^  racker.  9.  Skynda  dig,  ar  du 
snail,  annars  forsumma  vi  taget.  10.  Det  bradskar  ej,  vi 
ha  annu  en  kvarts  timme  pa  oss  {to  spare),  innan  det  gar; 
klockan  har  just  slagit  sju.  11.  Jag  har  kopt  en  hel  del  (en 
massa)  saker  pa  torget  i  dag:  1  kilo  mejerismor,  4  tjog 
agg,  en  skinka  pa  fyra  kilo  och  diverse  gronsaker.  12.  Vad 
kostar  smoret  och  aggen?  Smoret  kostar  2.50  kilot^  och 
aggen  1.50  tjoget. 

^Vidare  means  wider,  further;  it  has  an  idiomatic  use  which  is  hard  to  render; 
sometimes  it  may  be  translated  by  very.  ^Tvd  och  (pronounced  (?)  femti. 
'Also  per  kilo,  per  is  abbreviated  to  pr 


192  VOCABULARY. 

C.  1.  In  the  city  of  London  live  almost  7,000,000 
people,  or  more  than  three  times  as  many  as  (313)  in  our 
state.  2.  Was  your  bill  at  the  hotel  very  high  ?  No,  it  was 
not  as  high  as  I  expected;  it  amounted  (B,  8)  to  about 
thirty-six  crowns,  the  tips  not  included^.  3.  Did  you  have 
breeJf f ast  at  the  hotel  before  you  started  ?  No,  we  only  had 
time  to  drink  a  cup  of  coffee  and  eat  a  sandwich.  4.  Did 
you  oversleep  ?  Yes,  we  slept  to  a  quarter  past  six  and  the 
train  was^  to  leave  at  ten  minutes  past  seven.  5,  How  many 
minutes  do  we  have  to  spare  (B,  10)  before  the  train 
leaves?  6.  Let  me  see,  only  fourteen  minutes;  it  is  nine 
minutes  of  five  by  (enligt)  my  watch.  Hurry,  please,  or  we 
shall  miss  the  train.  7.  (In  a  store.)  What  can  I  do  for 
you?  I  should  like  to  look  at. some  view  cards  of"  Stock- 
holm. 8.  We  have  cards  at  (till)  various  prices.  This 
kind  is  ten  ore  apiece  (338)  or  a  crown  a  dozen,  that,  five 
ore  apiece,  or  fifty  ore  a  dozen.  9.  I  owe  you  three  crowns 
and  seventy-five  ore,  I  believe;  here  is  a  fifty-crown  bill, 
can  you  change  it?  10.  Yes,  here  are  forty-six  crowns  and 
twenty-five  ore  in  change  {tillhaka).  11.  How  much  is  a 
crown?  A  crown  is  one  hundred  ore;  in  American  money 
a  crown  is  about  twenty-eight  cents.  12.  I  wish  to  change 
one  hundred  and  forty  crowns  into  (i)  American  money. 

'Use  the  plur.  of  the  p.  part,  of  inbegripa.     ^Skulle.     *Use  over  or  translate 
the  whole  expression  stockholmsvyer. 

VOCABULARY. 

en  befolkning,  -ar,  population  ett  dussin,  — ,  dozen 

behaga,  to   please  forso'va     sig      (insep.,      see 
belopa  sig  till,  Ila,  to  amount  sova),  to  oversleep 

to  forsum'ma    (insep.),   to   neg- 
en  betjdning  (generally  no  lect;   to  miss   (train) 

pi.),  service,  servants  gronsaker  (pi.),  vegetables 

(ett)betraktande,  consideration  del,  -ar,  part 

br&dska,  I,  to  hurry  en  invdnare,  — ,  inhabitant 

diver'se  (pi.),  diverse,  various  mejeri'smor,  creamery  butter 


NUMERAL  FORMATIONS.  193 

niira,  near,  almost  en  supe,  supcer,  supper 

olik,  -t,  unlike,  different  talrik,  -t,  numerous 

ett  pris,  — ,  price  tUlbaka,  back 

en    sedel,    -lar,     bill;     femti-  ett  tjog,  — ,  score 

kronesedel,  fifty-crown  ett  torg,  — ,  market  place 

bill  tamligen,  fairly,  pretty 

en  skinka,  -or,  ham  en  union,  er,  union 

en  smasak,  -er,  trifle  uppassare,  — ,  waiter 

en  smdrgds,  -ar,  sandwich  vUnta,  I,  to  wait,  expect 

en  Stat,  -er,  state  vdxla,  I,  to  change 

stiga  upp'  (see  stiga),  to  get  ett  vykort,  — ,  souvenir  postal 

up,  rise  ett  dgg,  — ,  egg 

ett  stycke,  -n,  piece  dndd,  yet 

Idioms:  1.  att   taga   en   sak   i   hetraktande,   to    take   a    thing 
into  consideration. 

2.  icke  pa  Idngt  ndr,  not  by  far. 

3.  icke  vidare  mycket,  not  very  much. 

4.  utan  vidare,  without  further  ado. 

5.  yad   hehagasf   What    do    you    wish?   "What   can    I 
do  for  you? 

6.  Jag  ar  skyldig  honom  tio  kronor,  I  owe  him  ten 
ten  crowns. 

LESSON  XXXI. 
The  Numerals  (Continued). 
NUMERAL  FORMATIONS. 

339.    From  the  cardinals  are  formed : 

(a)  The  variatives  by  the  use  of  slags  (the  geni- 
tive of  slag,  meaning  kind)  :  tvd  slags,  two  kinds  of; 
t7'e  slags,  three  kinds  of;  manga  slags  blommor, 
many  kinds  of  flowers. 

(b)  The  multipUcatives  by  the  addition  of  dubbel 
(neut.  dubbelt,  pi.  dubbla)  for  the  adjective  and 
dubbelt  for  the  adverb ;  more  rarely  by  the  addition 
of  -faldig  (-t,  -a)  for  the  adjective  and  -fait  for  the 


194  NUMERAL  FORMATIONS. 

adverb:  dubbel,  double;  tredubbel,  triple;  fyrdub- 
belt  (neut.  and  adv.),  quadruple;  kragar  av  fyr- 
dubbelt  linne,  collars  of  four-ply  linen;  dubbelt  sd 
manga,  twice  as  many;  mdngfaldig,  manifold;  vetet 
avkastar  trettiofalt,  the  wheat  yields  thirty-fold. 

(c)  The  iteratives  by  the  use  of  gang,  time ;  plur. 
gang 67':  en  gang,  once  or  one  time ;  tvd  gdnger,  twice 
or  two  times ;  ire  gdnger.  tvd  dr  lika  med  sex,  three 
times  two  equals  six. 

(d)  The  distributives  by  the  repetition  of  the 
numerals :  en  och  en,  one  by  one,  one  at  a  time ;  tvd 
och  tvd,  by  twos,  two  at  the  time;  de  gingo  tvd  och 
tvd,  they  went  by  twos,  in  pairs. 

(e)  The  collectives  by  suffixing  the  word  tal  to  the 
numeral : 

1.  To  denote  a  decade  or  a  century ;  thus,  80-talet, 
the  eighties;  han  gdr  pd  fyrtiotalet,  he  is  in  the 
forties;  1500-talet,  the  sixteenth  century  (1500 — 
1599). 

2.  To  denote  an  approximate  number:  ett  tiotal, 
about  ten;  ett  tjugutal,  about  twenty. 

Note.  Observe  expressions  like  hundratals,  hundreds,  tuientaU,  thousands; 
dussintaU,  many  dozen ;  tusentals  manniskor  voro  narvarande,  thousands  o< 
people  were  present. 

340.  From  the  ordinals  are  formed : 
(cc)  Fractional  nouns  by  compounding  the  ordinal 
with  the  noun  del,  part  (plur.  delar) :  en  tredjedel, 
a  third;  tvd  tion(de) delar,  two  tenths;  en  halv,  one 
half;  en  tjugutvdendel,  a  twenty-second  part;  so  also 
en  tretti(o)tvdendel,  etc. 

Note.  Half,  halv  and  hdlft.  Halv  is  used  as  the  denominator  of  fractions 
and  as  adjective,  otherwise  halft  is  used :  ett  halvt  dussin,  half  a  dozen ;  ena 
half  ten  av   huset,  one  half  of  the  house. 

(b)  Fractional  adjectives  by  prefixing  halv  to  the 


EXPRESSIONS  OF  DATE.  190 

next  higher  unit:  halvannan,  one  and  a  half;  halv- 
tredje,  two  and  a  half,  etc. 

Note.     Only  the  first  is  in  common  use. 

(c)  Ordinal  adverbs  by  using  the  preposition  for 
with  the  ordinal :  for  det  forsta,  first ;  for  det  andra, 
secondly,  etc. 

(d)  Distributives  by  prefixing  var  to  the  ordinal : 
varannan  (neut.  vartannat),  every  other;  var 
tredje  (neut.  vart  tredje),  every  third:  varannan 
dag  ha  vi  rdkning,  we  have  mathematics  every  other 
day. 

341.      EXPRESSIONS  OF  DATE." 

(a)  In  giving  the  day  of  the  month  the  ordinal 
is  used  without  any  preposition ;  as,  det  dr  den  sjdtte 
augusti  i  dag,  to-day  is  the  sixth  of  August.  In 
dating  a  letter  the  date  is  placed  before  the  name 
of  the  month,  not  after,  as  in  English:  Boston  den 
5:e  (or  5)  oktober. 

Observe  the  following  date  idioms: 

Vad  ha  vi  for  ett  datum  i  dag?  What  date  is 
it  to-day? 

Det  dr  den  femtonde  juni  i  dag.  To-day  is  the 
fifteenth  of  June. 

/  morgon  dr  det  den  sextonde.  To-morrow  will 
be  the  sixteenth. 

Vad  for  en  dag  dr  det  i  dag?  What  day  (of  the 
week)  is  it  to-day? 

Det  dr  onsdag  i  dag.    To-day  is  Wednesday. 

(b)The  date  of  the  year  is  given  by  the  cardinal 
number  often  preceded  by  dr,  in  the  year  of,  espec- 
ially in  the  case  of  historical  dates;  as.  Napoleon 
dog  dr  1821,  Napoleon  died  in  the  year  of  1821. 


196  EXPRESSIONS  OF  TIME. 

342.  With  the  names  of  the  days  of  the  week 
the  prepositions  pa  (on),  om  (about),  and  i  (in) 
are  used ;  pa  requires  the  def .  form,  om  the  indefinite 
and  I  the  genitive  of  the  indefinite:  pa  mandagen 
voro  vi  borta,  on  Monday  we  were  away ;  i  mdndags 
voro  vi  borta,  last  Monday  we  were  away;  pa  son- 
dagskvdllen  voro  vi  i  kyrkan,  on  Sunday  evening  we 
were  in  church;  i  sondags  kvdll  for  han  till  New 
York,  last  Sunday  evening  he  left  for  New  York; 
om  lordag,  next  Saturday;  om  sondag  kvdll,  next 
Sunday  evening. 

Note  1.  The  day  following  t  is  the  last  day  of  that  name,  while  the  day 
after  pd  is  any  day  of  that  name  in  the  past  or  future ;  the  day  after"  om  is 
the  next  day  of  that  name  (for  other  uses  of  t  and  om  see  338,  note,  and  343). 

2.  Pd  followed  by  the  def.  sing,  and  om  followed  by  the  def.  plur.  may 
denote  indefinite  or  recurrent  time:  pd  londagen  borde  man  ga  i  kyrkan,  on 
Sunday  one  ought  to  go  to  church ;  vad  gor  nt  om  sondagamaf  What  do  you 
do  on  Sundays? 

343.  Note  such  expressions  of  time  as: 

pd  morgonen,  in  the  morning; 

pa  formiddagen,  in  the  forenoon; 

pd  eftermiddagen,  in  the  afternoon; 

pd  middagen,  at  noon; 

aid  middagen,  at  noon; 

pd  kvdllen,  in  the  evening ; 

pd  natten,  in  the  night; 

vid  midnatt,  at  midnight; 

i  kvdll,  to-night ; 

i  gdr  kvdll,  last  night ; 

i  morgon  kvdll,  to-morrow  night ; 

i  morse,  this  morning; 

i  gdr  morse,  yesterday  morning ; 

i  morgon,  to-morrow ; 

i  overmorgon,  the  day  after  to-morrow; 


EXERCISE.  197 

I  morgon  middag,  to-morrow  at  noon ; 

tidigt  i  morgon,  early  to-morrow ; 

i  morgon  bittida,  early  to-morrow  morning; 

i  borjan']  in  the  beginning  of  April ; 

I  slutet  \pa  april,  the  latter  part  of  April ; 

i  mitten]  in  the  middle  of  April ; 

i  sommar,  this  summer ; 

i  fjol  sommar,  in  the  summer  of  last  year ; 

i  somras,  the  past  summer  (of  the  same  year)  ; 

i  dag  for  ett  dr  sedan)  ^    ^^^  to-dav 

i  dag  ett  dr  sedan      j     -^  « 

i  morgon  om  ett  dr,  a  year  from  to  morrow ; 

om  mdndag,  next  Monday ; 

om  sommarn,  in  the  summer; 

till  sommarn,  next  summer. 

344.   (a)  In  addressing  letters  the  street  name  is 
written  as  one  word  with  -gatan  (def.  form  of  gata, 
street)  ;  the  house  number  follows  the  street  name: 
Herr  Carl  Lind, 

Storgatan  8,  4  tr., 

Stockholm. 

Note.     tr.  {trappa  or  trappor,  stair  or  stairs)  signifies  story. 

(b)  In  giving  an  address,  {  nummer-\-the  number 
generally  precedes  the  street  name :  han  bor  i  num- 
mer  11  Linnegatan  (also  i  ll:an  [elvanl  Linne- 
gatan),  he  lives  at  number  11  Linne  Street. 

Exercise  XXXI. 

A.    Supply  in  Swedish  whatever  is  indicated. 

1.  Hur  stor  del  av  ett  ar  ar  en  manad?  En  manad  ar 
en  tolvtedel  av  ett  ar.  2.  Hiir  manga  .  .  .  (twelfths)  inne- 
haller  en  hel.  En  hel  innehaller  .  . .  (|f)  eller  .  . .  (|^) 
eller   ...    (m),  alltsa  gar  det     ..    ('jfetc.)   pa  en  hel. 


198  EXERCISE. 

3.  Huru  adderar  man  ...  (^)  och  ...  (|)?  Man  for- 
vandlar  bada  braken  till  . .  .  (twelfths)  och  adderar  de 
bada  taljarne.  4.  Hur  mycket  blir  det?  Det  blir  .  . .  (||). 
5.  Vad  gor  man  sedan  ?  Man  dividerar  taljaren  med  nam- 
naren  och  erhaller  .  . .  (liV).  6.  Vad  for^  datum  ha  vi  i 
dag?  Det  ar  .  . .  (the  sixth)  november  i  dag.  7.  I  dag 
ha  vi  salunda  arsdagen  av  Gustav  Adolfs  dod  vid  Liitzen, 
lian  stupade  .  .  .  (the  sixth)  november  .  . .  (in  the  year  of) 
1632.  8.  Vid  vilken  tid  pa  dagen  stupade  konungen?  .  . . 
(in  the  morning),  tror  jag.  9.  I  dag  fira  vi  pappas  .  . . 
(50th)  fodelsedag;  ban  foddes  . .  .  (the  ninth  of)  augusti 
1861.  10.  I  gar  for  en  vecka  sedan  kom  min  bror  hem  fran 
Tyskand  for  att  deltaga  i  firandet.  11.  Sverige  ar  mer  an 
. .  .  (twice)  sa  stort  som  Minnesota  och  bar  nastan  . . . 
(three  times)  sa  manga  invanare.  12.  Hur  langa  aro  feri- 
erna  vid  den  svenska  folkskolan  ?  Skolan  slutar  i  mitten  pa 
juni  och  borjar  igen  i  slutet  pa  augusti.  13.  Sommarferier- 
na  racka  alltsa  omkring  ...  (2  |)  manader.  14.  Vilken  ar 
den  genaste  vagen,  den  till  viinster  eller  den  till  hoger,  bag- 
g6  leda  till  staden,  eller  hur?  15.  Lat  oss  ta  vagen  till 
vanster,  den  ar  bortemot  en  och  en  halv  kilometer  kortare. 
Den  andra  ar  alltsa  mer  an  dubbelt  sa  lang.  16.  Vad  ha 
vi  for  en  dag  i  dag?  Det  ar  fredag  i  dag,  och  om  (342, 
note)  lordag  maste  vi  ha  det  bar  arbetet  fardigt  for  att 
kunna  ta  i  tu^  (327)  med  nagot  nytt  i  borjan  pa  nasta  vec- 
ka. 17.  Har  du  varit  i  herr  Lindgrens  tradgard  nyligen? 
Ja,  jag  var  dar  i  onsdags.  18.  Eosorna  aro  utspruckna;  de 
aro  de  allra  harligaste  rosor,  jag  nagonsin  har  sett,  dess- 
utom  har  han  manga  andra  slags  blommor. 

^The  indef.  article  may  be  omitted,  also  vilket  datum  or  vad  ar  det  for  datum, 
vi,  etc.     *Att  ta  itu  med  nagot,  to  go  to  work  with  something. 

B.    Conversation.    1.  Vad  ar  er  brors  adress  nu?   2.  Pa 
vilken  vaning  bor  han  ?    3.  Han  amnar  ju  att  flytta,  vet  ni 


EXERCISE.  199 

nar?  4.  Vad  ha  vi  for  datum  i  dag?  5.  Vad  ar  det  for 
datum  i  morgon  om  en  vecka?  6.  Nar  firar  er  bror  sin 
fodelsedag?  7.  Vilket  ar  och  vilken  dag  ar  han  fodd? 
8.  Nar  foddes  Gustav  den  andre  Adolf?  9,  Nar  stupade 
Karl  den  tolfte? 

C.  1.  Have  you  studied  fractions?  Yes,  we  are  studying 
(290,  note)  them  now  in  school.  2.  Can  you  tell  me  how  to 
multiply^  two-fifths  by  one-fourth  ?  1  multiply  the  numer- 
ators and  the  denominators  together  and  the  result  is  two- 
twentieths.  3.  How  many  units  are  there  in  seven-sixths? 
In  seven-sixths  there  is  one  unit  and  one-sixth  over.  4.  Why 
are  you  in  such  a  hurry^?  I  am  going^  to  the  station  to 
meet  my  sister.  I  must  be  there  at  a  quarter  of  ten  and  it 
is  half  past  nine  now.  5.  Is  she  coming  so  soon,  it  is  only 
the  18th  to-day;  a  week  from  to-day  is  Christmas.  6.  Yes, 
I  know,  but  my  birthday  is  (on)  the  20th  and  we  shall  have 
a  family  festival  at  home.  7.  How  old  are  you?  I  am  in 
(on)  my  20th  year.  8.  You  are  the  oldest  in  the  family, 
I  suppose.  No,  my  sister  Mary  is  a  year  and  a  half  older 
than  I,  and  I  have  a  brother  who  is  almost  twice  as  old  as 
I.  9.  I  hope  that  you  will  pardon  (use  pres.)  my  delay 
in  writing*,  but  I  received  your  letter,  which  was  dated 
Monday,  August  4th,  only  (forst)  this  morning.  10.  You 
have  been  away  very  long,  haven't  you  ?  Not  so  very  long^, 
I  left  the  city  at  the  beginning  of  August  and  came  back  at 
the  end  of  September;  so  I  was  away  a  little  over  a  month 
and  a  half.  11.  Does  your  brother  have  the  same  address 
as  (som)  before?  No,  he  has  moved;  now  he  lives  at  num- 
ber 13  King's  Street. 

^How  to  followed  by  an  infinitive  must  be  rendered  by  a  clause :  here  hur  jag 
tkall  multiplicera  or  hur  man  mvltiplicerar.  ^o  be  in  a  hurry,  att  ha  bratt  or 
br&ttom.  IFuture  with  skall.  ^Translate  att  jag  har  drSjt  med  att  gkriva. 
^Icke  ad  varst  liinge ;  varsl  is  colloquial.     *En  och  en  halv  mdnad. 


5J00 


VOCABULARY. 


VOCABULARY, 


adde'ra,  I,  to  add 
alltsd,  thus    (not  also) 
bliva,  to  become    (in   mathe- 
matics, to  equal) 
ett  hrdk,  — ,  fraction    (also 

trouble) 
brdttom   (att   ha   brdttom), 

to  be  in  a  hurry 
ett  datum,  -a,  date 
date'ra,  I,  to  date 
deVtaga  (sep.,  see  taga),  to 

participate 
divide'ra,  I,  to  divide 
ett  drdjsmdl,  — ,  delay 
en  dod,  -ar,  (generally  sing.), 

death 
er'hdlla  (insep.,  see  hdlla),  to 

receive,  get 
en  familjefest,  -er,  family 

festival 
ferier  (pi.),  vacation 
ett  firande,  celebration 
folkskola,  -or,  public  school 
fodas   (pass,  of  foda,  give 

birth  to),  lib,  to  be  born 
en  fodelsedag,  -ar,  birthday 
formed  da,  I,  to  presume 
forvand'la,  I,  to  transform 


gen,  -t,  near,  short  (of  a  road) 
en  hel  (-a),  unit 
Uoger  (no  neut.,  indef.),  right 
innehdlla    (insep.),    to   contain 
en  kilome'ter,  — ,  kilometer 
leda,  lib,  to  lead,  conduct 
en  mdnad,  -er,  month 
mitten  (def.  form  or  mitt), 

middle,  midst 
multipUce'ra,  I,  to  multiply 
en  ndmnare,  — ,  denominator 
ndstan,  almost 
nyligen,  recently 
omkring,  about 
rucka,  Ila,  to  reach;  last 
sedan  (adv.  and  conj.),  then, 

thereupon,  after 
sluta\  I,  to  end 
ett  slut,  — ,  close,  end 
stupa,  I,  to  fall   (on  the  battle 

field) 
sd'lunda,  thus 
en  tdljare,  numerator 
ursdkta,  I,  to  excuse 
utsprucken,  p.  part,  of  spricka 

ut',  to  open  (of  flowers) 
en  vdning,  -ar,  story,  apartment 
en  drsdag,  -ar,  anniversary 


^Sluta  when  it  means  to  shut  and  to  conclude  belongs  to  the  Fourth  Conjuga- 
tion; sluta,  slot,  sloto,  slut  it,  sluten,  -el. 


LESSON  XXXII. 
Prepositions. 

345.  Prepositions  govern  the  objective  case 
which,  except  for  a  few  of  the  pronouns,  is  the 
same  as  the  nominative. 

Note.     Till  and  i  govern  the  genitive  in  a  few  idiomatic  phrases :  till  sdngi 
to   (in)  bed ;  t  somras,  last  summer. 

346.  The  following  are  the  most  important  prep- 
ositions in  Swedish: 

av,  of,  off  ndra,  near,  close  by 

bakom,  behind  nedanfor,  below 

bland,  among  iiedfbr,  down 

efter,  after,  behind  ovan,  above 

enligt,  according  to  ovanfor,  above 

frdn,  if  ran,  from  pa,  a,  on 

framfbr,  in  front  of  sedan,  since 

for,  for,  before  till,  to 

f67'bi,  by,  past  undan,  away  from 

fore,  before,  ahead  of  under,  beneath,  below ; 

genom,  igenom,  through,        during 

by  uppfor,  up 

hos,  with,  by,  among  ur,  out,  out  of 

i,  in,  into  utmed,  along 

innan,  before  utefter,  along 

innanf or ^  within  utfor,  down 

inom,  in,  within  utom,  outside  of;  beside, 
jdmte,  by,  beside  except 

kring,  omkring,  around,  utan,  without 

about  utanfor,  outside  of 

med,  with  vid,  invid,  by,  at 

medelst,  by  means  of  bredvid,  by  the  side  of 

mellan,  emellan,  between  at,  to,  for 

mot,  emot,  against,  to-  over,  above 

ward 

347.  The  following  expressions  with  preposi- 
tional value  are  of  common  occurrence: 

Swedish  Grammar  14 


203  PREPOSITIONS. 

med  avseende  pa,  with  reference  to 

med  hdnsyn  till,  in  regard  to 

i  kraft  av,  by  virtue  of 

i  or  till  foljd  av,  in  consequence  of,  because  of 

med  anledning  av,  on  account  of 

i  trots  av   (trots),  in  spite  of 

oaktat,  in  spite  of 

Idngs,  Idngsmed,  along 

rorande  1 

angaende        J-concerning 

betrdffande    J 

i  stdllet  for,  instead  of 

undantagandes,  excepting 

for ....  skull,  for  the  sake  of 

for. . . .   sedan,  ago 

Note.  For. .  .skull  and  for. .  .sedan  take  the  expressions  which  they  govern 
between  the  two  parts.  For. .  .skull  requires  the  genitive  case:  for  min  far* 
skull,  for  the  sake  of  my  father ;  for  bans  skull,  for  his  sake ;  for  elt  dr  sedan, 
for  lange  sedan,  a  year  ago,  long  ago. 

USES   OF  THE   PREPOSITIONS. 

348.     The  following  are  the  uses  of  some  of  the 
most  common  prepositions. 

Av,  of,  off,  from,  by,  for: 

(a)  Titles:    konungen  av  Sverige,  the   king  of 
Sweden. 

(b)  Material:  klockan  dr  av  guld,  the  watch  is 
of  gold. 

(c)  Agent:  han  beundrades  av  alia,  he  was  ad- 
mired by  everybody. 

(d)  Cause=for,  of:  han  grdt  av  glddje,  he  wept 
for  joy;  ^an  dog  av  hunger,  he  died  of  hunger. 

(e)  Quality,   description   or    characteristic:     en 


PREPOSITIONS.  203 

man  av  karaktdr,  av  dra,  a  man  of  character,  of 
of  honor. 

(f)  Source :  jag  har  fatt  boken  av  honom,  I  have 
received  the  book  from  him;  det  dr  sndllt  av  dig, 
it  is  kind  of  you. 

(g)  Partitive  idea:  onskar  ni  ett  glas  av  delta 
vin?  Do  you  wish  a  glass  of  this  wine?  en  af  mina 
vdnner,  one  of  my  friends;  den  flitigaste  av  alia, 
the  most  diligent  of  all. 

349.  Efter,  after,  behind,  according  to,  for,  at: 

(a)  Time  or  sequence:  efter  middagen  dr  det 
skont  att  vila,  it  is  nice  to  rest  after  dinner;  vem 
kommer  efter  mig?  Who  comes  after  me  (behind 
me)? 

(b)  for:  after  verbs  of  asking,  looking,  sending,- 
striving,  etc.:   skicka  efter  Idkaren,  send  for  the 
doctor;  jag  har  letat  efter  boken,  I  have  hunted  for 
the  book;  vem  frdgar  han  efter?     Whom  does  he 
inquire  for?   strdva  efter,  to  strive  for,  etc. 

(c)  according  to :  efter  vad  jag  har  hort,  accord- 
ing to  what  I  have  heard  (enligt  is  more  common 
in  this  sense) . 

Note.  Closely  related  expressions  arc  found  with  certain  verbs:  att  doma 
efter  ndgot,  to  judge  by  something ;  han  rdttar  sig  efter  Hn  fars  vilja,  he  is 
governed  by  his  father's  will. 

350.  For,  for,  to,  before,  etc.: 

(a)  Advantage,  reference,  object:  han  har  sorjt 
for  sina  barns  uppfostran,  he  has  provided  for  the 
education  of  his  children;  tala  om  det  for  honom. 
mention  it  to  him ;  han  har  ingen  forstdelse  for  ide- 
ella  saker,  he  has  no  appreciation  of  ideal  things ;  for 
mig  far  du  gora  det,  as  far  as  I  am  concerned  you 


204  PREPOSITIONS. 

may  do  it;  for  mig  dr  han  blott  en  vanlig  mdn- 
niska,  in  my  estimation  he  is  only  a  common  mortal. 

(b)  Price:  giv  mig  for  en  krona  konfekt,  give 
me  a  crown's  worth  of  bonbons;  hur  mycket  har 
du  betalt  for  hatten?  How  much  have  you  paid  for 
the  hat? 

(c)  Place  (especially  figurative,  a  strictly  literal 
before  is  generally  expressed  by  framfor) :  med 
doden  for  ogonen,  with  death  staring  one  in  the 
face;  ndr  fai^an  star  for  dorr  en,  when  danger  is  at 
hand  (before  the  door)  ;  spdnn  hasten  for  kdrran, 
hitch  the  horse  to  the  cart. 

(d)  Duration  of  time:  det  dr  nog  for  en  vecka, 
that  is  enough  for  a  week  (see  pa  and  under). 

Note.     The  temporal    before  is   rendered  by  fore  and  innan. 

(e)  Succession :  han  har  oversatt  det  ord  for  ord, 
he  has  translated  it  word  for  word;  han  blev  vdrre 
dag  for  dag,  he  grew  worse  day  by  day,  steg  for 
steg,  step  by  step. 

(f)  With  sedan,  in  the  sense  of  ago :  for  en  vecka 
sedan,  a  week  ago;  for  Idnge  sedan,  long  ago. 

(g)  After  verbs  denoting  flight,  concealment, 
caution,  fear,  and  the  like:  han  fiydde  for  fienden, 
he  fled  from  the  enemy;  han  gomde  sig  for  mig, 
he  hid  from  me  (with  such  verbs  for  is  sometimes 
used  together  with  undan) :  att  varna  ndgon  for 
ndgot,  to  warn  somebody  against  something;  att 
akta  sig  for  ndgot,  to  be  on  one's  guard  against 
something;  att  vara  rddd  for  ndgot,  to  be  afraid 
Df  something;  att  skrdmma  ndgon  for  ndgot,  to 
frighten  somebody  for  something. 

(h)  In  a  number  of  idiomatic  expressions:  vad 


EXERCISE.  205 

tar  du  mig  for?  What  do  you  take  me  for?  jag 
gick  for  mig  sjdlv,  I  walked  by  myself;  han  skrat- 
tade  for  sig  sjdlv,  he  laughed  to  himself;  for  att 
vara  hara  ett  ham,  spelar  han  icke  sd  ilia,  to  be 
only  a  child  he  does  not  play  so  badly. 

Exercise  XXXII. 
A.  1.  Under  sommaren  bor  ni  val  ej  i  staden?  Nej,  da 
flytta  vi  ut  pa^  landet;  vi  aga  ett  litet  lantstalle  utmed-  flo- 
den  nedanfor^  staden.  2.  Aro  era  forbindelser  med  staden 
bekvama?  Ja,  de  allra  bekvamaste;  vi  ha  angbatsforbin- 
delse  med  tva  turer  i  timmen,  och  efter  vad  jag  liar  hort, 
kommer  automobilforbindelse  snart  att  upprattas*.  3.  Det 
ar  mycket  folk  i  denna  restaiirang,  men  darborta  i  hornet 
till  hoger^  ar  ett  bord,  som  ej  ar  upptaget  av  nagon. 
4.  Detta  lar  vara  en  ypperlig  restaurang,  jag  har  fatt  adres- 
sen  av  en  av  mina  vanner.  5.  Dar  star  han  sjalv  fram- 
for  disken  och  talar  med  agaren.  Vill  ni,  att  jag  skall  pre- 
sentera  er  for^  honom?  Han  ar  en  man  av  karaktar  och 
bildning.  6.  Jag  skall  ga  ned  i  staden^  i  dag  for  att  gora 
nagra  uppkop  for  mig  sjalv;  vill  du  kanske,  att  jag  skall  ko- 
pa  nagot  at  dig?  7.  Det  var  hyggligt  av  dig  att  tanka  pa* 
mig,  men  jag  ar  alldeles  utan  pengar  nu.  8.  Pengarna  kan 
jag  forskottera,  jag  har  fatt  lana  av  dig  sa  ofta.  9.  Om  du 
gar  forbi  Lindgrens  cigarrhandel,  sa  titta  in  och  hor  efter®, 
om  de  fatt  in  av  mina  favoritcigarrer  an,  i  sa  falP°  kop  en 
lada.  10.  Sa  sorgligt,  att  herr  Liden  skulle  do  sa  hastigt. 
Vad  dog  han  av^^?  11.  Av  hjartforlamning.  Han  blev 
haftigt  sjuk  efter  middagen.  Man  skickade  efter^  lakaren, 
men  han  kunde  ej  utratta  nagot.  12.  Han  var  en  praktig 
karl ;  enligt  ryktet  har  han  utovat  en  storartad  valgorenhet. 
Hans  dod  kommer  att  fororsaka  sorg  inom  vida  kretsar. 

^Into;  note  use  of  ut.     *Also  utefter.     'Nedanfor,  ovanfor,  designate  location 
uppfor,  nedfSr  denote  direction.     *Note  use  of  kommer  att;  skall  may  also  be 


206  EXERCISE. 

used.  "Note  omission  of  article.  'Not  till.  'Down  town.  *Think  of,  tiinka  pa, 
but  if  it  means  to  have  an  opinion  of  it  must  be  translated  by  idnka  om:  vad 
tanker  du  om  honom,  what  opinion  do  you  have  of  him?  '349,  a.  "In  that 
case.     "348,  d. 

B.  Conversation.  1.  Vart  flyttar  ni,  nar  sommaren 
kommer?  2.  Var  ligger  ert  lantstalle?  3.  Ar  det  svart  att 
konina  in  till  staden  ?  4.  Arc  angbatsturerna  tata  ?  5.  Pa 
vad  satt  kommer  forbindelsen  med  staden  att  forbattras? 

6.  Varfor  tror  ni  att  den  har  restaurangen  ar  ypperlig? 

7.  Vad  for  tjanst  vill  ni  gora  er  van?  8.  Vad  lovar  ni  att 
gora,  nar  ban  siiger,  att  ban  ar  utan  pengar?  9.  Var  koper 
ban  sina  f avoriteigarrer  ? 

C.  1.  Wbere  do  you  live  during^  the  summer?  We  live 
in  a  little  country  bouse,  which  we  own  along^  the  river  a 
little  above  the  city.  2.  Is  it  not  inconvenient  to  live  out- 
side of"  the  city?  No,  we  have  connection  by^  steamer 
every  half-hour*,  and  according  to  the  paper  we  are  soon 
to  have  connection  by^  automobile.  3.  Let  us  ask  that 
policeman  for^  a  good  restaurant;  I  have  not  had  a  bite  to 
eat  since  twelve  o'clock  and  it  is  now  after  seven.  4.  This 
looks  really  cozy;  shall  we  sit  down  by  that  table  in  the 
corner?  5.  Who  was  the  gentleman  who  just  walked  past 
us  and  saluted  ?  I  met  him  about  a  week  ago*'  when  I  took 
a  trip  up^  Gotlia  canal  from  Gothenburg  to  Stockholm. 
6.  May*  I  give  you  a  piece  of  this  steak?  If  you  please^. 
That  is  too  much,  give  me  only  half  of  that.  7.  After  din- 
ner I  shall  have^°  to  hurry  home;  I  must  be  at  the  hotel 
before  nine,    I    expect   company   between    nine    and    ten. 

8.  Which  is  the  best  way  of  getting^^  to  the  hotel?  By 
street  car  or  by  steamboat?  9.  The  little  steamboat  that 
lies  there  by  the  quay  will  land  you  right^-  in  front  of  the 
hotel.     10.  But  it  will  leave  within  a  few  minutes.     Now 


VOCABULARY.  207 

it  backs  out  from  the  quay.  11.  There  will  soon  come^^ 
another;  I  think  a  steamboat  leaves  every  ten  minutes. 
12.  If  you  are  ready  now,  we  shall  go  down  to  the  quay 
and  wait  for^*  the  boat.  13.  Just  in  time^^,  there  it  comes 
out^^  between  those  two  big  boats. 

^See  A,  1,  above.  Wtom  or  utanfor.  'Medelst  (vied  may  also  be  used).  *Varje 
halvUmme  or  far  trettionde  minut  (note  use  of  ordinal  in  such  expressions). 
'349,  a.  *350,  f ;  fiir  precedes  omhring.  'See  A,  note  3,  above.  *Use  fa.  'Ja,  jag 
tackar  or  om  rd  bthagar.  "Present  of  modal.  ^'Use  infinitive  of  homma. 
'-Translate  light  by  mitt;  mitt,  middle,  is  used  with  certain  prepositions:  mitt  i 
rummet,  in  the  middle  of  the  room  ;  mitt  under  predikan,  rig-ht  in  the  middle 
of  the  sermon ;  mitt  pu  fingret,  right  on  the  finger.  ^^Det  plus  present.  ^*Pa. 
'=^/  tid.     ^"Fram. 


VOCABULARY. 

en  automobilforbindelse,  -r,  /logrer  (no  neuter,  indef.),  right 

connection  by  automobile  en  Jcaj,  -cr,  pier,  quay 

bekvcim,   -t,    comfortable  kan'ske,  may  be,  perhaps 

en  bildning,  culture,  educa-  en  karaktiir',  -er,  character 

tion  en  krets,  -ar,  circle 

en  bit,  -ar,  piece,  bit  (bite)  ett  lantstdlle,  -n,  country  house 

en   cigarrhandlare,   — ,   cigar  en   poliskonstapel,   -lar,   police-. 

dealer  man 

en  disk,  -ar,  counter  praktig,  -t,  splendid 

en  favorit'cigarr',  -er,  favorite  en  sorg,  -er,  sorrow,  grief 

cigar  sorglig,  -t,  sad 

frcimmande,   — ,   strange  en  spdrvagn,  -ar,  street  car 

en  forbindelse,  -r,  connection  en  stek,  -ar,  steak 

for'orsaka  (insep.  v.),  I,  to  storartad,  -at,  magnificent 

cause  titta,  I,  to  look 

forskotte'ra,  I,  to  advance  en  tur,  -er,  trip;    turn    (also 
Gota  kanal,  Gotha  canal  luck) 

Gdteborg,   Gothenburg  tat,  frequent 

en  halvtimme,  -ar,  half  hour  ett  uppkop,  — ,  purchase 

hemtrevlig,  -t,  cozy,  homelike  upp'ratta     (insep.     v.),     I,     to 
en  hjdrtforlamning  (-ar),  heart  establish,   institute 

failure  upp'tagen,  -t,  occupied 

hj/gglig,  -t,  nice,  kind  ut'rdtta  (insep.  v.),  I,  to  ac- 
hdftig,  -t,  violent  complish 


208  PREPOSITIONS. 

utdva  (insep.  v.),  I,  to  exer-    en  dngMtsfurbindelse,   -r,   con- 
cise,  practice  nection  by  steamer 
en  vdlgorenhet,  charity               en    dngbutstur,    -er,    steamboat 
ypperlig,  -t,  excellent,  fine  trip 

en  iigare,  — ,  owner 
Idioms:   1.  att  ha  frdmmande,  to  have  company. 

2.  att  ha  tur,   to  be   in  luck;    clet  dr  min  tur,  it  is 
my  turn. 

3.  att  titta  in  hos  nilgon,  to  call  on  somebody. 


LESSON  XXXIII. 
Uses  of  Prepositions  (Continued). 

351.  Genom  (igenom),  through,  by  means  of, 
on  account  of: 

(a)  Direction:  vi  gingo  genom  skogen,  we  went 
through  the  forest. 

(b)  Time  (the  preposition  may  follow  the  noun 
in  this  sense  and  has  then  the  form  igenom):  han 
var  olycklig  hela  livet  igenom,  he  was  unhappy 
throughout  his  whole  life. 

('c^ Means:  han  later  hdlsa  genom  sin  bror,  he 
sends  greetings  through  his  brother;  genom  stora 
anstrdngningar  har  han  uppndtt  sitt  mdl,  by  means 
of  great  exertions  he  has  attained  his  goal. 

(d)  On  account  of:  genom  sitt  ddraktiga  upp- 
forande  har  han  forlorat  vdrt  fortroende,  on  ac- 
count of  his  foolish  conduct  he  has  lost  our  con- 
fidence. 

352.  Hos,  at  the  house  of,  in  the  shop  of,  in: 
han  bor  hos  oss,  he  lives  with  us;  hos  skrdddaren, 
at  the  tailor's;  vi  Idsa  hos  Gothe  mycket  om  kons- 
ten,  in  Goethe  we  read  much  about  art. 


PREPOSITIONS.  209 

353.  I,  in,  into: 

(a)  Place  (literal)  :  i  rummet,  in  the  room; 
place  into  which  (literal)  is  denoted  by  in  i,  into: 
han  kom  in  i  rummet,  he  came  into  the  room. 

Note.  Observe  the  difference  between  expressions  like  yd  in  i  kyrkan,  ga  in 
i  skolan  (go  into  the  church,  go  into  th^  school  [house])  and  gd  i  kyrkan, 
gd  i  skolan   (to  attend  church,  to  attend  school)'. 

(b)  Place  (figurative)  :  att  leva  i  fattigdom,  to 
live  in  poverty;  place  into  which  (figurative)  :  att 
rdka  i  svdrigheter,  to  get  into  difficulties. 

(c)  Time  (with  seasons  and  days  in  the  genitive 
to  denote  past  time,  translated  by  last) :  i  vdras, 
last  spring ;  i  fredags,  last  Friday ;  i  gar,  yesterday ; 
i  dag,  to-day ;  i  hundratals  dr,  for  hundreds  of  years ; 
en  gang  i  veckan,  once  a  week. 

(d)  Manner:  skriva  i  hast,  to  write  in  haste;  i 
vrede,  in  anger, 

(e)  Change,  transition:  grddden  forvandlas  i 
smor  och  ost,  the  cream  is  changed  into  butter  and 
cheese;  gd  i  bitar,  to  go  to  pieces. 

354.  Med,  with,  by,  to: 

(a)  Accompaniment:  vill  ni  gd  med  mig  i  kyr- 
kan? Will  you  go  to  church  with  me?  han  var  med 
de  fbrsta,  som  gingo,  he  was  among  the  first  who 
went. 

(b)  Manner:  att  studera  med  flit,  to  study  with 
diligence;  med  ett  enda  sprdng,  with  (at)  a  single 
leap. 

(a)  Instrument:  skicka  med  posten,  to  send  by 
mail;  skriva  med  penna,  write  with  pen;  fara  med 
jdrnvdg,  travel  by  rail. 


310  PREPOSITIONS. 

(d)  In  a  number  of  set  phrases;  as,  besldktad 
med,  related  to;  tola  med,  speak  to,  etc. 

Note.     As  an  adverb  med  means  along:  kom  med  I     Come  along! 

355.  Mot,  emot,  against,  toward: 

(a)  Direction:  hdren  marscherade  emot  fienden, 
the  army  marched  against  the  enemy;  var  vdnlig 
emot  din  bror,  be  kind  to  your  brother;  han  kommer 
nog  fram  mot  kvdllen,  he  will  very  likely  come  to- 
ward evening;  gd  emot  ndgon,  go  to  meet  somebody. 

(b)  Exchange,  comparison:  jag  bytte  ut  det 
gamla  pianot  mot  ett  nytt,  I  exchanged  the  old 
piano  for  a  new;  de  vunno  spelet  med  tio  podng 
mot  fyra,  they  won  the  game  with  ten  points  to 
four. 

(c)  Hostility:  arbeta  mot  ndgon,  work  against 
somebody;  sdtta  sig  emot  ndgot,  oppose  something. 

(d)  Remedy:  hdr  dr  ett  bra  medel  mot  huvud- 
vdrk,  here  is  a  good  remedy  for  headache. 

356.  Om,  about,  around,  in,  for,  of,  a,  etc.: 

(a)  Subject  or  topic :  han  berdttade  om  sina  dven- 
tyr,  he  told  of  his  adventures;  vad  handlar  boken 
om?  What  does  the  book  treat  about?  jag  vet  ej 
ndgot  om  den  saken,  I  know  nothing  about  that 
matter. 

(b)  Time  (at  the  end  of  which)  :  tdget  kommer 
om  fern  minuter,  the  train  will  be  here  in  five  min- 
utes; om  en  mdnad,  in  a  month;  om  onsdag,  next 
Wednesday. 

Note.     Time  within  which  is  denoted  by  inom;  jag  slcall  ha  det  fardigt  inom 
nagra  dagar,  I  shall  have  it  ready  within  a  few  days. 

(c)  Time  at  which    (indefinite)  :    om  dagen,    in 


EXERCISE.  211 

the   daytime;   om  vintern,  in  winter;   tvd  ganger 
om  dret,  twice  a  year. 

(d)  Interest,  competition,  with  verbs  of  asking, 
contending,  etc. :  hedja  om  ndgonting,  ask  for  some- 
thing (inquire  iov=frdga  efter,  see  349,  b)  ;  spela 
om  pengar,  play  for  money;  tdvla  om  ett  pris,  to 
compete  for  a  prize;  att  anhdlla  om  ndgot,  to  re- 
quest something. 

(e)  Motion  past :  ska  vi  forsoka  att  gd  om  honom  ? 
Shall  we  try  to  pass  him?  (here  om  may  perhaps 
be  regarded  as  a  separable  prefix ;  it  takes  the  main 
stress) . 

(f)  Position:  han  har  en  hindel  om,  huvudet,  he 
has  a  bandage  about  his  head ;  med  armen  om  ndgon, 
with  the  arm  around  somebody;  jag  dr  vdt  om  fot- 
terna,  my  feet  are  wet;  no7i'  om  Stockholm,  north 
of  Stockholm;  till  hoger  om,  to  the  right  of. 

Note.  Position  or  motion  around,  especially  when  the  moaning  is  literal,  is 
generally  denotefl  by  omknng  or  kring. 

Exercise  XXXIII. 

A.  1.  Jag  skulle  vilja  vaxla  en  deP  svenska  pengar  i 
araerikanska.  Kan  ni  saga  mig,  var  det  narmaste  vaxel- 
kontoret  ligger'?  2.  Jag  kanner  ej  tilP  nagot  vaxelkontor 
i  narheten,  men  darborta  om  hornet  ligger  en  bank,  och  dar 
vaxlar  man  nog  for  er.  3.  Det  var  bra,  ty  jag  har  sa  bratt- 
om;  jag  skall  lamna  Stockholm  om*  ett  par  timmar. 
4.  Hur  mycket  kostar  ett  telegram  om^  tjngufem  ord  till 
Berlin?  Det  blir  fyrtio  ore  per^  ord,  och  dessutom  maste 
ni  betala  for  adress  och  namnteckning.  5.  Avgar'^  tele- 
grammet  i  dag?  Ja,  med^  forsta  lagenhet.  6.  Jag  skulle 
vilja  sanda  ett  tusen  kronor  per  telegraf  till  Berlin,  har  ar 
adressen  och  telegrammet.     Tors^  jag  be  om'°  ett  kvitto? 


212  EXERCISE. 

7.  Du  var  val  ej  hos  Bloms  i  gar  ef termiddag  ?  Nej,  herr 
Carlen  bad  mig  ga  med  honom  till  Idrottsparken,  och  vi 
kommo  ej  tillbaka  forran  fram  mot*^  niotiden.  8.  Hur  av- 
lopte  fotbollmatchen  ?  Idrottsklubben  Kamraterna  vann 
med  tre  mal  mot  ett.  Kamraterna  spelade  med  kraft  och 
elegans.  9.  Jag  ti-affadc  var  gamle  van  Agrell  i  mandags. 
Han  talade  om  de  ekonomiska  svarigheter,  i  vilka  han  ra- 
kat,  och  anhoU  om^"  ett  mindre  Ian,  10.  Stackars  Agrell, 
allt  synes  ha  sammansvurit  sig  mot  honom.  11.  Visst  inte, 
han  har  adragit  sig  sina  motgangar  genom  sitt  slarv.  Han 
hade  kunnat  vara  valbargad  for  lange  sedan^^,  om  han^^ 
skott  sig. 

'£n  del  is  used  colloqmally  in  the  sense  of  gome,  a  number  of.  *Also  ar  held- 
get  or  or.  *Kdnna  till,  know  of.  *456,  b.  *0/.  The  Latin  per  is  used  after 
an  expression  of  price  with  the  meaning  of  a;  we  could  also  say  fyrtio  ore  ordet. 
'Note  use  of  pres. ;  also  kommer  att  avga.  'See  354,  b ;  also  vid.  •Common 
form  of  polite  request.  "356,  d.  ''SSS,  a.  "350,  f.  >*Note  omission  of  auxil- 
iary. 

B.  1.  Here  is  a  telegram  for  you.  It  is  from  my  brother ; 
I  wish  to  answer  immediately  by^  telegraph.  2.  Could^  you 
tell  me  where  the  nearest  telegraph  office  is  ?  You  will  find 
one  around  the  corner  on  the  first  cross  street.  3.  How 
much  does  a  telegram  of*  twenty  words  to  Paris  cost  ?  It 
costs  forty-five  ore  a*  word.  4.  May  I  then  send  the  ad- 
dress and  signature  for  nothing^  ?  No,  you  will  have  to  pay 
for  them  too.  5,  Will  you  take^  dinner  with^  us  next^ 
Wednesday  ?  I  am  so  sorry,  but  it  will  not  be®  possible  for 
me.  6.  Why  not?  I  have  promised  to  take  my  friend  Car- 
len along  to  the  football  game  in  the  afternoon.  7.  I  should 
like  to  go  with  you  myself ;  they  are  going  to  compete  f or^° 
the  championship  in  football.  8.  Get^^  into  this  compart- 
ment; the  train  will  start^^  in  a  few  minutes.  Hurry  up! 
9.  I  shalP*  take  these  parcels  with  me  into  the  car.  It  was 
so  kind  of  you  to  check  that  valise  for  me.    10.  That  seat 


VOCABULARY. 


213 


will  be"  very  comfortable  for  you,  if  you  are  not  afraid  to 
ride^^  backwards.  11.  Thank  you,  good-bye!  Now  they 
ring  for  the^^  third  time.  12.  How  far^^  is  it  to  Upsala? 
Upsala  lies  thirty  miles  north^®  of  Stockholm.  13.  You 
ought  to  visit  it  in^^  the  spring,  while  the  students  are  still 
there.  14.  They  will  return  within^"  a  month,  I  think. 
15.  Now  we  are  there.  Who  is  this  gentleman  that  comes 
to  meet^^  us?  16.  Over  there,  towards  the  west^^,  we  have 
Old  Upsala. 

'See  A,  6,  above.  "See  A,  1,  above.  'See  A,  4,  above.  *See  A,  i,  above, 
note  5.  ^Intet,  not  ingenting.  'Use  ata.  '352.  *356,  b.  'Use  present  of 
bliva.  ""SSe,  d.  *'Use  gd.  '-Use  pres.  of  ga.  "Use  shall  since  the  future  here 
denotes  a  determination.  "Use  kommer  att  bli.  ^'350,  g.  ''Leave  out  the 
prepositive  def.  article.  "Use  Idngt.  "356,  f.  ^^Om  or  pa.  ^"356,  6,  note. 
"358.   a.     ■'-Vaster. 


VOCABULARY. 


aji'hdlla  (insep.  v.),  to  request 
av'gA,  to  go  out,  depart;  gd 

av'  to  break 
hakldnges,   backwards 
en  bank,  -er,  bank 
ekonomisk,  -t,  financial 
elegans,^  elegance 
en  fotbollmatch,  -er,  football 

game 
genast,  immediately 
en  herre,  -ar,  gentleman 
en   idrottspark,   -er,    athletic 

park 
Idrottsparken,  Athletic  Park 

in  Stockholm 
inom,  within 

en  kraft,  -er,  force,  strength 
ett  kvitto,  -n,  receipt 
en  liigenhet,  -er,  opportunity 
en  motgdng,  -ar,  adversity 
ett  mdl,  goal;   meal 


ett  mdsterskap,  — ,  champion- 
ship 

mojligt,  -t,  possible  (ly) 

en  namnteckning,  -ar,  signa- 
ture 

norr  (adj.  and  noun,  no  indef.), 
north 

fen)  ndrhet,  nearness,  vicinity 

ett  ord,  — ,  word 

ett  paket,  -er,  parcel 

polette'ra,  I,  to  check 

en  resvaska,  -or,  valise 

rdka,  I,  to  meet;  encounter 

rcidd  (no  neut.  indef.),  timid, 
afraid 

sammansvdrja  sig  (refl.  v.), 
-svor,  -svuro,  -svurit,  -en, 
-et,  to  conspire 

skota  sig  (refl.  v.),  Ila,  to 
take  care  of  oneself 

ett   slarv,  — ,   carelessnns.'i 


214  PREPOSITIONS. 

ett  sate,  -n,  seat  vaxla,  I,  to  change 

en  telegraf,  -er,  telegraph  ett  vaxelkontor,  —  exchange 

en  tviirgata,  -or,  cross  street  office 

idvla,  I,  to  compete  d'draga  sig   (refl.  v.),  to  bring 

vdlbargad,  -at,  well-to-do  on,   contract 

Idioms:  1,  att  rdka  en  person,  to  see,  meet  a  person;  att  rdka 

i  fattigdom,  svdrigheter,  to  become  poverty-stricken, 

to  get  into   difficulties;    jag  rdkar  inte  hdr,   I   do 

not  find  my  way  here. 

2.  att  ddraga  sig  en  sjukdom,  to  contract  a  disease. 

'Pronounced  eleganga' . 


LESSON  XXXIV. 
Uses  of  Prepositions  (Continued). 

357.    Pa,  on,  upon,  at,  in,  for,  to. 

(a)  Place  in  which:  boken  ligger  pa  bordet,  the 
book  lies  on  the  table;  jag  motte  honom  pa  gatan 
(not  i  gatan);  I  met  him  in  the  street;  han  dr  pa 
sitt  rum,  he  is  in  his  room ;  ett  hdl  pa  rocken,  a  hole 
in  the  coat ;  pa  landet,  in  the  country. 

(b)  Place  into  which :  ga  pa  target,  pa  posten,  pa 
teatern,  to  go  to  market,  to  the  post  office,  to  the 
theater;  ga  ut  pa  fdltet,  pa  landet,  to  go  into  the 
field,  into  the  country. 

Note.  Till  teatern  means'  only  to  the  theater  as  a  place ;  pa  teatern  implies 
attendance ;  att  skicka  till  posten,  to  send  to  the  post  office ;  att  skicka  pa 
posten,    to    mail. 

(c)  Direction  toward  an  object:  han  riktade  sin 
kamera  pa  mig,  he  pointed  his  camera  at  me;  jag 
blickade  (sag)  pa  honom,  I  looked  at  him ;  han  syf- 
tade  pa  mig,  he  alluded  to  me. 

(d)  Time  during  which,  for  how  long:  han  har 
rest  till  Sverige  pa  ett  dr,  he  has  gone  to  Sweden 


PREPOSITIONS.  315 

for  a  year;  han  har  ej  skrivit  pa  en  vecka,  he  has 
not  written  for  a  week. 

(e)  Time  at  which :  pa  morgonen,  in  the  morning ; 
pa  vdren,  in  the  spring. 

Note.     Om  morgonen,  am  vdren,  etc.  is  much  more  indefinite :  we  must  say 
i  dag  pa  morgonen,  this  morning  (not  om  m,orgonen),  see  cm. 

(f)  Response  and  expectation  after  certain  verbs : 

1.  Response:  svara  pa,  to  answer;  hora  pa,  to 
listen  to;  giva  akt  pa,  to  pay  attention  to:  hor  pa 
vad  jag  sdger,  listen  to  what  I  say;  svara  pa  mitt 
brev,  answer  my  letter. 

2.  Expectation :  hoppas  pa,  to  hope  for ;  lita  pa, 
to  rely  upon;  rdkna  pa,  to  count  on,  etc.:  jag 
hoppas  pa  regn,  I  hope  for  rain ;  jag  rdknar  pa  din 
hjdlp;  I  count  on  your  help;  tank  pa  det!  Think  of 
it !  jag  vdntar  pa  honom,  I  am  waiting  for  him. 

(g)  With  certain  adjectives:  ond  pa,  angry  with; 
matt  pa,  tired  of;  avundsjuk  pa,  envious  of;  upp- 
mdrksam  pa,  attentive  to;  svartsjuk  pa,  jealous  of, 
etc.:  jag  dr  matt  pa  sddana  saker,  I  am  tired  of 
(have  had  enough  of)  such  things;  han  dr  ond  pa 
mig,  he  is  angry  with  me. 

(h)  In  a  number  of  idiomatic  expressions:  pa 
svenska,  in  Swedish ;  soppa  pa  oxkdtt,  beef  soup ; 
att  leva  pa  tio  dollars  i  veckan,  to  live  on  ten  dollars 
a  week;  jag  har  inga  pengar  pa  mig,  I  have  no 
money  about  me;  en  vdxel  pa  (a)  f emtio  kronor, 
a  draft  for  fifty  dollars;  pa  detta  sdtt,  in  this  man- 
ner; det  gar  hundra  ore  pa  kronan,  there  are  one 
hundred  ore  to  the  crown. 

358.     Till,  to,  in,  for,  of,  etc.: 

(a)  Motion  to  a  place:  ga  till  staden,  till  svarta 
tavlan,  till  posten,  till  himlen:  go  to  town,  to  the 


216  PREPOSITIONS. 

blackboard,  to  the  post  office,  to  heaven;  sjunka  till 
hotten,  sink  to  the  bottom;  fora  till  bords,  conduct 
to  the  table;  han  kom  till  mig,  he  came  to  me. 

(b)  Place  at  or  in  which:  ligga  till  sdngs,  to  lie 
in  bed ;  sitta  till  bords,  sit  at  table ;  till  sjoss,  on  sea. 

(c)  Purpose,  appointment,  destination,  transfor- 
mation: nyckeln  dr  till  att  lasa  upp  med,  the  key 
is  for  unlocking;  de  ha  kront  honom  till  konung, 
they  have  crowned  him  king;  bliva  till  sten,  become 
stone;  hdr  dr  ett  paket  till  er,  here  is  a  package  for 
you;  vara  till  nytta,  be  of  use;  taga  till  hustru,  to 
marry  (lit.  to  take  for  wife). 

(d)  Specification,  reference:  god  till  karaktdren, 
of  good  character;  vdnlig  till  sdttet,  of  a  good  dis- 
position ;  skomakare  till  yrket,  shoemaker  by  trade ; 
benet  till  bordet,  the  leg  of  the  table ;  han  dr  son  till 
presidenten,  he  is  the  president's  son. 

Note.  Here  may  perhaps  be  classed  the  Swedish  equivalent  for  the  objective 
grenitive:  kdrleken  till  fosterlandet,  love  of  countrj' ;  Gnds  karlek  till  oss, 
God's   love  for  us. 

(e)  Addition :  jag  dricker  kaffe  till  maten,  I  drink 
coffee  with  my  meals;  tag  socker  till  kaffet,  take 
sugar  with  the  coffee. 

(f)  In  a  number  of  idiomatic  expressions:  till 
hosten,  next  fall ;  till  pask  far  jag  hem,  I  shall  go 
home  for  Easter;  vad  fick  du  till  julklapp?  what  did 
you  get  for  Christmas  present?  vi  hade  lax  till  mid- 
dag,  we  had  salmon  for  dinner ;  gratulera  till  fodelse- 
dagen,  to  congratulate  on  a  birthday,  etc. 

(g)  till  och  med=to,  up  to,  including :  frdn  sidan 
tjugu  till  och  med  sidan  trettio,  from  page  twenty 
to  page  thirty  inclusive.  As  an  adverb  it  means 
even:  till  och  med  han,  even  he. 


EXERCISK  21T 

359.     Under,  under,  beneath,  during,  amid: 

(a)  Place,  direction:  jag  stod  under  trddet,  1 
stood  beneath  the  tree ;  jag  star  under  hans  uppsikt, 
I  am  under  his  supervision;  under  omstdndigheter- 
na,  under  the  circumstances;  kom  under  mitt  para- 
ply,  come  beneath  my  umbrella. 

(b)  Time :  under  hans  livstid,  during  his  lifetime ; 
under  tiden,  iii  the  meantime;  under  marschen,  on 
the  march;  under  middagen,  in  the  course  of  the 
dinner. 

(c)  Rank,  value,  age:  kaptenen  star  under  majo- 
ren  i  rang,  the  captain  is  below  the  major  in  rank; 
hans  bok  dr  under  all  kritik,  his  book  is  beneath  all 
criticism;  vill  ni  sdlja  huset  under  10,000  kronorl 
Do  you  wish  to  sell  the  house  for  less  than  10,000 
crowns?  under  tjugu  dr,  under  twenty  years  of  age. 

(d)  Manner:  under  tdrar  omtalade  han  vad  som 
hdnt,  weeping  (with  tears)  he  related  what  had 
happened ;  under  skratt  och  skdmt,  amidst  laughing 
and  joking. 

Exercise  XXXIV. 

A.  1.  Pa^  manga  ar  har  ej  en  sa  forfarlig  jarnvagsolycka 
hant  som  i  gar;  till  foljd  av  en  felsignal  ursparade  natt- 
snalltaget  mellan  Stockholm  och  Uppsala.  2.  Min  kusin 
var  bland  passagerarne,  han  blev  raddad  pa^  ett  underbart 
satt.  3.  Vad  vantar  du  pa^  ?  Jag  vantar  pa  att  fa*  en  vaxel 
a  ett  tusen  kroner  inlost,  som  jag  utstallde  pa  denna  bank 
genom^  dess  korrespondent  i  Chicago.  4.  Jag  har  mycket 
litet  kontanta  pengar  pa  mig,  men  jag  har  ett  kreditbrev 
pa  denna  bank  till  belopp  av  tio  tusen  kronor.  5.  Har  du 
tagit  ut^  alia  dina  pengar?    Nej,  jag  har  tilF  princip  att 

Sivedish  Grammar  16 


218  EXERCISE. 

alltid  lata  en  niindre  summa  innesta;  jag  rjiknar  pa  att 
kiinna  satta  in"  mera  senare.  6.  Har  du  reda  pa  att  ogynn- 
samma  rj^kten  rorande  denna  bank  under  de  senaste  veckor- 
na  varit  i  omlopp.  7.  Nu  vanta  vi  ej  langre®  pa  honom, 
utan^  ga  till  bords;  pa  honom  kan  man  da  aldrig  rakna. 
8.  Vad  ha  vi  till  middag  i  dag,  Anna?  Soppa  pa  hons. 
lammstek  m.  m.  (etc.)  Maken  till  middag  ha  vi  ej  haft 
pa^°  lange.  9.  Vem  och  vad  ar  den  dar  unge  mannen,  som 
vi  traffade  pa^^  bjudningen  i  gar?  Han  ar  en  son  till  dr 
Liden  och  ar  larare  till  yrket.  10.  Lagg  det  har  brevet  pa 
posten,  sa  ar  du  snail.  Du  har  glomt  att  satta  frimarke  pa. 
11.  Det  var  bra  att  du  gav  akt  darpa.  Adressaten  hade  nog 
blivit  ond  pa^^  mig,  om  ban  fatt^^  betala  losen. 

»357,  d.  *357,  h.  "357,  f.  *Fa  can  often  be  translated  by  get.  "851,  c. 
Generally  separated;  but  de  tittaf/na  pengarna,  de  insatta  pengama;  uttagare, 
insdttare.  '358,  c.  ^Translate,  any  longer.  'Adversative  conjunction ;  trans- 
lates  but  after   a   negative.     "357,   d.     "357,   a.     1=357,   a,    f.     "Fa,  have  to. 

B.  Conversation.  1.  Var  gardagens  jarnvagsolycka 
obetydlig  ?  2.  Varigenom  ursparade  taget  ?  3.  Vem  befann 
sig  pa  taget  vid  tillfallet  ?  4.  Omkom  ban  ocksa  ?  5.  Vad 
beloper  sig  er  vaxel  till  ?  6.  Varf or  behover  ni  ej  bara  myc- 
ket  kontanta  pengar  pa  er?  7.  Varfor  later  ni  en  mindre 
summa  innesta  i  banken?  8.  Varfor  vore  det  sakrare  att 
taga  ut  allt,  som  ni  satt  in  ?  9.  Varfor  har  ni  ej  gatt  till 
bords  forut?    10.  Vad  ar  er  tanke^  om  middagen? 

^Thought  is  here  equivalent  to  opinion. 

C.  What  do  you  think  of^  the  railroad  accident  which 
happened  yesterday  afternoon?  It  is  the  most  serious  for'^ 
many  years.  2.  My  brother,  who  is  on  a  trip  to  Narvik, 
was  among  the  passengers,  but  was  saved.  3.  How?  He 
had  gone  into^  the  dining  car  and  this  was  the  only  one 
of  the  cars  which  did  not  derail.  4.  The  accident  hap- 
pened because  of  carelessness  on*  the  part  of  the  employees. 
5.  Could  you  tell  me  where  Stockholms  Enskilda  Bank  is? 


VOCABULARY.  219 

I  have  a  di:aft  on  it  foi^  one  thousand  crowns.  6.  All  the 
banks  are  closed  at  three  o'clock  sharp®  and  you  have  only 
five  minutes  to  spare^.  7.  I  must  have  the  money,  for  I 
have  very  little  cash  about  me.  During*  all  my  travels  I 
have  never  been  so  short  of  money.  8.  I  believe  that  I  must 
turn  to^  you  and  ask  for  help.  You  can  count  on  me. 
9.  I  shall  gladly^"  advance  the  amount  of  the  draft  for  you ; 
to-morrow  they  wilP^  cash  it  in  the  bank.  10.  Now  we  have 
waited  long  enough  for^^  him  and  the  dinner  is  getting 
cold.  He  seems  to  have  a  habit^^  of  always  coming  late. 
11.  What  is  your  opinion  about  the  book?  According  to 
my  opinion  it  is  badly  written.  12.  How  is  he  as  to^* 
character?  I  observed  only  one  fault  in^^  him  while  he  was 
under  my  supervision:  too  great  a  love  of^^  money.  13. 
Is  your  coffee  sweet  enough?  Take  a  little  more  sugar. 
No,  thank^^  you.  I  have  not  used  sugar  with^*  my  coffee 
for  many  years.  14.  Mr.  Lind  will  surely  be  envious  of 
Carl  when  he  hears  that  they  have  elected  Carl  chairman^®. 

^356,  a;  tanka  om,  to  have  an  opinion  of;  tanka  pa,  to  think  of  (have  in 
mind),  357,  f,  2.  *357,  d.  '353,  a.  *A  betjdningens  sida;  a,  is  used  instead 
of  pa  in  a  few  set  expressions ;  the  place  is  never  literal.  "357,  h.  'Pa  slaget 
tre  or  precis  klockan  tre.  Td  er.  *359,  a.  'AH  vdnda  sig  till,  to  turn  to, 
address  oneself  to.  ^"Garna;  future  w-ith  skall  (the  future  here  denotes  a 
promise).  ^^Use  present;  we  have  here  a  temporal  adverb  which  obviates 
ambiguity.  «357,  f,  2.  "fTo  till  vana  att ;  358,  c.  "358,  d.  "352.  "358, 
d.  note.     "Nej,  jag  tackar.     "358,  e.     "358,  c. 

VOCABULARY. 

en  adressat'.  -er,  addressee  gdrdag,  yesterday 

all'varsajn,  -t,   serious  en  hjdlp,  help 

avundsjuk,  -t,  envious  hons    (collective),   chickens, 

ett  belopp,  — ,  amount  poultry 

en  hjudning,  invitation,  party  in'nestd   (generally  insep.  in 

ett  fel,  — ,  error,  mistake  this   sense),    to    remain 

en  felsignal,  -er,  wrong  signal  (money) 

forfdrlig.  -t.  terrible  in'losa,   Josa  in',   to   redeem; 

giva  akt'  (pa),  to  heed  to   cash 


!320  I'lfKl'OSlTlO.NS. 

in'sUtta,  satta  in'  (see  satta),  en  restaurangvagn,  -ar,  a  din- 
to  deposit  ing  car                                   ' 
kallna,  I,  to  become  cold  ^tt  rykte,  -n,  rumor;  reputation 
kontant',  — ,    (adj.).  cash  nilcna,  I,  to  count 
en  korrespondent',  -er,  corre-  en  sida,  -or,  side;  page;  part 

^,    ,      ,.,,  ,  ett  socker  (def.  sockret),  sugar 

ett   kreditbrev,   — ,    letter   of 

en  soppa,  -or,  soup 
credit 

,      ,  ett  siitt,  — ,  manner;  way 
en  lammstek,  -ar,  lamb  steak 

en  losen,  ransom;  postage  due  ^^^^rMr,  -t,   miraculous,   won- 
en  make,  -ar,  mate,  match  aeriul 

ett  nattsniilltctg,  -,  night  ex-  ^"  ^PPsiJ^t,  supervision 

gg  ur'spdra,  spdra  ur',  to  derail 

o'hetydlig,  -t,  insignificant  ut'stdUa  (generally  insep.  in 

ogynnsam,  -t,  unfavorable  t^is  sense),  lib,  to  draw 

ett  omlopp,  — ,  circulation  (^  draft) 

om'komma  (see  komma),  ut'taga,  taga  ut'  (see  taga) , 

perish  to  take  out 

en  princip',  -er,  principle  en  vdxel,  -lar,  draft 

en  reda   (-0  in  compounds),    vdrdsloshet,   carelessness 

order;  knowledge  ett  yrke,  -n,  trade 

Idioms  :  1.  att  ha  reda  pd  ndgot,  to  know  something. 

2.  att  gora   reda   for   ndgot,   to   give   an   account   of 
something. 

3.  till  fbljd  af,  in  consequence  of,  because  of. 


LESSON  XXXV. 
Uses  of  Prepositions  (Continued). 

360.     Vid,  at,  by,  on,  etc.: 

(a)  Vicinity:  slaget  vid  Breit^nfeld,  the  battle  of 
Breitenf eld ;  vid  bo7-det,  at  the  table;  vid  stranden, 
by  the  shore ;  vid  Stockholm,  in  the  neighborhood  of 
Stockholm ;  fdstad  vid  vdggen,  fastened  to  the  wall. 
Also  figuratively:  fdsta  sig  vid  ndgon,  fix  one's 
affections  on  somebody ;  vid  lampan,  by  the  lamp. 

(b)  Time:  vid  jul,  at  Christmas;  vid  f emtio  drs 


PREPOSITIONS.  22 1 

alder,  at  fifty  years  of  age;  vid  forsta  tillfdlle,  at 
the  first  opportunity;  vid  Idsandet  av  delta  brev, 
at  the  reading  of  this  letter. 

(c)  Condition:  vara  vid  god  hdlsa,  to  be  in  good 
health;  vid  stark  hetta,  at  a  great  heat;  vid  gott 
lynne,  in  good  humor;  han  dr  vid  armen,  he  is  in 
the  army. 

(d)  Contact:  taga  vid  handen,  to  take  by  the 
hand;  rora  vid  sdret,  touch  the  wound;  used  thus 
with  verbs  like  hdlla,  to  hold ;  gripa,  to  seize ;  leda,  to 
lead;  fora,  to  conduct;  draga,  to  pull, 

(e)  Penalty:  vid  livsstraff,  at  the  penalty  of 
death;  vid  tjugu  kronors  boter,  at  a  fine  of  twenty 
crowns. 

361.  At,  toward,  to: 

(a)  Direction=toward,  in  the  direction  of,  to.  In 
this  sense  at  does  not  necessarily  imply  attainment 
of  the  goal;  the  idea  of  direction  is  often  strength- 
ened by  till  placed  after  the  governed  word:  han 
har  gdtt  at  floden  till,  he  has  gone  toward  the  river; 
kasta  ett  ben  at  hunden,  throw  a  bone  to  the  dog; 
han  skot  stolen  at  sidan,  he  pushed  the  chair  to  the 
side;  han  sag  inte  ejis  at  mig,  he  didn't  even  look 
at  me   (in  my  direction), 

(b)  Often  before  an  indirect  object  (also  till)  : 
jag  gav  boken  at  Karl,  I  gave  the  book  to  Carl. 

(c)  Cause  (often  with  a  touch  of  ridicule  or  con- 
tempt) :  att  skratta  at,  to  laugh  at;  det  dr  sd  man 
kan  grata  at  det,  it  is  enough  to  make  one  weep. 

362.  A,  on,  is  used  in  a  few  common  phrases; 
as,  d  andra  handen.  on  the  other  hand ;  a  ena  sidan, 


222  PREPOSITIONS. 

on  the  one  side;  e?i  vaxel  a  f emtio  kronor,  a  draft 
for  fifty  crowns ;  d  hans  viignar,  in  his  behalf.  When 
the  expression  is  literal,  pa  must  be  used:  pa  ena 
sidan  gatan,  one  one  side  of  the  street. 

363.  over,  over,  above,  across,  beyond,  about, 
etc.: 

(a)  Place  (literal  and  figurative)  =over,  above, 
beyond:  ett  stort  moln  hanger  over  berget,  a  big 
cloud  hangs  over  the  mountain;  lararen  star  over 
sina  Idrjungar,  the  teacher  is  above  his  pupils ;  over 
havet,  beyond  the  sea;  han  dr  nog  over  trettio  dr, 
I  think  he  is  above  thirty.  Related  to  this  construc- 
tion is  over  after  such  verbs  as  regera,  to  rule ;  rdda, 
to  hold  sway  (primarily  to  advise)  ;  segra,  to  gain 
a  victory:  Karl  den  tolvte  regerade  over  ett  vid- 
strdckt  rike,  Charles  XII.  ruled  over  an  extensive 
realm;  han  segrade  over  sina  fiender,  he  was  vic- 
torious over  his  enemies. 

(b)  Direction=over,  across:  bi'on,  som  leder  over 
floden,  har  rasat,  the  bridge  which  leads  across  the 
river  has  collapsed.  Related  to  this  construction 
are  expressions  like  han  har  rest  till  New  York  over 
Chicago,  he  has  gone  to  New  York  by  way  of  Chi- 
cago. 

(c)  Excess:  denna  sak  kostar  over  en  krona,  this 
thing  costs  over  a  crown;  det  gar  over  mitt  for- 
stand,  that  surpasses  my  understanding. 

(d)  Duration:  han  blev  hos  oss  over  sommaren, 
he  remained  with  us  during  the  summer ;  over  natten, 
over  night. 

(e)  Cause,  topic=about,  of,  concerning,  on,  at: 

1.     With  verbs  like  skriva,  to  write;  tala,  to 


EXERCISE.  "  223 

speak ;  ytti'a  sig,  express  oneself :  han  skrev,  talade 
over  ett  svdrt  dmne,  he  wrote,  spoke  on  a  difficult 
topic;  han  yttrade  sig  over  dagens  frdgor,  he  ex- 
pressed himself  concerning  the  questions  of  the  day. 

NoTK.  Cm  used  with  similar  verbs  may  have  a  different  meaning:  atl  tala 
om  nagon,  to  speak  of  somebody  (make  a  mention  of),  skriva  om,  to  write 
about. 

2.  With  verbs  denoting  feeling:  sorja  over,  to 
mourn;  klaga  over,  to  complain  of;  glddja  sig  over, 
to  rejoice  at;  vredgas  over,  to  become  angry  at; 
fortvivla  over,  to  despair  of. 

3.  With  adjectives  denoting  feeling:  glad  over, 
glad  of;  ond  over,  angry  at;  ledsen  over,  sorry  on 
account  of. 

Note.  We  say  in  Swedish,  ond  pa  en  person,  angry  with  a  person,  but  ond 
iiver  en  sak,  angary  at  a  thing. 

Exercise  XXXV. 

A.  1.  Din  far  ar  visst  ej  vid  synnerligen  god  halsa  nu 
for  tiden.  Nej  det  ar  han  inte,  men  han  klagar  aldrig  over 
nagot,  och  kan  inte  formas^  att  tala  vid  en  lakare.  2.  Jag 
liar  sagt  at^  honom  mer  an  en  gang,  att  vid  hans  hoga  alder 
och  med  hans  svaga  kroppskonstitution  maste  han  varda 
sig  om  sin  halsa  battre.  3.  Ser  ni  anslaget  darborta  vid 
gangen?  Det  diir  under  tradet  med  orden:  "Det  ligger  i 
{is  to)  allmanhetens  intresse  att  skona  planteringarna  ?"  4. 
Ja !  Det  ar  ett  av  de  manga  satt,  pa  vilka  svensken  uttrycker 
det  amerikanska  "Keep  off  the  grass."  Han  faster^  stor 
vikt  vid  hovlighet.  5.  Under  min  vistelse  i  Sverige  har  jag 
ofta  forvanats  over  den  stora  hovlighet,  varmed*  svenskarna 
vid  alia  til  If  alien  bemota  varandra.  6.  Har  ni  varit  vid^ 
Skansen,  det  beromda  friluftsmuseet,  som  Hazelius  har 
upprattat?  Vi  svenskar  aro  med  ratta^  stolta  darover. 
7.  Nej,  annu  har  jag  ej  haft  tid,  men  vid^  forsta  tillfalle 


324  EXERCISE. 

skall  jag  ga  dit.  8.  Doktor  White,  en  av  mina  vanner  i 
London,  holl  for  ej  sa  lange  sedan  ett  liogst  intressant  fore- 
drag  over*  Skansen.  9.  Har  du  traffat  Karl?  Han  bar 
fragat  efter  dig.  Ja,  jag  traffade  lionom  nyss  ute  pa  va- 
gen ;  ban  gick  at  staden  tilP,  men  sade,  att  ban  sknlle  vara 
tillbaka  vid'^  niotiden.  10.  Har  Klara  blivit  fardig  med  sin 
laxa  an?  Nej,  bon  var  sa  trott,  stackars  liten^°,  att  bon 
somnade  over  boken. 

^Fd  and  forma  are  often  used  in  the  sense  of  make,  cause :  fa  ndgon  att  tro, 
to  make  somebody  believe ;  hon  kan  icke  formds,  he  can't  be  made  to ;  there 
is  more  compulsion  implied  in  fa.  ^361,  b;  also  till.  'Att  fasta  vikt  (av- 
seertdej  vid,  attach  importance  to ;  att  Idgga  vikt  pa,  lay  stress  on.  'Note  the 
prepositional  compound.  "Also  pa.  ^Med  rdtta,  rightly.  '360,  b.  '363.  e. 
•361,  a.     "Note  the  irregularities  of  liten,  neut.,   litet,  def.,  lille,  -a,  pi.  sma. 

B.  1.  Wbat  sbalP  we  do  to-nigbt?  I  am  going  to^  tbe 
tbeater;  will  you  go  witb  me?  2.  No,  I  tbink  I  sball  pass 
tbe  evening  over  my  books.  I  am  in^  sucb  a  bumor  to-nigbt 
tbat  I  could  not  laugb  at^  anything.  3.  I  know  tbat  you 
are  tired  of ^  tbe  tbeater ;  I  am  not  very  fond®  of  it  either ; 
you  know  bow  I  have  often  expressed  myself  concerning^ 
it.  4.  At  wbat  time  does  tbe  play  begin?  It  begins  as 
usual  at  eight  o'clock,  I  suppose*.  5.  Do  you  intend  to  re- 
main here  over  Christmas?  No,  I  am  going  home  for" 
Christmas.  6.  Where  is  your  home?  You  have  mentioned 
it  to^°  me  before,  but  I  have  forgotten  it.  I  live  in  Djurs- 
bolm,  close  by^^  Stockholm.  7.  Is  not  Djursholm  a  suburb 
of  Stockholm?  Yes,  and  it  has  become  famous  by  reason 
of  the  many  prominent  men  tbat  have  lived  there.  8.  Vic- 
tor Eydberg  died  there  not  so  very  long  ago  and  alP- 
Sweden  mourned  his  death.  9.  Although  I  have  traveled 
across  the  ocean  many  times,  tbe  rolling  and  pitching  of 
the  ship  always  makes^^  me  sick.  10.  How  quickly  we  glide 
over  tbe  water !  We  shalP*  soon  be  at  the  mouth  of  tbe 
Elbe.    11.  Were  you  at^°  the  spring  festival  at  Skansen  yes- 


VOCABULARY.  225 

terday  ?  No,  on  account  of  the  bad  weather  we  all  stayed  at 
home  in  the  afternoon.  We  are  so  sorry^''  that  we  could  not 
go  there^^.  12.  Were  you  not  out  at  all?  Yes,  during  the 
evening  the  weather  got  better  and  we  went  to  Berns  and 
listened  to^*  the  music.  13.  Your  eyes  look^^  very  sore. 
Yes,  I  am  quite  worried  about-"  them.  14.  Have  you  con- 
sulted an  eye  doctor  about  them?  Yes,  and  he  told  me  to 
otudy  only  by  daylight.  15.  Take  the  little  one-^  by  the 
hand,  he  may  be  frightened  at  the  sight  of  horses. 

^Future  with  shall.  Why?  2357^  b.  '360,  c.  ••361,  c.  ^3o7,  g.  *Fastad 
vid,  hdller  ej  vidare  pel,  etc.  '363,  e,  also  angdende.  *Use  an  adverb.  "358,  e, 
vid  Jul,  at  Christmas.  ^"350,  a.  "Invid  (niira  invid),  i  ndrheten,  av.  "What 
is  the  Swedish  equivalent  for  all  used  in  the  sense  of  whole f  "What  order? 
"Present.  Why  not  future  with  siallf  ^^360,  a.  ^*What  preposition?  In  this 
case  the  preposition  may  also  be  left  out.  "Here  and  there  used  in  the  sense 
of  hither  and  thither  are  hit  och  dit:  kom  hit,  not  kom  htir.  ^^57,  f.  1. 
»»Se  _|_  what?     »»363,  e,   2.     "Den -f  what  form  of  litenr 

VOCABULARY. 

en  allmanhet,  public,  gen-  klaga,  to   complain 

eralities  en     kroppsJconstitution,     -er, 
en  anbliek,  — ,  sight,  aspect  constitution   (of  body) 

ett  anslag,  — ,  design,  placard,  ledsen,  -et,  sorry 

notice  ett  lynne,  -n,  humor,  disposition 

bemo'ta,  Ila,  to  treat,  to  re-  en  mynning,  -ar,  mouth  (of  riv- 

ceive  er,  cannon) ;  nozzle 

ett   dagsljus,   daylight  om'tala,  tala  om',  to  mention 

framstdende    (invariable),  ond,  ont,   angry;    evil,  sore 

prominent  orolig,  -t,  uneasy,  worried 

fiista,    I   and    Ila,   to   fasten,  en  pjiis,  -er,  play  (theater) 

attach  en  plantering,  -ar,  vegetation 
en  forstad,  -stiider,  suburb  in  parks,  squares,  etc. 

forvdnas    (dep.  v.),   I,  to   be  en  rullning,  rolling 

astonished  rddfrdga  (insep.  v.),  I,  to  con- 
glida,  gled,  gledo,  glidit,  -en,  suit  (a  doctor) 

-et,   to    glide  Skansen,  an  open  air  museum 
glomma,  lib,  to  forget  in   Stockholm 

ett  hall,  — ,  hold;  direction  skona,  I,  to  spare,  to  treat  with 
(en)  hcivlighet,  -er,  politeness  care 


326  ADVERBS. 

en  stampiiing,  pitching   (of  ctt   tillfulle,   -n,   opportunity, 

ships)  occasion 

stanna,   I,   to  remain  uttrycka,  Ila,  to  express 

stolt,  — ,  proud  en  vikt,  -er,   weight;    impor- 
synnerligen,  especially  tance 

sorja,  lib,  to  mourn  en  vdrfest,  -er,  spring  festival 

till'hringa    (insep.     v.,     see  varda,  to  care  for 

bringa),  to  spend,  pass  en  alder,  -rar,  age 

(of  time)  en  ogonldkare,  — ,  eye  doctor 


LESSON  XXXVI. 
Adverbs. 

364.  Origin.  With  respect  to  their  origin  ad- 
verbs may  be  divided  into  three  groups: 

(1)  Primitive  words  and  compounds  of  such  as 
nu,  now;  fort,  fast;  blott,  only;  ja,  jo,  yes;  nej,  no; 
ej,  icke,  inte,  not;  ddr,  there;  har,  here;  ddrav,  of 
or  from  that;  hdrtill,  to  this,  hereto. 

(2)  The  neuter  singular  of  the  indefinite  form  of 
adjectives:  beskedligt  (from  beskedlig),  modestly; 
elakt  (from  elak),  wickedly;  klart  (from  klar), 
clearly;  hoppfullt  (from  hoppfull),  hopefully. 

(3)  Derivatives  formed  by  means  of  a  suffix:  bara 
(from  bar),  only;  mojligen  (from  mojlig),  possibly; 
ndgorlunda,  tolerably. 

365.  Derivative  Suffixes.  The  usual  adverbial 
suffixes  are: 

(a)  -a:  borta  (bort),  away;  hemma  (hem),  at 
home. 

Note  the  following  idiomatic  expressions:  att  vara  borta,  to  be  out;  att  vara 
hemma,  to  be  at  home. 


ADVERBS.  227 

(b)  -deles:  alldeles,  entirely,  quite;  framdeles, 
later  on;  sdrdeles,  especially. 

Note  the  following  idiomatic  expressions:  alldeles  riktigt,  quite  right;  jag 
mar  alldeles  ypperligt,  I  am  feeling  very  well ;  jag  tycker  ej  sd  sdrdeles  om 
honom,  I  can't  say  I  like  him  very  well ;  vi  fa  se  framdeles,  we  shall  see  later. 

(c)  -e  (in  some  adverbs  of  time  and  place)  : 
Idnge,  long;  framme,  in  front,  at  hand,  at  the  des- 
tination; inne,  in;  uppe,  up;  ute,  out,  etc. 

Note  the  following  idiomatic  expressions:  i  morgan  aro  vi  framme,  to-morrow 
we  shall  be  at  our  destination ;  har  dii  token  framme  t  Do  you  have  the  book 
at  hand  ?  /  dag  var  jag  uppe  tidigt,  to-day  I  was  up  early  ;  han  ar  ute  och 
gar,  dker,  he  is  taking  a  walk,  ride. 

(d)  -en  (from  adjectives  in  -lig)  :  dagligen,  daily ; 
mojligen,  possibly;  troUgen,  probably,  etc. 

(e)  -ledes:  sdledes,  thus;  dvenledes,  likewise. 

(f)  -lig en:  hitterligen,  bitterly;  storligen,  greatly; 
svdrligen,  hardly;  nyligen,  recently. 

(g)  -lunda  (an  old  genitive  of  the  Old  Swedish 
lund,  manner,  disposition)  :  annorlunda,  in  any  oth- 
er way ;  ingalunda,  by  no  means ;  ndgorlunda,  toler- 
ably. 

(h)  -s,  -es  (originally  a  genitive,  generally  in  com- 
pound adverbs,  see  365,  b,  e,  and  366,  note  2)  :  alls  in 
alls  icke  or  icke  alls,  not  at  all;  ndgonstans,  any- 
where; hoptals,  in  great  numbers;  tidtals,  at  times; 
tjogtals,  by  the  score ;  hundratals,  by  hundreds. 

(i)  -vis  (vis=English  wise)  :  lyckligtvis,  fortu- 
nately; mojligtvis,  possibly;  troligtvis,  probably; 
9tyckvis,  piecemeal ;  delvis,  partly. 

366.  Compound  adverbs  are  usually  composed  of 
prepositions  and  adverbs.  A  very  common  form  of 
adverb  compound  is  hdr,  here,  or  ddr,  there,  -fa 
preposition :  hdri,  in  this,  or  that ;  ddrtill,  to  this,  or 


228  ADVERBS. 

that;  hdi'i  bestdr  skillnaden,  the  difference  consists 
in  this;  ddrav  foljer,  att.  . .  .,  from  this  it  follows 
(or  results)  that. . . .,  etc. 

Note  1.  Har  and  diir  are  also  prefixed  to  many  adverbs  of  place  to  form 
extremely  common  compounds:  ddruppe,  up  there,  upstairs;  ddrborta,  over 
there ;  darhemma,  at  (my,  your,  his,  etc.)  home ;  ddrinne,  in  there,  inside,  etc. 

2.  Another  form  of  adverb  compound  sometimes  met  with  consists  of  a 
noun  generally  in  the  genitive  case  preceded  by  some  other  part  of  speech 
(see  also  365):  avsides,  apart;  halvvags,  half-way;  liggdags  (pronounced  daks). 
bedtime  (also  hur  dagsf  at  what  time?);  ndgonstades,  somewhere;  utomhus, 
outdoors. 

367.  Position  and  comparison  of  adverbs  have 
already  been  discussed. 

368.  The  functions  of  the  adverb  are  practically 
the  same  as  in  English. 

369.  The  following  examples  illustrate  the  idio- 
matic uses  of  certain  adverbs  and  adverbial  ex- 
pressions : 

Allt:  Karl  kunde  allt  vara  fiitigare,  Carl  could  cer- 
tainly be  more  diligent;  han  har  allt  bedragit  dig, 
I  am  sure  he  has  deceived  you. 

Alltfor,  for:  han  dr  alltfor  strdng,  he  is  much  too 
strict ;  du  kommer  for  sent,  you  come  too  late. 

Bara:  om  jag  bara  hade  tid!  If  I  only  had  time  I 
Kom  du  hit  bara!  Just  come  here  (threat)  ;  om  ni 
behover  ndgot,  sd  bara  kom  till  mig,  if  you  need  any- 
thing, just  come  to  me;  bara  ett  ogonblick,  just  a 
moment. 

Ens  (in  questions  and  after  negatives)  :  han  har 
icke  ens  skrivit  till  sin  mor,  he  hasn't  even  written 
to  his  mother. 

For  all  (for  ingen)  del:  kom  for  all  del,  innan  jag 
reser,  come  by  all  means  before  I  leave;  gor  det  for 
all  del  icke,  by  all  means,  don't  do  it;  jag  vill  for 


ADVERBS.  229 

ingen  del  sdra  hans  kdnslor,  I  would  by  no  means 
wound  his  feelings. 

En  gang:  han  har  varit  hdr  en  gang,  tror  jag,  he 
has  been  here 'once,  I  believe;  han  kommer  en  och 
annan  gang,  he  comes  now  and  then;  det  levde  en 
gang  en  konung,  once  upon  a  time  there  was  a  king ; 
han  skrive?'  inte  en  gang  till  mig,  he  does  not  even 
write  to  me. 

Gdrna:  jag  dter  gdrna  fisk,  I  am  fond  of  fish;  jag 
skulle  gdrna  gora  det,  I  should  gladly  do  it ;  jag  ville 
gdrna  ha  litet  mera  kott,  I  should  like  a  little  more 
meat ;  han  vill  nog  hellre  (comp.  of  gdrna)  vila  sig, 
I  think  he  would  prefer  to  rest. 

Heller:  min  bror  var  icke  trbtt,  och  icke  jag  heller, 
icke  heller  jag,  my  brother  was  not  tired,  and  I  was 
not  tired  either,  neither  was  I. 

Inte,  icke,  ej:  of  the  negative  adverbs  inte  is  used 
most  frequently  in  conversation.  Note  such  em- 
phatic expressions  as : 

alldeles  icke,  by  no  means;  inte  (icke)  alls,  alls 
(icke)  inte,  not  at  all;  i7ite  ett  grand,  inte  en  smul, 
not  a  bit ;  inte  det  ringaste,  inte  det  allra  minsta,  not 
in  the  least. 

Ju:  du  gor  det  ju?  You  are  sure  to  do  it?  Han  dr 
ju  min  far,  he  is  my  father,  you  know ;  det  kunde  jag 
ju  gora,  I  s appose  I  could  do  that. 

Nog:  han  kommer  nog,  he  will  very  likely  come; 
det  kan  nog  vara  sant,  it  may  possibly  be  true ;  nog 
horde  du  ha  lytt  din  far,  I  think  you  ought  to  have 
obeyed  your  father ;  jag  ville  nog  gdrna  gd  med,  men 
jag  har  inte  tid,  I  should  indeed  like  to  go  along,  but 
I  do  not  have  time. 


230  EXERCISE. 

I 

Till:  giv  mig  en  kopp  till,  dr  ni  snail,  give  me  an- 
other cup,  please;  hu7'u  manga  till?  How  many 
more? 

Vdl^ :  ni  dr  vdl  trdtt,  I  suppose  you  are  tired ;  det 
dr  vdl  sant,  that  is  no  doubt  true ;  lat  dr  han  vdl,  men 
ej  dum,  he  is  lazy,  to  oe  sure,  but  not  stupid. 

^Vdl  has  almost  the  same  meaning?  as  nog ;  both  denote  supposition;  nog  is 
more  subjective,  has  a  ring  of  concern  and  sincerity  which  val  lacks. 

Exercise  XXXVI. 

A.  1.  Det  hande  en  gang,  att  en  skomakares  hustru  blev 
allvarligt  sjuk.  2.  Hennes  man  hade  garna  kallat^  en 
skicklig  lakare,  men  han  hade  alls  ingenting,  varmed  han 
kunde  betala  en  sadan  och  befaun  sig  alltsa  i  stor  nod. 
3.  Han  kande  nog  en  framstaende  lakare,  som  bodde  mitt^ 
emot  (tvars  ofver  gatan)  i  ett  stort,  vackert  hus,  men  han 
visste  ocksa,  att  denne  skulle  begara  ganska  mycket  for  sin 
behandling.  4.  Han  overlade  saken  lange  for^  sig  sjalv  och 
kom  slutligen  pa  foljande  tanke.  5.  Han  gick  namligen 
till  lakaren  och  bad  honom  att*    besoka    hans^    hustni. 

6.  "Har  ni  da^  nagot  att  betala  mig  med  ?"  fragade  lakaren, 

7.  "Tyvarr  ej  sa  mycket",  svarade  skomakaren,  "men  jag 
ger  er  garna  allt  vad  jag  bar,  om  ni  bara  botar  min  hustrn." 

8.  "Under  femtio  kroner,  atager  jag  mig  icke  er  hustnis 
behandling,  och  ni  forstar  ju,  att  ni  maste  betala,  antingen 
jag  botar  henne  eller  icke."  9.  Skomakaren  betankte  sig 
icke  lange,  sa  mycket  pengar  hade  han  val  inte,  men  det 
gallde  ju  bans  sjuka  hustru  darhemma,  och  nagon  utvag 
funnes''  nog.  10.  "Kom  bara",  sade  han,  "och  jag  betalar, 
vad  ni  begar,  antingen  ni  botar  henne  eller  bringar  henne 
om  livet."  11.  Lakaren  atog  sig  den  sjuka  fruns  behandling, 
men  denna  blev  allt  varre  och  varre*  och  dog  slutligen. 
12.  Strax  darpa^  begarde  lakaren  sitt  honorar  av  skoma- 


EXERCISE,  231 

karen.  13.  "Botade  ni  min  hustru"  fragade  denne.  "Olyck- 
ligtvis  icke",  svarade  lakaren.  14.  "Ni  bragte  henne  val  ej 
om  livet",  fortsatte  skomakaren.  Lakaren  protesterade  na- 
turligtvis  daremot.  15.  "Ja,  da  kan  jag  alls  icke  inse,  att 
jag  ar  skyldig  er  nagot.  16.  Dessa  voro  ju  de  tva  villkor, 
pa  vilka  jag  lovade  att  betala  er." 

^Would  have  liked  to.  »Ex.  XXXII,  C,  Note  12.  '350,  h.  <May  be  omitted. 
Hionom  referring  to  liilcare  is  the  subject  of  the  infinitive,  hence  hans  and  not 
sin.  Translate :  But  do  you  have,  etc.  'Translate :  and  there  would  probably 
be,   etc.     *Note   allt   plus  repeated    comparative.     "366,   note   1. 

B.  Conversation.  1.  Vem  insjuknade,  skomakaren  eller 
hans  hustru?  2.  Varfor  hamtade  han  icke  en  lakare  med 
detsamma.  3.  Fanns  det  nagon  skicklig  lakare  i  narheten  ? 
4.  Varfor  tvekade  skomakaren  att  hamta  honom?  5.  Vil- 
ken  bon  riktade  skomakaren  till  lakaren  ?  6.  Vad  ville  den- 
ne  forst  veta,  innan  han  atog  sig  den  sjuka  fruns  behand- 
ling?  7.  Var  denna  lakare  barmhartig?  8.  Vad  lovade  sko- 
makaren att  betala?  9.  Pa  vilka  villkor  skulle  han  betala 
detta  honorar?  10.  Lyckades  lakaren  att  bota  den  sjuka? 
11.  Var  skomakaren  enligt  sin  asikt  skyldig  lakaren  nagot? 

C.  1.  She  has  fallen  seriously  ill,  and  her  illness  wilP 
probably  last  long.  2.  I  should  have  liked-  to  send  for  a 
prominent  physician,  if  I  had  only  had  money.  3.  The  doc- 
tor who  lives  right  across  the  street  is  skillful,  but  he  charg- 
es at  least  ten  crowns  a  visit^,  I  suppose*.  If  he  had  been 
sick  instead  of  his  wife,  he  would  probably*  not  have  hesi- 
tated at  all  to  summon  the  expensive  doctor.  5,  When  the 
health  of  my  wife  is  concerned,  no  expense,  of  course^,  can 
be  too  great.  6.  You  know,  do  you  not^,  that  you  will  never 
get  your  fee  from  him.  He  is  honest,  to  be  sure^,  but  al- 
together too  poor.  7.  I  heard  that  the  doctor  soon  after 
sent  the  shoemaker  a  bill  for  his^  treatment,  8.  I  have 
not  seen  her  since  she  became  better.     Neither  have  I. 


232  VOCABULARY. 

9.  I  should  like"  to  see  Mr.  Edgren;  is  he  at  liome?  No,  lio 
is  out  for  the  moment.    He  is  out  riding^  with  Dr.  Forsell. 

10.  Do  you  happen  to  have  those  books  at  hand®?  No,  I  have 
them  somewhere;   just  wait   and   I   shall   look   for  them. 

11.  Please  don't  take  the  trouble  just  now;  you  will,  no 
doubf,  find  them  later  on.  12.  How  are  you  now^°?  I  am 
feeling  somewhat  better;  until  now^^  the  doctor  has  visited 
me  daily.  13.  What  was  the  cause?  Too  much  indoor^^ 
work,  I  think^^. 

'Not  future  with  skall.  Why?  ^A,  1,  above.  'A,  3,  above.  Use  the  definite 
postpositive  article.  Attention  has  been  called  before  to  this  distributive 
use  of  the  definite  article  after  expressions  of  price ;  often  per  is  used,  XXXIII, 
A,  Note  5.  In  expressions  of  time  i  and  om  are  used :  han  fortjiinar  fyrtio 
kronor  i  veckan,  2,000  kronor  om  dret,  he  makes  forty  crowns  a  week,  2,000 
crowns  a  year ;  en  gang  i  manaden,  onoe  a  month.  '•Translate  by  nog,  which 
follows  the  simple  verb  or  the  auxiliary.  ^Translate  by  ju  which  follows  verb  ; 
invert.  ^Translate  by  an  adverb.  ''Hans  or  sinT  *365,  c.  Note.  '349.  b. 
'•There  are  three  common  ways  of  asking  for  the  health  of  a  person  in  Swe- 
dish ;  which  are  they  ?  'Tt'ZZa  nu,  tills  for  ndrvarande.  '-Certain  adverbs  may 
be  used  to  modify  nouns  in  Swedish,  when  so  used  they  follow  the  noun : 
arbeie  inomhus,  indoor  work;  nojen  utomhus,  outdoor  amusements;  resan  dit, 
tlie  trip  thither,  etc.     "Invert. 

VOCABULARY. 

allvarligt  (adv.),  seriously  framstdende,   prominent 

barmhar'tig,   -t,    charitable,  foljande,   following 

merciful  ett  honorar',  fee 

befinna  sig   (refl.  v.,  see  fin-  en  hiilsa,  health 

na),  to  be,  be  situated;  feel  handelsevis    (adv.),   by   chance 

begara,  lib,  to  demand,  charge  inomhus   (adv.),  indoors 

en  behandling,  -ar,  treatment  tn'se    (insep.   v.,   see  se),   to 
betdnka  sig  (refl.  v.),  Ila,  to  see,  realize 

reflect  i  stdllet  for,  instead  of 

beta,  I,  to  cure  leta,  I,  to  search  for 

dagligen   (adv.),  daily  ndmligen  (adv.),  namely,  that 
fort'sdtta  (insep.  v.,  see  sat-  is  to  say 

ta),  to  continue  olyckligtvis,   unfortunately 

framme    (adv.),  in   front,  at  proteste'ra,  I,  to  protest 

hand  rikta,  I,  to  aim,  direct 


CONJUNCTIONS.  233 

en  sjukdom,  -ar,  sickness  d'taga  sig   (refl.  v.),  to  under- 

slutligen,  at  last,  finally  take 

tveka,  I,  to  hesitate  dtminstone,  at  least 

tvars    (adv.,   prep),  across  ett  ogonblick,  — ,  moment 

en  utgift,  -er,  expense  6'verldgga  (insep.  v.,  see  liig- 

en  utviig,  -ar,  expedient  go),  to  deliberate 

vara,  I,  to  last;   endure 

Idioms:  1.  att  brmga  om  livet,  to  deprive  of  life,  to  kill. 

2.  att  komma  pd  en  tanke,  to  hit  upon  an  idea. 

3.  Har  du  hdndelsevis  sett  min  hokf    Do  you  happen 
to  have  seen  my  book? 

4.  langre  from  (framdeles),  later  on. 

5.  for  ogonblicket,  for  the  moment. 


LESSON  XXXVII. 
Conjunctions. 

370.  There  are  two  general  classes  of  conjunc- 
tions: (1)  the  coordinating  conjunctions,  which  are 
used  to  connect  clauses,  phrases,  and  words  of  equal 
rank;  (2)  the  subordinating  conjunctions,  which 
join  a  dependent  clause  to  some  other  part  of  the 
sentence. 

I.      COORDINATING   CONJUNCTIONS. 

371.  The  coordinating  conjunctions  are  divided 
into  two  groups:  (a)  general  connectives  and  (b) 
adverbial  conjunctions. 

(a)  General  connectives. 

The  most  important  of  these  are : 

antingen . . .  eller,  either ...  or 

hade . .  .  och,  both .  . .  and 

ej  heller,  nor,  neither 

eller,  or 

Swedish  Grammar  18 


334  CONJUNCTIONS. 

icke  blott. .  .utan  dven(ocksa),  not  only. .  .but  also 

men,  but 

och,  and 

samt,  and 

sdvdl. .  .som,  as  well  as 

ty,  for 

utan,  but  (adversative) 

varken . . .  eller,  neither . . .  nor 

372.  Remarks  on  the  general  connectives. 
Those  of  the  general  connectives  which  connect 
clauses  require  the  normal  order  (subject  before 
predicate)  with  the  exception  of  antingen. . .  .eller, 
varken. ..  .eller  and  ej  heller,  which  require  the 
inverted  order  (predicate  before  subject)  when 
they  connect  clauses:  han  reste  genast,  men  jag 
stannade,  he  left  immediately,  but  I  stayed ;  antingen 
vet  han  ingenting,  eller  vdgar  han  ingenting  saga, 
either  he  knows  nothing,  -or  he  dares  not  say  any- 
thing. 

Note.  Icke  blott.  .  .utan  dfven  may  take  either  word  order.  The  normal  is 
more  common,  in  which  case  icke  blott  and  dven  are  placed  within  the  sentence ; 
if  they  stand  at  the  be^'nning  the  inverted  order  must  be  used :  han  icke  blott 
gav  mig  yoda  rad,  utan  han  Idnade  mig  aven  penningar,  he  not  only  gave  me 
good  advice  but  he  also  lent  me  money ;  icke  blott  gav  han  mig  goda  rdd, 
utan  aven  Idnade  han,  etc.,  (dven  rarely  stands  at  the  beginning).  In  dependent 
clauses  the  Mormal  order  is  used  with  antingen.  .  .eller:  jag  vet  inte  antingen 
han  kommer  eller  ej. 

373.  The  following  peculiarities  in  usage  should 
be  noted : 

(1)  ej  heller  translates  nor  when  it  it  not  correla- 
tive: han  kommer  icke,  ej  heller  jag,  he  does  not 
come,  nor  do  I. 

(2)  eller  requires  the  inverted  order  when  used 
with  antingen  and  varken  but  not  as  a  rule  when 
used  alone. 


CONJUNCTIONS.  235 

(3)  samt  does  not  connect  clauses  and  is  not  used 
in  conversational  language. 

(4)  fd7'  often  takes  the  place  of  ty  in  conversa- 
tion. 

(5)  utan  is  used  only  after  a  negative  and  intro- 
duces a  contrast  which  excludes  or  contradicts  what 
goes  before :  detta  dr  icke  ett  skdl,  utan  en  forevdnd- 
ning,  this  is  not  a  reason,  but  a  pretext. 

374.  (h)  Adverbial  conjunctions.  A  large  num- 
ber of  conjunctions  are  adverbs  in  form,  but  are 
used  as  conjunctions  to  connect  coordinate  clauses. 
The  most  important  of  these  are  the  following : 

alltsd,  consequently 

annars,  otherwise 

dels ....  dels,  partly . .  partly 

dock,  yet,  still 

ddrfor,  therefore 

emellertid,  yet,  still 

icke  desto  mindre,  nevertheless 

likvdl,  yet,  still 

ock,  also 

ocksd,  also 

sd,  so 

sdledes,  thus 

sdlunda,  thus 

an. . . .  dn,  nov^ ....  now 

dndock,  yet,  still 

dven,  also,  even 

REMARKS  ON  THE  ADVERBIAL  CONJUNCTIONS. 

375.  The  adverbial  conjunctions  require  the  in- 
verted order:  klockan  dr  dtta,  sdledes  bor  han  vara 


236  EXERCISE. 

hdr  snart,  it  is  eight  o'clock,  consequently  he  ought 
to  be  here  soon. 

376.    Note  the  following  peculiarities  in  usage : 

(1)  Do  not  confuse  the  Swedish  alltsd  with  the 
English  also;  the  equivalents  of  also  are  ock,  ocksd, 
and  dven.  Ocksd  is  more  common  than  ock;  when 
used  as  mere  adverbs  ock  and  ocksd  like  English 
too  often  follow  the  word  they  modify,  while  dven 
precedes:  man  har  ej  hort  av  honom  pd  manga  dr, 
alltsd  dr  han  troligen  ddd,  he  has  not  been  heard  of 
for  many  years,  consequently  he  is  probably  dead; 
jag  ocksd  har  varit  i  Paris,  I,  too,  have  been  in 
Paris. 

(2)  Dock,  emellertid,  likvdl,  and  dndock  are  often 
placed  after  the  subject  and  the  predicate:  angrep- 
pet  var  hdftigt,  dock  (likvdl,  etc.)  blev  det  tillba- 
kaslaget  (or  det  blev  dock,  etc.),  the  attack  was  fu- 
rious, yet  it  was  repulsed.  The  adverbial  conjunc- 
tions must  be  placed  after  the  subject  and  the  pred- 
icate when  a  dependent  clause  precedes:  ehuru  han 
var  ddr,  fick  jag  dock  ej  tillfdlle  att  tala  vid  honom, 
although  he  was  there  I  had  no  opportunity  to  speak 
to  him. 

(3)  An. .  .dn  is  equivalent  to  the  English  now. . . 
now  or  at  times. . .  .at  times  (or  alternately. . . . )  : 
dn  grdt  hon,  dn  skrattade  hon,  she  laughed  and  cried 
alternately.  Quite  common  in  the  same  sense  is 
omsom ....  omsom. 

Exercise  XXXVII. 

A.  1.  Det  ligger  ett  paket  smutsiga  starksaker  anting- 
en  i  matsalen  eller  i  salongeii.     Var  snail  och  tag  dem 


EXERCISE.  237 

till  strykinrattningen,  Karl.  2.  Sag  at  dem,  att  bade 
kragar  och  skjortor  maste  vara  vita  och  vaP  strukna,  ty 
de  aro  mycket  vardslosa.  3.  Jag  later^  icke  liamta  tvat- 
ten  sjalv,  utan^  de  maste  skicka  hem  den  fore  klockan 
sex  pa  onsdag  kvall.  4.  Herr  Sjostedt  bad  mig  halsa  och 
saga,  att  aiitingen*  kommer  han  pa  slaget  fem,  eller  kom- 
mer  han  icke  forran  i  morgon.  5.  Klockan  fem?  Det 
ar  bara  lialv  tva  nu;  da  hinner  jag  icke  blott  att  ga  till 
barberaren,  utan  ocksa  att  utratta  ett  par  arenden.  6.  Har 
iir  en  frisersalong;  ehuru  den  icke  ser  fin  ut,  far  jag  lik- 
viil  lov^  att  ga  in,  ty  jag  bar  brattom.  7.  Jag  onskar 
att  bli  bade  klippt  och  rakad,  men  jag  bar  bratt,  alltsa 
far  ni  vara  snail  och  skynda  er.  8.  Vad  felas  den  bar 
rocken?  Dels^  saknas  ett  par  knappar,  dels^  har  den 
gatt  upp  i  sommarna  bar  och  dar.  9.  Ehuru  det  ar  myc- 
ket att  laga  pa  den,  s§,  skall  jag  emellertid^  forsbka  att 
fa  den  fardig  till  i  kvall.  10.  Emedan  ni  lagat  rocken  sa 
vaP,  skall  jag  ocksa  bestalla  en  ny  kostym  hos  er.  Var  dar- 
for  sa  god  och  tag  matt  pa  {of)  mig.  11.  Jag  anvander  en- 
dast  de  biista  varor  och  sysselsatter  endast  de  skickligaste 
arbetare,  salunda  kan  jag  garantera  bade  tyget  och  snit- 
tet. 

^Bra  and  vdl  would  here  be  interchangeable,  val  denoting  a.  higher  degree 
of  excellence.  Bra  often  has  reference  to  the  essential  excellence,  val,  to  the 
outward:  skriva  vdl  and  skriva  bra  are  not  the  same,  the  former  refers  to  form, 
the  latter  to  contents.  Bra  colloquially  maj'  have  the  sense  of  very  (much): 
bra  mycket,  arbeta  bra,  etc.  ^Note  use  of  later.  '373,  5.  *372.  'Fd  lov, 
must.     «375.     '376,   2. 

B.  Conversation.  1.  Var  ligger  paketet  med  starksa- 
kerna?  2.  Vart  vill  ni,  att  Karl  skall  bara  det?  3.  Hu- 
ru  vill  ni  ha  era  kragar  och  skjortor?  4.  Nar  maste 
tvalten  vara  fardig?  5.  Varfor?  6.  Vad  later  herr  Sjo- 
stedt balsa  ?  7.  Vad  iimnar  ni  gora  under  tiden  ?  8.  Var- 
for gar  ni  in  i  en  frisersalong,  som  ej  ser  fin  ut?  9.  Vad 
vill  ni  ha  gjort  diir?     10.  Vad  fattas  er  rock? 


238  VOCABULARY 

C.  1.  A  boy  is  here  from  the  laundry  and  asks  for^ 
your  washing,  but  we  can't  find  it,  therefore  I  came  in 
to  ask  you.  2.  It  is  either  on  the  little  table  in  the  dining 
room  or  in  the  hall.  Just-  wait  a  little,  I  shall  come 
down  myself.  3.  It  is  a  very  poor  laundry,  they  can 
neither  wash  nor  iron.  Carl  is  not  satisfied  with  their 
work  either^.  4.  You  must  not  wait  for*  me  to  call  for  it 
this  time,  but  send  it  home  on  Friday^^  without  fail. 
5.  Neither  the  collars  nor  the  cuffs  were  well  ironed  last 
time.  6.  Both  the  washing  and  the  ironing  must  be  bet- 
ter next^  time,  or"  I  shall  send  my  washing  to  another 
laundry.  7.  I  don't  know  his  address ;  consequently  I  can't 
write  to  him.  8.  ]\Iy  friend  writes  that  he  will  either  come 
at  five  o'clock  sharp"  or  not  at  all.  9.  Although  he  will  be 
here  in  an  hour,  yet  I  shall  go  to  the  barber  shop.  10.  I 
need  not  only  a  hair  cut^,  but  also  a  shave^.  11. 1  have  only 
three  quarters®  of  an  hour  to  spare^",  hence  you  must  hurry. 
12.  The  coat  was  almost  worn  out;  nevertheless  he  sent  it 
to  the  tailor  to  be  mended.  13.  Although  the  coat  was  al- 
most worn  out,  nevertheless^^  he  sent  it,  etc. 

'349,  b.  *369,  hara.  '369,  heller ;  place  negative  -|-  adverb  after  the  subject. 
*357,  £,  1,  2.  (Translate  by  clause.)  ^Xdsta;  note  definite  form  of  adjective, 
noun  is  indefinite.  What  two  words  translate  timet  *When  or  equals  other- 
wise,  it  is  translated  by  annars.  ''Precis  klockan  fern  or  pa  slaget  fern.  *Idioni 
3.     ^Tre  kvarts  timme.     '"Use  a  prepositional  phrase.     "376,  2.     '"See  342. 

VOCABULARY. 

en  arhetare,  — ,  workingman  fore   (prep.),  before 

an'vdnda,   lib    (impf.   anvan-  forrdn'   (conj.),  before 

de),  to  use  garante'ra,  I,  to  guarantee 

en  barberare,  — ,  barber  gd  upp'  (sep.),  to  go  up;  rise 
bestdl'la,  lib,  to  order  (sun) ;    open 

ehuru,  although  hdmta,  I,  to  fetch 

felas  (dep.,  intr.),  I,  to  lack,  hinna,  Tiann,  hunno,  hunnit, 

to  ail  -en,  -et,  to  have  time;  at- 

enfriser'salong, -er,  {common-  tain,  get   (to) 

ly,  rakstuga),  barber  shop 


CONJUNCTIONS.  239 

en  kostym',  -er,  suit,  costume    stryka,    striik,    strUko,    stru- 
en  krage,  -ar,  collar  kit,  -en,  -et,  to  iron;  erase, 

laga,  I,  to  mend;  to  occasion  rub 

en  manschett' ,  -er,  cuff  en  strykinrdttning ,  -ar,  laundry 

ett  matt,  — ,  measure  {en) strykning ,   ironing 

ned  (adv.),  down  starksaker     (pi.),     laundry 

nojd,  nojt,  satisfied  (linen) 

en  onsdag,  -ar,  Wednesday  sysselsdtta  (see  sdtta) ,  to  oc- 

ett  paket',  -er,  parcel  cupy;  to  employ 

sakna,  I,  to  miss  en  sdm,  sommar,  seam 

en  salong',  -er,  drawing  room; en  tambur',  -er,  vestibule,  hall 
auditorium  (in  a  theater)  ett  tyg,  -er,  cloth 

utsUten,  -et,  worn  out 
en  skjorta,  -or,  shirt  vara,  -or,  article;  merchandise 

smutsig,  -t,  dirty,  soiled  vdrdslos,  -t,  careless 

ett  snitt,  — ,  cut  ett  drende,  -n,  errand 

Idioms:  1.  Jag  hinner  ej  att  gora  det,  I  shall  not  have  time 
to  do  it. 

2.  Han  Jiann  dit  i  tid,  he  reached  there  in  time. 

3.  Jag  onskar  att  bli  klippt,  rakad,  I  wish  to  have  a 
hair  cut,  a  shave. 

4.  Rocken  har  gdtt  upp  i  sommen,  the  coat  has  ripped 
in  the  seam. 

5.  Dorren  har  gdtt  upp,  the  door  has  opened. 

6.  Laga,    att    ni    dr    har  dd,   see  to   it  that  you   are 
here  then. 

LESSON  XXXVIII. 

Conjunctions  (Continued). 

II.      SUBORDINATING  CONJUNTIONS. 

377.    The  most  important  of  these  are : 

(a)  Comparative:  ju. . .  .desto  (dess),  the.... 
the ;  som,  as ;  sdsom,  as,  such  as ;  an,  than. 

(b)  Concessive:  ehuru,  fast,  fastdn,  oaktat, 
though,  although;  om  ock,  om  an,  dven  om,  even  if, 
even. 


240  CONJUNCTIONS. 

(c)  Causal :  da,  efter,  eftersom,  since,  as ;  emedan, 
because ;  endr,  since ;  som,  as ;  ddrfor  att,  because. 

(d)  Conditional:  bara,  if  only;  if  all,  in  case,  if; 
om,  if,  whether, 

(e)  Consecutive  (result)  :  sd. . .  .att,  so.  . .  .that; 
sd  att,  so  that. 

(f)  Final:  for  att,  pa  det  att,  in  order  that;  sd 
att,  so  that,  in  order  that;  att,  that. 

(g)  Temporal:  da,  when;  forrdn,  innan,  before; 
medan,  while;  ndr,  when;  sedan,  after;  sd  ofta,  as 
often  as ;  sd  snart,  as  soon  as ;  tills,  until. 

(h)  The  general  subordinating  att,  that. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  SUBORDINATING  CONJUNCTIONS. 

378.  After  a  subordinating  conjunction  many 
adverbs  (negative  adverbs,  indefinite  temporal  ad- 
verbs and  certain  adverbs  expressing  supposition, 
etc.)  which  in  an  independent  clause  follow  the  sim- 
ple predicate  or  auxiliary  must  be  placed  before  the 
predicate:  eftersom  han  icke  kommer,  sd  fd  vi 
borja  dta  utan  honom,  since  he  does  not  come,  we 
shall  have  to  begin  to  eat  without  him;  det  dr  osd- 
kert,  om  vi  ndgonsin  fd  se  honom,  it  is  doubtful,  if 
we  ever  shall  see  him;  han  sade,  att  ha7i  mojligen 
skulle  kunna  Idna  mig  ett  par  hundra,  he  said  that 
he  possibly  might  be  able  to  lend  me  a  couple  of  hun- 
dred. 

NOTK.  If  the  independent  clause  follows,  its  verb  precedes  the  subject  and 
is  often  introduced  by  sd,  so:  ehuru  solen  fycktes  skina  ganska  varmt  i  dag 
pa  jormiddagen,  sd  var  luften  rdtt  sval,  although  the  sun  seemed  to  shine 
quite  warm,  the  air  was  quite  cool. 

379.  In  a  subordinate  clause  the  auxiliary  hava 
is  very  often  omitted:  om  han  inte  slosat  hort  sina 
pengar,  sd  hade  han  varit  vdlbdrgad  nu,  if  he  had 


CONJUNCTIONS.  241 

not  squandered  his  money,  he  would  have  been  in 
easy  circumstances  now. 

380.  The  following  will  serve  to  illustrate  the 
uses  of  the  subordinating  conjunctions: 

(1)  Ju  requires  the  normal  order  of  words,  its 
correlative  desto  (dess)  the  inverted  order:  ju  forr 
du  goT  det,  desto  Idttare  gar-  det,  the  sooner  you 
do  it,  the  easier  it  will  be  (go). 

(2)  Som  may  have  both  a  comparative  and  a  caus- 
al value  (eftersom  is  more  common  in  the  sense  of 
since)  :  han  gjorde  precis  som  jag,  he  did  exactly 
as  I;  Ilka  rik  som  du,  as  rich  as  you  (sdsom  is  less 
common;  it  is  more  emphatic  than  som:  sdsom  det 
nu  regnar,  har  det  icke  regnat  forr  i  dr,  as  it  now 
rains  it  has  not  rained  before  this  year) ;  som  vddret 
var  tryckande,  holl  jag  mig  inne,  as  the  weather  was 
oppressive,  I  stayed  indoors. 

(3)  Om  ock,  om  an  are  often  separated  if  they 
stand  at  the  beginning  of  a  clause,  ock  and  an  being 
placed  immediately  after  the  subject:  om  han  an 
vore  hdr,  sd  kunde  vi  inte  gora  ndgot,  even  if  he 
were  here,  we  could  not  do  anything. 

(4)  Dd  and  ndr  are  temporal  conjunctions,  but 
both  may,  like  ivhen  in  English,  have  a  causal  value 
{dd  is  more  common  in  the  sense  of  as)  ;  when  as 
interrogative=nar. 

(5)  Emedan  and  endr  are  used  less  in  the  spoken 
than  in  the  written  language. 

(6)  Bara=^om  hara  (often  om. .  .bara),  if  only: 
om  det  bara  inte  regnar,  sd  skola  vi  gd,  if  only  it 
does  not  rain,  we  shall  go. 


243  EXERCISE. 

(7)  Om  is  also  equivalent  to  ivhether  in  an  indi- 
rect question :  jag  vet  ej,  om  jag  shall  stanna  eller 
gd,  I  do  not  know  whether  I  shall  stay  or  not.  Som 
om,  as  if,  as  though:  det  ser  2it,  som  om  det  skulle 
regna,  it  looks  as  though  it  would  rain, 

(8)  Pa  det  att  is  less  common  than  the  other  final 
conjunctions ;  sd  att  always  denotes  result  when  used 
with  the  indicative :  han  skadade  sig,  sd  att  han  icke 
kunde  arbeta,  he  injured  himself  so  that  he  could 
not  work.  For  att  with  the  infinitive  is  used  when 
the  subject  in  the  purpose  clause  would  be  the  same 
as  in  the  principal  one. 

(9)  Sd  ofta,  as  often  as,  and  sd  snart  (sd  fort), 
as  soon  as,  may  take  som  but  generally  do  not:  sd 
snart  han  kommer,  sand  honom  hit,  as  soon  as  he 
comes  send  him  here. 

Observe :  sa  ofta  som  heist,  as  often  as  you  please ;  sd  snart  som  heist,  as 
soon  as  you  please ;  ndr  som  heist,  whenever  you  please. 

(10)  Att  is  almost  identical  in  its  usage  with  the 
substantive  conjunction  that.  Like  its  English 
equivalent  it  is  often  omitted:  jag  formodar  han 
kommer  snart,  I  suppose  he  will  soon  be  here;  jag 
tror  icke  jag  kan,  I  don't  believe  I  am  able. 

Note  1.  Subordinate  noun  clauses  introduced  by  att  may  be  immediately 
preceded  by  a  preposition:  han  har  ofveitygat  viig  om  alt  han  menar  upprik- 
tigt,  he  has  convinced  me  that  his  intentions  are  sincere ;  endast  genom  att  dti 
kom  mig  till  hjdlp,  blev  jag  raddad,  only  by  your  coming  to  my  assistance  I 
was  saved. 

2.  Prepositions  may  also  govern  other  clauses :  jag  tanker  pa  hur  jag  shall 
fa  bud  till  min,  bror,  I  am  thinking  of  how  I  shall  get  a  message  to  my  broth- 
er ijag  gldder  mig  over  vad  som  har  hdnt,  I  rejoice  over  what  has  happened. 

Exercise  XXXVIII. 

A.  En  viss  person  erholl  eu  gang  ett  tungt  brev  f ran  en 
van.  Enar  brevet  ej  var  frankerat,  maste  lian  betala  ganska 


^      EXERCISE.  243 

myeket  i  losen.  Da  han  oppnade  det,  fann  lian  ingenting 
annat  an  orden:  "Jag  mar  alldeles  forti-affligt."  Mottaga- 
ren  skrattade  och  avsande  samma  dag^  ett  stort  paket  till 
vannen,  avenledes  utan  att  frankera  det.  Adressaten  beta- 
lade  utan  att  knota  den  hoga  losen  i  hoppet,  att  han  skulle 
bli  rikligt  ersatt  genom  paketets  innehall,  sa  myeket  mer 
som  dess  tyngd  lat  ana  nagot  vardefullt.  Till  sin  over- 
raskning  fann  han  dock  intet  annat  dari  an  en  stor  sten 
med  orden:  "Vid  underrattelsen  att  du  madde  bra,  foil 
narslutna^  sten  fran  mitt  hjarta." 

^Note  use  of  indefinite  form  with  samma.  ^Narslutna  is  definite  and  the  noun 
indefinite,  so  innelyckta,  inclosed. 

B.  Conversation.  1.  Yad  maste  man  betala,  nar  ett 
brev  ar  ofullstandigt  eller  icke  alls  frankerat?  2.  Vad  fann 
personen  i  fraga,  nar  han  oppnade  brevet?  Vad  gjorde  han 
for  att  hamnas  pa  vannen  ?  4.  Varfor  betalade  vannen  den 
hoga  losen  utan  att  knota  ?  5.  Vad  var  det  i  all  synnerhet, 
som  kom  honom  att  tro,  att  paketet  inneholl  nagot  varde- 
fullt? 6.  Hur  kande  han  sig  vid  upptackten  av  paketets 
innehall?    7.  Vad  hade  avsandaren  bifogat? 

C.  Complete  the  following  according  to  the  anecdote 
above  and  the  indications  given;  be  especially  careful  to 
get  the  word  order  correct.  1.  Brevet  var  ej  frankerat, 
alltsa^  . . .  {must  pay,  etc.).  2.  Da  han  oppnade  brevet,  .  .  . 
(he  found,  etc.).  3.  Nar  en  viss  person  var  pa  resa,  .  .  . 
(he  received^  etc.).  4.  Eftersom  han  insag,  att  bans  van  ve- 
lat  spela  honom  ett  spratt,  ...  (he  decided,  etc).  5.  Han 
onskade  att  hamnas  pa  sin  van,  darfor^  ...  (he  sent,  etc.). 
6.  Emedan  han  sag,  att  en  van  hade  sant  det  tunga  brevet, 
...  (he  paid,  etc.).  7.  Ehuru  han  sag,  att  avsandaren  ej 
var  en  av  bans  vanner,  ...  andock  ...  (he  paid,  etc.). 
8.  Han  trodde,  att  paketet  inneholl  nagot  vardefullt,  sa 
myeket  mer  som.  . .  (it  was  not  light).    9.  Ehuru  han  van- 


244  EXERCISE. 

tat  nagot  annat,  .  . .  icke  desto  mindre^  ...  {he  did  not  he- 
come  astonished).  10.  An^  ...  (he  played)  en  van  ett 
spratt,  an  en  annan.  11.  Ju  tyngre  det  ar,  desto*  vardeful- 
lare  . . .  (one  believes  the  contents  to  he).  12.  Den  fattige 
mannen  ber  om  brod,  ty°  ...  {he  is  hungry).  13.  Han 
sade,  att  ...  {he  knew  nothing).  14.  Ju  forr  ...  {he 
comes),  desto*  fortare...  {we  shall  he  ready).  15.  Vara 
kusiner  komma  icke  att  besoka  oss  i  borjan  pa  juli  .  . . 
{hut)  i  slutet  av  September  i  stallet.  16,  Jag  tordes  ej 
vanda  mig  till  honom,  enar  ...  (/  had  never  seen  him 
hefore). 

>375.     »378,  note.     »376,  2.     *379,  7.     "372. 

D.  1.  As  soon  as^  the  tailor  comes,  please^  send  him  up 
to  me.  2.  I  have  sent  for^  you  because  my  friends  have  rec- 
ommended you  to  me  so  often.  3.  If  you  have  samples  of 
cloth  that  I  like*,  I  may  order^  a  suit.  4.  The  finer  and 
more  durable  the  cloth  is,  the  better,  even  if  it  should  cost 
a  little  more.  5.  As  the  suit  now  is,  it  does  not  please  me, 
(but^)  you  will  have  to  change  it.  6.  Don't  you  see  that 
the  coat  is  altogether  too  tight  under  the  arms;  besides  it 
does  not  fit  me  very  well  in  the  back.  7.  You  must  hurry 
and  change  it  so  that  you  can  send  it  home  on^  Friday, 
for  I  shall  leave*  the  city  on  Saturday.  8.  He  did  his 
work  so  well  that  all  were  pleased^  with  it.  9.  Since  you 
went  away  yesterday,  he  has  done  nothing  but  play^°. 
10.  Since  you  cannot  do  it,  you  must  let  me  try.  11.  As 
long  as"  it  rains,  we  cannot  go  out.  12.  The  boys  had  seat- 
ed themselves  at  the  table  in  order  to^^  study.  13.  We  have 
not  gone  away,  nor^^  shall  we.  14,  He  does  not  believe  what 
you  say,  nor  I  either^'.  15.  The  dearer  the  food  is  and  the 
colder  the  weather,  the  more  the  poor  sujffer.  16.  He  went 
out  of  the  house  without  saying^*  a  word.     17.  Have  30U 


VOCABULARY. 


245 


18.  I  have  no  confi- 


tliought  of^°  how  we  can  help  him? 
dence  in^'  what  he  does. 

*380,  9.  ^Var  god  och.  Give  at  least  tliree  equivalents  for  the  English 
please.  '349,  b.  *Tycka  om  can  be  used  in  the  sense  of  like  about  both  ani- 
mate and  inanimate  objects ;  alska,  to  love,  generally  only  about  animate  ob- 
jects (also  about  objects  like  home,  fatherland,  etc.)  :  hdlla  av,  to  cherish  af- 
fection for,  only  about  animate  objects.  "Use  present  of  verb  with  kanhdnda, 
perhaps.  "373,  5.  'Either  pa  or  om.  What  form  does  pa  require?  What, 
omT  (See  342  and  note  1.)  'Either  of  the  three  equivalents  for  the  future 
will  do  here.  Which  are  they  ?  'Nojda  or  beldtna.  ^"Swedish  uses  the  supine 
instead  of  the  infinitive.  "In  analogy  with  as  soon  as,  380,  9.  »''380,  8.  "369, 
heller,  and  373,  1.     "Use  infinitive.     "380,   10,  note  2. 


VOCABULARY. 


ana,  to  have  a  presentiment 

arm,  -ar,  arm 

av'sdnda,  sdnda  av',  to  send, 
dispatch 

heldten,  -et,  satisfied 

er'hdlla  (insep.),  to  receive 

er'sdtta  (insep.),  to  compen- 
sate;  take  the  place  of 

fattig,  -t,  poor 

fin,  -t,  fine 

ett  fortro'ende,  -n,  confidence 

fidmnas  (dep.),  I,  to  talce 
revenge 

ett  innehdll,  — ,  content (s) 

knota,  I,  to  grumble 

leka,  Ila,  to  play 

lida,  led,  ledo,  lidit,  -en,  -et, 
to  suffer 

en  mottagare,  — ,  recipient 


ndrsluten,  -et,  inclosed 

passa,  I,  to  suit,  fit 

ett  prov,  -er,  sample;   test 
(Pl.  — ) 

riklig,  -t,  abundant 

sitta,    satf,    sutto,    suttit,    to 
sit;   fit 

ett  spratt,  — ,  triclc 

trdng,  -t,  narrow,  tight 

tvng,  -t,  heavy 

tdras,  tordes,  torts,  to  dare 

en  underrdttelse,  -r,  informa- 
tion 

varaktig,  -t,  durable 

vdrdefull,  -t,  valuable 

dndra,  I,  to  change 

dvenledes,  likewise 

o'verraskad,   -at,  surprised 

o'verraskning,  -ar,  surprise 


Idioms:  1.  ingenting    annat    dn,  ingen  annan  dn,  nothing  but, 
no  one  but. 

2.  att    hdmnas    pd    ndgon,   to   revenge   oneself    upon 
somebody. 

3.  att   Idta  ana,   to   indicate. 


LESSON  XXXIX. 
Interjections. 

381.  The  most  common  interjections  are: 

ack!  alas!  oh!  hysch!  hush! 

ah!  aha!  ah!  klatsch!  crack! 

aj!  ouch!  kras!  smash! 

fy!   shame!   whew!  kratsch!  crash! 

ha!  hal  o.'oh!0! 

halld!  hello!  oj!  ouch! 

hej'!  hey!  paff!  pang!  bang! 

hejsan!  heigh-ho!  p tos A; .^  splash! 

hm!  hm!  ptro!  whoa! 

hurra!  hurrah!  puh!  usch!  whew! 

hu!  whew!  ve!  woe! 

Note  1.  A  nuiuber  of  other  words  and  expressions  are  also  used  as  inter- 
jections, such  as  gott !  good  1  halt!  halt!  hell!  hail!  hjdlp!  help!  Se  ddr ! 
look!     Se  upp!  look  out!      Vdlan'  !  very  well!   etc. 

2.  Aj  is  the  usual  interjection  to  express  pain.  Usch  expresses  disgust ; 
hu,  horror,  puh,  oppression  and  discomfort,  fy,  reprimand  and  disgust.  These 
interjections  are  often  followed  by  da :   usch  da !  fy  da! 

382.  The  affirmatives  ja  and  jo,  yes,  and  the 
negative  nej,  no,  may  be  classed  as  interjections. 
Jo  is  used  in  answer  to  a  negative  question  or  in 
answer  to  a  question  or  statement  implying  doubt: 

(1)  Kommer  han  snart?  Ja,  det  gbr  han.  Will 
he  come  soon?    Yes,  he  will. 

(2)Du  har  vdl  icke  tid  nu?  Jo,  det  har  jag  visst. 
I  don't  suppose  you  have  time  now?  Yes,  certainly 
I  have. 

(3)  Ska  vi  far  a  (doubt)  ?  Jo  visst!  Shall  we  go? 
Certainly ! 

Note.  Ja  and  jo  are  often  strengthened  by  the  addition  of  da  and  visst: 
ja  visst,  jo  visst,  certainly,  yes ;  jo  da,  why,  yes.  Ja  may  sometimes  be  rendered 
by  well:  ja,  har  jag  inte  sagt  dig  dett     Well,  haven't  I  told  you  so. 


INTERJECTIONS.  247 

383.  Jasd,  an  interjection  extensively  used  in 
Swedish,  is  made  to  express  almost  any  emotion, 
as  joy,  sorrow,  anger,  menace,  etc.  It  may  be  ren- 
dered by  so,  oh!  is  that  so?  well,  you  don't  say!  etc. 

384.  Nej  is  often  strengthened  by  da,  visst  inte 
or  irite  alls:  Nej  da,  no  indeed;  nej  visst  inte,  cer- 
tainly not;  7iej,  inte  alls,  not  at  all.  It  has  other 
idiomatic  uses:  Nej,  vad  sdger  du?  You  don't  say! 
Nej,  se  ddr!  Why,  just  look !  Nej,  sd  vackert!  How 
beautiful ! 


APPENDIX. 


The  Use  of  the  Articles. 

1.  Some  of  the  most  important  uses  of  the  articles  have 
been  given  already.    The  following  summary  may  be  useful. 

THE    DEFINITE    ABTICLE. 

The  definite  postpositive  article  is  used: 

(a)  With  abstract  nouns,  nouns  of  material  and  class:  leve 
friheten,  long  live  freedom;  guldet  dr  ej  sd  nyttigt  som  jdrnet, 
gold  is  not  as  useful  as  iron;  mdnniskan  dr  skapelsens  krona, 
man  is  the  crown  of  creation 

Note.  The  article  is  omitted  when  the  noun  is  not  used  in  an  absolutely 
general  way:  han  har  guld,  he  has  gold  (partitive). 

(h)  With  names  of  seasons  and  days  of  the- week:  sommaren 
dr  slut,  summer  is  ended;  om  vdren,  in  the  spring;  pd  mdnda- 
gen,  on  Monday. 

Note  omission  of  article  in  expressions  like  om  mdndag, 
next  Monday. 

(c)  With  many  names  of  rivers,  lakes,  oceans,  mountains: 
Of  re  sjdn,  Lake  Superior;  Ostersjon,  the  Baltic;  Klippiga  Ber- 
gen, the  Rocky  Mountains. 

(d)  With  names  of  streets:  Linnigatan,  LinnS  Street;  Oden- 
gatan,  Oden  Street. 

(e)  With  names  of  places  of  public  and  official  resort:  i 
kyrkan,  in  or  to  church;  i  skolan,  at  (in)  or  to  school;  infor 
ratten,  in  court. 

(f)  In  a  distributive  sense  where  English  uses  the  indefinite 
article.  In  temporal  expressions  the  noun  is  preceded  by  a 
preposition,  generally  i  or  om:  tvd  kronor  metern,  two  crowns 
a  meter;  hundra  kronor  i  veckan,  a  hundred  crowns  a  week; 
tvd  gdnger  om,  dret,  twice  a  year. 

(g)  Instead  of  possessive  adjective,  see  178. 


APPENDIX.  249 

(h)  With  titles  used  alone  in  address:  vill  doktorn  vara  sd 
god  och  komma?  Please  come,  doctor;  har  kyrkoherden  triiffat 
honom?     Have  you  met  him,  rector?    (See  142.) 

2.  The  definite  'postpositive  article  is  omitted: 

(a)  With  nouns  used  as  partitives  (some,  any)  or  as  & 
simple  predicate:  har  ni  pengarf  Do  you  have  money?  But 
penningen  (general)  (ir  upphovet  till  mycket  ont,  money  is 
the  cause  of  much  evil. 

(b)  After  savime,  same:  samme  gosse,  som  vi  sdgo  i  gdr 
the  same  boy  that  we  saw  yesterday. 

3.  The  prepositive  article  is  as  a  rule  used  in  connection 
with  the  postpositive  article  when  the  noun  is  preceded  by 
an  adjective.  It  may  be  omitted  in  a  few  instances  (cf.  tht 
remarks  on  the  prepositive  article,  126,  2). 

THE    INDEFINITE    ARTICLE. 

4.  It  thus  appears  that  the  definite  article  is  used  more 
widely  than  in  English.  On  the  other  hand  the  indefinite 
article  is  more  frequently  omitted: 

(a)  Before  an  unmodified  noun  denoting  vocation,  rank 
character,  station  in  life,  used  alone,  or  connected  by  som, 
in  the  former  case  also  before  a  noun  denoting  nationality. 
han  (ir  soldat,  he  is  a  soldier;  han  talade  som  soldat  och  ej 
som  statsman;  he  spoke  as  a  soldier  and  not  as  a  statesman. 
But  we  must  say:  han  Ur  en  tapper  soldat,  he  is  a  brave 
iL  oldier. 

Note.  If  tho  noun  and  modifier  form  a  set  phrase  the  indefinite  article  is 
omitted :  han  dr  svensk  spralddrare,  he  is  a  teacher  of  Swedish ;  han  dr  ei, 
sveiisk  sprakldrare  would  mean  he  is  a  Swedish  teacher  of  langiiagos ;  han  d. 
kungligt  rad,  he  is  a  royal  councilor. 

Cb)  Often  in  phrases:  i  hast,  in  haste,  in  a  hurry;  med 
grdtande  stiimma,  in  a  tearful  voice;  med  darrande  hand, 
with  a  trembling  hand;  jag  har  huvudvdrk,  tandvdrk,  etc., 
I  have  a  headache,  toothache;  jag  har  fdtt  svar,  I  have  re- 
ceived an  answer,  etc. 

(c)  Note  such  forms  as  ndgra  fd,  a  few;  mdngen,  -et,  many  a; 
en  sddan,  ett  sddant,  such  a;  vilken,  -et,  what  a;  vilken  man 
han  dr!   What  a  man  he  is! 

Stccdish  Grammar.  17 


250  APPENDIX. 

Rules  of  Gender. 

Remark.  Only  the  rules  for  determining  the  neuter  gender 
are  given.  In  regard  to  masculine  and  feminine  nouns  it 
will  suflSce  to  say  that  sex  names  follow  the  sex — male  names 
being  masculine,  female  names,  feminine.  Originally  masculine 
or  feminine  names  of  inanimate  objects  or  abstracts  are  now 
classed  as  common  gender  (Swedish  realgenus  or  den-genus) . 

5.  Neuter  are: 

fa)  Almost  all  names  of  continents,  countries,  places, 
metals,  letters  of  the  alphabet,  and  all  words  not  real  sub- 
stantives but  used  as  such:  det  maktiga  Amerika,  the  powerful 
America;  det  vackra  Stockholm,  the  beautiful  Stockholm; 
jdrnet,  the  iron;   det  skona,  the  beautiful. 

(h)  Verbal  abstracts  of  the  same  form  as  the  verb  after 
dropping  the  infinitive  ending  -a,  with  or  without  change  of 
vowel:  fallet,  the  fall;  kallet,  the  calling;  skriket,  the  cry; 
derived  from  falla,  kalla,  skrika. 

(c)  Nouns  ending  in  -a  (pi.  -n),  -an  (in  concrete  nouns), 
ande^,  ende^,  at^,  dome^,  -e  (pi.  -n),  -el  and  -er  (plur.=sing)*, 
eri,  -ment,  -on,  -skap  (plur.=sing.)*,  -um,  -eum,  -ium. 

*In  abstract  nouns.     Otherwise  common  gender. 

Note*  on  Inflection  of  Nouns. 

VOWEL    5IODIFICATION    IN    THE    PLURAL. 

6.  The  following  nouns  modify  the  vowel  in  the  plural, 
some  also  double  the  final  consonant: 

en  and.  Under,  duck  en  man,  man  (manner)  man 

en  bok,  hocker,  book  en  moder,  modrar,  mother 

en  tot,  hoter,  fine  en  mus,  moss,  mouse 

en  hrand,  hrdnder,  fire-brand  en  natt,  natter,  night 

en  broder,  broder,  brother  en  rand,  rdnder,  border 

en  dotter,  dottrar,  daughter  en  rot,  rotter,  root 

en  fader,  fader,  father  en  son,  soner,  son 

en  fot,  fotter,  foot  en   spdng,   spUnger,   foot-bridge 

en  gd-s,  gdss,  goose  en  stad,  stdder,  city 

en  hand,  hdnder,  hand  en  stav,  stdver,  stave 

en  ledamot,  ledamoter,  member  en  stdng.  stdnger,  pole 

en  hts,  loss,  louse  en  tdng,  tdnger,  pincers 


APPENDIX. 


251 


DOUBLE    PLURALS. 

7.     Some  nouns  have  double  plurals,  corresponding  to  dif- 
ferent senses  of  the  singular: 


en  bcirs,  iorsar,  purses 
en  form,  formar,  molds 
en  gang,  gdngar,  paths 
en  stav,  stavar,  staffs 


borser,  bourses 
former,  shapes 
gdnger,   times 
stUver,  staves 


SINGULAR    LACKING. 

8.     Some  nouns  occur  only  in  the  plural,  the  following  being 
the  most  important: 


anor,  pedigree 
banner,    scolding 
hdvor,   goods,   gifts 
indlvor,    entrails 


FIRST    DECLENSION. 

snubbor,   scolding 
/  sndsor,    snubbing 

sddor,  chaff 
dthuvor,  gestures,  manners 


fordldrar,  parents 
goddagar,  easy  life 


SECOND  DECLENSION. 


vdgnar,  behalf;   pd  (a)  ndgons 
vdgnar,  in  behalf  of  somebody 


annaler,  annals 
ferier,  vacation 
finanser,    finances 
gronsaker,  vegetables 
musikalier,   music    (written) 


THIRD  DECLENSION. 

rdnkei',   intrigues 
skrofler,  scrofula 
specerier,  groceries 
umgdlder,  dues 
utskylder,  taxes 


DOUBLE   GENDER. 

9.     Some  nouns  may  have  either  common  or  neuter  gender: 
the  most  important  of  these  are: 

blod,  blood  ndbb,  beak,  bill 

bolster,  bolster  paraply',  umbrella 

borr,  drill  parasoW,  parasol 

brum,  border,  trimming  redskap',  utensil,   tool 

daft,  fragrance  snitt,  cut 


2&2  Al'l'KNDIX, 

finger^,  finger  span,  shaving 

mussUn',  muslin  tacTc,  thanks 

'Generally  fingrar  in   the   plural.     -Always   common   gender   when  used   in  a 
collective  sense :  redskapen,  the  utensils. 


Irregularities  in  Conversational  Pronunciation. 

10.  Conversational  Swedish  presents  many  peculiarities 
in  pronunciation,   among   which   are  the   following: 

(a)  The  words  mig,  dig,  sig,  and  siiga  are  practically  always 
pronounced  as  if  written  mdj,  ddj,  scij,  and  saja. 

(h)  Det  often  drops  the  t  in  pronunciation.  Colloquially 
dem  is  always  pronounced  as  if  written  dom.  In  certain  parts 
of  Sweden,  especially  in  Stockholm,  dom  is  used  for  de.  An- 
other common  colloq.uial  form  for  de  is  di. 

(c)  Adjectives  ending  in  -ig  generally  drop  g  before  the 
neuter  -t  in  pronunciation:  tro'ligt,  probable,  pronounced 
tro'litt;  ste'nigt,  stony,  ste'nitt,  etc. 

(d)  Ar  and  dro,  is,  are,  are  often  pronounced  a  or  e. 

(e)  Och  is  generally  pronounced  d,  so  is  also  att  when  it  is 
the  sign  of  the  infinitive:  jag  skulle  tycka  om  att  (d)  trdffa 
honom,  I  should  like  to  see  him. 

(fj  Vad  very  often  drops  d  in  conversation:  Vafd)  (he )f alls? 
I  beg  your  pardon,  what  did  you  say?  Ya(d)  menar  du?  What 
do  you  mean? 

(g)  Final  -t  in  the  supine  of  verbs  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation 
is  dropped  in  conversation  in  many  parts  of  Sweden:  tagi 
(hard  or  soft  g)  for  tagit,  skrivi  for  skrivit.  So  also  final  -t  in 
mycket  and  litet. 

(h)  Skall  is  generally  pronounced  ska;  taga,  bliva,  draga, 
Tiava,  hedja  giva  are  generally  shortened  to  fa,  bli,  dra,  ha, 
be,  ge. 

(i)  Verbs  of  the  First  Conjugation  often  drop  the  ending  -de 
of  the  past  tense  in  conversation:  jag  tala  med  honom  i  gdr, 
I  spoke  to  him  yesterday. 

(j)  There  are  a  number  of  familiar  words  which  are 
softened  in  conversation  by  the  dropping  or  assimilation  of 
a  consonant:  trddgdrd,  garden,  trdggdrd;  gdstgivare,  Inn- 
keeper, where  stgz=  sh. 


APPKNDIX.  ;h)''\ 

(Jc)  The  plural  ending  -oi'  of  the  First  Declension  is  often 
pronounced  -er:  vecka(or),  veckei: 

(I)  For  enclitic  pronouns  'en,  'et  ('t),  and  -no,  see  140,  c. 

Irregularities  in  Conversational  Grammar. 

11.  The  most  common  grammatical  irregularities  met  with 
in  the  spoken  language  are  here  noted: 

(a)  The  singular  of  a  verb  regularly  takes  the  place  of  the 
plural  in  conversation. 

(b)  Neuters  of  the  Fifth  Declension  take  -ena  in  the  def. 
form  of  the  plural  instead  of  -en,  thus  becoming  like  nouns 
of  the  Fourth  Declension:  hus-ena,  the  houses;  namn-ena,  the 
names. 

(c)  Gender  nouns  ending  in  -n  preceded  by  a  vowel  often 
have  the  definite  form  the  same  as  the  indefinite:  han  stir 
pa  grdsplanen  (pronounced  griisplan) ,  he  stands  on  the  lawn; 
fdgeln  sitter  pd  grenen  (pronounced  gren),  the  bird  sits  on 
the  branch. 


I 


STRONG  AND  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


INFINITIVE         PRES. 


IMPERFECT 
SING.         PLUR. 


SUPINE      PAST  PART. 


beder  (ber)bad 


bedja,  ask,  pray 

binda,  bind  binder 

bita,  bite  biter 

bjuda,  offer  bjuder 
bliva,  become,  re-     *  bliver 

main  i  blir 

brin^a  1 ,  bring  bringar 

brista,  burst  brister 

bryta,  break  bryter 

brinna,  bum  brinner 

bara,  bear  bar 

bora,  ought  bor 

dimpa, /oM  dimper 

dragra,  draw  drager 

dricka,  drink  dricker 

driva,  drive  driver 

drapaS,  kill  drapa 

do.  die,  dor 

f  alia,  fall  f  alter 

fara,  go,  travel  far 

finna,  find  finner 

flyga,  fly  flyger 

flyta,  flow  flyter 

f  rysa,  freeze  •  f  ryser 

f A,  get,  may  f&r 

forg-ata,  forget  — grater 
fornimma,  perceive — nimmer 
forsvinna.  disap- 
pear 


— 8  V  inner 


sriva 


(  give 


JKi 


gitta,  care 
gjuta,  pour,  cast 
glida,  glide, 
gnida,  rub 
gripa,  seize 
gr&ta,  weep 
g&.  go 
gora,  do 


giver 
ger 

gitter 

gjuter 

glider 

gnider 

griper 

gr&ter 

gfir 

gor 


band 

bet 

bjod 

blev 

bragte 

brast 

brot 

brann 

bar 

borde 

damp 

drog 

drack 

drev 

drap 

dog 

foil 

for 

fann 

flog 

flot 

fros 

fick 
—gat 
—  nam 

— svann 

gav 

<gitte 

'■  gittade 
got 
gled 
gned 
grep 
grat 
gick 
gjorde 


b&do  bett  bedd,  bett 

bundo  bundit  bunden,  -  et 

beto  bitit  biten.  —  et 

bjodo  bjudit  bjuden,  —  et 


blevo 

bragte 

brusto 

broto 

brunno 

buro 

borde 

dumpo 

drogo 

drucko 

drevo 

dr&po 

dogo 

folio 

foro 

funno 

flogo 

floto 

froso 

fingo 

—  nummo 


blivit 

bragt 

brustit 

brutit 

brunnit 

burit 

bort 

dumpit 

dragit 

druckit 

drivit 

drapit 

dott 

fallit 

farit 

funnit 

flugit 

flutit 

frusit 

f&tt 
—  gatit 
nummit 


bliven.  —  et 
bragt,  bragt 
brusten,  — et 
bruten.  —  et 
brunnen,  —  et 
buren,  —  et 

dumpen.  —  et 
dragen,  —  et 
drucken,  —  et 
driven.  —  et 
drapen,  —  et 

fallen,  —  et 
faren,  —  et 
f  unnen.  —  et 
flugen.  —  et 
flu  ten,  —  et 
frusen,  — et 
\  -fkdd,  — f&tt3 
I  -fingen. — et3 
— gaten,  —  et 
—  nummen,  -  et 


— svunno    —  svunnit    -  svunnen,  —  et 


g&vo 

gitte 

gittade 

goto 

gledo 

gnedo 

grepo 

grato 

gingo 

gjorde 


givit 

gittat 

gjutlt 

glidit 

gnidit 

gripit 

gr&tit 

g&tt 

gjort 


given,  — et 


gjuten,  —  et 
gliden,  —  et 
gniden,  — et 
gripen,  —  et 
—  grrftten,  —  et  3 
g&ngen,  -  et 
gjord,  gjort 


1     Also  First  Conjugation. 
3     In  compounds. 


Also  Second  Conj.,  Class  I. 


Ari'KNDlX. 


255 


heta,  be  named 
hinna,  have  time 
hugTRa,  heio 
h&Ila,  hold 

idas  1 , 

klin^a .'! ,  sound 
kliva,  stride 
klyva,  split 
knipa,  pinch 
knyta,  tie 
komma,  com.e 

krympa,  shrink 
krypa,  creep 
le,  smile 

ledas,  be  lonesome 
leva,  live 
lida,  suffer 
ligrga,  lie 
Ijuda,  sound 
Ijugra,  lie 
IjutaS,  suffer 
lyss,  listen 
l&ta,  sound 
l&ta,  let 
lagTRa,  lay 

lasa,  read 
lopaU,  run 

may 

must 

nigra,  curtsy 
njuta,  enjoy 
nysaO,  sneeze 
pipa,  pipe 
rida.  ride 
r'lnna,  Jiow 
riva,  tear 
radas.  be  afraid 
se,  see 
simmaS,  swiTti 


heter 
hinner 
hugger 
h&ller 

ids  3 

klingar 

kliver 

klyver 

kniper 

knyter 

kommer 

krymper 

kryper 

ler 

\  ledes 

lleds 
lever 
lider 
ligger 
Ijuder 
Ijuger 
Ijuter 
lyss 
l&ter 
l&ter 
lagger 

laser 

loper 

m& 

m&ste 

niger 

njuter 

nyser 

piper 

rider 

rinner 

river 

rades 

ser 

simmar 


hette 
hann 
hogg 
hoU 

iddes 

klang 

klev 

klov 

knep 

knot 

kom 

krympte 

krop 

log 

leddes 

levde 

led 

l&g 

Ijod 

Ijog 

Ijot 

lyddes 

lat 

lat 

lade 

laste 

lopp 

m&tte 

m&ste 

neg 

njot 

nos 

pep 

red 

rann 

rev 

raddes 


hette 
hunno 
hoggro 
hollo 

iddes 

klungo 

klevo 

klovo 

knepo 

knoto 

kommo 

krympte 

kropo 

logo 

leddes 

levde 

ledo 

l&go 

Ijodo 

Ijogo 

Ijoto 

lyddes 

lato 

lato 

lade 

laste 

lupo 

m&tte 

m&ste 

nego 

njoto 

noso 

pepo 

redo 

runno 

revo 

raddes 

s&go 

summo 


hetat 
hunnit 
huggit 
h&llit 

j  itts 

(  idits 
klungit 
klivit 
kluvit 
knipit 
knutit 
kommit 
3  krympt 
I  krumpit 
krupit 
lett 

letts 

levat 

lidit 

legat 

Ijudit 

Ijugit 

Ijutit 

l&tit 
l&tit 
lagt 

t  last 

>  lasit 
lupit 

m&st 

nigit 

njutit 

nysit 

pipit 

rid  it 

runnit 

rivit 

radits 

sett 

summit 

)  suttit 

(  setat 

sjudit 

sjungit 


hunnen,  —  et 
huggen,  — et 
h&llen,  —  et 


klungen,  —  et 
— kliven,  — et* 
kluven,  —  et 
knipen,  —  et 
knuten,  — et 
kommen,  —  et 

S  krympt 

>  krumpen,-  et 
krupen,  -  et 
— ledd,  —lett* 


— levad,  —at 
— legad,  —  at  4 


— Ijugen,— et  4 
Ijuten,  — et 


— l&ten,  — et4 
lagd,  lagt 
)  last 

(  — lasen  —  et  4 
lupen,  — et 


njuten,  — et 


riden,  — et 
runnen,  —  et 
riven,  -  et 

sedd,  sett 
summen,  —  et 
5  -sutten,  -et  4 
(  —  suten4 
sjuden,  — et 
sjungen,  —  et 


sitta,  sit  sitter  satt  sutto 

sjuda,  seethe  sjuder  sjod  sjodo 

sjunga.  sing  sjunger        sjong  sjongo 

1  Att  icke  idas  gSra  ndgot  =  to  be  too  lazy  to  do  a  thing. 

2  Pronounced  iss.       3     Also  First  Conjugation, 

4      In  compounds.       5      Only  in  the  expression  Ijuta  ddden,  to  suffer  death 
Generally  Second  Conjugation,  Class  I. 


25G 


Ai'i'ii.nix. 


sjunka,  sink 

s  junker 

sjonk 

sjiinko 

sjunkit 

sjunken,  — et 

skina,  shine 

skiner 

sken 

skeno 

skinit 



skjuta,  shoot 

skjuter 

skot 

skoto 

skjutit 

skjuten,  —  et 

skola,  shall 

skall 

skulle 

skulle 

skolat 



skrida,  Ttiove 

skrider 

Nekred 

skredo 

skridit 

skriden,  —  et 

skrika,  cry 

skriker 

skrek 

skreko 

skrikit 

skriken,  —  et 

skriva,  write 

skriver 

skrev 

skrevo 

skrivit 

skriven,  —  et 

skryta,  boast 

skryter 

skrot 

skroto 

skrutit 

skruten,  — et 

skara,  cut 

skar 

skar 

skuro 

skurit 

skuren,  —  et 

slinka,  slinlc 

slinker 

slank 

slunko 

slunkit 

slunken,  — et 

slinta,  slip 

slinter 

slant 

slunto 

sluntit 

slunten,  -  et 

slippa,  not  to 
have  to 

slipper 

slapp 

sluppo 

sluppit 

sluppen,  -  et 

slita,  tear 

sliter 

slet 

sleto 

slitit 

sliten,  — et 

sluka  1 ,  devour 

sluker 

slok 

sloko 

slukit 

sluken,  —  et 

slutaS,  shut 

sluter 

slot 

sloto 

slutit 

sluten,  —  et 

sl&,  strike 

sl&r 

slog 

slogo 

slagit 

slagen,  —  et 

smita,  sneak 

smiter 

smet 

smeto 

smitit 

smiten,  -  et 

smyga,  go  stealthilyamyger 

smog 

smogo 

smugit 

smugen,  —  et 

snyta,  blow  the  nosesnyter 

snot 

snoto 

snutit 

snuten,      et 

sova,  sleep 

sover 

sov 

sovo 

sovit 



spinna,  spin 

spinner 

spann 

spunno 

spunnit 

spunnen,  -  et 

spricka,  crack 

spricker 

sprack 

sprucko 

spruckit 

sprucken,  —  et 

springa,  leap 

springer 

sprang 

sprungo 

sprungit 

sprungen,  —  et 

spritta.  start 

spritter 

spratt 

sprutto 

spruttit 

sprutten,      et 

stickaS,  stick 

sticker 

stack 

stucko 

.  stuckit 

stucken,  —  et 

stiga,  step 

stiger 

steg 

stego 

stigit 

stigen,  -  et 

stintra,  sting 

stinger 

stang 

stungo 

stungit 

stungen,  — et 

stinka,  stink 

stinker 

stank 

stunko 

stunkit 



stjala,  steal 

stjal 

stal 

stulo 

stulit 

stulen,  — et 

stryka,  stroke 

stryker 

strok 

stroko 

strukit 

struken,  —  et 

stup&i,  fall 

stupar 

stop 

stopo 





st&,  stand 

st&r 

stod 

stodo 

st&tt 

j-st&dd,    tt4 
1  st&nden, — et 

suf^a,  suck 

suger 

sog 

sogo 

sugit 

sugen,  —  et 

supa,  imbibe 

super 

sop 

sopo 

supit 

supen,  —  et 

svida,  smart 

svider 

sved 

svedo 

svidit 



svika,  disappoint 

sviker 

svek 

sveko 

svikit 

sviken,  —  et 

svalta,  starve 

svalter 

svalt 

svulto 

svultit 

svulten,  —  et 

svar(j)a,  swear 

svar(jer) 

svor 

svuro 

svurit 

svuren,  —  et 

saga,  say 

sager 

sade 

sade 

sagt 

sagd,  sagt 

satta,  set 

satter 

satte 

satte 

satt 

satt,  satt 

taga,  take 

tager 

tog 

togo 

tagit 

tagen,  — et 

tiga,  be  silent 

tiger 

teg 

tego 

tegat 

— tegad,  -  at  4 

tjuta,  howl 

tjuter 

tjot 

tjoto 

tjutit 



tryta,  run  short 

tryter 

trot 

troto 

trutit 

—  truten,  -  et4 

tvinga  1 ,  force 

tvingar 

tvang 

tvungo 

tvungit 

tvungen,  —  et 

1      Also  First  Conjugati 

ion.    2   Also  First  Conjugation  in  the  sense  of  end. 

3      Also  Firsi 

t  Conjugati 

on  in  the  s« 

!nse  of  to  kn 

it.     4     In  c 

ompounds. 

APPENDIX. 


257 


tvit.  wash 

be  likely 

toras,  dare 
vara,  be 
varda.  beco^ne 
veta,  know 
vetta,  face 
vika,  yield,  fold 
vilja,  will 
vinna,  win 
vrida,  twist 


tv&r 

tor 

tors 

ar 

varder 

vet 

vetter 

viker 

vill 

vinner 

vrider 


tv&dde 

torde 

tordes 

var 

vart 

visste 

vette 

vek 

ville 

vann 

vred 


tv&dde 


(  tvasrit 
'  tv&tt 


*  tvagen 
I  tv&dd 


vidl&da  1 ,  adhere      — l&der         — l&dde 
^ta,  eat  ater  &t 

1      Also  First  Conjugation. 


tordes 

voro 

vordo 

visste 

vette 

veko 

ville 

vunno 

vredo 

— l&dde 
&to 


torts 
varit 

vetat 

vettat 

vikit 

velat 

vunnit 

vridit 
<  -l&tt 
^  -l&dit 

atit 


vorden. — et 


viken,  — et 


vunnen,  — et 
vriden,  — et 


aten,  — et 


VOCABULARY. 


SWEDISH-ENGLISH. 

In  the  vocabulary,  only  the  gender  of  neuter  nouns  is  designated ;  all  nouns 
not  marked  (n.)  are  gender  nouns.  For  the  principal  parts  of  irregular  and 
strong  verbs  the  list  on  page  254  should  be  consulted.  Parts  of  speech  are 
designated  only  in  cases  of  ambiguity. 


abtorre,  -ar,  perch 
adde'ra,  I,  add 
adjo',   good-bye 
adress',  -er,  address 
adresse'ra,   I,   address 
adressat',  -er,  addressee 
affiir',  -er,  business;  store 
affdrsbyggnad,  -er,  business 

building 
aga.  I,  punish 
akt  (invar.),  notice 
alldeles,  entirely,  quite 
alle'na   (gen.  def.),  alone 
allmdnhet,  public;    i  — ,   in 

general 
alls,  at  all 
alltid,  always 

alltsd,  consequently,  thus,  so 
allvarlig,  sober,  grave,  serious 
allvarligt,  adv.,  seriously 
amerikan',  -er,  American 
an-,  accented  var.  prefix 
anblick,  -ar,  sight,  spectacle 
anfortro,  III,  intrust 
angenam,  agreeable,  pleasant 
anhdlla,  st.  v.,  request 
ankare  (n-^    — ,  anchor 
ankomma,  st.  v.,  arrive 


anlagga,  irr.  v.,  found,  estab- 
lish 

anlUnda,  lib,  arrive 

anse,  irr.  v.,  regard,  consider, 
think 

ansikte  (n.),  -71,  face 

anslag   (n.),  — ,  plot,  design; 
placard,  notice 

anvanda,  lib,  use 

ana,  I,  suspect;   anticipate 

annars,   otherwise 

annons'    (annongs'),  -er,  ad- 
vertisement 

apote'kare,  — ,  druggist 

aptW,  appetite 

arbeta,  I,  work 

arbetare,  — ,  workingman 

arm,  -ar,  arm 

arreste'ra,  I,  arrest 

artig,  polite 

att,  conj.,  that;   to   (infinitive 
sign) 

auditorium  (n.),-ier,  audience 

automobiV,  -er,  automobile 

automobilforbindelse,  -r,  con- 
nection by  automobile 

av,   prep,   and   accented   vari- 
able prefix,  of,  by,  from,  etc. 

avbryta,   st.   v.,   insep.,   inter- 
rupt; Sep.,  break  off 


VOCABULARY. 


259 


avgd,  irr,  v.,  sep.,  depart 
avUigsna  (sig),  I,  remove;  refl., 

go  away. 
avlijpa,  lib,  turn  out 
avsiinda,  lib,  Sep.,  send  away, 

dispafech 
avundsjuk^  envious 

B 

backa,    I,    back 

bad   (n.),  — ,  bath 

badort,  -er,  watering  place 

baka,  I,  bake 

bagare.  — ,  baker 

bakgrund,  -er,  background 

baklunges,  backwards 

bakom,  behind 

bank,  -er,  bank 

bara,  only 

barmhdr'tig,  merciful 

barn   (n.),  — ,  child 

be-,  unaccented   insep.   prefix 

bedja  (om),  irr.,  pray,  ask  for 

bedraga,  st.  v.,  cheat,  deceive 

befalla,   lib,  command 

befinna  sig,  st.  v.,  be  (health 
and   place) 

befolkning,  -ar,  i)opulation 

begara,  lib,  demand,  request 

begaran,  no  pi.,  demand 

behaga,   I,  please 

behandling,   -ar,  treatment 

beMlla,  st.  v.,  keep,  retain 

behova,  lib,  need 

bekant,  known,  acquainted; 
en  — ,  an  acquaintance 

bekvdm,  comfortable,  conven- 
ient 

bekvUmlighet,  -er,  comfort, 
convenience 


belopp    (n.),  — ,  amount 

beldten,  -et,  def.  -Idtna,  satis- 
fled 

beldst,  well-read 

belopa  sig  (till),  lla,  amount 
to 

bemdktiga  sig,  I,  take  posses- 
sion of 

bemota,   lla,  treat;    receive 

ben  (n.),  — ,  bone,  leg 

berg    (n.),  — ,  mountain 

berdtta,  I,  relate 

beromd,  n.  -romt,  famous 

beromma,    lib,   praise 

bestd,  irr.  v.,  exist;  stand  (a 
test);  treat;  —  av,  consist 
of 

bestdlla,  lib,  order 

besdttning,  -ar,  crew 

besok    (n.),  — ,  visit 

besoka,  Ila,   visit 

betala,  I,  Ila,  pay 

betjdning,  no  pi.,  servants, 
attendance 

betraktande    (n.),    considera 
tion;  taga  i — ,  take  into  — 

betyda,   lib,  mean,  signify 

betdnka,  Ila,  consider,  delib- 
erate; —  sig,  reflect 

bevista,  I,   attend 

bifall   (n.),  applause 

bil,  -ar,  "auto" 

bildad,  n.  -at,  cultured 

bildning,  culture,  education 

biljeWkontor'  (n.),  ticket  of- 
fice 

bit,  -ar,  piece 

bita,  St.  v.,  bite 

bjudning,-  ar,  invitation,  party 

blank,  smooth,  shiny,  glossy 


3G0 


VOCABULARY. 


bliva,  St.  v.,  become;    remain, 

be  (aux.  of  passive) 
olixtra,  I,  lighten 
hlomma,  -or,  flower 
blom'sterrabaW,     -er,     flower 

bed 
hlott,  only 

blygsam,  def.  -samma,  modest 
bldsa,  Ila,  blow 
black  (n.),  ink 
60,  III,  dwell,  live 
bok,   backer,  book 
bonde,  bonder,  peasant,  farmer 
bord   (n.),  — ,  table 
borsta,  I,  brush 
bort,  away 
borta,  away  from  home;   dlii- 

— ,  over  there 
bostad,  -stdder,  dwelling, 

residence 
bota,  I,  heal,  cure 
bra  (adj.  and  adv.),  good,  fine; 

well,  quite 
bredvid',  by,  at  the  side  of 
brev   (n.),  —    letter 
brevbdrare,  — ,  letter  carrier 
brodd,  sprout 
broder,  broder,  brother 
bruka,  I,  use 
bryta  av',  st.  v.,  break  off 
brddska,  hurry 
brdk   (n.),  — ,  trouble;    frac- 
tions  (math.) 
brds  pd,  take  after,   favor 
brdtt,  brdttom,  ha  — ,  be  in  a 

hurry 
brod  (n.),  — ,  bread 
by,  -ar,  village 
bygga,  lib,  build 
bdde . . .  och,  both ...  and 


biira,  St.  v.,  carry 

biirare,  — ,  porter 

biist,  best 

borja,  I,  begin 

borjan  (no.  pi.),  beginning 

C 

ceremoni',  -er,  ceremony 
cigarr',  -er,   cigar 
cigar rhandel,  cigar  store 
cigarrTiandlare, — ,  cigar  dealer 

D 

dag,  -ar,  day 

daglig  (adj.),  daily 

aagiigen   (adv.),  daily 

dagsljus  (n.),  daylight 

dal,  -ar,  valley 

dam,  -er,  lady 

date'ra,  I,  date 

datum   (n.),  data,  date 

del,  -ar,  part 

deltaga,  st.  v.,  sep.,   participate 

(Zen (pron.),  that,  it;   (art.) the 

dessutovi,  besides,  in  addition 

det  (pron.),  it;   (art.)  the 

dikt,  -er,  poem 

direkt',  direct 

disk,  -ar,  counter;   dish 

dit,  thither 

diver'se   (pi.  only),  diverse 

divide'ra,  I,  divide 

doktor,  dokto'rer,  doctor 

dotter,  dottrar,  daughter 

dram,  -er,  drama 

drama   (n.,   no  plur.),   drama 

dricka,  st.  v.,  drink 

drickspengar  (pi.  only),  tip(s) 

droska,  -or,  cab 

droja,  lib,  delay,  take   (time) 

drojsmdl   in.),  — ,  delay 


VOCABULARY. 


!G1 


duelV,  -er,  duel 
duTca,  I,  set  the  table 
dum,  def.  dumma,  stupid, 

foolish 
dumboni,  -bonimar,  fool 
dussin  (n.),  — ,  dozen 
dyrhar,  expensive,  precious 
ddlig,  poor,  bad,  wicked 
diir,  there 

diirbor'ta,  over  there 
ddrhem'ma,  at  home 
darpd,    thereafter,    thereupon. 

on  it  (them) 
do,  ITT.  v.,  die 
dod,  dott   (adj.),  dead 
d<)d,    (-ar),   death 
doda,  I.  kill 
dorr,  -ar,  door 


cfter,  prep.,  adv.,  and  accented 

variable  prefix,  after 
efterkomma,    st.     v.,     comply 

with,    komnia    efter,    come 

after 
eftermiddag,  -ar,  afternoon; 

i  — ,  this  afternoon 
ehuru,  although 
ej,  not 

ekono'misk,  financial 
eld,  -ar,  fire,  conflagration 
elegans'  (elegangs'),  elegance 
elektrisk,  electrical 
emedan,  because 
emot  (prep,  and  adv.),  against, 

opposite 
en,  ett,  a,  an,  one 
endasft,  only 
envar.  everybody 
enligt,  according  to 


episk,  epic 

er-,  accented  insep.  prefix 
erbjuda,  st.  v.,  offer 
erfarenhet,  -er,  experience 
erhdlla,  st.  v.,  receive,  get 
erinra,  I,  remind;  —  sig, 

remember 
ersutta,  irr.  v.,  to  replace. 

compensate 
europe'isk,  European 
exporte'ra,  I,  export 


fdbrik',  -er,  factory 

■fader  (far),  fader,  father 

familjefest,  -er,  family  festival 

family,  -er,  family 

fara,  st.  v.,  travel,  drive,  go 

fara    med',    go    along    (drive, 

travel ) 
farbror,  -broder,  uncle 
fartyg,  — ,  ship,  vessel 
fast,  n.  fast,  firm,  solid,  fast 
fast  (conj.),  although 
fattas,  I,  dep.  impers.  v.,  lack, 

ail;   vad  —  dig?    What  is 

ailing  you? 
fattig,  poor 

fel  (n.),  — ,  error,  mistake 
felas,  I,  dep,  impers.  v.,  lack 
ferier   (pi.),  vacation 
fi,n.  nice,  fine,  delicate 
finna,  st.  v.,  find;    det  finns, 

there  is  (are) 
fi.ra,  I,  celebrate 
flrande  (n.),  celebration 
fisk,  -ar,  fish 
flagga,  -or,  flag;  hissa  flaggan, 

hoist  the  flag 
flere,  several,  more 


262 


VOCABULARY. 


flicka,  -or,  girl 

flitig,  diligent 

flod,  -er,  river 

fly.  III,  flee 

flyta,  St.  v.,  flow 

flytande,  indecl.,  flowing,  fluent 

flytta,  I,  move 

folk   (n),  — ,  people,  nation; 
also  collectively,  people 

folkskola,  -or,  public  school 

forsla,  haul 

fort  (adv.),  fast,  quickly 

fortsdtta,  irr.  v.,  continue 

fot,  fotter,  foot 

fotbollag    (n.),  — ,   football 
team 

fotbollspel  (n.),  — ,  or  -match, 
-er,  football  game 

fram,  adv.  and  accented  var. 
preflx,  forth,  forward 

framdeles,  in  the  future,  later 

framme  (adv.),  at  destination, 
at  hand 

framrdcka,  or  rdcka  fram', 
reach  forth,  hold  out 

framstdende,     indecl.,     promi- 
nent 

framtid,  future 

franke'ra,  I,  stamp  (put  on 
stamp) 

Frankrike  (n.),  France 

Frans,  Francis,  Frank 

fransk,  French;   franska, 
French  language 

fri,  fritt,  free 

frikopa,   sep.,   v.,   ransom,  re- 
deem 

friluftsviuseum  (n.),  -er.  open 
air  museum 

frimdrke   in.),  -n,  stamp 


f riser' salon g,  -er,  barber  shop 
frisk,  fresh,  healthy 
fni,  -ar,  lady,  wife,  Mrs. 
frukost      (pronounced     fruc'- 

kost),  -ar,  breakfast 
frukt,  -er,  also  collective  pi., 

frukt,  fruit 
frysa,  st.  v.,  freeze 
fi-ysa  hort',  perish  by  frost 
fryspunkt,  -er,  freezing  point 
frdga   (efter),  I,  ask  a  ques- 
tion, inquire 
jrdn,  prep.,  adv.  and  accented 

variable  prefix,  from 
frdmmande,    n.,    — ,    strange, 
foreign,    ha  — ,    have    com- 
pany 
frdmst,  foremost,  first 
fullpackad,  n.   -at,   crowded 
fullsatt,   n.  — ,   crowded 
fylla,  lib,  fill;   —  dr,  have  a 

birthday 
fyrtio,  forty 

fd,   irr.   v.    (modal),   get,   re- 
ceive;  may 
fdgel,   fdglar,  bird 
fait   (n.),  — ,  field 
fdrdig,  ready 
fdsta,  I  and  Ila,  fasten 
fodas,  lib,  dep.  v.,  be  born 
fodelsedag,  -ar,  birthday;    till 
fodelsedagen,  for  a  birthday 
folja,  lib,  follow 
folja  med',  accompany 
foljaktligen,    consequently 
foljande,  n.  — ,  following 
fonster  (n.),  — ,  window 
for  (prep.),  for,  before 
for. . .sedan,  ago 


VOCABULARY. 


263 


for    (adv.),    too;    —   mycket, 

too  much 
for-,    accented    insep.    prefix, 

before 
for-,  unaccented   insep.  prefix 
forarglig,  annoying,  vexatious 
forbindelse,  -r,  connection;  ob- 
ligation 
fijrbjuden,     n.     -bjudet,     def. 

bjudna,   prohibited 
fordraga,  st.  v.,   tolerate;   — 
varandra,  bear  with  one  an- 
other 
fore,  prep.,  adv.,  and  accented 
var.    prefix,    usually   insep., 
before,  first,  ahead 
fiiredrag  (n.),  — ,  lecture 
foredraga,  st.  v.,  prefer 
forelusning,  -ar,  lecture 
forening,  -ar,  union,  society 
foreskriva,  st.  v.,  dictate,  pre- 
scribe 
foresW,  St.  v.,  propose 
forestallning,  -ar,  performance 
fdretaga{sig),st.v    undertake 
forfattare,  — ,  author 
forfdrlig,  terrible 
forfolja,  lib,  pursue 
forgifta,  I,  poison 
fdrJiindra  I,  prevent 
forhdllande  (n.),  -n,  relation, 
condition;  i  —  till,  relative 
to 
forkldda    {sig),    lib,   disguise 

(oneself) 
forkyla  sig,  lib,  catch  cold 
forkyld,  n.  -kylt,  having  a  cold 
forkylning,    -ar,    cold     (sick- 
ness) 


forlora,  I,  lose 

formak  (n.),  — ,  parlor 

formiddag,  -ar,  forenoon;  pd 
formiddagen,  in  the  fore- 
noon 

formoda,   I,   suppose 

forvid.  III,  intr.,  be  able;  tr., 
induce 

forolyckas,  I,  dep.  v.,  perish 

fdr'orsaka,   I,   cause,  occasion 

forr    (adv.),   before 

fdrre(a),  former 

forrdn    (conj.),    before,    until 

forsena,  I,  cause  to  be  late, 
delay 

forsiktig,   cautious 

forskotte'ra,  I,  advance 
(money) 

forslag  (n.),  — ,  proposition 

forsona,  I,  reconcile;  refl.  v., 
become  reconciled 

forsova,  st.  v.,  oversleep 

forst,  first 

forstad,   -stdder,   suburb 

forstd,  irr.  v.,  understand 

forstdndig,  wise,  sensible 

forstora,  lib,  destroy 

forsumma,  I,  neglect,  miss 
(train,  meal,  etc.) 

forsoka,   I  la,   try 

fortjusande,  n.  — ,  charming 

fortjdna,  I,  also  I  la,  earn 

fdrtrdfflig,  excellent 

forvandla,  I,  change,  trans- 
form 

forvdnas,  I,  dep.  v.,  to  be  as- 
tonished 

fordldrar,  pi.   only,  parents 


264 


VOCABULARY. 


gammal,  def.  gamla,  old 

ganska,  quite,  entirely 

garante'ra,  I,  guarantee 

gata,  -or,   street 

gen   (adj.),  near   (of  a  road) 

genast,  immediately 

genom  or  ige'nom  (prep,  and 

adv.),   through;    as   adverb 

it  has  the  form  igenom 
giva,  St.  v.,  give;  —  akt'  pa, 

notice,  observe 
glad,  n.  glatt,  glad,  happy 
glas  (n.),  — ,  glass 
glasogon,  pi.,  spectacles 
glida,  st.  v.,  glide 
glddja,  irr.  v.,  gladden 
gladje,  no  pi.,  joy 
glomma,  lib,  forget 
golv  (n.),  — ,  floor 
gosse,  gossar,  boy 
grad,    -er,    grade,    degree;     i 

hogsta   — ,    in    the    highest 

degree 
gren,  -ar,  branch 
gro.  III,  sprout 
grossJiandlare,    — ,    wholesale 

merchant 
grdta,  st.  v.,  weep,  cry 
grds  (n.),  grass 
grdsmatta,  -or,  lawn 
gron,   green 

gronsaker,  pi.  only,  vegetables 
gul,  yellow 
gunga,  I,  rock,  swing 
gd,  irr.  v.,  go,  run;    det  gdr 

icke,  it  won't  work;  klockan 

gdr,  the  watch  is  running 
gd  upp',  rise 


gdng,  -er,  time  (in  counting) ; 

en  — ,  once 
gdng,  -ar,  walk,  path 
gdr,  i  gdr,  yesterday 
gdrdag,  yesterday 
gds,  gdss,  goose 
gdlla,    lib,    concern;    have    a 

value;   be  a  question  of 
gdst,  -er,  guest 
gora  (irr.  v.),  do,  make 
Gota  kanal,  Gotha  Canal 
Goteborg    (n.),  Gothenburg 

H 

hals,  -ar,  neck,  throat 

halv,  half 

halvtimme,  -ar,  half  hour 

halvsula,  I,  half-sole 

halvvdgs  (adv.),  halfway 

hamn,  -ar,  harbor,  port 

han,  he 

hand,  hdnder,  hand 

handbagage,  hand  baggage 

handla,  I,  act,  trade;   —  om, 

treat  about 
handlande,  — ,  merchant 
Jiarv,  -ar,  harrow 
hastig,  quick,  rapid,  sudden 
hatt,  -ar,  hat 
havre  (n.),  oats 
hedersman,     -man,     man     of 

honor 
Jiel,  n.  -t,  whole;  en  — ,  a  unit 
helgdag,  -ar,  holiday 
hellre,  rather 
Jiem    (n.),  home 
hem  (adv.),  home;  gd  — ,  go 

home 


VOCABULAET. 


265 


hemifrdn,  from  home 

hemma,  at  home 

hemtrevlig,  cozy,  homelike 

hennes,  her,  gen.  case 

herr.  Mister,  in  address 

herre,  -ar,  master,  gentleman 

heta,  irr.  v.,  to  be  called;  jag 
heter  Karl,  my  name  is  Carl 

hinna,  st.  v.,  attain ;  have  time 
to  do  or  get  to 

historia,  -ier,  history,  story 

hitta,  I,  to  find 

hjdlp,  help 

hjalpa,  Ila,  help 

hjdrta   (n.),  -n,  heart 

hjdrtforlamning,  -ar,  heart 
failure 

hjdrtlig,  hearty,   cordial 

hon,  she 

hopp  (n.),  — ,  hope 

hoppa,  I,  jump 

hoppas,  I,  dep.  v.,  to  hope 

hos,  with,  by,  in,  in  the  house 
of 

honorar'  (n.),  — ,  fee 

hotelV  (n.),  — ,  hotel 

hund,  -ar,  dog 

hungrig,  hungry 

hur,  how 

hus  (n.),  — ,  house 

hustru,  -r,  wife 

huvudvdrk,  headache 

hygglig,  nice,  kind,  accommo- 
dating 

hpra,  lib,  rent,  hire 

hdlla,  St.  v.,  hold,  keep 

hdll  in.),  — ,  hold;  direction; 
dt  alia  — ,  in  all  directions 

hdr  (n.),  — ,  hair 

hdrd,  n.   hdrt,  hard 


hdftig,  violent,  vehement 

hdlft,  -er   (noun),  half 

hdlsa,  health 

hdlsa,  I,  greet 

hdl'sa  pd,  greet 

hdlsa  pd'  (hos),  make  a  call 
(at  somebody's  home) 

hdlsning,  -ar,  greeting 

hdmnas,  I,  dep.  v.,  take  re- 
venge 

hdmta,  I,  fetch 

hdnda,  lib,  happen 

hdndelse,  -r,  event 

Tvdndelsevis  (adv.),  by  chance 

hdnga,  lib,  hang 

hdnseende   (n.),  -n,  respect 

hdr,  here 

hdrlig.  glorious,  magnificent 

hast,  -ar,  horse 

hog,  high 

hoger,  def.  hdgra,  right;  till 
— ,  to  the  right 

hojd,  -er,  height,  hill 

hons  (n.),  — ,  chicken,  col- 
lective, chickens 

hora,   lib,    hear 

hora  pd,  listen  to ;  hdr  pd  mig, 
listen  to  me 

horn  in.),  — ,  corner 

host,  -ar,  fall;  i  hostas,  last 
fall 

hostdag,  -ar,  autumn  day 

hovlig,  polite 

hovlighet,  politeness 


i  (prep.),  in,  into 
i'akttaga,  st.  v.,  observe 
ibland',  sometimes 


Swedish  Grammar 


18 


266 


VOCABULARY. 


i'drott,  -er,  sport 
idrottspark,  -er,  athletic  field 
igen',  adv.  and  accented  var. 

prefix,  again,  back 
igenkanna,  lib,  sep.  v.,  recog- 
nize 
i'hdlig,  hollow 
ilia  (adv.),  bad;   det  var  ilia, 

that  was  too  bad 
illumine' r ad,  -at,  illuminated 
in,   prep.,   adv.,   and   accented 

var.  prefix,  in,  into 
inackordering,     -ar,     boarder, 
also    board;    hel   — ,    room 
and  board 
inhegripa,  st.  v.,  include 
infinna  sig,   st.   v.,   to   come, 

arrive 
ingen,  intet,  or  inget,  no,  no 

one,  nothing 
mAJop  (n.),  — ,  purchase 
inlosa,    Ila,   sep.,   to   redeem, 
*     cash 

innan   (conj.),  before 
inne   (adv.),  inside 
inne-,  accented  var.  prefix 
innehdll  (n.),  — ,  contents 
innehdlla,  st.   v.,   contain 
innestd,  irr.  v.,  remain  (mon- 
ey in  a  bank) 
inom    (prep.),   within 
inomhus  (adv.),  indoors 
insiitta,  irr.  sep.  v.,  deposit 
inse,    irr.    v.,    to    see,    under- 
stand 
inte,  not 

intet,  n.  of  ingen,  no,  nothing 
intresse'rad,  n.  -at,  interested 
intrcssant',  n.  — ,  interesting 
intres'se   (n.),  -n,   interest 


intyg   (n.),  — ,  testimonial 
inv&nare,  — ,  inhabitant 
is,  -ar,  ice 
Ita'Uen   (n.),  Italy 


ja,   yes 

jasd  (pronounced  ja^'sd),  so; 

you  don't  say!    Is  that  so? 
jo,  yes 

ju,    the    (with    the   compara- 
tive), you  know,  to  be  sure 
Jul,    -ar,    Christmas;    vid   — , 

at   Christmas;    till   — ,    for 

Christmas 
jv^t,  just 
juste'ra,  I,  adjust 
jdmrande,  n.,  — ,  plaintive 
jdrnvagsMljett,    -er,     railway 

ticket 
jdrnvagsolycka,    -or,    railway 

accident 
jarnvdgsstation,    -er,    railway 

station 

K 

kaffe    (n.),  coffee 
kaj,  -er,  quay,  pier 
kail,  cold 

kallna,  I,  grow  cold 
kalla,  I,  call 
kamma,  I,  comb 
kanhlin'da,   perhaps 
kan'ske,  perhaps 
kappa,  -or,  cloak 
karaktdr',  -er,  character 
kapten',  -er,  captain 
kasta,  I,  throw 
kasta  ut'.  throw  out 


VOCABULAKr. 


367 


katedral',  -er,  cathedral 

katt,  -er,  cat 

kilo,  kilogram  (n.),  — ,  kilo 
gram 

kilome'ter,  — ,  kilometer 

klack,  -ar,  heel  (of  shoe) 

klaga  {over),  I,  complain 

kJandra,  I,  criticise 

klar,  clear 

klass,  -er,  class 

klassisk,  classic 

klen,  weak 

klimat'  (n.),  — ,  climate 

klippa,  Ila,  cut,  shear 

kldda,  lib,  dress 

kldda  sig,  dress   (oneself) 

kldda  om'  sig,  change  dress 

kldder,  pi.  only,  clothes 

knacka,  I,  knock;  —  pd  dor- 
ren,  knock  at  the  door 

knappast,  hardly 

knappndl,  -ar,  pin 

knota  (over),  I,  grumble 

koffert,  -ar,  trunk 

koka,  I,  cook,  boil 

kollide'ra,  I,  collide 

komma,  st.  v.,  come 

komma  in',  come  in 

konduktor',  -er,  conductor 

konsert',  rer,  concert 

konst,  -er,  art;   pi.  tricks 

konstndr',  -er,  artist 

kontant,  n.  — ,  cash 

kontor  (n.),  — ,  office 

kopp,  -ar,  cup 

korg,  -ar,  basket 

korrespondent' ,  -er,  corre- 
spondent 

kort  (o  long  and  close)  (n.), 
— ,  card 


kort  (o  short  and  open),  n. 
— ,  short 

kosta,  I,  cost 

kostym',   -er,   suit 

kraft,  -er,  strength,  power 

krage,  -ar,  collar 

kredit'brev  (n.),  — ,  letter  of 
credit 

krets,  -ar,  circle,  society 

krok,  -ar,  hook 

krona,  -or,  crown 

kroppskonstitution,  -er,  con- 
stitution   (ol  body) 

kulle,  -ar,  hill 

kunna,  know;  (modal)  can, 
be  able 

Kungsgatan,  King's  Street 

kupe,  -er,  compartment  (rail- 
way) 

kiisin'  -er,  cousin 

kusk,  -ar,  driver,  cabman 

kvalitet',  -er,  quality 

kvar,  adv.  and  accented  var. 
prefix,  left  over,  beJiind,  re- 
maining 

kvarldmna,  I,  sep.,  leave  be- 
hind 

kvam,  -ar,  flour  mill 

kvart,  -er,  quarter;  en  kvarts 
timme,  a  quarter  of  an  hour 

kvall,  -ar,  evening;  i  gdr  — , 
last  night;  pd  kvdllen,  in 
the  evening 

kyckling,  -ar,  young  chicken 

kylig,  chilly 

kyrka,  -or,  church 

kdmpa  ut',  I,  fight  to  a  finish ; 
die 

kdnna,  lib,  know  (acquainted 
with) 


268 


VOCABULARY. 


kiinna     till',     be     acquainted 

with 
kdrleJc,  love 
kold  (n.),  cold 
kopa,  I  la,  buy 
kora,  lib.  drive 


laga,  I,  mend;  bring  to  pass 
lammstek,  -ar,  lamb  steak 
land.  Hinder,  country;  pd  lan- 

det,  in  the  country;  i  land, 

ashore 
landskap    (n.),  — ,   landscape 
landsdtta,  irr.  v.,  land 
lantstalle     (n.),    -n,    country 

house 
lantbrukare,  — ,  farmer 
last,  -er,  load;   vice 
lat,  no  neuter,  lazy 
le,  irr.  v.,  smile 
leda,  lib,  lead 
ledsen,  n.  ledset,  def.  Zedsna, 

sad,  sorry 
lek,   -ar,   play,   game 
fe/ea,  Ila,  play 
leva,  irr.  v.,  live 
lida,  St.  v.,  sufEer 
ligga,  irr.  v.,  lie 
Hfc  (adj.),  like,  alike 
lika  (adv.),   (just)   as 
liten,    n.    litet,    def.    lilla,    pi. 

smd,  little,   small 
litteratur,  -er,  literature 
liv   (n.),  — ,  life 
Ijus   (n.),  — ,  light;    candle 
Ijus  (adj.),  light 
loge,  logar,  threshing  floor 


londondngare,  — ,  London 

steamer 
lov  (n.),  permission;  vacation 

(from  school);   fd  lov,  may 

have  to 
lova,  I,  promise;   praise 
lugn   (adj.),  calm,  quiet 
lycka,  happiness,  fortune 
lyckad,   n.    -at,    successful 
lyckas,  I,  dep.  v.,  succeed 
lycklig,  happy 
lyda,  lib,  obey 
lynne    (n.),    -n,    humor;    vid 

gott  — ,  in  good  humor 
Wda,  -or,  box,  drawer 
Idna,  I,  lend;  borrow 
l&ng,  long 

Idngsam,  def.  -samma,  slow 
Idsa,  Ila,  lock 
Idta,  St.  v.,  let,  allow;   cause 

to  do  or  be  done 
lagenhet,  -er,  opportunity 
liigga  bort',  irr.  v.,  put  away 
Idkare,  — ,  physician 
lamna,  I,  leave 
Idnge   (adv.),  long 
Idngre,   comp.  of  Idng,   Idnge, 

longer 
Idra,   lib,  teach;    learn 
Idrare,  — ,  teacher 
lard,'  n.  Idrt,  learned 
Idrjunge,  -ar,  pupil 
Idsa,  Ila,  read 

Idsa  upp',  also  upp'ldsa,  recite 
Idseiok,  -booker,  reader 
Idxa,  -or,  lesson 
Idsa  (biljett),  buy   (ticket) 
Idsen,  no  pi.,  ransom 


VOCABULARY. 


2G9 


M 

maj,  May 

majs,  Indian  corn 

make,  -ar,  match,  mate 

mala,   lib,   grind 

man,  man,  man 

man  (indef.  pron.),  one,  they 

manscheW,  -er,  cuff 

manovre'ra,  I,  maneuver 

marknad,  -er,  fair 

marknadsstdnd  (n.),  — ,  booth 
at  a  fair 

mat,  food 

matsal,  -ar,  dining  room 

matsedel,  -sedlar,  bill  of  fare 

med,  prep.,  adv.,  and  accented 
var.  prefix,  with,  along,  etc. 

medfora,   lib,  bring,   entail 

medan   (conj.),  while 

mejeri'smor  (n.),  creamery 
butter 

mellan    (emellan),  between 

men,  but 

mena,  I,  mean 

mer{a),  more 

meta,  I,  angle 

middag,  -ar,  noon;  dinner;  i 
middags,  this    (past)    noon 

min,  n.  mitt,  my 

minnas,  lib,  dep.  v.,  remem- 
ber 

minut',  -er,  minute 

miss'taga,  st.  v.,  mistake 

misstaga  sig,  be  mistaken 

misstag  (n.),  — ,  mistake 

mitt,  indecl.  noun,  middle;  i 
mitten,  in  the  middle 

mjol  (n.),  flour 

mjolnare,  — ,  miller 

moder,  modrar,  mother 


modern',  modern 

mogen,  n.  moget,  def.  mogna, 

ripe 
mogna,  I,  ripen 
morgan,    morgnar,    morning; 

tidigt   p&   morgonen,    eaiiy 

in  the  morning 
i  morgon,  to-morrow 
morgontidning,    -ar,    morning 

paper 
i  morse,  this   morning 
mot,  prep,  and  accented  var. 

prefix,  also  emot,  against 
motgdng,  -ar,  adversity 
mottaga,  receive 
mottagare,  — ,  recipient 
mottagningsrum   (n.),  — ,  re- 
ception room 
mo'torMt,  -ar,  motor  boat 
mulna,  I,  become  cloudy 
multiplice'ra,  I,  multiply 
mun,  munnar,  mouth 
munter,  def.  muntra,  merry 
museumin.),  museer,  museum 
musik',  music 
mtisikalisk,  musical 
musikkdr,   -er,   band 
mycken,  n.  mycket,  def.  myck- 

na,  much 
mycket  (adv.),  very 
mynning,  -ar,  mouth  (of  river, 

cannon) ;  nozzle 
md  (modal),  may 
md,    III,    feel;    hur   mdr   ni? 

How  are  you? 
mdl  (n.),  goal;  meal 
mdnad,  -er,  month 
mdndag,  -ar,  Monday 
mdtt  (n.),  — ,  measure 


270 


VOCABULARY. 


manniska,  -or,  human  being, 
person 

master skap  (n.),  — ,  champ- 
ionship 

mobel,  mobler,  piece  of  furni- 
ture 

mojlig,   possible 

mojligen,  possibly 

mork,  dark 

mossa,  -or,  cap 

mota,  Ila,  meet 

motas,  reciprocal;  meet  (one 
another) 

N 

namn  (n.),  — ,  name 
namnteckning,  -ar,   signature 
natt,  natter,  night;   i  — ,  last 

nigbt 
nattsndlltdg    (n.),    — ,    night 

express 
nappa,  I,  bite 
natur',  nature 

naturligtvis  (adv.),  of  course 
tied,  down 
nej   (adv.),  no 
ni,  you  (polite  address) 
nog,  enough 

nog,  certainly;  I  suppose 
noga  (adv.  and  predicate  adj., 

indecl.),  careful  (ly) 
noggrann,  n.   -grant,    careful, 

accurate 
norr  (noun  and  adj.,  def.  form 

only),  north,  northern 
nu,  now 

nu  for  tiden,  now-a-days 
nummer    (n.),    def.    numret, 

— ,  number 
ny,  n.  nytt,  new 


nyhet,  -er,  newness,    novelty; 

news 
nyligen,  recently 
nyss,  just  now 
ndgon,  n.  -ot,  pi.  ndgra   (adj. 

and  pron.),  any,  some 
ndgonsin,  ever 
namligen,    that     is    to     say; 

namely 
ndmnare,  — ,  denominator 
niir,  when 
nar  (adj.),  near 
ndra  (adv.  and  prep.),  near 
ndrhet,  nearness,  vicinity 
ndrma  sig,  I,  approach 
ndrsluten,  n.  -slutet,  def.  -slut- 

na,  inclosed 
ndrvarande,  indecl.,  present 
ndsta,  indecl.,  next,  following 
ndstan,  almost 
nod,  distress 
nojd,  n.  nojt,  contented 
noje     (rw),     -n,     amusement, 

pleasure 


0-,  accented  prefix  of  negation 

obetydlig,  -t,  insignificant 

obetydlighet,      -er,      insignifi- 
cance, trifle 

och,  and 

ocksd,  also 

oense  (indecl.  predicate  adj.), 
at  variance 

officer',  -er  or  -are,  officer 

officerskappa,  -or,  officer's 
cloak 

ofrankerad,  n.  -at,  not 
stamped,   not   prepaid 

ofta,  often 


VOCABULARY. 


271 


ogynnsam,  def.  -samma,  un- 
favorable 

olik,  unlike,  different 

olycTca,  -or,  misfortune 

olyckligtvis,  unfortunately 

olynipisk,  Olympic 

om,  conj.,  if;  prep,  and  ac- 
cented var.  prefix,  around, 
about;    concerning 

omhord,  aboard 

om'komma  (see  komnia), 
perish 

omkring  (adv.  and  prep.), 
about,   around 

omlopp  (n.),  circulation 

omtala.  I,  sep.,  relate,  tell 

omtalad,  n.  -at,  mentioned; 
celebrated 

omdjlig,  impossible 

oncL,  n.  out,  bad,  evil;  sore; 
angry 

onsdag,   -ar,  Wednesday 

opera,  -or,  opera 

ord  (n.),  — ,  word 

ordforande,  — ,  chairman 

ordine'ra,   I,  prescribe 

orolig,  uneasy 

orsak,  -er,  reason 

otdlig,  impatient 

oskadlig,  harmless 

ovanlig,  unusual 


packa,  I,   pack 
packa  upp',  unpack 
paket'  (n.),  — ,  parcel 
pant,  -er,  security;  forfeit 
par  (n.),  — ,  pair,  couple;  ett 
par,  a  couple  of 


paraply   (n.),  -n,  umbrella 

passa,  I,  fit,  suit;  be  proper 

passagerare,  — ,  passenger, 
traveler 

passande,  n.  — ,  proper 

patient',  -er,  patient 

pengar,  pi.,  money 

penna,  -or,  pen 

person',  -er,  person 

pessimistisk  pessimistic 

pest,  -er,  pestilence,  plague 

piller  (n.),  — ,  pill 

pjiis,  -er,  play    (theatrical) 

plan,  -er,  plan 

plane' ra,  I,  plan 

plante'ring,   -ar,   park;    plant 
ing 

plats,   -er,   place;    tag  — ,   sit 
down 

plocka,  I,  pick 

pldga,  I,  pain,  torment,  trouble 

polette'ra,  I,  check  (trunk) 

polis'konstapel,    -staplar,    po- 
liceman 

post,   mail;    post  office;    skic- 
ka  pd  posten,  mail 

poste    restante,     general     de- 
livery 

postanvisning,  -ar,  money  or- 
der 

pota'tis,  —  (colloquially  often 
-ar),  potato 

precis',   exactly;    precis   kloc- 
kan  fern,  five  o'clock  sharp 

predi'ka,  I,  preach 

predikan,  no.  pi.,  sermon 

presente'ra  (for),  introduce 

princip',  -er,  principle 

pris  (n.),  -er,  price 


^72 


VOCABULAEY. 


program'  (n.),  — ,  def.  -gram- 
met,  program 

promene'ra,  I,  take  a  walk 

proteste'ra,  I,  protest 

prov,  -er,  sample;  test  (pi. — ) 

pryda,  lib,  decorate,  adorn 

priiktig,  fine,  magnificent, 
splendid 

punkt,  -er,  point,  dot 

pd,  on,  upon 

pdminna,  lib,  remind 


raka,  I,  shave 

rask,  quick,  brisk 

recept'    (n.),  — ,   prescription 

redan,    already 

regna,  I,  rain 

rekommendationsJ)rev   (n.), 
— ,  letter  of  recommendation 

rekommende'ra,  I,  recom- 
mend; register 

rekommenderad,  n.  -at,  regis- 
tered 

reda  (-0  in  compounds),  or- 
der; ha  —  pd,  know  about; 
ta  —  pd,  find  out 

regna,  I,  rain 

rengora,  irr.  v.,  clean 

resa,  Ila,  travel,  go 

resa,  -or,  journey,  trip 

resona'bel,  def.  -abla,  reason- 
able 

rest,  -er,  remainder 

restaurang',  -er,  restaurant 

restaurangvagn,  -ar,  dining 
car 

resultat  (n.),  — ,  result 

resvdska,  -or,  valise 

rev,  -ar,  flsh-line 


revolver,  -rar,  revolver 

rik,  rich 

riklig,  abundant 

rikta,  I,  aim,   direct 

riktig,  right,  correct,  quite 
(adv.) 

ring,  -ar,  ring 

ringa,  indecl.,  humble,  insig- 
nificant 

ringa,  lib,  ring 

ringa  pd'  (hos),  ring  up 

riva,  St.  v.,  tear,  scratch 

ro.  III,  row 

roa  sig,  I,  amuse  oneself 

rock,  -ar,  coat 

roddMt,  -ar,  rowboat 

rolig,  amusing;  ha  roUgt,  have 
fun 

roll,  -er,  part  (theatrical) 

ropa,  I,  call,  shout;  —  pd,  call 
(somebody) 

ruin',  -er,  ruin 

rullning,  -ar,  rolling 

rum  (n.),  — ,  room 

rykte  (n.),  -n,  reputation; 
rumor 

Ryssland  (n.),  Russia 

rdd  (n.),  — ,  advice;  ha  rdd, 
have  the  means  to 

rdda,  lib,  advise 

rdgirod  (n.),  — ,  rye  bread 

rddfrdga,  I,  consult 

rdka,  I,  meet;  get  (into) ;  —  i 
svdrigheter,  get  into  difl5- 
culties;  rdkas,  to  meet  one 
another 

rdcka,  Ila,  reach,  last,  be  suf- 
ficient 

rddd,  no.  n.,  timid,  afraid; 
radd  for,  afraid  of 


VOCABULARY. 


273 


rddda,  I,  save 

riikna,  I,  count 

rdkning,  -ar,  bill;  calculating, 

counting 
rdtt    (adj.),  n.  — ,   right;    ha 

rdtt,  be  right 
rod,  n.  rott,  red 
roka,  I,  smoke 
rokare,  — ,  smoker 
riJkkupe,     -er,      compartment 

for  smokers 
rdkning,  smoking 
rijrande,  concerning 
rorelse,  -r,  movement,  motion, 

exercise 
rust,  -er,  voice 

S 

sak,  -er,  thing,  matter 
sakna,  I,  lack,  miss,  feel  loss 

of 
sakta  (sig),  slow  down;  lose 

time   (watch) 
sakta  (adv.),  slowly 
sal,  -ar,  hall 
salong',  -er,  drawing  room, 

auditorium 
salt  (n,),  salt 

sam-,  accented,   insep.   prefix, 
^  together 

samma,  (the)  same 
sammansvdrja    (sig),    irr.   v., 

conspire 
samtal   (n.),  — ,  conversation 
samtala,  I,  converse,  chat 
scenerV   (n.),  -er,  scenery 
se,  irr.  v.,  see;  se'  pd,  look  at; 

se  ut',  look  (appearance) 
sed.  -er.  custom 


sedan,  (conj.),  after,  when; 
(adv.),  then,  thereupon,  af- 
ter;  (prep.),  since,  after 

sedel,  sedlar,  bill 

segelMt,  -ar,  sailboat 

segla,  I,  sail 

semes' ter,  -rar,  semester;  va- 
cation 

sen,  late 

senate,  later 

sex,  six 

sida,  -or,  side;   page 

sig,  him-,  her-,  itself,  them- 
selves 

sin,  reflex,  possessive,  3d  pers. 

sist,  last;  till  sist,  at  last 

sitia,  irr.  v.,  sit 

sju,  seven 

sjuk,  sick 

sjukdom,  -ar,  sickness 

sjunga,  st.  v.,  sing 

sjunka,  st.  v.,  sink 

sjo,  -ar,  sea,  lake 

sjorofvare,  — ,  pirate 

sjosjuk,  seasick 

sjostrand,  -strdnder,  lake 
shore 

skada,  -or,  injury,  damage 

skadad  n.  -at,  injured,  dam- 
aged 

ske,  III,  happen 

skepp  in.),  — ,  ship 

skicka,  I,  send 

skicka  hort',  send  away;  dis- 
miss 

skicka  in',  send  in 

skicka  ut',  send  out 

skicklig,  skillful 

skildring,  -ar,  description, 
portrayal 


274 


VOCABULARY. 


skillnad,  difference;  —  pd, 
difference   between 

skina,  st.  v.,  shine 

skinka,  -or,  liam 

skiva,  -or,  slice 

skjorta,  -or,  shirt 

skjuta,  St.  v.,  shoot 

sko,  -r,  shoe 

skoJa,  -or,  school;  gd  i  — ,  go 
to  school   (attend) 

skolavgift,  -er,  tuition 

skolkamrat,  -er,  school-mate 

skog,  -ar,  forest 

skomakare,  — ,  shoemaker 

skona,  I,  spare 

skorsten,  -ar,  chimney,  smoke- 
stack 

skratta,  I,  laugh 

skriftlig,  written 

skrika,  st.  v.,  shout,  cry 

skriva,  st.  v.,  write 

skriva  om',  rewrite 

skridsko,  -r,  skate;  dka  skrid- 
sko,  skate. 

skridskobana,  -or,  skating  rink 

skrdddare,  — ,  tailor 

skuld,  -er,  guilt;  debt 

skydda,  I,  protect 

skyldig,  guilty;  vara  skyldig, 
owe 

skynda,  I,  hurry 

skynda  sig,  hurry 

skdmmas  (for),  lib,  dep.  v., 
be  ashamed  (of) 

skota,  Ila,  take  care  of;  man- 
age 

slag  (n.),  — ,  blow,  stroke 

slagsmdl  (n.),  — ,  fight 

slant,  -ar,  coin 

slott  (n.),  castle 


slut  (n.),  close,  end 

sluta,  I  and  st.  v.,  close;  end; 

shut 
slutligen,  finally,  at  last 
sld,  St.  v.,  strike 
sldkting,  -ar,  relative 
slarv  (n),  — ,  carelessness 
sld  (irr.  v.),  strike 
sliippa,  Ila,  let  go;  sluppa  in, 

ut,  let  in,  out 
slatt,  -er,  plain 
smaka,  I,  taste 
smeka,  Ila,  caress 
smutsig,  dirty 
smdsak,  -er,  trifle 
smiilta,  Ila,  melt 
smor  (n.),  butter 
smorgds,  -ar,  bread  and  butter, 

sandwich. 
stiabb,  quick,  rapid,  fast 
snar,  quick,  speedy 
snart,  soon 

snitt    (n.),  — ,  cut    (fashion) 
snail,    good,    kind;      var   — , 

please 
snalltdg  (n.),  — ,  express  train 
sno,  snow 

socker  (n.),  def.  sockret,  sugar 
soffa,  -or,  sofa,  seat 
solsken   (n.),  sunlight 
solstrdle,  -ar,  sunbeam 
som  (rel.  pron.),  who,  which, 

that;   (conj.)  as 
sommar   somrar,    summer;    i 

somras,  last  summer 
somna,  I,  fall  asleep 
son,  soner,  son 
soppa,  -or,  soup 
sorg,  -er,  sorrow,  grief 
sorglig,  sad,  sorry 


VOCABULARY. 


275 


sova,  St.  v.,  sleep 

spara,  I,  save 

spatser'tur,  -er,  walk;  gora  en 
— ,  take  a  walk 

spegel,  speglar,  mirror;  se  sig 
i  spegeln,  look  in  the  mirror 

spel  (n.),  — ,  play;  game 

spela,  I,  play 

spratt  (n.),  — ,  trick;  spela 
ett  — ,  play  a  trick  on 

springa,  st.  v.,  run 

springpojke,  -ar,  errand  boy 

sprdJc  (n.),  — ,  language 

spdrvagn,  -ar,  street  car 

stackars,  indecl.,  poor,  wretch- 
ed 

stad,  stUder,  city 

stampning,  pitching   (ship) 

stanna,  I,  stop,  stay,  remain 

stark,  strong 

Stat,  -er,  state 

station',  -er,  station 

stek,  -ar,  steak 

sten,  -ar,  stone 

stiga,  St.  v.,  step 

stiga  fram',  step  forth 

stiga  pA',  enter 

stiga  upp',  get  up,  rise 

stil,  -ar,  style;  print 

stial.a  'bort',  st.  v.,  steal 

stjdlpa,  Ila,  upset 

stol,  -ar,  chair 

stolt.  n.  — ,  proud 

stor,  great,  large 

storartad,  n.  -artat,  grand, 
magnificent 

stormig,  stormy 

strand,  strdnder,  shore 

strax,  soon 

strid,  -er,  strife,  struggle,  fight 


stryka,  st.  v.,  iron;  lower  (of 
a  flag) ;  stroke 

strykning,  ironing 

strykinruttning,  -ar,  laundry 

stude'ra,  I,  study 

studium  (n.),  studier,  study 

stund,  -er,  while;  om  en  kort 
— ,  in  a  short  while 

stundande,  indecl.,  coming 

stupa,  I,  fall;  die  (on  the  bat- 
tle field) 

sty  eke  (n.),  -n,  piece 

styrka,   strength,   force 

std  fill',  irr.  v.,  be  (with  ref- 
erence to  health),  hur  star 
det  tillf  How  are  you? 

stalle  (n.),  -n,  place;  i  ert  — , 
in  your  place 

stunga,  lib,  close,  shut 

stdrk'saker,  pi.  only,  laundry 
(washing) 

supe,  -er,  supper 

svag,  weak 

svar  (n,),  — ,  answer 

svara,  I,  answer 

svensk  (adj.),  Swedish;  (n.), 
-ar,  Swede 

Sverige  (n.),  Sweden 

sv&r,  difficult;   serious 

svdrighet,  -er,  difficulty 

svdlja,  lib,  also  svalde,  svalt. 
swallow 

synas.  Ha,  dep.  v.,  seem 

synnerligen,  especially 

sysselsdtta,  irr.  v.,  busy;  em- 
ploy 

syster,  -trar,  sister 

sd,  III,  sow 

sd,  so 

sd  att,  so  that 


276 


VOCABULARY. 


sdlunda,  thus,  consequently 

sdng,  -er,  singing,  song 

saga,  irr.  v.,  say;  —  dt  (till), 

tell 
sdker,    def.    sdkra,    sure,    cer- 
tain; —  pd,  sure  of 
sdllan,  seldom 
sallskap,  -er,  society,  club 
sdllsynt,  n.  — ,  rare 
sdng,  -ar,  bed;   gd  till  sdngs, 

go  to  bed 
sdrskilt,  separate 
sdsong',  -er,  season 
sate  (n).  -n,  seat;  bench 
sdtt  (n.),  — .  manner,  way 
sdtta,  irr.  v.,  set,  put,  place 
sdtta  sig,  sit  down 
sodra,  def.  only,  southern 
soka,  Ila,  seek,  look  for 
som,  sommar,  seam 
somnig,  sleepy 
sondag,  -ar,  Sunday 
sorja,  lib,  mourn,  grieve 
sot,  n.  sott,  sweet 


taga,  ta,  st.  v.,  take 

taga  upp',  take  up 

tal  (n.),  — ,  speaking,  speech; 

number 
tamhur',  -er,  hall,  vestibule 
talrik,  numerous 
tand,  tdnder,  tooth;   7m  ont  i 

tdnderna,  have  a  toothache 
tandvdrk,  toothache 
tanke,  -ar,  thought 
tappa,  I,  lose,  drop 
'tavla,  -or,  picture,  painting 
tavelgalleri'   (n.),  -er,  picture 

gallery 


teater,  teatrar,  theater;  gd  pd 
teatern,  go  to  the  theatre 

telegraf,  telegraph 

telegram  (n.),  — ,  telegram 

telegram'bud  (n.),  — ,  mes- 
senger boy 

telefone'ra,  I,  telephone 

tennis,  tennis 

termome'ter,  -metrar,  ther- 
mometer 

tid,  -er,  time;  i  — ,  on  time 

tidig,  early 

tidtaielV,  -er,  time  table 

tidning,  -ar,  newspaper 

tiggare,  — ,  beggar 

till,  prep.,  adv.,  and  accented 
var.  prefix,  to,  until. 

tillhaka,  back 

tillbringa,  I  and  irr.  v.,  pass, 
spend 

tillfdUe  in.),  -n,  chance,  occa- 
sion; vid  forsta  — ,  at  the 
first  occasion 

tillhora,  lib,  belong  to 

tillkomma,  st.  v.,  befit,  be  the 
right    of 

tilldta,  St.  v.,  allow,  permit 

tilldtelse,  -r,  permission 

tillsammans,  together 

tillverka,  I,  manufacture 

tills  (conj.),  until 

timme,  -ar,  hour 

titta,  I,  look;  —  pd,  look  at 

tjog  (n.),  — ,  score 

tjugu,  twenty 

torn,  def.  tomma,  empty,  va- 
cant 

torg   (n.),  — ,  market  place 

torka,  I,  dry 

torka  av',  wipe  off,  dry 


VOCABULARY. 


277 


torr,  dry 

trevlig,  pleasant,  nice;  ha  det 
trevligt,  have  a  fine  home, 
time,  etc. 

tro,  III,  believe 

trogen,  n.  froget,  def.  trogna, 
faithful 

troligen,  probably 

trdkig,  tedious,  boring,  un- 
pleasant 

trdng,  narrow,  crowded 

triid  in.),  — ,  tree 

tradgdrd,  -ar,  garden 

traffa,  I,  meet,  see 

traffas,  reciprocal,  meet,  see 
one  another 

trdnga  sig  fram,  lib,  crowd 
up,  make  a  way  for  one- 
self 

troska,  I,  thresh 

trott,  n.  — ,  tired 

tu  (tvd),  two;  itu,  in  twain, 
apart,  asunder 

tung,  heavy 

tunga,  -or,  tongue 

tur,  -er,  trip,  turn;   luck 

tveka,  hesitate 

tvenne,  two 

tvist,  -er,  quarrel 

tvd,  two 

tvUrgata,  -or,  cross  street 

tvdrs    (over),  across 

tviitt,  -ar,  wash(ing) 

tvdtta,  I,  wash 

ty,  for,  because 

tycka,  Ila,  think,  fancy;  — 
om',  like;  —  ilia  om,  dis- 
like 

tyg  (n.),  -er,  cloth 

tyngd,  -er,  weight 


tysk,   German    - 

tyska,  German  language 

tyst,  n.  — ,  silent 

tyvdrr',  unfortunately 

tdg   (n.),  — ,  train 

tdcka,  Ila,  cover 

tdljare,  — ,  numerator 

tdmligen   (adv.),  quite,  fairly 

tdnka  (pd),  Ila,  think  (of) 

tat,  frequent 

tdvla  (om),  compete  (for) 

toras  (modal),  dare;  may 

U 

under,  prep,  and  accented 
var.  prefix,  under,  beneath, 
etc. 

underhdlla,  st.  v.,  entertain; 
support 

underldta,  st.  v.,  neglect 

underrdttelse,  -r,  information 

undersoka,  Ila,  examine,  in- 
vestigate 

underTyar,  wonderful 

undra,  I,  wonder 

union',  -er,  union 

upp,  adv.  and  accented  var. 
prefix,  up 

uppassare,  — ,  waiter 

upphrdnd,  n.  •'brdnt,  burnt  up 

uppdragen,  n.  -et,  def.  dragna, 
wound  up 

uppflyttad,  n.  -at,  moved  up; 
promoted 

uppfora,  lib,  erect,  build 

uppfora  sig,  conduct  oneself, 
behave 

uppforande  (n.),  — ,  conduct, 
performance 

uppldsa,  Ila,  Sep.,  recite 


278 


VOCABULARY. 


uppluckra,  I,  sep.,  loosen 
(soil) 

uppmdrksam,  def.  -samma,  at- 
tentive 

uppmdrksamhet,  attention 

upprdtta,  I,  establish,  found 

uppsats,  -er,  composition 

uppsikt,  supervision 

uppskatta,  I,  esteem 

uppstd,  irr.  v.,  sep.,  to  arise; 
originate 

upptaga,  st.  v.,  sep.,  to  take 
up;   to  adopt 

upptagen,  n.  -et,  occupied; 
busy;  adopted 

urmakare,  — ,  watchmaker 

urspdra,  I,  derail 

ursdkta,  I,  excuse 

ut,  adv.  and  accented  var. 
prefix,  out   (motion) 

utan,  prep,  and  adv.,  with- 
out; att  vara  — ,  lack 

utantill,  by  heart 

utbryta,  st.  v.,  sep.,  break  out 

ute,  out 

utflykt,  -er,  picnic,  excursion 

utforande  (n.),  execution 

utgift,  -er,  expense 

utgiva,  st.  v.,  sep.,  publish; 
edit;  spend 

utkdmpa,  I,  bring  a  contest 
to  a  close;  play  (a  game) 

utmana,  I,  challenge 

utmdrkt,  n.  — ,  excellent 

utom,  outside  of,  beside;  ex- 
cept 

utrikes,  adv.  and  indecl.  adj., 
abroad,  foreign 


utrdtta,  I,  to  carry  out,  ac- 
complish 

utsikt,  -er,  view 

utsliten,  n.  -et,  def.  -slitna, 
worn  out 

utsprucken,  n.  -et,  def.  -spruck- 
na,  open  (about  leaves  and 
flowers) 

utstdlla,  lib,  exhibit;  draw 
(draft) 

uttaga,  st.  v.,  sep.,  take  out 

uttrycka,  Ila,  express 

utvdg,  -ar,  expedient 

utova,  I,  practice;   exercise 


vacker,  def.  vackra,  pretty 
vagn,  -ar,  wagon,  carriage 
vakna,  I,  awaken 
vaktmdstare,  — ,  janitor, 

waiter 
vandra,  I,  wander,  stroll 
vanlig,  usual,  common 
vanligen,  usually 
vapen    (n.),    def.    vapnet,  — , 

weapon 
var,  indecl.  adj.,  each,  every 
var  och  en,  everyone 
vara,  -or,  ware,  merchandise 
vara,  I,  to  last,  endure 
vara  (v.),  to  be 
varaktig,  lasting,  durable 
varje,  indecl,  adj.,  each,  every 
varm,  warm 
vai'sehliva,  st.  v.,  sep.,  become 

aware  of 
vart,  whither 
Yasagatan,  Vasa  Street 
vatten  (n.),  water 
vattna,  I,  water 


VOCABULARY. 


279 


veranda,  -or,  porch 

verk  (n.),  — ,  work 

verkligen,  really 

vete   (n.),  wheat 

vetebrod  (n.), — ,  white  bread, 
loaf  of  — 

vid,  prep.,  adv.,  and  accented 
var.  prefix,  at,  by 

vid,  n.  vitt,  wide 

vidare,  further;  utan  — ,  with- 
out further  ado,   directly 

vikt,  -er,  weight;    importance 

viktig,  important 

Vila,  I,  rest 

vilja  (v.),  will,  wish,  intend, 
etc.;  —  Jia,  want 

villkor   (n.),  — ,  condition 

vin   (n.),  -er,  wine 

vinge,  -ar,  wing 

vinter,  -rar,  winter;  i  vint- 
ras,  last  winter 

vinterhatt,  -ar,  winter  hat 

visa,  I,  show 

viss,  sure,  certain 

visst,  adv.,  surely,  certainly 

visserligen,  to  be  sure 

vistelse,  -r,  sojourn 

vykort  (n.),  — ,  souvenir  pos- 
tal card 

vdning,  -ar,   story,  apartment 

vdr,  -ar,  spring;  i  vdras,  last 
spring 

vdrda,  I,  nurse,  take  care  of 

vdrdslos,  careless 

vdrdsloshet,  carelessness 

vdrfcst,  -er,  spring  festival 

vdt,  n.  vdtt,  wet 

viicka,  ITa,  wake  up 

vader  (n.),  — ,  weather 

viilMrgad,  n.  -at,  well  to  do 


vdlgorenhet,   charity,    oenevo- 

lence 
vdlja,  lib,  choose,  elect 
vdlsigna,  I,  bless 
van,  vdnner,  friend 
vdnda,  lib,  turn,  turn  back; 

—  sig,  turn  around 
vdnlig,  friendly,  kind;  —  mot, 

kind  to 
vdnskap,  friendship 
vdnster,  def.  vdnstra,  left;  till 

vanster,  to  the  left 
vdnta  (pd),  I,  wait  (for) 
vdntsal,  -ar,  waiting  room 
vdrdefull,  valuable 
vdrd  (n.),  vdrt,  worth 
vdrld  (l  mute),  -ar,  world 
vasnas,  I,  dep.  v.,  make  noise 
vdxa,  I  la,  grow 
vdxel,  vdxlar,  draft;    utstdlla 

en  — ,  draw  a  draft 
vdxelkontor  (n.)  — ,  exchange 

oflSce 
vdxla,  I,  change,  exchange 

Y 

ypperlig,  excellent 

A 

d,   prep,   and   accented   insep. 

prefix,  on 
ddraga   sig,    st.    v.,    contract, 

incur 
dlder,  dldrar,  age 
dka,  I  la,  ride 
dker,  dkrar,  field 
dngare,  — ,  steamer 
dngMtsforbindelse,  -r,  connec 

tion  by  steamer 
dngMtstur,  -er,  steamboat  trip 
dngmaskin,  -er,  steam  engine 


280 


VOCABULARY. 


dr  (n.),  — ,  year 

drsdag,  -ar,  anniversary 

dsikt,  -er,  opinion 

dtaga  sig,  st.  v.,  undertake 

dter,  adv.   and   accented  var. 

prefix,  again;   back 
dterldmna,  I,  sep.,  return 
iterstd,  irr.  v.,  remain 
Itervdnda,  lib,  sep..  return 
dtmins'tone,  at  least 
dttio,  eighty 


ddel,  def.  ddla,  noble 

dga,  lib,  own 

dgare,  — ,  owner 

dgg  (n.),  —  egg 

dmna,  I,  intend 

dn,  yet;  than  (after  a  com- 
parative) 

dndamdl  (n.),  — ,  purpose 

dndd,  yet,  nevertheless 

dndra,  change;  —  sig,  change 
one's  mind 

dng,  -ar,  meadow 


dnnu,  still,  yet 

dpple   (n.),  -n,  apple 

drende  (n.),  -n,  errand 

d'venledes,  likewise 

dta,  St.  v.,  eat 
Q 

6,  -ar,  island 

dga   (n.),  ogon,  eye 

ogonbUck  (n.),  — ,  moment 

(jgonldkare,  — ,  oculist 

dmsesidig,  mutual 

onska,  I,  wish 

onskan,  indecl.,  wish 

oppna,  I,  open 

ore  (n.),  -n,  Swedish  coin 

over,  prep.,  adv.,  and  accented 
var.  prefix,  over 

overldgga,  irr.  v.,  deliberate 

(iverraska,  I,  surprise 

overraskning,  -ar,  surprise 

uverresa,  -or,  trip  across,  voy- 
age 

overtyga,  I,  convince 

overvaka,  I,  supervise 

overvikt,  overweight 


ENGUSH-SWEDISH. 

For  particulars  of  declension  and  conjugation,  the  Swedish-English  vocabukry 
must  be  consulted. 


a,  an,  en,  ett 
able,  he  — ,  kunna 
about,  om,  omkring 
abroad,  utrikes 
abundant,  riklig 
accident,  olycka,  olycksfall 
accompany,  folja  med 
accomplish,  utratta 


according  to,  enligt 

accordingly,  foljaktligen 

account,  skildring,  rakning; 
on  account  of,  med  anled- 
ning  av,  till  foljd  av 

acquainted,  bekant 

accustom,  vanja 

across,  tvars   (over) 

add,  addera 


VOCABULARY. 


281 


address,  adress 

address,  adressera 

addressee,  adressat 

adopt,  upptaga,  antaga 

adorn,  pryda 

advance  (money),  forskoltera 

adversity,  motgdng 

advertisement,  annons 

advice,  r&d 

advise,  r&da 

afternoon,    eftermiddag;    this 

— ,  i  eftermiddag;  in  the — , 

p3,  eftermiddagen 
afraid  (of),  radd  (for) 
after,  efter 
again,  igen 
against,  emot,  mot 
age,  §,lder 
ago,  for... sedan 
agreeable,  angenam,  behaglig 
ail  (impers.),  fattas 
aim,  rikta 
air,  luft 
alike,  lika 
allow,  tiliata 
almost,  nastan 
alone,  generally  def.,  allena 
along  (as  in  come  — ),  med 
already,  redan 
also,  ocks§, 

although,  ehuru,  fastan 
altogether,  alldeles 
always,  alltid 
American    (n.),  amerikan, 

(adj.),  amerikansk 
among,  bland,  ibland 
amount,  belopp 
amount  to,  belopa  sig  till 
amuse,  roa;  to  amuse  oneself, 

ha  roligt 


amusement,  noje 

amusing,  roande,  rolig 

and,  och 

angle,  meta 

another,  en  annan 

anniversary,  Srsdag 

annoying,  forarglig 

answer,  svara 

any,  n§.gon;  any  longer,  langre 

anything,  nigonting,  nS,got 

appetite,  aptit 

applause,  bifall 

apple,  apple 

approach,  narma  sig 

approval,  bifall 

arm,  arm 

around,  omkring,  om 

arrest,  arrestera 

arrive,  ankomma,  anlanda 

art,  konst 

article,  artikel;   vara 

artist,  konstnar 

as,  som 

ashamed,  skamsen;   to  6e  — , 

skammas    (for) 
ashore,  i  land 

ask,  frSga  (efter),  bedja  (om) 
astonished,   forv&nad;    6e   — , 

forv&nas 
at,  vid   (time,  place) ;   at  the 

house  of,  hos 
attain,  uppnS,,  hinna 
attend   (visit),  besoka,  bevis- 

ta;  —  church,  gk  i  kyrkan 
attention,  uppmarksamhet 
attentive,  uppmarksam 
audience,  auditorium 
author,  forfattare 
automobile,  automobil 
autum.n  day,  hostdag 


Swedish  Grammar 


la 


282 


VOCABULARY. 


aware,  varse;  to  become  —  of, 

bliva  varse 
away,  bort,  borta;  to  go  away, 

g§,  bort;   to  be  away  (out), 

vara  borta 

B 
back,  tillbaka;  back  and  forth, 

fram  och  tillbaka 
back   (v.),  backa 
background,  bakgrund,  fond 
backwards,  baklanges 
bad,  d§,lig,  ond,  elak 
badly,  ilia 
bake,  baka 
baker,  bagare 
band,  band,  musikk&r 
bank,  bank 

barber  shop,  frisersalong 
basket,  korg 
be,  vara;  how  are  you?    Hur 

star  det  till? 
bear,  bara 

beat,  slS;  besegra  (in  games) 
beautiful,  skon,  vacker 
because,  emedan,  ty 
become,   bliva;    what    became 

of  himt  Hvad  blev   det  av 

honom?  —  cloudy,  mulna 
bed,   sang;    go   to  — ,   g§.  till 

sangs 
befit,  passa;   tillkomma 
before    (prep.)     fore;     (adv.) 

forr,  forut;    (conj.)   innan 
beg,  tigga ;  —  for,  bedja  cm 
beggar,    tiggare 
begin,  borja,  begynna 
beginning,  borjan;   in  the  — , 

1  borjan 
behind,  bakom 

being,  vasen;  human  — ,  man- 
niska 


belated,  forsenad,  sen 

belief,  tro 

believe,  tro;   —  in,  tro  pS, 

hell,  klocka 

belong    (to),  tillhora 

bench,  bank,  sate 

beside,     bredvid,    vid;     utono 

(except) 
besides  (prep.)   utom;    (adv.) 

dessutom,  dartill 
best,  bast 

between,  (e)mellan 
big,  stor 

bill,  sedel;  rakning 
bill  of  fare,  matsedel 
bird,  fSgel 
birthday,  fodelsedag 
bite,  bita;  nappa  (of  fish) 
bite,  napp  (of  fish),  bit. 
bless,  valsigna 
blow,  blSsa 
blonde,  Ijus,  blond 
board  (fare),  kost 
board  and  room,  inackordering 
board  (a  train),  stiga  pS,' 
boarder,  inackordering 
boil,  koka 
bone,  ben 
hook,  bok 
booth,   stfind 
boring,  trS,kig 
horn,  fodd;   be  — ,  fodas 
borrow,    ISna;     borrow    from. 

ISna  av 
both,     bida,     bagge;     both... 

and.  bade . . .  och 
boy,  gosse 
branch,  gren 
bread,  brod 
break,  bryta 


VOCABULARY. 


283 


break  off,  bryta  av,  avbryta 

break   out,   bryta   ut 

breakfast,  frukost 

bring,  bringa,  hamta 

1)ring  along,  medfora,  fora  med 

brother,  broder 

brunette,  brunett,  mork 

brush,  borsta 

build,  bygga 

building,  byggnad 

burn,  branna 

burnt  up,  uppbrand 

business,  affar;  do  a  good  — , 

gora  goda  affarer 
business  building,  affarsbygg- 

nad 
but,   men,    (after   a   negative, 

utan) 
butter,  smor 
buy,  kopa 
by,  vid,  bredvid 


cab,   droska 

cabman,  kusk 

calculation,    rakning 

call,  kalla 

call  on,   halsa   pS.    (bos),   be 

soka 
called,  be  — ,  beta 
calm   (adj.),  lugn 
can,  kunna 
captain,  kapten 
car,  vagn,  sp§,rvagn 
card,  kort 
care     (noun),    v§,rd,    skotsel, 

omsorg 
care  (v.),  v^rda,  skota 
careful,  aktsam,  noggrann 
careless,  vS.rdslos,  slarvig 


carelessness,   vardsloshet, 

slarv 
cargo,  last 
carriage,  vagn 
carry,  bara 
cash  (noun),  kontant 
cash   (v.),  inlosa 
castle,  slott 
cat,  katt 

cathedral,  katedral 
cause   (noun),  orsak 
cause  (v.),  fororsaka 
cautious,   forsiktig 
cease,  sluta,  avsluta,  upphora 

med 
celebrate,  fira 
celebrated,  firad,  omtalad 
celebration,  firande 
certain,  saker,  viss 
chair,  stol 

chairman,  ordforande 
challenge,  utmana 
championship,   masterskap 
chance,    tillfalle;     by    chance. 

handelsevis 
change,  andra;  vaxla( money) 
character,   karaktar 
charge,  begara 
charitable,  barmbartig,  valgo- 

rande 
charity,  barmhartighet,  valgo- 

renhet 
charming,    fortjusande 
chat  (noun),  samtal 
chat  (v.),  samtala 
cheat,  bedraga 
check,  polettera 
chicken,  hons,  kyckling 
child,  barn 
chilly,  kylig 


284 


VOCABULARY. 


choose,  valja 

Christmas,  jul 

church,  kyrka 

cigar,    cigarr;    —   dealer,   ci- 

garrhandlare 
circle,  cirkel 
circulation,   omlopp 
city,  stad 
class,  klass 
classic,  klassisk 
clean,  ren 
cleanly,  renlig 
clear,  klar 
r.limate,  klimat 
clock,  klocka 
close  (noun),  slut 
close  (v.),  sluta,  stanga 
cloth,  tyg 
clothes,  klader 
cloudy,  mulen;  become  — , 

mulna 
coat,  rock 
coffee,  kafle 
coin,  mynt,  slant 
cold   (adj.)   kail,   (noun)   for- 

kylning 
collar,  krage 
collide,  kollidera 
comb,  kamm 
come,  komma 

come  (to  a  place),  infinna  sig 
comfort,  trost 
comfortable,  bekvam 
coming,   kommande,   stundan- 

de 
command,  befalla 
common,  allman,  vanlig 
company,   sallskap,   framman- 

de  (guests) 


compartment,   kup6 
compensate,  belona,  ersatta 
compete,  tavla 
complain,  klaga    (over) 
comply,  efterkomma 
composition,  uppsats 
concern,  angS,,  galla 
concert,  konsert 
condition,     forhailande;     till- 

st&nd 
conduct  (noun),  uppforande 
conduct  (oneself),  uppfora  sig 
conductor,  konduktor 
confidence,  fortroende 
conflagration,  brand,  eldsv§,da 
connection,  forbindelse 
consequently,  foljaktligen 
consideration,  betraktande 
consist,  bests,   (av) 
conspire,  sammansvarja  (sig) 
consult,  rkAtrkga. 
constitution,     kroppskonstitu- 

tion 
contain,  innehSlla 
contents,  inneh5.ll 
continue,  fortsatta 
contract,    adraga    sig     (as    a 

sickness) 
converse,   samtala 
conversation,  samtal 
cook,  koka 
cool,  kylig 

correspondent,  korrespondent 
cordial,  hjartlig 
corner,  horn 
cost,  kosta 

costly,  dyrbar,  kostbar 
costume,  kostym 
count,  rakna 
counter,  disk 


VOCABULARY. 


385 


country,  land;    in  the  — ,  pS, 

landet 
country  house,  lantstalle 
couple,  par;   a  couple  of,  ett 

par 
course,  g^ng,  kurs;  of  course, 

naturligtvis 
cousin,  kusin 
cozy,  hemtrevlig 
creamery  butter,  mejerismor 
crew,  besattning 
cross  street,  tvargata 
crowd,  folkmassa 
crowded,  fullsatt,  fuUpackad 
cuff,  manschett 
culture,,  kultur 
cultured,  bildad 
cup,  kopp 
cure  (v.),  bota 
custom,  sed 
cut  (noun),  snitt 
cufiv.),  klippa,  skara,  avmeja 

D 
daily,  daglig 
damage   (v.),  skada 
dark,  mork 
date,  datum 
date  (v.),  datera 
daughter,  dotter 
day,  dag 

daylight,  dagsljus 
dead,  dod 
deal,  del;   a  great  deal,  myc- 

ket,  en  hel  del 
dealer,  handlande 
dear,  kar,  dyr  (price) 
death,  dod 
debt,  skuld 
deceive,  bedraga 
deck,  dack 


degree,  grad 
delay  (noun),  dr6jsm§,l 
deliberate,  betanka,  overvaga 
demand  (noun),  anhSllan,  be- 

garan 
demand  (v.),  anb3,lla 
denominator,  namnare 
deposit,  insatta 
derail,  ursp^ra 
description,  beskrivnlng 
deserve,  fortjana 
design,  anslag;    monster 
desire  (noun),  onskan,  lust 
destroy,  forstora 
die,  do 

different,  olik,  annorlunda 
difference,  skillnad 
difficult,  s\kv 
difficulty,  sv^righet 
diligent,  flitig 
dining  car,  restaurangvagn 
dining  room,  matsal 
dinner,  middag 
direct,  dlrekt 
direction,  h§,ll,  riktning 
dirty  smutsig 
disguise,  forklada 
•dismiss,  skicka  bort 
dispatch,  avsanda 
diverse,  diverse 
divide,  dividera 
do,  gora 
doctor,  doktor 

doctor's  office,  mottagningsrum 
doctor's  fee,  honorar 
dog,  hund 
door,  dorr 
dot,  prick,  punkt 
down  (adv.)  ned;  (prep.)  ned- 

f6r 


386 


VOCABULARY. 


dozen,  dussin 

draft,  vaxel 

drama,  dram,  drama 

draw,  draga;   rita 

drawing  room,  salong 

dress,  klada   (sig) 

drink,  aricka 

drive,  kora 

drop,  slappa  ned,  tappa  (lose) 

druggist,  apotekare 

dry,  torr 

duel,  duell 

durable,  varaktig 

dwelling,  bostad 


each,  var,  varje 

early   (adj.)   tidig;    (adv.)    ti- 

digt 
earn,  fortjana 
eat,  ata 
economical,    sparsam,    ekono- 

misk 
egg,  agg 
eighty,  attio 
either  (conj.),  antingen 
elect,  valja 
electric,  elektrisk 
elegance,   elegans 
emperor,  kejsare 
employees,  betjaning 
empty,  torn 

end  (noun),  slut,  ande 
endure,  fordraga;  bests,;  vara 
enjoyment,   noje 
enough,  nog 
entail,  medfora 
enter,  intrada,  komma  in 


entertain,  underh§,lla,  roa 
entertaining,    roande,    under- 

h&llande 
entirely,  halt  och  hSllet 
entrust,  anfortro 
envious,  avundsjuk 
erect,  uppfora,  uppratta 
errand,  arende 
errand  hoy,  springpojke 
error,  fel,  misstag 
especially,  isynnerhet 
establish,  anlagga,  uppratta 
esteem,  uppskatta 
European,  europ§,  europeisk 
even,  till  och  med;  afven 
evening,  afton,  kvall 
every,  varje,  var 
everybody,  envar,  var  och  en 
exact,  noga,  noggrann 
exactly,  precis 

examine,  examinera,  undersoka 
excellent,  fortrafflig,  ypperlig 
except,  utom 
exchange,  byta,  utbyta 
excursion,  utflykt 
excuse  (v.),  ursakta 
execution,  utforande 
exercise    (noun),   ovning,    ro- 

relse 
exercise  (v.),  utova,  ova,  rora 
expect,  vanta 
expedient,  medel;  r§,d 
expense,  utgift 
expensive,  dyr 
experience,  erfarenhet 
export   (v.),  exportera 
express   (v.),  uttrycka 
express  train,  snalltSg 
eye,  oga 


VOCABULARY. 


287 


face,  ansikte 

factory,  fabrik 

fair  (noun),  marknad 

faithful,  trogen 

fall,  falla,  stupa   (fall  on  the 

battlefield) 
family,  familj ;  —  festival,  fa- 

miljefest 
fainous,  beromd,  ryktbar 
farmer,  lantbrukare 
fast    (speed),    fort,    hastigt 
fast   (unmovable),  fast 
father,  fader 
fault,  fel 
fee,  honorar 
feel,  kanna 
fetch,  harata 

feic,  fS.;  a  feio,  ndgra  (fH) 
field,  §.ker 

fight  (noun),  slagsmS,!,  strid 
fill,  fylla 

finally,  slutligen,  antligen 
find,  finna,  hitta 
fine,  fin,  trevlig,  vacker 
fire,  eld,  eldsv^da 
first,  forst 
fish,  fisk 
fit.  passa 
flag,  flagga 
flee,  fly 
floor,  golv 
flour,  mjol 
floiv,  flyta 
flower,  blomma;   — bed,  blom- 

sterrabatt 
fluent,  flytande 
follow,  folja 
following,  foljande 
food,  mat 


fool,  narr 

football  game,  fotboUspel 

football  team,  fotbollag 

for  (prep.)  for;  (conj.)  for,  ty 

force,  kraft,  styrka 

foreign,  frammande;   utrikes 

foremost,  framst 

forenoon,   formiddag;    in   the 

forenoon,  p9,  formiddagen 
forest,  skog 
forget,  glomma 
fortune,  lycka;  formogenhet 
fraction,  br^k  (arithmetic) 
France,  Frankrike 
Francis,  Frans 
free,  fri 
freeze,  frysa 

freezing  point,  fryspunkt 
French,  fransk 
friend,  van 
friendly,  vanlig 
friendship,  vanskap 
frightened,  forskrackt 
from,   (i)fran 

front,  front;  in  front,  framme 
frost,  frost 
fruit,  frukt 
full,  full 

further,  langre,  vidare 
future,  framtid  • 


game,  spel,  lek 
garden,  tradgSrd 
general,  allman,  vanlig 
general     delivery,     poste     re- 

stante 
generality,  allmanhet 
generally,  vanligen 


288 


VOCABULARY. 


Qerman,  tysk 

Germany,  Tyskland 

get,  f§,,  erhaila,  bekomma 

get  up,  stiga  upp 

girl,  flicka 

give,  giva 

glad,  glad;  I  am  glad,  det  gla- 

der  mig 
glass,  glas 
glide,  glida 
glorious,  harlig 
go,  gh,  resa,  fara 
goal,  m9,l 
God,  Gud 
good,  god,  snail 
good-bye,  farval,  adjo 
goose,  g§,s 

Ootha  Canal,  Gota  kanal 
Gothenburg,  Goteborg 
granary,  lada 
grass,  gras 
great,  stor 
green,  gron 
grreef,  halsa 
greeting,  halsning 
flrrief,  sorg 
grind,  mala 

grow,  vaxa,  blifva    (become) 
grumble,  knota 
guest,  gast    • 
flTtttZf,  skuld 
guilty,  skyldig 

H 

habit,  vana 

Tiair,  h&r 

TiaZf,  halv  (adj.),  halft  (noun) 

ftaZf  hour,  halvtimme 

half-sole,  halvsula 

halfway,  halvvags 


hall,  tambur 
ham,  skinka 
hand,  hand;  at  — ,  till  hands, 

framme 
hand  baggage,  handbagage 
hang,  hanga 
happen,  ske 
happiness,  lycka 
happy,  lycklig,  glad ;  make  — , 

gladja 
harbor,  hamn 
hard,  h§,rd,  sv^r 
harmless,  oskadlig 
hat,  hatt 

haul,  forsla,  kora 
he,  han 

headache,  huvudvark 
health,  halsa 
healthy,  frisk,  halsosam 
hear,  hora 

heart,  hjarta;    by  — ,  utantill 
heart  failure,  hjartforlamning 
heavy,  tung 
heed,  lyda,  giva  akt  pS. 
heel,  hal;  klack  (of  shoe) 
height,  hojd 
help  (noun),  hjalp 
help   (v.),  hjalpa 
her   (gen.   and  obj.),  hennes, 

henne 
herself,  sig 
here,  har 
hesitate,    tveka 
high,  hog 

highly,  hogt,  hogligen,  mycket 
hill,  hojd,  kulle 
him,  honom 
himself,  sig 
hire,  hyra 
Tits,  hans 


VOCABULARY. 


389 


history,  historia 

hold  (noun),  Mil 

hold  (v.),  haila;  —  out,  rac- 

ka  fram 
holiday,  helgdag 
hollow,  iMlig 
home  (noun),  hem;  at — , 

hemma 
home  (adv.),  hem 
honest,  arlig 
hook,  krok 
hour,  timme 
hope    (noun),    hopp 
hope  (v.),  hoppas 
hotel,  hotell 
house,  hus;    at  the  house  of, 

hos 
human,   manskllg;    —   being, 

manniska 
humanity,   mansklighet, 
humor,  lynne 
hungry,  hungrig 
hurry  (noun),  br§,dska;  be  in 

a  — ,  ha  br§,ttom 
hurry    (v.),    skynda,    skynda 

sig 
hurry  up,  skynda  pS, 

I 

ice,  is 

if,   cm 

ill,  sjuk 

illuminated,    illuminerad 

immediately,  genast 

impatient,  otaiig 

important,  viktig 

inclose,  Innesluta,  narsluta 

inclosed,  narsluten 

include,   Inbegripa 

inconvenient,  obekvamt 


indicate,   visa 
induce,  formS, 
industrious,  flitlg 
information,  underrattelse 
inhabitant,  inv§,nare 
injured,  s^rad,  skadad 
ink,  black 

insignificance,   obetydlighet 
insignificant,  obetydlig 
intend,  amna,  vilja 
interest   (noun),  intresse 
interested,  intresserad 
interesting,   intressant 
interrupt,  avbryta 
introduce,  presentera   (for) 
invite,  bjuda,  inbjuda 
invitation,    inbjuaning 
iron  (v.),  stryka 
ironing,  strykning 
island,  6  ' 
it,  det 
Italy,    Italien 


journey,   resa 
joy,  gladje 
jump   (v.),  hoppa 
just,  just 

K 

keep,  behaila,  h&lla 
kilogram,   kilogram,   kilo 
kilometer,   kilometer 
kind   (adj.),  snail,  vanlig 
kind  (n.),  slag 
king,  konung,  kung 
King's   Street,   Kungsgatan 
knock   (v.),  knacka 
know,  veta,  kanna,  kunna 
know   about,  kanna  till 


290 


VOCABULARY. 


lack,   sakna;    impers.,    fattas, 

felas 
lady,  dam 
lake,  sjo,  insjo 
lake  shore,   sjostrand 
lamh   steak   lammstek 
land   (noun),  land 
land  (v.),  landa  (intr.),  land- 

satta  (tr.) 
landscape,  landskap 
language,  spr§,k 
Lapland,  Lappland 
large,   stor 

last   (v.),  vara,  racka 
last  (adj.),  sist;   last  night,  i 

gkr  kvall;   last  year,  i  fjol; 

last  Monday,  i  m^ndags 
late,  sen,  forsenad  * 
laundry,  strykinrattning 

(place) 
laundry,  stryksaker 
lawn,  grasmatta 
lazy,  lat 
lead  (v.),  fora 
learn,   lara 
learned,  lard 

least,  minst;  at — ,  atminstone 
leave   (v.),  lamna,  avresa,  gS 
leave  behind,  kvarlamna 
lecture,   forelasning 
left,   vanster;    to   the  — ,   till 

vanster 
left,  kvarlamnad 
leg,  ben 
lend,  l&na 
less,  mindre 
lesson,  laxa;  lektion 
let,  lata 


letter,  brev;  —  of  credit,  kre- 
ditbrev;  —  of  recommenda- 
tion,   rekommendationsbrev 

lie,  ligga 

lie,  Ijuga 

life,  liv 

like   (adj.)   lik;    (adv.)   as 

likewise,  afvenledes 

like,  tycka  om 

line   (fishing),  rev 

listen,  lyssna;   —  to,  hora  pS 

literature,  litteratur 

little,  liten;   a  little,  lite(t) 

live,  leva,  bo 

load,  last,   borda 

loaf,  kaka 

lock,  l&sa 

long,  l§.ng;    (adv.)    lange 

longer,  langre 

long  (v.),  langta 

long  expected,  lange  vantad 

look,  titta,  blicka;  se  ut  (ap- 
pearance) ;  — at,  se  pS;  look 
for,  soka  efter,  leta  efter 

lose,  forlora,  tappa 

love,  karlek 

lower,  taga  ned;  stryka  (flag) 

luck,   lycka,  tur 
M 

magnificent,  harlig,  storartad 

mail   (noun),  post 

mail  (v),  bara,  lagga  pS  pos- 
ten 

make,  gora;  (induce)  forma 
(att),  f&  (att) 

man,  man,  manniska 

maneuver    (v.),   manovrera 

manner,  satt,  vis 

manufacture,   tillverka 

many,  mSnga 


VOCABULARY. 


291 


market  place,  torg 

mate,  make 

may,  mk,  fS,,  kunna 

meadow,  ang 

meal,  mS,l 

mean   (v.),  mena,  betyda 

means,   medel;    by  vieans   of, 

medelst 
measure,  mktt 
meet,  mota,  traCEa 
melt,  smalta 
mend,  laga 

mention,  namna,  omtala 
merchant,  handlande 
merciful,  barrahartig 
merry,  glad,  munter 
miraculous,  underbar 
messenger  hoy,  telegrambud 
middle,  mitt  (i  mitten) 
mill,  kvarn 
miller,  mjolnare 
minute,  minut 
mirror,  spegel 
misfortune,  olyclva 
miss,  sakna,  torsumma 
mistake   (noun),  mlsstag 
mistake   (v.),  misstaga   (sig) 
Mister  (Mr.),  herr 
modern,   modern 
modest,  blygsam 
moment,  ogonblick 
Monday,   m§,ndag 
money,  pengar;  make  — ,  for- 

tjana  pengar 
money  order,  postanvisning 
month,  mS,nad 
more,  mer,  flere 
morning,  morgon;   to-morrow, 

i  morgon;  this  — ,  i  morse: 

—  paper,  morgontidning 


most,  mest;  most  people,  de 
fiesta 

mother,  moder 

motor  boat,  motorbat 

mountain,  berg 

mourn,  sorja 

mouth,  mun;  mynning  (can- 
non, river) 

move,  flytta 

movement,   rorelse ;    verk 

much,  mycken,  mycket 

multiply,  multiplicera 

museum,  museum 

music,  musik,  spel 

mutual,  omsesidig 

my,  rriin 

N 

namely,  namligen,   that  is  to 

say 
nature,  natur 
near    (adj.)    nar,     (adv.    and 

prep. )   nara 
nearness,  narhet 
need,  behova 

neglect,   forsumma,  underl^ta 
nest,  bo 
7>.cver,  aldrig 
new,  ny 
newness,    nyhet 
news,  nyheter 
newspaper,  tidning 
next,  nast 
next  to,  bredvid 
nice,  hygglig,  snail,  Irevlig 
night,  natt;  to-night,  '  kvall 
night  express,  nattsnallt^g 
no  (adv.),  nej;  (adj.)  ingen 
noble,  adel 
noise,  vasen,  larm 


392 


VOCABULARY. 


noon,  middag;  at  — ,  pS,  mid- 

dagen 
north     (noun)     norr,     (adj.) 

norra  (def.  only) 
northern,   norra    (def.    only), 

nordlig 
Northern   Museum,    Nordiska 

museet 
not,  inte,  icke,  ej 
nothing,   ingenting,   intet 
notice  (y.),  varsebliva 
now,  nu 

number,  nummer,  tal 
numerator,  namnare 
numerous,  talrik 

O 
oats,  havre 
obey,  lyda 
observe,  lakttaga 
occasion,  tillfalle 
occupied,  sysselsatt,  upptagen 
occupy,  sysselsatta,  upptaga 
oculist,  ogonlakare 
of,  av,  om 
oifer  (v.),  erbjuda 
office,  kontor 

office   building,   afEarsbyggnad 
officer,  officer 
often,  ofta 
old,  gammal 
Olympic,  olympisk 
on,  p§, 

on  board,  ombord 
one,   en,    ett;     (indef.    pron.) 

man 
once,  en  gang 
only,  bara,  endast,  blott 
open    (adj.),   oppen;    utspruc- 

kep    (flowers) 
open  (v.),  oppna 


opera,  opera 

opinion,  mening,  tanke 

opportunity,  tillfalle,  lagenhet 

or,  eller,  annars 

order  (noun),  ordning,  reda 

order  (v.),  befalla,  bestalla 

originate,  uppstS, 

otherwise,  annars 

out,  ut,  ute 

over,    over;    kvar;    —    there, 

darborta;     — sleep,    forsova 

(sig) 
overweight,  overvikt. 
owe,  vara  skyldig 
own,  aga 
owner,  agare 

P 
pack,  packa 
page,  sida 

pain   (v.),  plaga;    gora  ont 
painting,  m§,lning,  tavla 
pair,  par 
palace,  palats 
paper,  papper,  newspaper,  tid- 

ning 
parcel,  paket 
pardon,  ursakta 
parents,  foraldrar 
parlor,   formak 
parte,  park 

part,  del;   roll   (theater) 
participate,  deltaga 
pass,  tillbringa 
passage,  overresa 
passenger,  passagerare 
past  (prep,  and  adv.),  forbi 
patience,  tSlamod 
patient,  t§,lig;   patient 
pay,  betala 
peasant,  bonde 


VOCABULARY. 


293 


pen,  penna 

people,  folk 

perch,  abbone 

performance,  forestallning 

perhaps,  kanske,   kanhanda 

permission,  tiliatelse,  lov 

permit,  tiliata 

person,   person,   manniska 

pessimistic,  pessimistisk 

pest,  pest 

physician,  lakare 

picture  gallery,  tavelgalleri 

pick,  plocka 

pick  upp,  taga  upp 

piece,  stycke,  bit 

piece  of  furniture,  mobel 

pill,  piller 

pin,  knappnil 

pirate,  sjorovare 

pitching,  stampning 

placard,   anslag,   plakat 

place,  plats;    in   the  —  of,   i 

stallet  for;   take  the  —  of, 

ersatta 
plaintive,  jamrande 
plan  (noun),  plan 
plan  (v.),  planera 
plant,  plantera,  s§. 
play    (v.),   leka;    spela 
play   (noun),  lek;    spel;    pjis 

(theater) 
pleasant,    angenam,    behaglig, 

trevlig 
please,  behaga 
pleasure,  behag,  noje 
poem,  dikt 
poet,,  diktare,  skald 
point,  punkt,  dot 
poison,  forgifta 
policeman,  poliskonstapel 


polite,  hovlig,  aitig 
politeness,  hovlighet,  artighet 
poor,  fattlg,  stackars,  dilig 
population,  befolkning 
porch,  veranda 
port,  hamn 
porter,  barare 
portrayal,  sklldring 
position,  plats;  stallning 
possible,  mojlig 
postage  stamp,  frimarke 
post  office,  postkontor 
potato,  potatis 
power,  kraft;  makt 
practice  (v.),  praktlsera,  ova, 

utova 
praise,  beromma 
pray,  bedja 
preach,  predika 
preacher,  predlkant 
precious,  dyrbar 
prefer,  foredraga,  hellre 

(heist)  +  verb 
prescribe,  ordinera,  foreskriva 
prescription,  foreskrift,  recept 
present    (adj.),  narvarande 
presentiment,   aning;    have   a 

— ,  ana 
presume,  formoda,  tro  sig 
pretty,  vacker;    (adv.)    tamli- 

gen,  ganska 
prevent,  forhindra 
price,  pris  . 
print,  tryck,  stil 
principle,  princip 
probable,  trolig 
probably,  troligen 
program,  program 
prohibit,  forbjuda 
prohibited,  forbjuden 


294 


VOCABULARY 


prominent,  framstliende 
promise    (v.),    lova 
promoted,  befordrad 
propose,  fbresia 
proposal,  forslag 
propositioyi,  forslag 
protect,   skydda 
protest,   protestera 
proud,  stolt 
pul>lic   (noun),   allmanhet, 

publik 
pubJic  (adj.),  allman,  offentlig 
public  school,  folkskola 
publish,   utgiva 
pupil,  larjunge 
purchase    (noun),    inkop 
purpose,  avsikt 
pursue,   forfolja 
put,  lagga,  satta 
put  atvay.  lagga  bort 

Q 

quality,    kvalitet 

quarrel   (v.),  trata 

quay,  kaj 

quick,   kvick,    hastig,    snabb, 

snar,  rask 
quickly,  fort 
quiet,  tyst 
quite,  ganska,  riktigt,  alldeles 

R 

railway,  jarnvag;  —  accident, 

jarnvagsolycka 
rain  (noun),  regn 
rain   (v.),  regna 
ransom    (noun),   losen 
ransom   (v.),  frikopa 
rapid,  hastig,  snabb 
rather,  hellre 
rare,  sallsynt 


reach,  racka;   reach  out,  rac- 

ka  fram 
I'ead,  lasa 
reader,  lasebok 
ready,  fardig 
realize,  inse 
really,   verkligen 
reason,  orsak;    by  reason   of. 

till  foljd  av 
reasonable,  resonabel 
recall,  minnas,  komma  ih&g 
receive,  erhS.lla,  fi,  mottaga 
recently,  nyligen 
reception  room,  mottagnings- 

rum 
recipient,  mottagare 
recite,   upplasa 
reconcile,   torsona 
recognize,  igenkanna 
recommend,  rekommendera 
recommendation,  letter  of,  re- 

kommendationsbrev 
red,  rod 
redeem,  inlosa 
reduce,  reducera 
reelect,  betanka  (sig) 
regard,   anse,   betrakta 
registered,   rekommenderad 
regulate,  justera 
relate,  beratta,  omtala 
relation,   forh&llande 
relative,  slakting 
remain,  bliva,  forbliva;   inne- 

sta  (money  in  bank) ;  stan- 

na;  MerstS. 
remainder,  rest 
remember,  minnas,  erinra  sig 
remind,  erinra  (om),  pSminna 
rent,  hyra 
reputation,  rykte 


VOCABULARY 


29o 


request  (noun),  begaran 

request    (v.)    anh^lla,   begara 

respected,  respekterad 

rest  (noun),  vila 

rest  (v.),  Vila  sig 

restaurant,   restaurang 

result,  resultat 

retain,  beh3,lla 

return,    Sterlamna     (tr.    v.) ; 

komma  tillbaka,  S,tervanda 
revenge,  hamnas 
revolver,  revolver 
rewrite,  skriva  om 
rich,  rik 

ride  (noun),  a,ktur 
ride   (v.),  rida    (horse);    §,ka 
right,  ratt;   he  — ,  ha  ratt 
right,   hoger;    to   the  — ,   till 

hoger 
ring,  ring 

ring  up,  ringa  pS,   hos 
rink,  skridskobana 
ripe,  mogen 
ripen,  mogna 
rise,  stiga  upp 
river,    flod;     —     bank,     flod- 

strand 
road,  vag 
rock  (v.),  gunga 
rolling,  rullning 
room,  rum 

row,  ro;   — boat,  roddbat 
ruin,  ruin 
rumor,  rykte 

run,  springa;   gS.    (watch) 
Russia,  Ryssland 

S 
sad,  sorgsen,  sorglig,  tr&kig 
sail,  segla;  — boat,  segelbSt 
sailor,  sjoman 


salt,  salt 

salute,  halsa  (p2.) 

sample,  prov 

sandwich,  smorgSs 

satisfied,  bel&ten,  nojd 

save,  spara;  radda  (rescue) 

say,  saga 

scenery,   sceneri 

school,  skola 

score,  tjog 

scratch,  riva  i 

seam,  som 

sea,  sjo,  hav 

seasick,  sjosjuk 

seat,  sate,  soffa,  plats 

security,  sakerhet;   pant 

see,  se,  traffa 

seek,  soka 

seem,  synas;  it  seems  to  me, 
det  synes  mig 

seldom,  sallan 

sell,  salja 

semester,  semester;  termin 

send,   skicka 

send  for,  skicka  efter 

send  away,  skicka  bort 

sensible,   forstandig 

serious,  allvarlig,  allvarsam, 
svS,r 

sermon,  predikan 

servant,  tjanare ;  servants 
(coll.),  betjaning 

service,  tjanst;  betjaning  (at- 
tendance) 

settle,  avgora,  uppgora 

seven,  sju 

several,  flera,  atskilliga 

share   (noun),  del 

she,  hon 

shine,  skina 


296 


VOCABULARY 


shiny,  skinande,  blank 

ship,  skepp,  fartyg 

shirt,  skjorta 

shoe,  sko 

shoot,  skjuta 

shore,  strand 

short,  kort 

shout,  ropa,   skrika 

show,  visa 

shut,  stanga 

shut,  stangd 

sick,  sjuk 

sickness,  sjukdom 

side,  sida;  to  the  — ,  hi  sidan 

sight,  syn;  anblick,  Ssyn 

signature,  namnteckning 

signify,  betyda,  mean 

since,   sedan    (time),   emedan 

(cause) 
sing,  sjunga 
sink,  sjunka 
sister,  syster 
six,  sex 
sit,   sitta 
situated,  belagen;    be  — ,  lig- 

ga,  befinna  sig 
skate    (noun),   skridsko 
skate  (v.),  S.ka  skridsko 
skating  rink,  skridskobana 
skillful,  skicklig 
sleep   (noun),  somn 
sleep  (v.),  sova 
sleepy,  somnig 
slice  (noun),  skiva 
slow,  ]d,ngsam 
slowly,  sakta 
slow  up,  sakta 
small,  liten 
smile  (v.),  le 
smoker,  rokare 


smokestack,  skorsten 
smoking,  rokning 
smooth,  jamn,  blank 
snow  (noun),  sno 
snow  (v.),  snoa 
so,  sh,  jas3. 
so  that,  sS,  att 
society,  societet;   forening 
sofa,  sofEa 
sometimes,  ibland 
some,  n&gon 
somewTiat,  n§.got 
somewhere,  n&gonstades 

(-stans) 
son,  son 
song,  s§,ng 
soon,  snart,  strax 
sore,  om;  ond 
sorrow,  sorg 
sorry,  ledsen 
soup,  soppa 
southern,  sodra,  sydlig 
souvenir  postal,   vy^:ort 
sow,  sk 
spare,   skona 
speak,  tala 
spectacles,  glasogon 
speech,  tal 
spend    (money),   giva   ut;    — 

time,  tillbringa 
splendid,  praktig 
sport,  idrott 
spring,  v§,r 

spring  chicken,  kyckling 
spring  festival,  vS,rfest 
sprout  (noun),  brodd 
sprout  (v.),  gro 
stamp,  frimarke;   without  — , 

ofrankerad 
start  (v.),  starta,  borja,  avresa 


VOCABULARY 


297 


state,  Stat 

station,  station 

stay,  stanna 

steak,   stek 

steal,  stjala,  stjala  bort 

steamboat,  Sngare,  angb&t 

steam  engine,  angmaskin 

step  (v.),  stiga;  —  up,  forth, 

stiga  fram 
still,  annu 
stop,  stanna 
store,  bod,  butik 
stormy,  stormig 
story,  berattelse;    vSning    (of 

a  house) 
strange,  frammande 
street,  gata 
street  car,  spirvagn 
strength,  styrka,  kraft 
strife,  strid,  gral 
strike,  s\k 
stroll,  vandra 
strong,  stark 
student,  student 
study  (noun),  studium 
study  (v.),  studera 
stupid,  dum 
style,  stil 
suburb,  forstad 
succeed,  lyckas 
successful,  framg&ngsrik,  lyc- 

kad 
sudden,  hastig,  haftig,  snabb 
suddenly,  plotsligt 
sugar,  socker 
suffer,  lida 
suit   (noun),  kostym 
suit  (v.),  passa 
suitable,  passande 


summer,   sommar;    last  — ,   i 

somras 
summon,  kalla 
sun,  sol 

sunbeam,  solstr§,le 
Sunday,    sondag;     last    — ,    i 

son dags 
superintend,  overvaka 
supervision,  uppsikt 
supper,  kvallsmat,   sup6 
sure,  saker;  to  be  — ,  nog,  vis- 

serligen 
surely,  sakert,  sakerligen 
surprise  (noun),  overraskning 
surprise   (v.),  overraska 
swallow,  svalja 
Sweaen,  Sverige 
sweet,  sot,  alsklig 
swing   (v.),  gunga 


table,  bord;   set  the  — ,  duka 

tailor,  skraddare 

take,  taga;  —  a  walk,  g§,  ut 
och  g&,  promenera;  —  time, 
droja;  —  after,  br&s  p^ 

talk  (noun),  samtal 

talk  (v.),  tala,  samtala 

ta^te,  smaka 

teach,  lara 

teacher,  larare 

tear,  riva 

tedious,  trakig 

telegram,  telegram 

telegraph,   telegrafera 

tell,  beratta,  omtala,  tala  om, 
saga  at,  till 

telephone,  telefonera 

ten,  tio 

tennis,  tennis 


Swedish   Grammar. 


208 


VOGABULAliY 


terrible,  forfarlig 

test  (noun),  prov 

than,  an 

thank,  tacka 

tJiat,  (rel.)  som;   (dem.)  den- 

ne,  den  dar;    (conj.)   att 
theater,  teater 
then,   dS,,   sedan 
there,  dar 
therefore,  darfor 
thereupon,  darpS,  sedan 
thermometer,  termometer 
think,  tanka,  tycka 
this,  denna,  detta 
thought,  tanke 
thresh,  troska 
threshing  floor,  loge 
throat,  hals 
through,   genom 
throw,  kasta 
thus,  sS,,  s3,lunda 
ticket,    biljett;    —   office,   bil- 

jettkontor 
tidy,  renlig,  ordentlig 
time,  tid;   have  — ,  hinna 
iime  (counting),  gSng 
time  table,  tidtabell 
timid,   radd 
tip,   drickspengar 
tired,  trott 
to-day,  i  dag 
together,  tillsammans 
tolerate,  t&ia,  fordraga 
to-morrow,  i  morgon 
tongue,  tunga 
to-night,  i  kvall 
too.  for,  ocksS 
tooth,  tand 
toothache,  tandvark 
town,  stad 


torment   (v.),  pl3.ga 

train,   t§.g 

transform,  forvandla 

travel,  resa,  f^ra 

travel  (noun),  resa 

treat,  behandla;  bests,;  bemo- 

ta;  —  about,  handla  om 
treatment,  behandling 
tiee,  trad 
trick,  spratt 

trifle,  sm§,sak,  obetydlighet 
trip,  resa,  tur 
trouble   (noun),  svSrighet, 

bra,k 
trouble  (v.),  besvara,  pliga 
true,  sann 
try,  forsoka 
tuition,  skolavgift 
turn   (v.).  vanda  (om) 
turn  (noun),  tur 
twenty,   tjugu 
twice,  tvk  ganger 
two,  tvk 

U 
umbrella,  paraply 
uncle,  farbror 
under,  under 
understand,  forstS. 
undertake,  foretaga,  ataga  sig 
uneasy,  orolig 
unfavorable,  ogynnsam 
unfortunate,  olycklig 
unfortunately,    olyckligtvis, 

tyvarr 
union,  union 
unit,  (en)  hel 
unpack,   packa   upp 
unpleasant,   tr^kig 
until,   till,    tills    (conj.) 


VOCABULARY 


299 


unusual,  ovanlig 

upon,  pS. 

upset,  stjalpa 

usage,  sed 

use    (noun),   bruk 

use  (v.),  bruka,  anvanda 

useful,  nyttig 

usual,  vanlig;  as — ,  som  van- 

ligt 
usually,  vanligen 


vacant,  ledig,  torn 

vacation,  ferier;  semester 

valise,  resvaska 

valley,   dal 

value  (noun),  varde;  have  a 
— ,  galla 

valuable,  vardefull 

vai'iance,  be  at,  oense 

various,  olika 

Vasa  Street,   "Vasagatan 

vegetables,   gronsaker 

vehement,  haftig 

very,  mycket;  with  negative 
vidare,  varst 

vessel,  fartyg 

vestibule,  tambur 

vicinity,  narhet 

view,  utsikt 

villa,  villa 

village,  by 

violent,  haftig,  vSldsam,  sud- 
den 

visit   (noun),  besok 

visit  (v.),  besoka,  halsa  pk 
(hos) 

voice,  rost 

voyage,  overresa 


W 
tcagon,  vagn 
wait,  vanta   (pft) 
waiter,  uppassare,  vaktmasta- 

re 
waiting  room,  vantsal 
wake  up,  vakna 
walk  (noun),  spatsertur 
ivander,  vandra 
want    (v.),    onska,    vilja    ha; 

sakna 
icarm,  varm 
wash   (v.),  tvatta 
wash,    washing,    tvatt,    tvatt- 

ning 
watch,  fickur,  klocka 
watchmaker,  urmakare 
water  (noun),  vatten 
water  (v.),  vattna 
way,  vag;    satt,  vis 
iceak,  svag 
icealthy,  rik 
weapon,  vapen 
weather,  vader 
Wednesday,  onsdag 
week,  vecka 
tveigh,  vaga 
weight,  vikt,  tyngd 
weighty,  viktig 
uell,   val,    frisk,   bra;    —  off. 

valbargad ;  —  read,  belast 
wet,  vkt 
wheat,  vete 
lohen.  nar 
where,  var 
which,      (interrog.)      vilken; 

(rel.)   vilken,  som 
while  (conj.),  medan 
lohile  (noun),  stund 
whither,  vart 


300 


VOCABULARY 


who,    (interrog.)  vem;  (rel.) 

som,  vilken 
whole,  hel 
wholesale     merchant,     gross- 

handlare 
wholly,  helt  och  h§.llet 
wife,  hustru 
wind  up,  draga  upp 
window,  fonster 
wine,  vin 
wing,  vinge 
winter,  vinter;    last  winter,  i 

vintras 
wipe,  torka;   —  off,  torka  av 
wise,  klok 

wish  (noun),  onskan 
wish  (v.),  onska 
with,  hos,  med 
within,    inom,    innanfoi 
without,  utan 


wonder  (noun),  under 
wonder   (v.),  undra 
wonderful,   underbar 
word,  ord 

work   (noun),  arbete;  verk 
work  (v.),  arbeta 
workingman,  arbetare 
world,  varld 
worn  out,   utsliten 
worried,  orolig 
worth  (adj.),  vard 
write,  skriva 

Y 
year,  §lt 

yell  (v.),  skrika 
yellow,  gul 
yes,  ja,  jo 
yesterday,  i  gS,r 
yet,  an,  annu;  andS, 
you,   du,   ni 


CONDENSED  INDEX  OF  SUBJECTS. 

The  reference  is  to  sections.     In  general  only  the  first  of  successive  sectioni 
on  the  same  topic  is  indicated. 


Accentuatiorij     33. 

decent-stress,  simple  words,  34  ;  com- 
pounds, 35  ;   foreign,   38. 

Accent,    musical,    39. 

Address,  see  Pronouns  ;  of  letter,  344. 

Adjectives:  declension,  109;  indefi- 
nite, 110  ;  use  of  indefinite  declen- 
sion, 113 ;  definite,  122 ;  use  of, 
124 ;  pronominal,  see  demonstra- 
tive, interrogative,  etc. ;  compared, 
303. 

Adverbs:  form,  317,  364 ;  position, 
179 ;    compared,    318, 

Alphabet,    1. 

Apostrophe,  130,  a. 

Articles,  62 ;  definite,  68 ;  postposi- 
tive, 69,  70,  71,  79 ;  generic  and  ab- 
stract, 74  ;  distributive,  338  ;  syn- 
tax, app. ;  prepositive,  73  ;  use  of, 
126  ;  indefinite.  63  ;  syntax,  64  and 
app. 

Auxiliaries:  hava,  65,  96;  vara,  66, 
96  ;  skola,  143  ;  bliva,  188  ;  varda, 
190  ;  modal,  see  modal  auxiliaries ; 
omission  of,   299. 

Capital   letters,    45. 

Cardinal  numbers,  324 ;  remarks  on 
325 ;    formations   from,    339. 

Cases,  129  ;  syntax  of,  131. 

Causative,    lata,    262. 

Comparison,  adjective,  303  ;  by  auxil- 
iar3%  308;  of  equality,  312;  abso- 
lute, 315  ;  adverbs,  318. 

Compound  verbs,   204. 

Concord,  gender,  56  ;  adjectives,  116  ; 
sing,  for  plur.  in  verbs,  67,  c. 

Conjugation:  87,  97,  136,  143,  152, 
158,  180,  188. 

Conjunctions,  coordinating,  371 ;  gen- 
eral connectives,  372 ;  adverbial 
conjunctions,  374 ;  subordinating, 
377. 


Date,  expressions  of,   341. 
Declension,    of   nouns,    76 ;    first,    77  ; 

second,  80  ;  third,  83  ;  fourth,  105  ; 

fifth,    118;    irregularities,    127    and 

app.;  foreign,  127,  g;  proper,  128; 

uf    adjectives,     see    adjectives ;     of 

pronouns,  see  pronouns. 
Demonstratives,      195 ;      remarks     on, 

200  ;  uses  of,  201. 
Dependent    clauses,   word   order   after, 

104,    2;    omission    of   the   auxiliary 

in,  299. 
Deponent  verbs,   194. 
Double  forms,  in  nouns,  app. 

Foreign  words,  pronunciation  of,  18,  4, 
note;  21,  1;  22,  note,  23,  note;  ac- 
centuation  of,    38 ;    nouns,    127,    g. 

Future  tenses:  form,  143 ;  use  of 
294  ;  present  used  for  future,  290  ; 
expresison  of  pure  futurity,  296. 

Gender,  55. 

Genitive,    132 ;    uses    of,     133 ;    with 

nouns   of   measure,    134 ;    objective, 

135. 

Imperative,   144 ;   substitutes,   147. 

Imperfect,   291. 

Impersonal   passive    187,    243. 

Impersonal  verbs,  241. 

Indefinite  pronouns  and  adjectives, 
265  ;  pronouns  only,  265  ;  pronouns 
and    adjectives,    270. 

Infinitive,  300;  to  express  purpose, 
165,  2  ;  att  omitted,  300 ;  preposi- 
tions with  infinitive,  302. 

Inseparable  prefixes,  205. 

Interjections,    381, 

Interrogatives,   214 ;  remarks,  216. 

Measure,  nouns  of,   134,  338. 
Modal    verbs,    forms,    251 ;    uses    of, 
252 ;   senses  of,  255. 


302 


INDEX. 


yegatives,  position,   179. 

Nominative  case,  131,  130,  c,   134. 

Nouns,  declension,  76 :  first,  77  ;  sec- 
ond, 80 ;  third,  83  ;  fourth,  105  ; 
fifth,  118 ;  irre^larities,  127  and 
app. ;  gender,  55  ;  foreign,  127,  g ; 
compound,  35  ;  of  measure,  13-t, 
338  ;    verbal,    230. 

Number,  singular  of  verbs  for  English 
plural,   67,   c. 

Numerals,  cardinal,  324  ;  325  ;  ordinal, 
324,  331  ;   formations  from,  339. 

Omission,  of  auxiliary  in  dependent 
clauses,  299  ;  of  prepositive  definite 
article,    126,    2. 

Order  of  words,  of  verb  (normal,  in- 
verted), 104,  1,  2  ;  questions,  104, 
2  ;  adverbs,  179 ;  object  with  vari- 
able verb-compoimds,  210 ;  na^ou- 
titiff,  ingenting,    268,    2. 

Paradigms,  see  nouns,   adjectives,    etc. 

Participle,  present,  226  ;  past,  233  ; 
past  participle  and  supine,  240. 

Passive,  180 ;  in  -s,  181 ;  with  auxili- 
aries (bliva,  varda,  vara);  compar- 
ison of  passives  in  -s  and  with 
bliva,  192  ;  agent  with  passive,  183  ; 
substitute  for,  184  ;  apparent  or 
false  passive,  185  ;  idiomatic  mean- 
ings, 186 ;   impersonal,  187. 

Past  tense,  291. 

Perfect   tense,   form,    94,   6 ;   use,   293. 

Personal,  names,  128,  130,  a;  pro- 
nouns,   139. 

Possessives,  172 ;  reflexive  possessive 
sin,   174 ;  substitute  for,  178. 

Prefixes,  inseparable,  204 ;  variable, 
207 ;  position  of  object,  210 ;  ac- 
cent, 211 ;  for  and  fore,  211,  1. 

Prepositions,  345 ;  uses,  348 ;  351 : 
357,    360. 

Present  tense,   290. 

Principal  parts,  of  strong  and  ir- 
regfular  verbs,  app. 

Pronominal  adjectives,  see  demonstra- 
tives,  indefinite,  etc. 

Pronouns,  personal,  139 ;  in  address, 
67,  a,  b;  use  of  title  instead,  142; 


reflexive,  150,  intensified,  248,  note; 
'possessive,  172  ;  demonstrative,  195  ; 

interrogative,     214;     relative,    219; 

reciprocal,    250 ;    indefinite,    265. 
Proper  nouns,  128. 
Pronunciation,  2 — 42. 
I'linctuation,   50. 

Quantity,   2;   long  ni   and   n,   3,   note. 

Reciprocal,  pronoun,  250 ;  reciprocal 
sense  of  the  passive,  186,  a. 

Relatives,  219  ;  remarks  222 ;  omis- 
sion   of,    224. 

Separable   prefixes,    207. 

Subjunctive.  158  ;  uses  of,  163  ;  wish. 
164  ;  purpose,  165  ;  concession,  166  ; 
potential,  167  ;  (condition)  unreal, 
171. 

Supine,  91. 

Superlative,  see  Comparison ;  distrib- 
utive,  316  ;   absolute,   315. 

Syllabication,  51  ;  compound  words, 
54. 

Tenses  (forms),  see  Paradigms; 
(uses),  present,  290;  imperfect, 
291  ;  perfect,  293  ;  future,  294  ;  in 
unreal  conditions,  171  ;  prog^ressivc, 
93  ;  290,  note ;  292,  note ;  emphat- 
ic,  93. 

Time  of  day,  336;  date,  335,  341. 

Umlaut,   14. 

Verbs,  weak,  88 ;  strong,  89 ;  first 
conjugation,  90 ;  second  conjuga- 
tion, 97  ;  third  conjugation,  136  ; 
fourth  conjugation,  152 ;  irregular 
verbs,  168  ;  passive,  180  ;  imperson- 
al, 241  ;  reflexive,  245  ;  modal,  251  ; 
number,  67,  c ;  list  of  principal 
parts,  strong  and  irregular  verbs, 
app. 

Verbal  nouns,    230. 

Vowels,  quantity,  2 ;  hard  and  soft. 
13 ;  modification,  14. 

treat  t;er6»,   88. 

Weight,  nouns  of,  134,  338. 


SWEDISH  NATIONAL 
SONGS 


Dane  liksom  askan,  broder. 


Marcia. 


J.  H.  Stunz. 


/ 


Da-ne  lik  som  as-kan,  brci-der,  hogt  v&r  fosterlandaka  s&ng! 


^sv»Ht Nr-J ^^ — '^3r^ i — ^-^r^ f5-J— •-r'S^—  , 


yi^t£E53EK 


Pul-sen  briuner,  hjartat  gloder;  marsch  fram&t  annu  en  g&ug! 


:p=b: 


^e 


fcfc:6=A^ 


w=--^ 


id=«^^ 


■0^-^- 


S§,ng-en  ild  -  la  kans-lor  fo  -    der,  hjar-tata  nyckel  heter  sang. 


M 


p 


w 


Sangen  ad-la  kanslor  foder, 

M5,    vi    da 


^ 


to  -   ner 


^^^£^ 


MS,    vi       dS.       i         to  -  ner         svii     -      -      ra 

M&  vi     da        i         to   -   ner 


m 


^ 


-t- 


±1 


-ii^-ir 


j*  >i  ft  «i  ^^ 


-s- 


:p=ti: 


n 


SV& 


ra      tro-hets-e   -  den     hand    i 


hand; 


n^iL_^r5 


'1    r>n   M  ^^^ 


i 


23: 


rib 


1*1- 


tro-hets-e  -  den        hand  i  hand; 

sva      -      -      ra      tro-hets-e   -   den    hand    i         hand; 


:^iHt^ 


-t— t-^r^— -^ 


^  M  I*  1  ^^ 


3 


;J==t 


/ 


^ 


^ 


^-  ^  ^ 


3i?f 


-#^-^ 


-*-i-#- 


"^^~^  i     p  I        I  i     b    b' 

liv  och  blod  for  Sver-ges  a    -     ra,    hell!  vart  dy-ra  fo8 -ter- 


^J^Ajv^ 


-^  .0-^    fS 


E 


p^ 


^E^^ 


^^^r> 


^^^^rn 


-^^ 


M 


^^ 


^^ 


12^ 


:f=^ 


land!                       Liv  och  blod  for  Sver-ges  a 
Liv  och  blod 


tjHhI- 


^ 

yjT 


-J: 


J.  J  t  f 


I 


iS 


^P=r4=4 


:^ 


Liv  och  blod 


fefe 


£ 


ri- 


a 


^i-D*'^i   i 


^ 


i^ 


? 


*  •'••  •■ 


' 0  ■<$► 


^ 


8va    -    ra      trog-na  bro-der  hand  i     hand!  Ma  vi   hand! 


I 


I 


^^^ 


i>— r 


^ 


D&ne  liksom  &skan,  broder— 2. 


J.  Jaus,  efier  6Btnn>TViG. 


Dalkarlasi,ng. 


Marseh. 


0.   LiNDBIjiD. 


/ 


^ ^    j)        ^- 


^^ 


^^^±^^zi:zj=r:z=g 


Jag    vet      ett    land     l&ngt  upp     i     h6  -  ga  nord,   ej 


^eIe^^ 


iss 


T— •—  -»  •  -1*— 


-; — »- 


.    •    J.  -»l — p- 


S3 


^ 


•    |_» 


3=^ 


varmt  och  rikt    som  so-derns  lander,  men  hjftr-tan  klap-pa 


iM 


g^f^H^g^^gg 


j»=: 


Hi    ^    ^    ^    l=J 


/ 


=^ 


it^ 


^   ^.  ^   ^ 


?^^ 


?^ 


•  •  • — w 


-4-  -0-  -J::  J-  j:: 


3S^ 


dar  for  fos-ter-jord,och  man-dom  bor,  ja,  man  -  dom  bor 


y^-g  tS '  ";^^^=g=^=b= 


-I       D   P   D 


:^fe 


m 


d: 


-t5-N 


^. 


3r^-£S: 


75^- 


:^=3=J= 


^=^ 


a^ 


^=^ 


-^^^^^ 


Sil  -  jans  gro  -  na  stran -der;     och  sko  -  gar  su  -  sa   dar   i 


P 


Ud^^^^^^^ 


dys  -ter  prakt,  och  ill  -  var  bru  -  sa  dar  fran  trakt  till  trakt. 

-f>  -    -  -    -  J    -    -        J. 


§S^ 


i 


-•-•  -•-  -#- 


^t^J^ 


^-^- 


^^"=|=b^=^^E^EEF=^=E^| 


/ 


i±=f5: 


^1        fe 


a 


^ 


:5=t 


Ett  har  -  ligt  land,  ett  hfir  -  ligt  land,  I     go  -  de    da  -  la- 

fi-,f  •  f-  ff-.f-  rip   -r  fi- 

-I Y- h 1- ! 1 - 


--^ 


9te 


rr^  ^  te=t=t=t=  it=rtz=zt==t=  ±==  i 


:ti^i?t 


i 


decrease. 


PP 


i 


3 


4=fe=|it| 


mftn,     I      go  -  de     da   -   la-mRn!  Och         vem  det 


ia 


W^^ 


I        go  -  de       da 


la  -  mSn!  Och  vem  det 


d=i 


/l 


i^ 


3 


:^3ri 


=,;= 


^-t-'g^ #-r-#--g! 


ia 


^  i  -^  JTT^-* 

landet  en  gang  sett,  hanlangtarditjlftngtar  dit     1-  gen 

— |- — |-      L      ±3 ^  .       -■  ^^ f5^ 


*e£ 


^^^ 


^^ 


f=p= 


ttr: 


Dalkarlag&nt:— 2. 


G.   NYBIjIEUS. 


Mitt  hemlands  dal. 


Andante, 
mf 


Pfbil. 


1.  Var    dof  -  tar    en   blom  -  ma    sa      skon       (sa 

2.  Var    tin  -  nes    en     him  -  mel    s&      bla  (8& 


skein), 

bii), 


P& 


£ 


-»-    Jt-    4- 


P 


'ff'Y  i» #-* — • — •■ 


:•— ^ 


* 


i 


lT=3=i3S=t=J=:l=^ 


i      ^^ 

var  sjung  -  er    en       ik  -   gel    si      nojd       (sS, 
var    stri,  -  lar    vSl      so  -   len    sa      varm      (8& 


f-^-t^^-r- 


*: 


^^-^ 


i 


nojd), 
varm), 


P 


m 


^m 


^=^ 


■* — B 


m 


i 


^=t 


a^ 


'^p\ 

var     sor  -  lar    en      kal  -   la      s&      ren         (sS, 
var    kSn  -  de  ditt    hjjir  -  ta     du      sla         (du 

^-        -•-.      M.      JL.        ^.      _•-      -f-       -jf.  ^^ 


ren), 
sl&) 


P^ 


9« 


?=* 


^ 


iiitE} 


s 


K=r 


Stu 


s 


sfl      klar    ned  fr&n  klip  -  pi  -  ga      hojd     (fran   hojd), 
sa    friskt      i      din    sval  -  Ian  -  de      barm     (din   barm), 


it=t 


«^ 


i^ 


ri<. 


■• •t- 


«=*i 


ISt 


var    flak  -  tar    viil    vin  -  den    sk      mild      och     sval 
var      £U  -  sar    sa    Ijuvt    det      i        sko  -  gens    sal 


i^-?- 


m 


f=i- 


8oiX).    Alt.  el.  Bas. 
mf 


^ 


=Pt 


^ 


# 


P 


som      i  min  dal,         som    i    mitt  hem-lands  dal, 


^a 


^^ 


2i=:*; 


t 


som      i  min    dal,        som      i  min         dal, 


P^ 


»: 


♦ — ^-i^ 


^^. 


TX 


^^=^ 


3t±^ 


^ 


min   dal,     som     i      mitt  hem-lands  dal? 


f)    r)    D 


^ 


j=p  y  j    [j_^f-^zg^zin— j— 1^ 


min    dal,     som     i      mitt  hem-lands  dal ^ 


PI 


.«L        JL. 


^— kr- 


1 


fep^ 


-*-^ 


-^ 


"b    D    p= 


* — 5^ 


Mitt  liemlands  dal— 2. 


Andante  maestoso. 

/ 


Du  gamla,  du  fria. 

Folkmelodi  fran  Norrland. 


r 


1.  Du  gam  -  la,  du  fri  -  a,  du  fjall-ho-ga  Nord,du  tys  -  ta,  du  ■ 

2.  Du  tro-narp&min-nenfrSn  forn-sto  ra-dar,    da    a  -  ratditt 

* ^ W 0 — la— rl ^— • — 0 , 


§2^ 


^ 


5^ 


-» — 0—^-0- 


r 


f— t^^-f- 


^P=it 


gltid-je-rl-  ka,  sko   -    na!      Jag  hal  -  sar  dig,  va  -  nas-te 
namnflogo-  ver  jor   -    den;    jag  vet,   att  du    ftr    och  du 


p^f 


iandup-pajord,dinsol,dinhim-mel,di-naung-dergro  -  na! 
blirvad  du  var,  ack,  jagvill  le  va,jagvilldo  i     Nor  -  den! 


^=^ 


U^ 


p=^ 


^=1c 


^ 


ff 


p  p 


fen. 


I 


:^=^5=:^: 


:^=^: 


-f — ij— f — ^ — j — 1- 
-* i — w — w • — •- 


-0-r- 


Ja,      jag   vill    le  -  va,  jag   vlll   do       i       Nor  -    den! 


i>-i^^^jM;---^J^ 


i 


R.  Dtbeck 


Andante. 
P 


3E£ 


Fjariln  vingad  syns  pa  Haga. 

C.  M.  Bellman. 

gT  I   rK' 


4=^=*^ 


f^^^^pi^m 


•riazS 


^  u  r  I   ,   1  , 

1.  Pja-riln  ving-ad  syns  pa  Haga  mellandimmors  frost  och  dun 

2.  Haga,    i  dittsko-te   ro-jes  grS-sets  brodd  och  gro-na  plan. 


^  r  IF  F"Tllf=^'^^g 


§5e 


l^  D  II    I    I 


'-V- 


^^^^^^^ 


sig  sitt  gro-na  skjul  til  -  la  -  ga  och  i  blom-man  sin  pau-Iun. 
Stolt  i     di  -  na  rann-lar  hci-jes,  gung-an-de,  den  vi  -  ta    svan. 


Mins-ta  krllk  i  karr  och  sy    ra,  nyss  av  so-  lens  var-ma  vSckt, 
Langsturskogensgle-sa  kam-rar  ho-ras  ta  -  ta    §,  -  ter-skall 

.i 


i 


^=^ 


W^ 


h    r   -^   -S-   -0-   -4-   -#-  -•-  I  ti*  I        1 


i 


:^^ 


I 


till  en  ny  hog-tid  -  lig    y  -  ra     el  -  das  vid  se  -  fi  -  rens  flakt. 
anfr&ndengra-ni-ten  hamrar,  an  franyx'   i   bjork  och  tall. 


,-tiifJS^. 


;l»-k 


^ 


^rrn 


% 


i 


Vart  land. 


Maestoso. 


F.  Pacids. 


espregg. 


1.  V&rtland,v&rtland,v&rtf()8-ter-land,ljudh6gt,ody-raord!  Ej  " 

2.  Vi  ai-ska  vara  strom-mars  brua  och  vara  backars  sprang,deii 

3.  Din  blom-ning, sluten  an  i  kn()pp,skall  mogna ur  sitt  tv&ng; se, 


^msi 


iw^-t)-^\ 


--4-p- 


6- 


^^tHR 


:^ 


^ 


.^-^ 


=P2- 


^^ 


:P=|C 


-ti 


dim. 


lyft8enhojdmothiinlenarand,ejaauksendal,ejsk61jseustran(i,nier 
mor-ka  sko-gens  dyst  ra  sus,  vSrstjarDenatt,vart8ommarlju3, allt, 
urv4rkarlekskallgaoppdittlj\i3,dinglans,diufr6jd,ditthopp,och 


f:^A^2 


3=1: 


^=P^ 


-t^-^ 


^5=^ 


rit. 


2?: 


1 


^- 


IT 


al3  -  kad  an  v2,r  bygd  i  nord, 
allt,  vad  hSrsom  syn,  som  s&ng 
hogre  klinga  skall  en  gang 


an  vara  fa-der8  jord. 
v&rt  hjartarort  eng&ng. 
var      fosterlandska  siing. 


mer  alskad  an  var  bygd,  an  v&ra  fa-ders  jord. 

allt,  allt,  vad  bar  som  syn,  vart  h  jarta  rort  en  gdng. 

och  hogre  klinga  skall  var  fosterlandska  sang. 

J.  L.  RCNKBKBO. 


Mandom,  mod  och  morska  man. 

Allegretto.  Folkmarsch  fr&n  Orsa  i  Dalaine. 


t5=t5: 


^ 


^^ 


J 


± 


^— ^F^-^r 


^    j  Mandom,  mod  och  morska  man  Anns   i  gam-la  Sver-ge  Sn, 
■  /     To-ner  an  fr&n  for  -  na  dar    Iju  -  da  dSr  i  skogochdal, 


f^- 


h 


|i=t 


T  t  r 


£=£ 


^    b  D 


=P=? 


tJ=t2i 


:ti=tc 


kraft  i    arm  och    mod  i   barm,  ungdomsvarm  i  bardalarm. 
vil-dasom   en    storm  pa  hav,  mil-da  somen  suck  vidgrav. 


m 


• — !    •      I- 


0-  gon  bis,      dd    och  da        le      i  bloms-ter-da-lar  dar! 
Lyss-nen  da,      van-ner,  pi,  hemlandskhund-ra-a-rig  8§,ng! 


s 


:£=£= 


T  f- 


P= 


^ 


-^-^ 


:^>=^ 


:ti=^=^= 


itcztc 


D     P     I 


^r-f 


f 


P 


^ 


i 


^    I)   ^  ^ 


D   P^  ^  P-. 


:& 


:t5=l5: 


j|  .   •    J  J — Kw       rn  ^  •  *l ai  .   *    ai — i — Kd — h — \^ — 1-^ 

TT     I  *^#-    )  TTi     h  IT     L^#--#-  -•-  -#- 


53    =:d 


ca 


Nord,  dujor-dens  jat  -  te  -  lem,Nord,dumildahjartanshem!  } 
Lyss-nen, als- ken,  la-  renden,sjungen,8jungdensjaiva8e'n!  ^ 


1^=^ 


B 


^- 


=P=^ 


^ 


:2S: 


:^ 


1^ 


Se^ 

:^=^= 


R.  Dtbbck. 


m 


Dalmarsch. 

Hurtigt.  M.  M.  J  =  100. 


IVAR  WlD^BN. 

Arr.  af  tonsattaien. 


■'^ 5h 


-0-1-C^ 


T 


Mar-schen  gar  till  Tu  -  na  p&  bed  och  bac-kar  bru  -   na. 


3 


la 


3 


Mar-schen  g&r  pS 


I 


f, 


^^^ 


,///l 


^ 


"■•=^     ^  y 


=3^ 


-*— hsi 


-^t 


-z;*- 


mar-acben  gar  till   Mo  -  ra    och   ber  -  gen    de    blS.      Med 
^-       P       0 s— r-^ • P-rS M^-:^^' 


Ldz 


5t 


if: 


if: 


:r=4= 


r± 


=F=F= 


-p- 


i 


fc 


^ 


— — 5^ 


w 


fffrrr    r 

hac-ka  och  med  spa  -  de   vi  dra  -  ga  hem  sa    gla  -  de  till 


tt 


E 


J: 


J=f= 


9^ 


:^ 


r:t 


^^^ 


:dt 


^ 


^ 


ife: 


Vr  .^  ''  ^ 


i:s: 


!SEBi 


-^ 


"t^ 


=s=r^r3 


9iib 


sko  -  gar  -  na    de     sto    -   ra  och  kul  -  lor  -  na    de    sm^. 


-4? — F-^ hr 


:^ 


ite: 


— t^-r— r 


_^Lj^re./^  J 


m/ 


m/ 


=r=i= 


-i 1 — ^ j—  ->& !  — r 


^~** 


l=t^ 


irf 


Hur  latt  det  ar   att  vand-ra,  I  bro-der,  med  var-and-ra,  nar 

.  I  H 


|i^ 


^ 


#, 


p 


3^ 


:^--i—i 


St 


S^ 


r 

slan  -  tar  -  na     i       flc  -  kan  slS.  takt  mot  byx-ans  skinn!  Hur 


£3 


^ 


3^ 


-g-^ 


f 


■p- 


fe^:^ 


PptEEi 


^^ 


kla  -  ri-net-teu   la    -   ter,  da  spel-man  van-der  a    -    termed 


1 — r 


f^ 


f=r=F 


:d2 


la  -  la  -  la,        tra-la-la,         la  -  la  -  la,       tra-la-la, 
IPP  dim.  e  rit.         -'^^^zz  = 


P 


^^ 


sk- 


•JTT 


'"=  -tig;*:**  •■'-^^ 

brudgumaskank  &t  flickan  och  brollopslust  i    sinn! 


Vrr\rP' 


S 


-•(«>-• *9- 


ff 


p-hppp 


la  -  la  -  la,        tra-la-la,       la  -  la  -  la,      tra-la-la,tra-la-la, 
Dalmarsch— 2. 


a  tempo. 


-^ 


S 


I   bergs-lags-man  p&    vre     -     ten,  som  stra-venoch   ar- 


i 


X  ■  - 


/    I  bergs-lags-mfin, 


ff 


fff 


-iTiT-r 


* — #- 


S 


*~^~^'-  J  *  -w-y 


^ 


be    -  ten,  g&n  med  dit  upp  till  8il  -  jan    i    da-la-Dnar-schens 


^— M-J:: 


-J- 


§z1^ 


ittit 


-«— # 


ti     J       ji 


r=2t 


-- — 5^ 


takt!  G&n  med  och  skS-den   Ian-  den,  dar  kyr-kor-na  pa 


i^ 


J^ 


E 


na  pa 


^ 


^-^ 


4= 


-•— t- 


£ 


I 


/ 


^' S^ 


I 


3* 


I  I  i 

stran  -  den  stA  glim-man-desom  lil-jan  u  -  ti    sin  vi-taprakt! 


f=l: 


-^-1- 


Dalmarsch— 3. 


Lifligore.  f 


^ 


mf 


EE5^ 


5 


mf 


-^- 


^ 


r^T^^ 


rj 


Hur  latt  det  ar   att  vand-ra,  I  bro-der,  med  var-and-ra,  nSr 

0^0       0 


*=r 


^ 


-0 19 •— 

H — H 


0       h 

,  #, 

K.                   1 

1       ^ 

1/   1    P       1              1             1              t 

1        1 

^                 J 

^1 

/Ln      \ 

M          *i 

"^   ^    1 

VT\'^      J         J         J         J 

-       •_  _ 

*  •      *^                     « 

ir            •^ 

Ks]}       S      S       i      d 

■Z5--       *         • 

^       1        1        1        i        " 
slan  -  tar  ^  na     i       tic  - 

kan  sia  takt  mot  byx-ans  akiDn!  Hur 

r\*    U               ^     r        to 

f 

.-^                1 

}•!  t'  1          L^    '        r 

U 

1*  •   L     •      p 

-^  n                     1 

«        1 

I'                             1 

r       1 

i 

1        1 

^     1       1 

1 

d^ 


^ 


^ 


*: 


tEi 


* 


^- 


=i=i= 


:^ 


kla  -  ri-net-ten  la    -  ter,  da  spel-man  vSn-der  d   -    termed 


^^fr  ? 


S 


-0-^9-0 ^- 


i 


la  -  la  -  la,         tra-la-la,         la  -  la  -  la,       tra-la-la, 
f^P  dim.  e  rit.         -=::::^  ^^^^== 


1 


t±^- 


^T^> 


-i-  ig:  J::  -i-*- 


brudgumsskank  §,t  flickan  och  brollopslust  i    sinn! 


9vrr^ 


■#«^# — rs>- 


la  -  la  -  la,        tra-la-la,       la  -  la  -  la,      tra-la-la,tra-la-la, 

Dalmarsch— 4.  E.  A.  Karlfsldt. 


Svenska  kungssangen. 


M 


Maestoso,     mf 


Otto  Lindblad. 


& 


15: 


I  '  '  '  '^       \ 

Ur  svens-ka  h jar-tans  djup  en  gang  en  samf&lld  och  en 


^ 


* 


^Bt 


f: 


i 


iSSE* 


5t 


i 


iftii:*^ 


g 


:^5=:t 


F=*^^^ 


2^ 


T=^ 


i 


I 

en-kel  8§.ng,  som  g&r  till  kung-en  fram!  Var  ho-nom  tro-fast 


9lffiTTT-fTH^ 


22: 


:t=t 


■25 


--=^ 


n    #     S         1                        Si 

1 

W  '  rjltf              P 

1             K       !            ! 

A^t    ;•      *'     J        ^ 

dWH— tt 

i — ^T~] — H- 

och  hans  Stt,    gor 

kro  -  nan  pa    hans 

-^ .   J '   1 — # — 
*•  *  *    1 

hjas  -  sa  latt,  och 

1         1 

ri-it„if  f  •    p    r     u 

1 f #- 

-t:— 1 — J — J — 

=^'^t — ;    ^     ^ 

•  •   *  1     r 

-P-s F — ^ P 

— 1- —      ■  > — ^ 1 

'^— ^^'^rl — r-^ 

U — ^    •— -|_J 

L_| ^ — m. ; 1 

fe^^33: 


^ 


I 


H 1        # ^ H 1 -♦ 


2^ 


!&— 


a# 


all     din  tro   till    ho-nom  stltt,  du  folk   av  frej  -  dad  stam. 


;g 


^ 


K.  V.  A.  Strandberg. 


Varmiands-visan. 


Folkmelodi. 


^ 


:t5=^ 


^^^=^ 


^ 


arzi: 


-^-^ 


^ 


f5i=l!: 


fit 


4=^ 


^'Sr^ 


Ack  Var-me-land  du,  sko  -    na,  du  har  -  li  -  ga  land,  du 
Och  komme  jag   an  mitt  i     det  for-lo  -   va -de  land,  till 


1^ 


^f^t^^^ 


^'    T 


Iiz2: 


♦-r- 


^z^A±=^-y^d^=i^. 


:X=pd 


i 


t^ 


i 


45=f5: 


S 


:5=i(= 


rt^tri^ 


-ar-'-X- 


kro  -  na  bland  8ve-a    ri  -  kes   lan  -  der!  .  .  )        j      ,..      .„  . 
Varmlandjagandock&ter- van-der!  ..^       Ja,  aar  mij  jag 


P      "t"^  i»     •     t-i-I-r-» 


P53=5_J^-4H-HJ 


*=t 


±j.a: 


«3^ 


^ii 


:1^=l5: 


:?rt 


le  -  va,  ja,   dar  vill  jag  do;  om  en  g&ng  i-frS,n  Vftrmland  jag 


f: 


3 


-•— •- 


i* 


i*     ^:;tE 


4— ^H^ 


"^ 


3t 


^^ 


1 — P^-^ 

— I 1 -i *- 


ta-ger  mig  en  mo,  sa  vet  jag,  att  aldrig  jag  mig  ang-rar. 


^^ 


:*c=jE 


:?=iF=e: 


^  ,  #    »    * 


P=^^^ 


:p=tp=V= 


^ 


TTf 


^ 


A.   FRTXHLi. 


Langtau  till  landet. 


Tempo  di  mareia. 
f  > 


0.  LlNDBUU). 


^ 


(  Vin-tern  ra  -  sat  ut  bland  v&-  ra  fjal  -  lar,  dri-vans  blom-mor 
{  Ja,  jag  kom-mer!  Halsen,  glada  viu  -  dar,  ut    till   Ian  -  det, 


iSE 


4=r 


fe£ 


Ic^-fc 


=-££ 


■M^ 


?^ 


:N=t 


f:;-^ 


-•— 


:1=^ 


:4: 


^::^ 


^ 


i 


3r 


smal-ta  ner  och  do,        him-len  ler      i      va- rens  Iju  -  sa 
ut      till*  f&g- lar -ne,         att '  jag  ais-kardem,  till  bjork  och 

^  t  #:  t  -r^^-«  tip  ■  __^^;:^^^- 


i 


9^irn^-t^-^ 


i 


S3 


I 


P^ 


^ 


kval  -  lar,     so  -  len     kys  -  ser    liv      i     skog  och    8j6.  ) 
lin   -  dar,    sjo     och   berg,  jag  vill  dem    a  -  ter  -  se;  ) 


=t 


I 


ES 


f 


=P=0= 


P 


f  b  P  b 


^  Snart  a'r  sommarn  har ;  i    pur  -  pur  -  xk  -  gor,  guld-be-lag  -  da, 
"/ se    dem  an  som   i     min  barndomsstun-der,  fol-ja  back-ens 


^  .    h  . 


^p^ 


s 


-•-•  -^   -«-• 


r* 


V   -#-   -#- 

b    b    b 


a  -    zur  -  skif  -  tan  -  de,  lig  -  ga  ftng  -  ar  -  na       i 

dans  till     klar  -  nad    sjo,        traa-tens  s&ng    i      fu   -  ru- 


9VP=F 


h 


P~~K    b    ^ 


iiS: 


da  -  gena  la  -  gor,  och     i     lun-den  dan-aa  kal-lor-ne.    ) 
ako  -  gens  lun-der,    vat-ten-fa-gelnslekkringfjardocho.  ^ 


^^— #- 


a=t= 


i:  t  r- 1 


I)  7  r-r  t 


I 


^ 


ii3= 


)i^=*= 


-p-f^ 


Langtan  till  landet— 2. 


Nackens  polska. 


i 


Avdante  con  moto. 


H.  Satherbebo. 


Folkmelodi. 


■*-r-J d d — > — « f— « — :^ «-!- 


g^ 


t=r 


1.  Djupt  i   ha -vet    pa  de-man-te-hal-len  nSc-ken  vi  -  lar    i 

2,  A  -  girs  dott-rar  ho-nom  aak-te-li  -  ga  gung-a  fram  pS  den 

J2- 


3± 


9S^ 


^  '  .0 • «- 


t=t^ 


tic 


p=^ 


^ 


i 


ifc 


A  J  f) 


nM-^=j=^ 


3 


ti^ 


-r- 


-0-  -^ 


-  b 


gro-nan  sal,      nat-tena  tar  -  nor     span-na  mor-ka  pal-len 
kla  -  ra    ajo.    Har-pansljud,  de      ga     sa  sor  -  ge  - 11  -  ga, 


:tt 


-ti2_ 


-P^:^ 


3b-  L,  ^    f> 

t)    E^  ^   b 


>  r=-     PP  > 


6  -  ver  skog,  6  -  ver  berg  och  dal.  Kvai-len  har-lig  star    i 
so  -  ka  fjar  -  ran  en    vag  att  do.    Fast  bans  o  -  ga  stir    kt 

I  -^ 


^=^k-^^-ai3 


ipz-)! 


:p=P= 


-^=^=ff 


i 


:;t=!;i 


Hi. 


i-A^ 


=^=:^: 


D    P 


^5^*^ 


svartan  hog-tids-skrud, nftr  och  f jarran.ej  en  aus-ning,  intet  Ijud 
dunk-la  him-me-len,  ing-en  stjar-na  ba-dar  nattens  drottning  an 

-M — p! — • — m — « — ■  »J  '»J '  1 — t  1~    m-^. 


^^ 


k=k 


t^f^ 


±1 


-^^^K 


±1 


-# — » — •- 


:^=tt 


:p=:b= 


i=|c 


P  a  tempo. 


T^ 


0  ■; 


/ 


ii 


^^^E^^^^ 


^^^^^ 


t=| 


pi^t;^^^^tt^==^^_^tet 


-•— 


stor  det  lugn  o  -  ver  nejden  rS,r,  uar  havets  kung  ur  gyllne 
Fre-ja  smyckar  aitt  gyll-ne  bar,  och  nac-ken  sS.  sin  sorg  p§, 


J±S 


i 


s 


^^5BE 


.* « • «- 


t** 


^ 


:t=t3=t: 


3E3 


icfetizfc 


i 


:P=^ 


^ 


fe3 


p  h  ,ft  I    ''pP 


— H — W — ai — i — • — i^— •— -#-^     i;      r 

^-^  J-     -^-   '=^'==^^T-:ii:^»-yT^ 

bor-gen  gar,  nar    havets  kung  ur  gyll-ne    bor-gen  gar. 
bar-pan  sl8.r,  och   nac-ken   sS,  sin  sorg  p&  bar-pan  sl&r. 

\)    fc _     ^ D    ^-^- 


|t-=pt 


I 


gUTT-f 


_« — c — • §-• 

-i»— tfc 1b F— 


E«ES3^ 


J    ti    tv 


^=F^Fp 


t 

A.  A.  Afzeuiis. 


Nackens  polska— 2. 


^      /        7—  V^ 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  U3RARY  FACILITY 


A     000  666  352     o 


